Home

Samsung IP Phone DS 5000 User's Manual

1. Playback Speed Cancel Return to Subscriber Services Fast Forward 5 Seconds Skip to Next Message Change Playback Speed Scan Messages SEND Message Then Exit Record Play Menu Options Play Menu Options Play Message Information Cancel Return to Subscriber Services Cancel Return to Subscriber Services GroupNew Group Saved Listen to New Review Saved Record amp Send Access Personal Mailbox Personal Pause Resume Play Menu Exit Messages Messages Messages Messages Messages Manager Greetings Administration Services Options 4 Assign and or Edit Change Review 6 Group Messages Menu 6 Listen Menu Record Menu 1 Follow Me 1 Primary Greeting 1 Message Alert 1 Workload 4 Group 4 Play For a Directory 2 Assign and or Edit 2 Change 2 Edit Stored Urgent Messages Message of Subscribers Busy Greeting Pager Notification Telephone Numbers Play Previous To Creat i i Group 11 o vreate a Assign and or Edit Review Deleted Change Change 2 Callback Requests Message Reminder 3 Block Calis 3 Blocking Greeting 3 Messages 3 Weekly Schedule 1 Password Gi 2 Assi id or Edit Review Undeli d PI roup Message Enter the Recipient s Number ssign and or Edi eview Undelivere 3 Reminders 4
2. Em SOFT KEYS Used to activate ipid features via the display Scroll Call 1 Call 2 Message i SCROLL KEY Used to scroll Pe 1d a through dis fe plays ae 5 fe SPEAKER For handsfree gt operation and ringing Gas GHI JKL MNO ES 2 PQRS B S lt 5 m 8 lt LE Cm OPER ca MICROPHONE ANSWER RELEASE KEY For handsfree operation HOLD KEY 20 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH VOLUME CONTROL KEYS 8 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH TRI TRI COLORED LIGHTS Used for CALL Used to set independent COLORED LIGHTS Used to call buttons intercom calls outside lines levels for handset speaker stations directly to indicate busy and many other system features background music ring and conditions of other stations for One page volumes Touch dialing and many other system features iDCS 18D KEYSET 32 CHARACTER DISPLAY Two lines with 16 characters each TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR Used to provide your keyset status SAMSUNG SOFT KEYS Used to activate features via the display iDCS 18D SCROLL KEY Calla 2 Message Used to scroll through dis
3. HomePage Table of Contents ITP 5112L Background Music Established Call Pick Up 41 43 44 Executive Secretary 44 Group Listening Account Codes Ecko You Ke SL ics die 19 Off Hook Voice Announce 00 OVA DI asc decetero cei elu uuo ou e eru CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET AME cec eati ertt t shiver teca ei ea LC eL Oeo Auto CampsO ausos cdc A RE Select ENO oi naa cire colder eet vetet ieri Ee ER er Change Your Passcode Set Answer Mode Intercom Set Answer Mode CO Automatic ka rH RR 5 Ring Preference Auto Answer CO Calls Display Speed Dial Name Caller Seele 5 DISPLAY FEATURES Ditectoby 008 Dial b
4. 11 12 Busy Line Queuing with 00 12 Canceling Call D ck naa ean a 12 INTERCOM CALLS Calling ORE Statio MS 13 Answering Intelcom Calls 13 a 13 Station CallBack RR 7777 14 BUSY 14 Calling Your System 17 CALL PROCESSING Copyright 2007 Samsung Telecommunications America Holding Ca 16 17 E TAI EEE A E E Transferring ica a i M 17 18 electronic or mechanical including recording taping photocopying or information retrieval systems Tansierwith ea b EOD ccce cocco te teorico enclose ctn roris 18 without express written permission of the publisher of this material Bici his b RR RT 18 eR RES 18 19 Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in Forwa rding 20 21 this guide for reason Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior Call PickUp tthe helical an nasil ema sera 22 My Group Pickup 22 the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide Privacy cic rr docti co tear eda mU rua ione a eo ra cic
5. 61 Men 61 63 Call Ld daa ma bak ct ci iet nae M bdo E 61 late e init nee eee en eNO een ren E 61 62 Directory Dial GR auda do tu Uo uda 62 Forward Set dbi s 2 63 Samsung 64 Accessing your Mailbox 65 Subscriber Services Menu 21300007 66 67 Getting Listen to your Messages Subscriber Services Menu Listening to Old or New Messages Group New or Old Messages Record and Send a Message Access Mahlagel ui Personal Greetings Mailbox Administration Message Broadcast iau Personal Services Personal Administration Settings Keyset User Featttes Cote statio cho da czcta cc voa RU a Aaa Interactive 5 PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS 83 84 Home Page Table of Contents ITP 5121D ABOUT THIS BOOK Samsung s new OfficeServ Technology keyset model ITP 5121D is part of the OfficeSe
6. an IP address to Send Receive voice and data For voice communications the ITP e Es RR 51075 uses the data network line already in place in most offices and increasing number of homes PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS 77 78 The 51075 keysets incorporate an LCD screen which provides important infor mation for the user to make using the keyset easier and more convenient Your keyset is the most visible part of your telephone system Please take the time to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation of your keyset Keep this guide handy as you may need to look up instructions for infrequently used features Learning to use your keyset correctly will make everyday telephone communica tions a breeze This book is written based on the factory default settings for the feature access codes Sometimes due to programming requirements these codes may be changed If you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book please contact your installation and service company to determine the correct code THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW USER ORIENTATION The ITP model telephones are called IP keysets The IP keyset incorporates buttons or keys that are used to access or activate the many features of your office phone system The 51075 keyset incorporates 7 programmable buttons Any of the system features or functions can be programmed to these buttons
7. 8 9 a 09 9 9 2 Copy of Message Playback Volume Pause Resume Message Playback Fast Forward 5 Seconds Change Playback Speed Skip to Next Message Scan Messages Play Menu Options Play Message Information Cancel Return to Subscriber Services ej 83 5 5 3 3 8 3 Specify Future Delivery Rewind 5 Seconds Change Playback Volume Pause Resume Record Playback Fast Forward 5 Seconds Change Playback Speed SEND Message Then Exit Record Play Menu Options Cancel Return to Subscriber Services 0 6 7 Bm o Menu Options Cancel Return to Subscriber Services NOTE All options shown MAY NOT be authorized If an option is not available please speak to your system administrator 60 to Subscriber Services Cancel Return to Subscriber Services e Menu Options Cancel Return to Subscriber Services 8 Pause Resume Rewind Play 0 Play 0 Play Record Cancel Return Menu Prompting 5s Access Coverage Menu Options Menu Options a Reminder to Subscriber Services eoones SEND Message Then Co Group Change RY Play Cancel Return Play 61 GETTING STARTED Using your new Samsung Voicemail Subscriber Services is as simple as following a few simple s
8. Group New Messages Call to Sender Deliver Copy of Fax Message Forward a Discard Recording and Rerecord Set Delivery Options Auto Set Night Intercept 8 Edit Only Mailbox Greeting Pause Resume 8 Pause Resume Menu Prompting a Pause Resume Menu Prompting 8 Pause Resume Menu Prompting 3 4 Assign and or Edit Change Review Group Messages Menu Listen Menu b Record Menu 1 Follow 1 Primary Greeting 1 Message Alert 1 Workload 4 Group Play For a Directory 2 Assign and or Edit 2 Change 2 Edit Stored Urgent Messages Message of Subscribers Busy Greeting Pager Notification Telephone Numbers Play Previous Create 1 i Group 3H 6 Assign and or Edit Review Deleted Change Change 2 Callback Requests Message Reminder Block Calls 3 Blocking Greeting 3 Messages 3 Weekly Schedule 1 Password E Edi R Undeli Ri d Group Message Enter the Recipient s Number ssign and or Edit eview Undelivere ecor 3 Reminders 4 can forwarding 4 Night Greeting 4 Messages 5 Direct Call 2 Name Discard Review Group Message Assign and or Edit Auto Play Enter Directory R di 4 Private Messages 5 Sereen
9. digits dialed after the with be sent as tones MEMO REDIALING When you are calling directory information you can store the number you are given using the SAVE feature There is no need for pencil and paper While you are talking on an outside call press SAVE Dialthe telephone number as it is dictated to you on the key pad Press SAVE to store the number To dial the number press the SNR button It will select the same line and dial the stored number If necessary you can select a different line and then press the SNR button 30 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset PAGING AND MESSAGING MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE To make an announcement through the keyset speakers in the idle condition Liftthe handset Press the PAGE key or dial 55 Dial the desired zone number 0 1 2 3 or 4 After the attention tone make your announcement NOTE If you have a dedicated page zone key it is not necessary to press PAGE and dial a zone number MAKING AN EXTERNAL PAGE To make an announcement through the external paging speakers Liftthe handset e Press the PAGE key or dial 55 Dialthe desired zone number 5 6 7 or 8 OR Dial 9 to page all external zones e After the attention tone make your announcement NOTE If you have a dedicated page zone key it is not necessary to press PAGE and dial a zone number ALL PAGE To page all designated keysets in internal zone 0 and external page zones at the s
10. 23 DIALING FEATURES 0 24 Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers 24 25 One Touch Speed a con 25 saat 25 With Redial 26 Save Number With 26 Chaim s 26 acta cia a Gode 26 Pulse to Tone Ca saucia dau dede ado pa pad 27 0 7 PAGING AND MESSAGING Making Ma RR 28 Makip sn External Page i ds itd lho 28 PAQE ic et acl lei daa 28 Meet Me 29 29 Messa ges Set and Cancel 30 MESSAGES ic atico qercixa 30 ee ee ee ee 31 CONVENIENCE FEATURES duo as cu ode 32 TB cca cancer 32 Mte 32 0 32 Established Piek 33 Appointment Reminder Alarm Clock 33 Poor PHONE CI NN 34 Executive Secretary HOt ME aca ar Lob 34 Executive DIVEN docui aba i
11. 44 Caller ID Review 1 44 Secure 0 44 DISPLAY FEATURES Interactive Display YS a steadied 45 Directory Iniormat oD 45 6 46 Progress Displays ek cr acc ccc 46 Display Number Dialed ascia insi eati ertet cap deputato eee ee meena 47 Call D ratio w 47 ZO DIOE 47 Timer ss iva cei 47 Viewing 0 48 48 49 Personal Speed Dial 49 Staton eno rix 49 Managing Key ASSIQGMIMGINS suisia 50 50 Lalo de Backspace with LCR Text Messaging Caller D Samsung Voice Mail Subscriber Services Menu Diagram Accessing your Mailbox uacua aide disco depu sc oa aad A ed LETS Ae Started EE Listen to your 105535 63 Subscber Services acudir addicta CASES 63 Listening to Old or New Messages 64 Group New or Old Massdt BS cla che da suse tdi 65 Record and Se
12. B 34 Ister A AA 35 Account CodeS cc a bic ha aonb 35 Locking SG 35 Manual 36 36 7 iare cents a cereal a Recreo E 37 37 37 HomePage Table of Contents DS 5000 CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET este acl as ru dd 38 Auto Capi 38 i es de Lt 38 Change TON POCO ii sti ii Deh hs is 38 Set Answer Mode MERC 39 39 Set Answer Mode CO 39 01 Headset 39 Hop 40 Key Confirmation TONE 40 Rejoinitig Page 40 isle Macar on teet 40 Auto Snswel CO Calls chsh cert assent tdi ocak 41 Display Speed Dial NaMe ausi aca accicasa cen t irit ci ties aa s scere tesis 41 Caller D acetic nc 41 Secule CV 41 nc eM 42 DISPLAY FEATURES Di
13. Check if there is any currently saved IP address of the phone on the LCD If the IP address has not been set the LCD displays nothing The user can enter the IP address using 0 9 dial buttons and button for entering a Save that IP address by pressing the Enter button of navigation button assembly the NETMASK SET UP menu is selected press ENTER the LCD will dis INPUT NETMASK amp PRESS OK play the following message and the XXX XXX user can enter a new Netmask IP address Check if there is any currently saved subnet mask address of the phone on the LCD If the subnet mask address has not been set the display will show nothing Press any dial buttons from 0 9 and button to enter the subnet mask IP address and then save that subnet mask IP address by pressing the Enter button of navigation button assembly f the 4 GATEWAY SET UP menu is selected press ENTER the LCD will dis INPUT GATEWAY amp PRESS OK play the following message and the user XXX XXX can enter a new gateway address Check if there is any currently saved Gateway IP address of the phone on the LCD If the gateway IP address has not been set the LCD displays nothing The user can enter the gateway IP address by using 0 9 and button and can save that IP address by pressing the ENTER button of the navigation button assembly NOTE the 3 NETWORK SET UP
14. Outgoing Call Log ncoming Call Log Speed Number Search Search Forward Assign Alarm Assign With the NAVIGATION button the station user is no longer required to enter sta tion level programming to activate these frequently used features A few button presses and these features are activated The NAVIGATION button is divided into separate feature buttons These buttons are described below MENU BUTTON This button displays the station feature main menu so that the users can easily utilize various settings and helpful functions Table of Contents ITP 5121D SEND BUTTON If the station is programmed for Enblok Dial Mode when dialing an outside telephone number or internal station number you must press the SEND button to initiate the call This button is also used when reviewing recently received or called numbers and answering incoming calls When reviewing recently received calls continue to press the SEND button for more than 2 seconds and the last outside number called will be redialed The SEND button operates as the ANS portion of the ANS RLS button An ANS RLS button may be assigned to the station as a programmable button ENTER BUTTON This button is used to select a menu option or to save changes made to a menu or submenu option DIRECTION BUTTON The DIRECTION BUTTON is the donut shaped ring which surrounds the ENTER button This button is used to navigate within the menus There a
15. SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION AND SPECIAL FEATURES GUIDE OfficeServ 7100 USER INSTRUCTIONS TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 APRIL 2007 PART 1 ENHANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING 1 1 OVERVIEW iDCS KEYSETS This diagram illustrates the keys on a iDCS 28 BUTTON and a iDCS 18 BUTTON that have special functions during programming When required these keys will referred to by the names described in the LEFT SOFTKEY RIGHT SOFT KEY Scroll diagram _ 1 2 Message eet 20 28 Au UL 1 2 3 an EX 4o Wd px 8w 9 G NA 0 d HOLD ANS RLS DOWN UP S OfficeServ 7100 USER INSTRUCTIONS TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 APRIL 2007 This diagram illustrates the keys on a iDCS 8 BUTTON keyset that have special functions during programming When required these keys will be referred to by the names described in the diagram um m Scroll LEFT RIGHT SOFT KEY SOFT KEY Y VOLUME A DOWN UP NB EM 1 2 3 DEF 4 GHI 5 JKL 6 MNO Tears 8 TUV 9 Oorer HOLD ANS RLS ITP and DS 5000 Series Keysets This diagram illustrates the keys on an ITP 5021 D keyset The ITP and DS 5000 keysets have keys that have special functions during programming When required these keys will be referred to by the names described in the diagram 1 2 OfficeServ 7100 USER INSTRUCTIONS TECH
16. move back to the previous screen or delete the last digit of the displayed option value IK To enter between address fields enter numerical values SETTING THE NETWORK PARAMETERS Utilize the following programming steps to program the ITP 5112L IP keyset to operate within the users network System Easy Wizard By selecting this option the System Easy Wizard can guide you through setting up your network parameters If you want to set up these parameters individually fol low the instructions below Network Parameter Setup From the Configuration Main Menu select 1 Manual Network Setup to set or modify the network 2 DHCP parameters The LCD will display the Network Setup screen Table of Contents ITP 5112L e If 1 Manual IP is selected the user must enter the IP address subnet mask and gateway value for the customer network that the 5112L resides on 2 DHCP is selected the IP address subnet mask and gateway value will be set to the default values automatically Choose this option only if a DHCP server is available on the local network 3 PPPoE Point to Point Power over Ethernet This option is selected in some cases when connecting directly to ISP Internet Service Provider equipment without going through a local LAN If so you must enter the username pass word assigned to you by the ISP to authenti
17. ONE TOUCH SPEED DIALING You may assign any speed dial number to an already existing One Touch Speed Dial button for quick and easy dialing of frequently used numbers e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 107 Press a One Touch Speed Dial button e Dial the speed dial number 00 49 or 500 999 that you want assigned to this button Press TRANSFER to store your selection To call this telephone number just press the One Touch Speed Dial button NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing LAST NUMBER REDIAL To redial the last telephone number you dialed press the REDIAL key or dial 19 NOTES 1 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing 2 Redial does not apply to intercom calls 28 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset MANUAL RETRY WITH REDIAL While you are on an outside call listening to a busy signal and you want to redial the same number dialed Press the REDIAL key This will hang up your existing call and manually redial the same number dialed You can repeat this operation for a limited number of attempts NOTE If your keyset is programmed with Call Log Blocks then the Redial will access the call log when pressed SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL To save the number you just dialed for later use press the SNR key before han
18. Press TRANSFER to store the name 47 MANAGING KEY ASSIGNMENTS You can view your key assignments and add extenders to some of your program mable keys for easy one touch operation of frequently used features e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 107 Use the VOLUME buttons to scroll through all of your programmable buttons OR press the programmable button to which you want to add the extender When you reach a key listed below dial the corresponding extender Press TRANSFER to store and exit programming Please refer to the Enhanced Display Programming Section provided by your instal lation company when requested for a complete list of descriptions and extenders for any keys you may have programmed on your keyset NOTE Confirm that the cursor is placed correctly before you enter the extender LCR WITH CLEAR When you are making an outside call using LCR and dial an incorrect digit you can press the CLEAR soft key to reenter the telephone number You do not need to redial 9 to reaccess LCR BACKSPACE WITH LCR If you misdial while using LCR you can delete digits shown in the display by press ing the BSPC soft key as many times as necessary 48 Table of Contents DS 5000 TEXT MESSAGING This feature allows two digital keyset users to respond to each other with prepro grammed text messages After receiving an Off Hook Voice Announcement or Station Camp On you may respond with a text message whi
19. You now CLEAR this entry OR Use NND to view more information about this call OR Press DIAL to call this person back OR Press SCROLL and then press STORE to save this number in a personal speed dial bin 56 Table of Contents ITP 5107S NOTES 1 Each keyset defaults with ten review bins Please see your system administra tor to determine the number of bins assigned to your keyset 2 Your system must have LCR correctly programmed to allow you to DIAL num bers from the review list or to STORE entries from the review list 57 Samsung Voicemail This section describes how to setup and use the various features available to a Subscriber A Subscriber is a person that has been authorized access to the vari ous features and services available in the Samsung Voicemail Please review this section carefully before you use your Authorized Features and Services known as Subscriber Services Voicemail is one of the Subscriber Services available Your voicemail box has the capability of storing private messages and offers a number of options for sending or redirecting messages as well as provides several ways to notify you of new mes sages Another very common Subscriber Service is Access Manager This allows you con trol over when and where you receive your calls as well as what to speak to your callers in the event you are unable to speak to them directly The events are referred to as Call Conditions No Answer Busy and
20. a Enter the recipient s mailbox number or if this is not known enter to use the system directory 64 Table of Contents 51075 Record your message at the tone After recording the message you will hear the Send Menu with the following functions Review Continue Recording Discard and Re Record Set Message Attributes Delivery Options Schedule Future Delivery Save and Send then Send a Copy to Someone Else Save and Send the Recording 0 Setting Message Attributes If after recording a message you select 4 you can set up any combination of the following delivery options Urgent Delivery Return Receipt Requested Request a Call Back Private Delivery Reply Required Exit 3 2 A Scheduling Future Delivery If after recording a message you select 5 to schedule future delivery you will be able to set message attributes and set this message as Immediate Delivery Next Few Hours End of Current Business Day based on your Availability Schedule Beginning of Next Business Day based on your Availability Schedule A Coming Day of the Week Specific Day Time Exit ACCESS MANAGER 5 The Access Manager allows the subscriber to set a number of options for when where and how and or if the Samsung Voicemail contacts you when a caller dials your extension number All of the options are toggled on off based on their cur rent status when you access
21. 1 NETWORK MODE SETUP option when 2 DHCP is selected the IP address Netmask and Gateway will not be dis played on the LCD Load and Upgrade Set Modify The fourth item 4 LOAD amp UPGRADE SET UP sets or modifies the IP phone s software version Use extreme caution when upgrading the keyset Select the 4 LOAD amp UPGRADE SET UP item and move to the lower level The screen below is displayed 1 UPGRADE TFTP SERVER 2 UPGRADE START Select option 1 UPGRADE TFTP SERVER and enter the IP address of the TFTP server containing the ITP software Use 0 9 and button to enter the address Press ENTER to save Select option 2 UPGRADE START to start the upgrade process Table of Contents ITP 5121D System Server Setup The fifth item 5 SYSTEM SERVER SET UP sets or modifies settings related to registering the phone to the MCP You can obtain this information from your sys tem administrator The screen below is displayed 1 SERVER IP ADDRESS You can set modify the IP address of the MCP at the 1 SERVER IP ADDRESS item The screen below is displayed when you enter the item The server IP is the IP address of the MCP2 MCP INPUT SERVER IP ADDRESS XXX XXX XXX XXX You can confirm the current IP address of the MCP at the LCD panel The address is left blank if it is not set Use the dial buttons from 0 9 and to set the IP address and press the ENTER button among the navigation but
22. AUTO ANSWER MODE When another station calls you your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and then automatically answer the call e Your microphone and speaker are turned on and you can speak handsfree For privacy use the handset e To finish the call replace the handset or press the END button NOTE order for calls to be answered handsfree AUTO ANS CO must be set to ON BUSY STATION CALLBACK When you call another station and receive a busy signal Press the CALLBACK button if programmed or dial 44 When the busy station becomes free your keyset will ring Lift the handset or press the SEND button to call the now idle station NOTES 1 A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds If you have set a callback the cursor associated with the CALLBACK button will be solid black 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER or SEND button before dialing BUSY STATION CAMP ON When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to wait for a callback MANUAL CAMP ON e Press the CAMP button or dial 45 e The called station will receive off hook ring tone repeated every few seconds and the cursor associated with the first available CALL button will flash black to indicate your call is waiting e for the called party to answer e called station must release its first call or place it
23. PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS To program personal speed dial numbers Lift handset to go offhook Dial 15105 the next available speed dial bin number e g 01 a trunk or trunk group number and your speed dial digits Listen for system dial tone and replace handset NOTE It is much easier to have your System Administrator program these for you LAST NUMBER REDIAL To redial the last telephone number you have dialed Lift the handset and dial 19 NOTE Redial does not apply to intercom calls SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL To save the number you have just dialed for later use Before hanging up hookflash receive confirmation tone and dial 17 To redial this saved number at any time Lift the handset and dial 17 This step will select the same line dial the number for you This telephone number is stored in memory until you save another When you do the new number will be saved and the old number will be erased NOTE Save Number does not apply to intercom calls PULSE TONE CHANGEOVER When making an outside call on a dial pulse line press All digits dialed after the will be sent as tones Table of Contents STD Telephone PAGING AND MESSAGING MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE To make an announcement through the keyset speakers in the idle condition Lift the handset e Dial 55 plus zone number 0 1 2 3 or 4 After the brief attention tone make the announcement MAKING AN EXTER
24. SYS 505 SPEED DIAL SPEED DIAL 9 121223456789 Table of Contents System Admin 4 Press the F key to toggle to Program SYS SPEED NAME System Speed Dial Names step 3 to 5055 enter the name 5 Press TRSF to store and exit programming OR press SPK to store and advance to the next program DEFAULT DATA NO SPEED NUMBERS ASSIGNED PROGRAM SYSTEM SPEED DIAL NAMES This program is used to assign a character name or identification for each system speed dial location This name enables you to locate the speed dial number when you are using the directory dial feature You may assign a name 11 characters long PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through speed dial bins KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPK Used to store data and advance to next program HOLD Used to clear previous entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press TRSF and then 706 SYS SPEED NAME Display shows the first name 500 2 Dial the system speed number e g 505 SYS SPEED NAME OR press UP or DOWN to select the entry 505 number and press the right soft key to move the cursor 3 Enter the name as shown in Program SYS SPEED NAME Station Names and press the right soft 505 SAMSUNG key to return to step 2 OR press the F key to toggle to the speed dial number to return to Program System Speed Dial Numbers step 4 4 Press the right soft key to return to step 2 above OR press TRSF to store and exit progr
25. Sc a Gode 29 Pulse to Tone Change saucia da dede acd pad 30 Memo A NUR sci ses ie ea isis eats 30 PAGING AND MESSAGING Making 0 31 Page oai Cielo oan Duda onda 31 0 31 Meet Me 32 Call Park ang LO it iti ia i he asta 32 Messades Set ard Cancel 33 MESSAGES uc cito uv 33 Programmed cee iran 34 CONVENIENCE FEATURES DEED TOES as cua oo dea de arte Creer oer 35 35 Mte c 35 ces thn oa ub 35 Established Call Piek 36 Appointment Reminder Alarm Clock 36 Poor PHONE CI ee Oe eee eee mere ene er eee ee eee 37 Executive Secretary HOD AE aca ar CHA EDU sbi cabaret 37 Executive DIVEN docui aba i 37 8 38 Account SAN ct a uu bk bi a nha anos 38 Locking Sacha ttn che A ic 38 auum edes ellas 39 Off H ok ANNOUNCE 39 vests a 40 Meade eade ou 40 20 HomePage Table of C
26. Soft Button Panel Speaker Scroll Button Volume Button Redial Button Navigation Button Dial Button Microphone Speaker Button Conference Button Hold Button Transfer Button 05 5 Soft Button LCD Panel Status Indicator Scroll Button Programmable Buttons 7 Keyset Support Volume Button Redial Button Conference Button Transfer Button Hold Button Dial Button Microphone Speaker Button 64 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH RED LIGHTS Used to call stations directly to indicate busy conditions of other stations for One Touch dialing and many other system features KEYSET DAUGHTER MODULE 550210 50140 omy DS 5021D keysets can have one type of daughter module installed to enhance the operation of the keyset the FDBF The standard speakerphone mode of operation for the DS 50210 is half duplex This means that you cannot transmit and receive speech at the same time Adding a FDBF to your keyset will convert the speaker phone into full duplex mode enhancing it operation In addition the FDBF may have up to three 3 external microphones attached to it for conference room type applications These microphones require an EXTMIC key programmed on the keyset to activate or deactivate them Table of Contents DS 5000 ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET Place the keyset face down on a flat surface Insert notched ends of the support bracket into the channels located in the u
27. When you are connected to any call press HOLD The call will flash green at your keyset If this call appears on a line button at other keysets it will flash red at those keysets Totake the caller off hold press that button and the green flashing light will 9o steady green again Resume the conversation NOTE While on a call pressing a line button route button or flashing CALL button will automatically put your first call on hold and connect you to the new call See Automatic Hold under Customizing Your Keyset EXCLUSIVE HOLD To place an outside call on hold at your phone so that other users cannot get it Press the HOLD button twice The call will flash green on your keyset and this line will show a steady red light on other keysets retrieve the call press the flashing green line button or press the HOLD button a third time NOTE Intercom calls will always be placed on exclusive hold REMOTE HOLD When you wish to place a call on hold at another station Press TRANSFER and a dial the station number or press the appropriate DSS button Press the HOLD button This will place the call on system hold on an available CALL button or Line Button at the remote station and return you to dial tone NOTES 1 If the destination station does not have any free CALL buttons or line buttons you will hear No More Calls tone and must return to the other party by press ing the TRANSFER button or the RETURN soft key in th
28. 46 47 48 49 84 NOTES Table of Contents Enterprise IP Solutions OfficeServ 51075 User Guide For OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 OfficeServ 7000 Series 04 2007 Copyright 2007 Samsung Telecommunications America All rights reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means graphic electronic or mechanical including recording taping photocopying or information retrieval systems without express written permission of the publisher of this material Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in this guide for any reason Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing may warrant Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide HomePage TableofContents 51075 5 ABOUTTHIS BOOK cei cits ric teste ciiin 1 THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW 2 6 ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET 7 51075 8 13 OUTSIDE CALLS 14 0 14 7 Answering an Outside Universal Answ
29. Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing FORWARD DND To forward your phone when you activate DND Dial 605 plus the extension number or group number Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing CALL FORWARD OPTIONS A display keyset may review or change call forward options and destinations Call forward access can be done via the keypad or by accessing the keyset display fea tures To review or change call forward options Press TRANSFER 102 The display will indicate the current current call forward condition and desti nation OR Show 0 FORWARD CANCEL to indicate no forward is set 24 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset Dial 0 to cancel current condition OR Dial 1 5 to select forward type OR Press UP or DOWN to select forward type Press the right soft key to move the cursor Dialthe destination number e 9 202 OR Press UP or DOWN to select the destination Press the right soft key to move the cursor Dial 1 to set OR Press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO Press TRANSFER to store and exit STATION CALL PICKUP To pick up answer a call ringing at another station lift the handset and dial 65 plus the extension number of the ringing phone If you
30. This procedure allows users to view and set the level of the volume for your keyset 0 RING VOLUME Set a level for your keyset ring volume There are eight levels of volume level 1 is the lowest and level 8 is the highest 1 OFF RING VOL Set a level for your keyset off hook ring volume There are eight levels of volume level 1 is the lowest and level 8 is the highest 2 HANDSET VOL Set a level for your keyset handset volume There are eight levels of volume level 1 is the lowest and level 8 is the highest 3 SPEAKER VOL Set a level for your keyset speaker volume There are sixteen levels of volume level 1 is the lowest and level 16 is the highest 4 BGM VOLUME Set a level for your keyset background music volume There are sixteen levels of volume level 1 is the lowest and level 16 is the highest 5 PAGE VOLUME This is the volume you will hear internal page over the keyset speaker when your keyset is idle and BGM is turned on There are 16 volume levels level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the highest ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press the transfer key followed by 114 201 STN VOLUME Display shows RING VOLUME OFF 2 Dial 1 8 to select the volume to change 201 STN VOLUME OR OFF RING VOL OFF Press UP or DOWN to select the volume to change Press the right soft key to move the cursor 3 Press UP or DOWN to select ON or OFF 201 STN VOLUME Press the left or right soft key to return to step 2 OFF RING VOL ON OR Dial 1 for ON or
31. ACCOMM TSS 7 Conference Groups Forwarding Calls Call Forward Options eieaa aeeiiaii a oN GE Lon se My Group Pickup Pl vacy TAS d ba ccs ct DIALING FEATURES Speed DIDID teet rts tubum Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers One Touch Speed Dialing Dire cton DRING secas cec rire eet reped eee Pete ducet est ceo PE ee cuerda Numo Reda tans seitens Manual Retry with Redial Save Number wth R d 23 Automatic Relig Pulse to Tone Changeover MefticiReialibiG PAGING AND MESSAGING Makingan intemal Page uitis eclesia 36 a cc con 36 All Page cal Parkana bc a ba b Ga Messages Set and Cancel Returning Messages PROG CONVENIENCE FEATURES Do NOt 40 One Time
32. Call forwarding 4 Night Greeting 4 Messages 5 Direct Call 2 Name Discard Review Group Message 1 Recordin Assign and or Edit Auto Play Enter Directory 4 Private Messages g 5 Call Screening 5 Screened Greeting 5 New Messages 3 Name 4 Reply to Sender 2 Stop Append to Group Recording Edit Only Auto Play Message Personal Extended 5 Fax Only Messages Place 6 Find Me 6 Personal Greetings 6 Information 7 Administration 4 Prompting 5 Call to Sender 3 Discard Recording and Rerecord 7 Auto Set 7 Edit Only 8 Pause Resume 8 Pause Resume 8 Pause Resume Deliver Copy Night Intercept Mailbox Greeting Menu Prompting Menu Prompting Menu Prompting 55 of Fax Message 4 Set Delivery Options 8 Pause Resume 8 Pause Resume 9 Record and Send 0 Play 6 Menu Prompting Menu Prompting Broadcast Message Menu Options Copy of Message 5 Specify 8 Pause Resume 7 Rewind Puture Delivery Play 0 Play 0 Play Record Cancel Return Menu Prompting 5 Seconds Access Coverage Menu Options Menu Options a Reminder to Subscriber Services 6 SEND Message 9 Group 77 Change E 0 Play Cancel Return Cancel Return 0 Play A Specific Sender Playback Volume 7 Rewind Menu Options to Subscriber Services to Subscriber Services Menu Options 8 Pause Resume 5 Seconds Message Playback Cancel Return Cancel Return Message Inventory 77 Change to Subscriber Services to Subscriber Services 9 Fast Forward Playback Volume 0 Play
33. DLI port for connection of a dig ital station device such as a keyset or 64 button module iDCS KDB SINGLE LINE INTERFACE FKDBS supporten on os 71001 If your keyset is connected to a Digital Line Interface DLI port that supports 2B D operation your installing company can determine this you may install a daugh ter module that provides a Single Line Interface SLI port for connection of a stan dard telephone device such as a cordless phone NOT SUPPORTED ON OfficeServ 7100 iDCS KDB FULL DUPLEX FKDBF The standard speakerphone mode of operation for a iDCS keyset is half duplex This means that you cannot transmit and receive speech at the same time Adding a FKDBF to your keyset will convert the speakerphone into full duplex mode enhancing its operation addition the FKDBF may have up to three 3 external microphones attached to it for conference room type applications These micro phones require an EXTMIC key programmed on the keyset to activate or deacti vate them Table of Contents iDCS Keyset ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET Place the keyset face down on a flat surface Remove the base pedestal by placing your thumbs over the attachment clips and press outward while simultaneously pressing down on the keyset body with your fingertips Plug the handset cord into the jack marked with hed symbol Route the handset cord out the RIGHT side of the keyset as you look at it face down Reatt
34. Dial 1 to enable The display shows ENABLE CUS PROG ENABLE Press TRSF The keyset returns to its idle condition Press TRSF and then dial the three digit program code you want to access Follow the instructions for that program NOTE You must begin programming within 30 seconds Once you are in program ming any delay of more than 30 seconds between key strokes will cause the sys tem to automatically close programming CUSTOMER LEVEL ACCESS USING THE PROG KEY A designated keyset may be programmed with a PROG key which allows access to the following areas of system programming When pressed you must enter your station passcode followed by the MMC number The default station passcode 1234 can not be used The only MMCs that may entered from pressing the PROG key are as follows MMC 100 Station Lock for All Stations MMC 102 Station Forward for All Stations MMC 104 Station Name MMC 115 Program Message for all Stations MMC 116 Alarm and Message MMC 505 System Day and Time MMC 705 System Speed Dial MMC 706 System Speed Dial Name MMC 722 Station Key Programming CHANGING FEATURE PASSCODE You can change individual feature passcodes This program is used to change the passcodes for several features These features are the following RING PLAN SER VICE DISA ALARM ALARM CLEAR and AA RECORD Note Each passcode is four digits long Each digit can be 0 to 9 PROGRAM
35. FWD ALL to 204 keep you in formed of what is happening and where you are In some conditions you are prompted to take an action and in other cases you receive directory information DISPLAY NUMBER DIALED Display keysets begin showing digits as they are dialed They will stay in the dis play until the call duration timer comes on automatically or the TIMER button is pressed If the call duration timer is not used the number dialed will be displayed until the call is released transferred or put on hold CALL DURATION TIMER The system can be set to automatically time outside calls few seconds after you dial a telephone number the timer appears in the display It appears immediately for incoming calls The call timer continues for the duration of the call Call dura tion times are displayed in minutes and seconds If a call lasts longer than 60 min utes the timer restarts You can press the TIMER button to manually begin timing a call Press it again to stop timing If you press it while the automatic timer is on the call duration time is restarted AUTO TIMER Display keyset users may have the timer automatically start when they answer incoming calls or after a short delay on an outgoing call e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Dial 011 to turn the auto timer on or 010 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection TIMER FUNCTION Display keyset users may use this feature as a sim
36. OR press UP or DOWN to select the station and press the right soft key to move the cursor OR press ANS RLS to select all stations Dial 1 3 to select the alarm e g 2 OR press UP or DOWN to select the alarm and press the right soft key to move the cursor OR press the left soft key to return to step 2 Enter the alarm time in 24 hour clock format e g 1300 and the display will automatically advance to step 5 Enter the alarm type from the list above OR press UP or DOWN to select the alarm type and press the right soft key to move the cursor Enter the messages using the procedure in Program Station Names and press the right soft key to return to step 2 Press TRSF to store and exit pro gramming OR press SPK to store and advance to the next program 205 ALM REM 1 HHMM NOTSET OR ALL ALM REM 1 HHMM NOTSET 201 ALM REM 1 HHMM NOTSET 205 ALM REM 2 HHMM 1300NOTSET 205 ALM REM 2 HHMM 1300DAILY 205 ALM REM 2 TAKE MEDICATION 26 MANAGING KEY ASSIGNMENTS You can view station key assignments and add extenders to some of the program mable keys for easy one touch operation of frequently used features An extender is a number that makes an otherwise general key very specific Add ing the digit 4 to a PAGE key defines this key for paging zone four Adding 225 to a directed pickup key will define this key as pickup for extension 225 only The key must already be ass
37. Play Menu Options Play Message Information Cancel Return to Subscriber Services ej 83 5 5 3 3 8 3 ent s Number 4 Review Recording Stop Append to Recording Discard Recording and Rerecord Set Delivery Options Specify Future Delivery SEND Message Then Copy 0 Rewind 5 Seconds Change Playback Volume Pause Resume Record Playback Fast Forward 5 Seconds Change Playback Speed SEND Message Then Exit Record Play Menu Options Cancel Return to Subscriber Services 7 31 9 Personal Greetings 11 Block All Calls Call forwarding Call Screening Find Me Auto Set Night Intercept Pause Resume Menu Prompting Play 0 Access Coverage Play Menu Options Cancel Return to Subscriber Services 8 2 4 51 7 NOTE All options shown MAY be authorized If an option is not available please speak to your system administrator 60 Mailbox Administration Assign and or Edit Primary Greeting Assign and or Edit 4 Change hange Busy Greeting Assign and or Edit Message Alert 2 Pager Notification R Blocking Greeting Assign and or Edit 3 eview Deleted Messages Night Greeting Assign and or Edit 4 Review Undelivered Messages Auto P
38. SPEED DIAL 4 Searches all speed dial numbers assigned to the phone Enter the speed dial number of the party you wish to call When the number is displayed press ENTER and the number will be automatically dialed for you If you press ENTER without entering a speed dial number all registered num bers will be displayed 2 BY NAME Searches for a telephone number by names associated with them Enter the name the By Name box and press ENTER When the name is dis played press ENTER again and all of the numbers associated with that name are displayed Using the direction button highlight the desired number Press ENTER and the system will automatically dial it for you If you press ENTER without entering a name all registered names will be dis played 3 BY PHONE NUMBER Searches for an entry by the phone number registered Enter the phone number of the party you wish to call Press ENTER and the number will be displayed from the PHONEBOOK When the number is dis played press ENTER and all information associated with that number is dis played If you press ENTER without entering a number all registered numbers will be displayed Notes Entering 123 searches all numbers that include the 123 in them Entering 305 searches all numbers that begin with 305 Entering 3000 searches all numbers that end with 3000 4 BY GROUP Searches for an entries by group information registered Scroll to group or enter as
39. The MESSAGE key on key sets will flash and standard telephones will receive special dial tone and light their message lamp if their phone is equipped with one and they are on a 16DSL card e Hookflash and dial 43 Receive confirmation tone and hang up If the keyset you are calling is in the Auto Answer mode you must use the follow ing procedure Hang up for at least two seconds Lift the handset Dial 41 plus the extension number Receive confirmation tone and then hang up NOTE A station can have up to and including five message indications If you receive dial tone instead of confirmation tone there are already five messages at this station Try again later RETURNING MESSAGES When you see your message indicating lamp flashing if your phone is equipped with one and your phone is connected to an 8MWSLI or a 16 MWSLI card or you lift the handset and receive special dial tone another sta tion has left a message for you To return messages Liftthe handset Dial 43 The first station that left you a message will be called automatical ly If itis not answered your message indication will remain Repeat the prior step until all messages have been returned in the order received Dialtone will return to normal when all messages have been returned Table of Contents STD Telephone CANCELING A MESSAGE You can cancel a message indication that you have left at another station Lift the handset Di
40. The three buttons above the row of programmable buttons are soft keys These buttons assist in the use of the system features and functions Lines from the telephone company are C O lines Calls on these lines are referred to as outside calls Your system can have individual C O line keys or lines may be assigned to groups When they are in a group you access a line by dialing an access code or pressing a route button For example dial 9 or press a LOCAL but ton to get a local outside line If Least Cost Routing is used pressing the LCR but ton will automatically select a preprogrammed C O line according to what digits are dialed Each line in the system is numbered beginning with 701 then 702 703 etc Direct Station Selection DSS buttons are programmed to ring specific stations You can press a DSS button instead of dialing the extension number CALL INDICATIONS The buttons on your phone have light emitting diodes LEDs These are tri colored LEDs that light green red or amber green and red together Intercom calls also called internal calls always appear on your CALL buttons They will always light green You can have up to eight CALL buttons but at least two are recommended Outside calls appear on individual line buttons if they are assigned When an indi vidual line is not assigned to its own button it will appear on a CALL button Your outside calls will light green on your keyset and red on other keyse
41. if programmed or dial 44 you will hear confir mation tone Press the END button When the line becomes free the system will call you back Liftthehandsetor press the SEND button to answer wait for dial tone and dial the telephone number or speed dial number again NOTES 1 Acallback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds If you have set a callback the cursor associated with the CALLBACK button will be solid black 2 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing Table of Contents ITP 5112L CANCELING CALLBACK A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds If you have set a callback the cursor associated with the CALLBACK button will be solid black To cancel a callback Press the CALLBACK button if programmed or dial 44 The display will show the callback details and an option to CLEAR the callback e Pressthe CLEAR button or press the HOLD button This will cancel the last set callback and display the next set callback also with the option to CLEAR This process is repeated until all callbacks are cleared from memory NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature is turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing INTERCOM CALLS SALLING OTHER STATIONS Dial the extension number or group number Wait for the party to answer If you hear a brief tone burst instead of rin
42. 0 lt gt 0 DIAL 1 space 1 DIAL 2 2 DIAL 3 D E F 3 DIAL 4 G H 5 4 DIAL 5 J K L 5 DIAL 6 M N 0 6 DIAL 7 P Q R S 7 8 0 0 8 9 W X Y 9 DIAL NOTES 1 2 When the character you want appears the same dial pad key as the previ ous character press UP to move the cursor one space to the right Other symbols are available for DIAL ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE When you are programmed to receive calls from a door phone You will receive three short rings repeated Lift the handset You are connected to the door phone If an electric door lock release is installed dial 13 to unlock the door 43 CALLING THE DOOR ROOM MONITOR You may call the door phone and listen to what may be happening outside or in another room e Dial the extension number of the door phone You will be connected to the door phone and you can listen or have a con versation e Ifan electric door lock release is installed dial 13 to unlock the door NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the hand set or press the SPEAKER button EXECUTIVE SECRETARY HOT LINE If programmed an executive and a secretary can have a hot line between them When the executive station is in the DND mode all of its calls will ring the secre tary station When an Executive Secretary hotline is programmed to this keyset the keyset offers an additio
43. 0 Play 0 Play Record Cancel Return Menu Prompting 5s Access Coverage Menu Options Menu Options a Reminder to Subscriber Services eoones SEND Message Then Co 9 Group Change Ry 0 Play Cancel Return Cancel Return 0 Play A Specific Sender Playback Volume Menu Options to Subscriber Services to Subscriber Services Menu Options 61 ACCESSING YOUR MAILBOX Also known as Subscriber Services Menu Inside Callers Subscriber logging in from their Desk Dial the voicemail access number or press the key assigned to ring the voicemail VMMSG Enter your personal password when prompted the default password is 0000 Outside Callers Subscribers calling from Cell Phones or outside of the office environment Dial the phone number that will be answered by the voicemail The main greeting will answer At the main greeting dial plus your Subscriber or mailbox number Subscriber and Mailbox numbers will usually match your extension number Enter your personal password when prompted the default password is 0000 Access your Subscriber Services or Mailbox from a Station other than your Own or checking a mailbox associated with a different station Press the VMMSG key or dial the voicemail group number You will be prompted to enter a password Press k This will take you to the Main Auto Attendant Menu Press plus the Subscriber number of your choice You will be prompted to enter you
44. 0 for OFF If option O from above list is dialed at step 2 201 STN VOLUME RING VOLUME 4 1 19 OfficeServ 7100 TECHNICAL MANUAL If option 1 from above list is dialed at step 2 If option 2 from above list is dialed at step 2 If option 3 from above list is dialed at step 2 If option 4 from above list is dialed at step 2 4 Press the transfer key to store and exit 1 20 USER INSTRUCTIONS PART 1 APRIL 2007 201 STN VOLUME OFF RING VOL 4 201 STN VOLUME HANDSET VOL 4 201 STN VOLUME SPEAKER VOL 13 201 STN VOLUME BGM VOLUME 13 OfficeServ 7100 USER INSTRUCTIONS TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 APRIL 2007 1 16 SETTING A PROGRAMMED MESSAGE When you will be away from your phone for any length of time you can leave a programmed message Display stations calling you will see this message and be informed of your status or follow your instructions ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press the transfer key followed by 115 201 PGMMSG 00 Display shows CANCEL VAC MSG 2 Dial 00 20 to select message number e g 05 201 PGMMSG 05 OR PAGE ME Press UP or DOWN to select message 3 Press the left or right soft key to return to step 2 OR Press the transfer key to store and exit 1 21 OfficeServ 7100 TECHNICAL MANUAL USER INSTRUCTIONS PART 1 APRIL 2007 1 17 ALARM REMINDER WITH MESSAGE Station users can have three alarms programmed at their phones Each alarm may be one of the following three types 0 NOTSET 1 TODAY O
45. 1 If the call is not retrieved within a pre programmed period of time it will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light You cannot park and page intercom calls 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy signal you can leave a message indication Press the MESSAGE button or dial 43 and receive confirmation tone Hang up The MESSAGE button on the called station will light Standard tele phones receive special dial tone as a message indication or a lit message lamp if the phone is equipped with and they are connected to an BMWSLI card not available on the OfficeServ 100 or OfficeServ 7000 Series or a 16MWSLI card on the system NOTES 1 Astation can have up to five message indications 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing CANCELING MESSAGES To cancel a message indication that you left at another station dial 42 plus the extension number of the station at which you left a message To cancel all mes sage indications left at your keyset dial 42 plus your extension Your MESSAGE light will go out NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button bef
46. 6 and imme diately enter the option Scroll to DISP SPDNAME press ENTER to change option status Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu press END to return to idle screen CALLER ID REVIEW ALL This feature allows display keyset users to review Caller ID information for calls sent to their stations This list can be from ten to fifty calls in a first in first out basis The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your station but that you did not answer When reviewing this list you can press one button to dial the person back The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number With you handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Press 121 to turn CID REVIEW ALL on or 120 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection From the LCD Press MENU button Scroll to SETUP option press ENTER Scroll to STATION ON OFF and press ENTER OR you may dial 6 and imme diately enter the option Scroll to CID REVIEW ALL press ENTER to change option status Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu press END to return to idle screen SECURE OHVA This option allows you to receive OHVA Over Head Voice Announce calls via the speaker while you are on the handset e With your handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Press 131 to turn SECURE OHVA ON or 130 to turn it OFF Press TRANSFER to savv
47. Answer greeting during the day when you are 72 Table of Contents ITP 5121D available and will NOT ring your extension but simply play your Night greet ing during the night when you are not available Note This does NOT use the Day and Night schedules of the phone system It is solely controlled by the Subscriber s Availability Schedule Pause Resume Exit from Access Manager Play All Options Play Access Coverage This feature is useful for finding out how you current access settings are set It will also tell you what greetings will play under each of the call conditions you have setup PERSONAL GREETINGS The options available in this menu will be determined by your System Administrator and not all of them may be available to you In the simplest sys tems only a mailbox greeting will be available additional greetings may be acces sible in more complex systems Your Personal Greeting will be played every time someone dials your extension and you do not answer You may record up to 9 Personal Greetings and you may assign any one of them to be active There are several different Call Coverage conditions to which you may assign any of your 9 greetings The Call Coverage Conditions are No Answer Busy and Do Not Disturb or Forwarded All This will allow different greetings to play depending on the type of call forward that you have set or the condition of your telephone The Call Coverage conditio
48. DCS KEYSETS NOT SUPPORTED ON OFFICESERV 7100 24 BUTTON KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT 12 BUTTON KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT e 21 Table of Contents System Admin iDCS KEYSETS 8D KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE 28D KEYSET 18D KEYSET KEYS LAYOUT PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT BID VOLUME La 4 Transfer LA mg J Speaker Transfer Speaker DS 5000 SERIES KEYSETS 7S KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE 14D KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT KEYS LAYOUT 1 1 8 w pa pu 21D KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT a 1 1 1 E C Open customer programming and follow the instructions below ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press TRSF and then dial 105 201 SPEED DIAL Display shows 00 2 Dial the station number e g 205 OR 205 SPEED DIAL press UP or DOWN to select the station 00 and press the right soft key to move the cursor OR press the left soft key to go to step 4 3 If the selected station has no speed dial bins this display w
49. Dial 0 NOT SET 1 TODAY ONLY or 2 DAILY to select the alarm type e Press TRANSFER to save Repeat for each alarm if needed To cancel individual alarms Press TRANSFER and then dial 112 Dial alarm number 1 2 or 3 Press the HOLD button NOTE Display keysets can show a reminder message See Alarm Reminder Messages under Display Features 33 ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE When you are programmed to receive calls from a door phone You will receive three short rings repeated Liftthe handset or press SEND button You are connected to the door phone e Ifan electric door lock release is installed dial 13 to unlock the door CALLING THE DOOR PHONE ROOM MONITOR You may call the door phone and listen to what may be happening outside or in another room Dialthe extension number of the door phone You will be connected to the door phone and you can listen or have a con versation e electric door lock release is installed dial 13 to unlock the door NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button EXECUTIVE SECRETARY HOT LINE If programmed an executive and a secretary can have a hot line between them When the executive station is in the DND mode all of its calls will ring the secre tary station Either person can press the BOSS button to make a voice call to the other sta tion Using the hot line will override D
50. Directory Name will be played as a string of digits that are equal to your name spelled out on your telephone keypad Follow the instructions to enter a new name You will be prompted to enter your last name and then your first name This must be done in order for the directory feature to work correctly Note It is possible that if you do not record your name described above and or enter your Directory Name you will not be included in the Dial by Name Directory 4 Extended Prompting Use this option to drastically reduce the number of prompts played in the subscriber interface mailbox prompts Change this setting only if you are very familiar with the user operation of the Samsung Voicemail 85 Note Remember if you know what digits to press you can enter them at time you do not have to wait to be prompted This feature can be toggled on off at anytime Also if it is off you will be prompted within each subscriber menu to press zero for more options This enables you to still be able to find out what to do if you were to get lost and extended prompting was disabled KEYSET USER FEATURES The following options are available if you have a display keyset They require setup by the System Administrator Message Waiting Lights When new messages are left in your mailbox the voicemail message light on your keyset will flash Press this flashing key VMMSG and follow the prompts to retrieve messages This key may be pressed at
51. If your keyset does not have a SAVE key press the CID key the SCROLL key and then the SAVE soft key The system must be using LCR to dial the saved number REDIALING A SAVED CALLER ID NUMBER To redial a number that has been saved press the SNR key or dial 17 NOTES 1 Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the saved number 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing STORING A CALLER ID NUMBER At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information you may save the CID number as a speed dial number in your personal speed dial list To store a Caller ID number in a personal speed dial bin Press the STORE key The system displays the speed dial bin in which the number was stored OR Press the CID key and then press the SCROLL key Press the STORE soft key The system displays the speed dial bin in which the number was stored NOTE Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the saved number If LCR is not being used on your system you will not be allowed to STORE CID numbers 55 INQUIRE CALLER PARK HOLD INFO If you are informed that an incoming call is on hold or has been parked for you you may view the Caller ID information before you retrieve the call This may influ ence how you choose to handle the call From an idle keyset Press the INQUIRE
52. Inform the other party that he she may now join the conversation After the other party or parties has joined the conversation and you wish to return privacy to the line so that no one else can join the conversation press the PRB key a second time the PRB key LED will be off To Join a Non Private Conversation When someone has informed you that you can join a conversation Press the line key that he she has indicated OR Dialthe C O line number that he she has indicated 26 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset DIALING FEATURES SPEED DIALING You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system wide speed dial list of numbers 500 999 or from your personal list of numbers 00 49 You system may be set for 950 system wide numbers If so the system speed dial access codes are 050 999 and the station speed dial codes are 000 049 e With the handset on hook press the MEMORY key or dial 16 e the desired speed dial number The telephone number is automatically dialed for you NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial list A station may be assigned up to fifty numbers 00 49 See your system admin istrator to determine the amount assigned to your station e While on hook press TRANSFER
53. Night Personal Greeting and the Auto Night Intercept feature Follow the spoken directions to enter the days of the week and times you are generally available to talk to your callers All other times you will be considered unavailable 5 Place a Direct Call Allows you to place a direct call out of the Samsung Voicemail from any where You may either dial the number or dial a single digit 1 5 that corre sponds to a stored number See Personal Services 2 Stored Numbers This feature must be authorized by the System Administrator and can be limited or opened to internal local and long distance calls 7 Personal Administration This area is used during the initial set up of your Subscriber Settings see next section 73 PERSONAL ADMINISTRATION SETTINGS This menu allows you to make changes to basic setup settings that are rarely changed Use these when you initially set up your personal Subscriber settings You probably will not need to change them after that 1 Setting your Password From the Subscriber Services Menu press 7 1 The current password will be played and you will have the chance to change it 2 Recording your Name Use this option to record your name Your recorded name is played in several different situations It is important to record your name for proper operation of the Samsung Voicemail system From the Subscriber Services Menu press 7 2 Thecurrent name will be played and yo
54. SPK to store and advance to the next program Table of Contents System Admin PROGRAM SYSTEM SPEED DIAL NUMBERS The system list starts with 200 numbers and can be increased in blocks of ten The system may have either 500 or 950 maximum depending on the setting in MMC 861 See your service company to increase or decrease the system list The speed dial codes are 500 999 or 050 999 Each speed dial number consists of a line access code and the telephone number to be dialed The access code can be any line group individual line station group or individual extension The speed dial number can be up to 24 characters long including FLASH and PAUSE NOTE If Least Cost Routing LCR is being used the LCR access code must be entered When you are entering a speed dial number there are some special keys that you will need to use These are the bottom row of programmable keys on the keysets and are known as keys A B C D E and F PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Select the speed dial bin KEYPAD Used to enter number HOLD Press to clear entry SPK RLS Save data and advance to next program A Does not have a function B Inserts a FLASH C Inserts a PAUSE D Changes the dialing type from pulse to tone E Hides and displays digits F Changes display to speed dial name entry DCS KEYSETS NOT SUPPORTED ON OFFICESERV 7100 24 BUTTON KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT 12 BUTTON KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE KEY
55. To finish the call replace the handset See Ring Preference under Customizing Your Keyset VOICE ANNOUNCE MODE When another station calls you your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and you will hear the caller s announcement e Press the FLASHING CALL button to turn on the microphone and speak handsfree OR lift the handset to reply To finish the call replace the handset NOTE In order for C O calls to be answered handsfree AUTO ANS CO must be set ON AUTO ANSWER MODE When another station calls you your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and then automatically answer the call Your microphone and speaker are turned and you can speak handsfree For privacy use the handset Tofinish the call replace the handset NOTE In order for C O calls to be answered handsfree AUTO ANS CO must be set ON 16 Table of Contents ITP 5107S BUSY STATION CALLBACK When you call another station and receive a busy signal e Press the button if programmed or dial 44 When the busy station becomes free your keyset will ring Lift the handset to call the now idle station NOTES 1 Acallback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds If you have set a callback your CBK button will light 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing BUSY STATION CAMP ON When you call another station and
56. a message press 1 Night Greeting Used during the time period you are scheduled UNAVAILABLE usually after business hours during the evening and at night This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Scheduling feature Example Hi this is John Smith I ve left the office for the evening If you would like to try someone else please enter the extension number now Or to leave me a message press 1 Call Screening Greeting Used while Call Screening is enabled and you REJECT a caller after listening to the caller s record name This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Call Screening feature Example Hi this is John Smith I m sorry but am not available to speak with you at this time If someone else can help you please enter the extension number now Or to leave me a message press 1 Table of Contents ITP 5121D 6 Edit Personal Greetings You may also edit record each one of the greetings 1 9 at any time Select a greeting number to edit and follow the instructions to record your greeting When you are done recording your greeting you will be able to lis ten to the greeting you recorded save the greeting you recorded and return to the previous menu record the greeting again or exit without saving the greeting Note If you record only the greeting assigned to the No Answer Call Coverage Condition then that greeting will play to callers for all C
57. a separate bill to number has been specified in which case the bill to number will be sent Note that ANI does not provide calling party NAME only the number The phone system can provide calling number to name translation table WHAT IS CLI On ISDN circuits calling party information is called CLI and is supported on both BRI BRI not supported on the OfficeServ 7100 and PRI type circuits On BRI cir cuits the system only supports number delivery and like ANI a name can be attached to the telephone number of frequent callers via the Caller ID translation table On 5ESS and NI2 PRI circuits both name and number support is provided on the OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 and OfficeServ 7000 Series systems SELECTING YOUR CALLER ID DISPLAY Simultaneous display of Caller ID name and number on incoming CO calls on both lines of display keysets is supported on all OfficeServ systems On Transferred CO calls you can decide if you want to see the Caller ID name or Caller ID number in the display Regardless of which one is selected you can press the NND button to view the other pieces of Caller ID information To select the type of Caller ID infor mation you wish to view first e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 119 0 for CID options 1 for ANI options or 2 for CLI options DialO if you do not wish to view CID information 1 to view the NUMBER first or 2 to view the NAME first Press TRANSFER to e
58. after you enter your password correctly any new messages will immediately begin to play To enable or if already enabled tog gle and disable this feature From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 5 to Set Auto Play of New Messages 6 Auto Play Message Information If this option is enabled the date time and sender s name will be played auto matically before each message If this is disabled the information must be requested manually by pressing 00 To enable if already enabled toggle and disable this feature From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 6 to Set Auto Play of Message Information MESSAGE BROADCAST This option will only be available if it has been allowed by the System Administrator Broadcast to All Mailboxes If you have been designated as a Subscriber Administrator you may send a message to ALL mailboxes in the system From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 9 for Broadcast Messages This option will only be available if your mailbox has been assigned Subscriber Administration privileges 72 Table of Contents DS 5000 PERSONAL SERVICES The Personal Administration Menu is used to set your password and record your name Many of these features must be allowed by the System Administrator 1 Workload Management Allows you to access to all reminders both Activ
59. and then dial 105 e a speed dial number 00 49 Dial a line or line group access code e Dial the telephone number to be stored 24 digits maximum It can include FLASH and PAUSE Press TRANSFER to store the number NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing 8D KEYSET DEFAULT PROGRAMMING B RD KEYS LAYOUT 28D KEYSET i 18D KEYSET Y VOLUME DEFAULT eee KEYS Transfer Speaker 27 For the purposes of programming speed dial numbers the programmable keys are known as A B C D E and F and are defined below The A key is not used The key inserts a flash The C key inserts a pause The D key is used for pulse to tone conversion If your system uses rotary pulse dialing C O lines pressing D while entering a speed dial number caus es all subsequent digits to be sent as DTMF tones TheE key is used to hide digits Display keyset users may want to hide some speed dial numbers so that they will not show in the display When you are en tering a telephone number press E All subsequent digits will be hidden Press E again to begin displaying digits key is used to enter a name See Personal Speed Dial Names under Display Features Use the HOLD key to clear a speed dial number
60. any order While engaged in a conversation press the CONF key and receive conference tone Make another call either intercom or outside press the CONF key and receive conference tone Make another call or press the CONF key to join all parties e Repeat the last step until all parties are added NOTE When attempting to add another party to the conference and you are not able to reach the desired person hang up Simply press the CONF key again to return to your previous conversation To drop a party from your conference call Press CONF and dial the extension or line number that is to be dropped Press CONF again to reestablish the conference NOTE To leave the conference hang up Control is passed to the next internal sta tion If there are no internal stations and you wish to leave outside lines connect ed together in a trunk to trunk conference press the CONF key plus the CALL but ton that the call appears on or follow the instructions to drop a party and use your extension number When they hang up the lines will release automatically Press CONF to rejoin a trunk to trunk conference CONFERENCE SPLITTING If you are the controlling party of a conference and your keyset has the Auto Hold feature turned on See Customizing Your Keyset and all of the outside lines involved in the conference appear as buttons on your keyset you can split the conference into separate calls as follows Press any one of the o
61. any time to log into your Subscriber Main Menu Answer Machine Emulation If you have an Answer Machine Emulation key programmed on your keyset you can use it to monitor calls going to your voicemail and optionally answer them The operation of this feature is similar to screening a call on a home answering machine Your keyset must be set to forward on no answer to voicemail After ringing your station the caller will be connected to your voicemail and hear your personal greeting before leaving a message During this time you will be monitoring the connection between the caller and your voicemail box At this time you will only be monitoring the call you can not talk to the other party until you answer You may pick up the call at any time or ignore it To activate this feature press the AME button The associated indicator will be lit steady Press again to turn off If this key is pressed while a station is ringing dur ing forward no answer the feature will be turned on for the current call only While the caller is leaving a message or ringing you may Press to immediately put the caller in your voice mailbox and monitor it Press to immediately disconnect your station The caller continues to leave a message normally Pickup the handset and monitor privately Press ANS RLS to answer the call using the handset or speaker 86 Table of Contents ITP 5112L AME Password If your keyset has AME PASSW
62. are used to page up and page down screens The remaining five buttons on either side of the display are programmable There are ten programmable buttons per programmable feature screen with the excep tion of the last screen which has nine programmable buttons The total program mable buttons per 5112L station is ninety nine Any system feature or function can be assigned to these buttons VOLUME CONTROLS The 5112L keysets use the UP and DOWN buttons to adjust the ringer volume while the keyset is ringing the speaker volume while the speakerphone is in use and the handset volume while you are listening These three levels will be stored in memory until changed If background music is turned on at your keyset the vol ume buttons will also control the level of music The volume of pages heard through the speaker of a keyset can be adjusted during a page announcement by using the volume buttons There are 16 levels for each volume setting The volume of off hook ring is controlled by a user programmable setting 51121 incorporates a SCREEN button This button allows you to choose your keyset s idle screen display The default is CALENDAR The options are STATION FIXED FEATURE buttons two levels or STATION PROGRAMMABLE buttons ten levels NOTE From the default CALENDAR screen Press the SCREEN button once to access the STATION PROGRAMMABLE BUTTON SCREEN 1 the DOWN arrow associated wi
63. be programmed to ring a general alerting device To answer calls ringing this device dial 67 or press the UA button This device can operate in any one of the six different ring plans NOTE The 0550075 keysets do not support the navigation key function NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing 10 11 RECALL DIAL TONE Press the NEW button to disconnect your existing call wait for dial tone and then make a new call on the same line NOTE If this button does not appear on your keyset the FLASH button may be programmed to recall dial tone SENDING A FLASH While on an outside call press the FLASH button to send a flash to the telephone company This is required for some custom calling features or CENTREX use NOTE Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH CALLBACK If you receive a busy signal when you are selecting an outside line this means that the line or group of lines is busy Press the button if programmed or dial 44 You will hear confirmation tone When the line becomes free the system will call you back Lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer wait for dial tone and dial the telephone number or speed dial number again NOTES 1 Acallback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds If you have set a callback your CBK button will light 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad featu
64. be prompted to enter the Forward Destination Enter it and press ENTER NOTE call forwarding has been initially set for subsequent settings you may scroll to the desired forward type and press ENTER to forward to that same desti nation You may also press the SELECT button associated with the desired forward type as opposed to scrolling to it 3 From the Station Feature Button Each of the forward types be assigned its own feature button Pressing the desired feature button will set forwarding to the last destination NOTES 1 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 2 The station that receives a Forward All call can transfer the call to the for warded station This is useful when you are expecting an important call but you do not wish to be disturbed by other calls 3 When a station user places his her keyset in Forward All mode and he she does not have a FORWARD ALL button the TRANSFER button will light to indicate Forward All has been set and calls to this station have been trans ferred elsewhere CALL FORWARD OPTIONS A display keyset may review or change call forward options and destinations Call forward access can be done via the keypad or by accessing the keyset display fea tures To review or change call forward options Press TRANSFER 102 Dial 0 6 to select the forward type e g 1 OR Press UP or D
65. be selected for you NOTES 1 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 2 The saved telephone number is stored in memory until you save another number 3 Redial does not apply to intercom calls CHAIN DIALING You may manually dial additional digits following a speed dial number or chain as many speed dial numbers together as required After the first speed number is dialed press MEMORY again and dial another speed number OR manually dial additional digits following a speed dial num ber AUTOMATIC REDIAL RETRY When you are making an outside call and you receive a busy signal the system can automatically redial the number for you It will automatically redial at a pre programmed interval for up to 15 attempts When you hear a busy signal press the RETRY button Thesystem will reserve the line and automatically redial the same number for you You will hear the call being made through the keyset speaker The micro phone is muted 31 When the called party answers lift the handset or press the flashing SPEAK ER to begin speaking NOTES 1 Ifyou make another call auto redial is canceled 2 Tocancela retry lift and replace the handset PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER When making an outside call on a dial pulse line press All digits dialed after the with be sent as tones MEMO REDIALING When you are calling d
66. been turned off you must first lift the handset or press SPEAKER before you begin dialing FORWARD NO ANSWER To forward calls to another station when you do not answer Dial 603 plus the extension or group number e Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 25 FORWARD BUSY NO ANSWER If you have both a Forward on Busy destination and a Forward No Answer desti nation programmed you may set both of these at the same time Dial 604 e Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing FORWARD FOLLOW ME When you want all calls to your extension forwarded to the extension where you are now Dial 606 plus your extension number e Receive confirmation tone and hang up If you want a specific extension s calls forwarded to your phone Remote Call Forward Dial 606 plus the desired extension number Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing FORWARD DND To forward your phone when you activate DND Dial 605 plus the extension number or group number Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTE If the Hot Keypa
67. been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing AUTO CAMP ON When you want to automatically camp on to a busy station without pressing the camp on button every time you call a busy station you can set your phone for auto camp on e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 081 to turn on auto camp on or 080 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection CALLING YOUR SYSTEM OPERATOR Dial 0 to call your system operator or group of operators e Ifyou want to call a specific operator dial that person s extension number NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the hand set or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 20 Table of Contents ITP 5121D CALL PROCESSING TEM HOLD When you are connected to any call press HOLD The call will flash green at your keyset If this call appears on a line button at other keysets it will flash red at those keysets Totake the caller off hold press that button and the green flashing light will steady green again Resume the conversation NOTE While on a call pressing a line button route button or flashing CALL button will automatically put your first call on hold and connect you to the new call See Automatic Hold under Customizing Your Keyset EXCLUSIVE HOLD To place an outside call on hold at your phone so that other users cannot get it Pr
68. busy station is called e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Press 081 to turn CAMP ON on or 080 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection SELECT RING TONE Each keyset user can select any one of eight ring frequencies While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 111 Dial 1 8 or press the UP and DOWN buttons to hear each tone When you hear the tone that you prefer press TRANSFER to save it NOTE Specific lines or stations may be programmed to ring with a different tone than what you have selected for your keyset CHANGE YOUR PASSCODE From the factory your station passcode is 1234 You can change your station pass code whenever you desire e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 101 Dial your old passcode new passcode must be four characters You can use 0 9 Redial the new passcode to verify If successful you will hear two beeps Four beeps indicate an incorrect code Reenter the code again Press TRANSFER to store the new passcode 41 SET ANSWER INTERCOM You can receive internal calls in one of three modes see Answering Intercom Calls under Intercom Calls for descriptions e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 103 Dial 0 for Ringing 1 for Auto Answer or 2 for Voice Announce Press TRANSFER to store your selection SET ANSWER MODE CO Your incoming CO calls can be set to follow the intercom ans
69. button scroll UP DOWN to the desired option and LEFT RIGHT to scroll to desired option setting Enter TIME via dial pad in 24 hour format Set RING TONE via direction button LEFT RIGHT Each tone is heard Set REPEAT DURATION via direction button e Press ENTER when finished 2 ALARM See Alarm Reminder Programming Section 65 3 DAILY PLANNER See Alarm Reminder Programming Section 4 MEMO PAD Self memo feature Allows you to set text message notes Up to 5 memos may be stored Add NEW MEMO memo on keypad Press MENU button to change fonts or add characters To save press ENTER When you select an existing MEMO press MENU to edit it or delete it 5 CALCULATOR Enter FIRST NUMBER press NAVIGATION KEY associated with the prop er operation Enter SECOND NUMBER and press ENTER to display answer 6 WORLD TIME Displays times throughout the world Use direction button LEFT RIGHT to view desired time zone Press MENU to set your current time zone 7 D DAY PLUS Scheduling feature that allows the user to view the time left until an event or time since event occurred Use to monitor deadlines sched ules etc 8 UNIT CONVERT Weights and Measures conversion application Allows you to convert units of weights and measures into other units Choose desired function LENGTH WEIGHT AREA VOLUME TEMPERATURE press ENTER Scroll LEFT RIGHT to select base unit Scrol
70. call conditions you have setup PERSONAL GREETINGS The options available in this menu will be determined by your System Administrator and not all of them may be available to you In the simplest sys tems only a mailbox greeting will be available additional greetings may be acces sible in more complex systems Your Personal Greeting will be played every time someone dials your extension and you do not answer You may record up to 9 Personal Greetings and you may assign any one of them to be active There are several different Call Coverage conditions to which you may assign any of your 9 greetings The Call Coverage Conditions are No Answer Busy and Do Not Disturb or Forwarded All This will allow different greetings to play depending on the type of call forward that you have set or the condition of your telephone The Call Coverage conditions that you can assign specific greetings to are select ed by the following digits 1 Primary No Answer Greeting Used when in your office away from your desk or during the time period you are scheduled available If this is the only Personal Greeting you record it will play for all call coverage conditions This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Basic Greeting feature 67 68 Example Hi this is John Smith l m sorry am not available to answer your call If someone else can help you please enter the extension number now Or to leav
71. call is being held and you can dial another party TRANSFER CONF TONE 100 ms ON 100 ms OFF CONTINUOUS Confirmation Tone Very short beeps followed by dial tone indicate you have correctly set or canceled a system feature CONFIRMATION 50 ms ON 50 ms OFF FOR ONE SECOND programmable Error Tone A distinctive two level beeping tone indicates you have done something incorrectly Try again ERROR 50 ms of tone 1 50 ms of tone 2 FOR THREE SECONDS Table of Contents ITP 5121D ITP 5121D LCD Panel Programmable Buttons 21 Soft Button Scroll Button Status Indicator Speaker Volume 4 Button 3 S Button Keyset Support Navigation Button Microphone Dial Button Speaker Button Conference Button Hold Button Transfer Button ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET Place the keyset face down on a flat surface nsert notched ends of the support bracket into the channels located in the upper section of the bottom panel Push towards the top of the keyset to lock in Plug the handset cord into the jack marked with the symbol Route the handset cord out the RIGHT side of the keyset as you look at it face down Plug an eight conductor ethernet cable from the wall into the jack marked LAN on the back of the keyset Connect
72. can do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can do a blind transfer without notification While on a call press the TRANSFER key and dial an extension number or group number Your call is automatically put on transfer hold OR Press a DSS key or station group key Your call is automatically put on transfer hold Hang up when you hear ringing this is an unscreened or blind transfer OR Wait for the called party to answer and advise him her of the call and hang up If the transfer is refused you will be reconnected to the outside line when the called station hangs up or you can press TRANSFER to return to the outside party If you wish to send the call to another extension without waiting for the 20 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset first station to hang up simply press another DSS button OR Press the CALL button or C O line key to return to the outside party and begin the transfer process again When you are transferring a call to a keyset set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer the transferred call will always ring NOTES 1 Afterthe inside party answers you may alternate back and forth between the parties by pressing the TRANSFER key 2 Ifyou receive No More Calls tone that station has no key available to receive another call Press TRANSFER to return to the other party 3 You cannot transfer an Intercom call by pressing a DSS key You must press the TRANSFER key and dial the destinati
73. canceled a system feature CONFIRMATION TONE 50 ms 50 ms OFF programmable Error Tone A distinctive two level beeping tone indicates you have done something incorrectly Try again ERROR 50 ms of tone 1 50 ms of tone 2 FOR THREE SECONDS ITP 5112L KEYSET Color LCD Panel Displays a large quantity of information so that Select Buttons 6 the users can easily To select a specific item search the user can simply Volume Button Used to adjust Select Button 6 the volume of the handset speakerphone ringer back ground music and page press the Select button next to the item Status Indicator Used to provide psy E your keyset status lt Screen Button gt T Scroll EEE iB ESN So oS a 40 Navigation Button Microphone Button Dial Button Conference Button Used to make a calls of up to 5 parties Speaker Button For handsfree operation and ringing Hold Button Used to save a call without hanging up on the current call Transfer Button Table of Contents ITP 5112L ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET Place the keyset face down a flat surface Insert notched ends of the support bracket into the channels located in the upper section of the bottom panel Push towards the top of the keyset to lock in Plug the handset cord into the jack marked with the 3 symbol Route the handset cor
74. codes SYSTEM TONES The system provides several tones to assist you Some of these tones are already familiar to you Intercom Dial Tone A steady tone that indicates you can begin dialing CONTINUOUS Ringback the station you dialed is ringing RINGBACK TONE 1000 ms ON 3000 ms OFF E CONTINUOUS Busy Tone lIndicates the station you dialed is busy BUSY TONE 500 ms ON 500 ms OFF CONTINUOUS DND No More Calls Tone Fast busy tone indicates the station you dialed is in the Do Not Disturb mode or cannot receive any more calls DND NO MORE CALLS TONE 250 ms ON 250 ms OFF FOR SECONDS Transfer Conference Tone Indicates your call is being held and you TRANSFER CONF TONE 100 ms 100 ms OFF CONTINUOUS t 5 2 3 o 5 lt Confirmation Tone Very short beeps followed by dial tone indicate you have correctly set or canceled a system feature CONFIRMATION TONE 50 ms ON 50 ms OFF FOR ONE SECOND programmable Error Tone A distinctive two level beeping tone indicates you have done something incorrectly Try again ERROR 50 ms of tone 1 50 ms of tone 2 FORTHREE SECONDS Table of Contents iDCS Keyset iDCS 28D KEYSET 32 CHARACTER DISPLAY Two lines with 16 characters each TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR Used to provide your keyset status
75. different lines to ring different ring plans to ring different station and or station groups Examples of why different ring plans are required can include normal day operation night operation using different oper ators during different lunch shifts and Saturday or evening hours of operation While the system is in a ring plan each station will be limited to its individual Ring Plan class of service dialing restrictions You can place the system in one of any six of these ring plans at any time Ring Plans are available on an individual tenant basis and may be set automatically or manually Automatic Ring Plans have an individual start time and will remain in that mode until the beginning of the next defined ring plan If no automatic timer is set you must change ring plans manu ally Any of these ring plans can be switched from one plan to another at any time by manually pressing a ring plan button There are two ways to override the auto matic ring plans one is a temporary override until the next programmed start time and the other is a permanent override until manually changed MANUAL RING PLAN CHANGE Press the RTO button plus the ring plan passcode four digits and the ring plan 1 6 you wish to set The system will override all the automatic time tables and will remain in the set ring plan until manually changed To manually change or cancel the ring plan time override and return ring plan operation to the system clock press the RT
76. each of the call conditions you have setup PERSONAL GREETINGS The options available in this menu will be determined by your System Administrator and not all of them may be available to you In the simplest sys tems only a mailbox greeting will be available additional greetings may be acces sible in more complex systems Your Personal Greeting will be played every time someone dials your extension and you do not answer You may record up to 9 Personal Greetings and you may assign any one of them to be active There are several different Call Coverage conditions to which you may assign any of your 9 greetings The Call Coverage Conditions are No Answer Busy and Do Not Disturb or Forwarded All This will allow different greetings to play depending on the type of call forward that you have set or the condition of your telephone The Call Coverage conditions that you can assign specific greetings to are select ed by the following digits 1 Primary No Answer Greeting Used when in your office away from your desk or during the time period you are scheduled available If this is the only Personal Greeting you record it will play for all call coverage conditions This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Basic Greeting feature 68 Table of Contents DS 5000 Example Hi this is John Smith l m sorry am not available to answer your call If someone else can help you please enter the ex
77. electric door lock release is installed dial 13 to unlock the door CALLING THE DOOR PHONE ROOM MONITOR You may call the door phone and listen to what may be happening outside or in another room Dial the extension number of the door phone You will be connected to the door phone and you can listen or have a con versation e electric door lock release is installed dial 13 to unlock the door NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button EXECUTIVE SECRETARY HOT LINE If programmed an executive and a secretary can have a hot line between them When the executive station is in the DND mode all of its calls will ring the secre tary station Either person can press the BOSS button to make a voice call to the other sta tion Using the hot line will override DND at the other station This button will light red when the other station is in use To transfer a call to a Boss in DND Press the TRANSFER button followed by the BOSS button Wait for the BOSS to answer to announce the call and hang up to complete the transfer OR e Hang up to complete a blind transfer after pressing the BOSS button EXECUTIVE DIVERT When the executive station is in the DIVERT mode all of his her calls will ring the secretary station Press the DIVERT button to pass a call while ringing 39 To transfer all calls to the Secretary Press the DIVERT
78. enabled after you enter your password correctly any new messages will immediately begin to play To enable or if already enabled tog gle and disable this feature From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 5 to Set Auto Play of New Messages 6 Auto Play Message Information If this option is enabled the date time and sender s name will be played auto matically before each message If this is disabled the information must be requested manually by pressing 00 To enable if already enabled toggle and disable this feature From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 6 to Set Auto Play of Message Information MESSAGE BROADCAST This option will only be available if it has been allowed by the System Administrator Broadcast to All Mailboxes If you have been designated as a Subscriber Administrator you may send a message to ALL mailboxes in the system From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 9 for Broadcast Messages This option will only be available if your mailbox has been assigned Subscriber Administration privileges 71 PERSONAL SERVICES The Personal Administration Menu is used to set your password and record your name Many of these features must be allowed by the System Administrator 1 72 Workload Management Allows you to access to all reminders both Active and Pending I
79. environment Dial the phone number that will be answered by the voicemail The main greeting will answer e At the main greeting dial plus your Subscriber mailbox number Subscriber and Mailbox numbers will usually match your extension number e Enter your personal password when prompted the default password is 0000 Access your Subscriber Services or Mailbox from a Station other than your Own or checking a mailbox associated with a different station e Press the VMMSG key or dial the voicemail group number You will be prompted to enter a password e Press k This will take you to the Main Auto Attendant Menu e Press plus the Subscriber number of your choice You will be prompted to enter you password At this point the inside and outside callers follow the same instructions You will hear a message stating the number of messages left in your mailbox You will then hear the Subscriber Services Menu with the following options 1 Listen to New Messages See Listening to your Message Record and Send Message See Sending Messages Review Saved Messages See Listening to your Message Access Manager See Access Manager Personal Greetings See Personal Greetings Mailbox Administration See Mailbox Administration Personal Services See Personal Services gt B Return to Main Menu 65 Table of Contents Subscriber Services Menu Group Sav
80. f you have entries in your review list the most recent call will be shown first 56 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset e You can now CLEAR this entry OR Use NND to view more information about this call OR Press DIAL to call this person back OR Press SCROLL and then press STORE to save this number in a personal speed dial bin NOTES 1 Each keyset defaults with ten review bins Please see your system administra tor to determine the number of bins assigned to your keyset 2 Your system must LCR correctly programmed to allow you to DIAL num bers from the review list or to STORE entries from the review list 57 BUTTON MODULE 64 65 WITH KEYSET The 64 button module is used when you need more programmable keys added to your keyset The 64 red LED s provide visual indication of calls and features The extra programmable keys are used exactly like the ones on your keyset Make them DSS BLF keys or feature keys As a DSS BLF the size of the 64 button module allows for greater call status and faster call processing The 64 button module does not support executive off hook voice announce OHVA and does not have a microphone A maximum of two 64 button modules can be assigned to any key set 58 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset Samsung Voicemail This section describes how to setup and use the various features available to a Subscriber A Subscriber is a person that has been authorized access to the vari ous fe
81. is not necessary to lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing Calls can be made and features activated by simply dialing the C O line number trunk group access code intercom number or feature access code To ac tivate this feature e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 031 to turn the Hot Keypad on or 030 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection KEY CONFIRMATION TONE You can hear a short beep confirmation tone each time you press a button on the dial pad This tone can be turned on or off e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Dial 040 to turn tones off or 041 to turn tones on Press TRANSFER to store your selection REJOINING A PAGE This feature allows you to hear the remaining portion of an ongoing internal page after you return your keyset to idle To enable this feature e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 051 to turn this feature on or 050 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection RING PREFERENCE This feature automatically answers ringing calls when you lift the handset This method will always answer calls in the order they arrived at your keyset When you turn ring preference off you must press the flashing button to answer a call allow ing you to answer calls in the order you choose e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 061 to turn ring
82. item 5 SYSTEM SERVER SET UP sets or modifies settings related to registering the phone to the MCP You can obtain this information from your system administrator The screen below is displayed 1 SERVER IP ADDRESS You can set modify the IP address of the MCP at the 1 SERVER IP ADDRESS item The screen below is displayed when you enter the item The server IP is the IP address of the MCP2 MCP INPUT SERVER IP ADDRESS XXX XXX XXX XXX You can confirm the current IP address of the MCP at the LCD panel The address is left blank if it is not set Use the dial buttons from 0 9 and to set the IP address and press the SPEAKER button to save and exit Select the 2 SERVER ID menu Use the HOLD button to backspace INPUT SYSTEM ID XXXX You must input the ID assigned to your ITP phone See your phone system admin istrator to get this value Press the SPEAKER button to save and exit Select the 3 SERVER PASS item INPUT SYSTEM PASSWORD XXXX You must input the password associated with your ID See your phone system administrator to get this value Press HOLD to backspace Press the SPEAKER but ton to save and exit Completion of Settings From the main menu select the seventh item 7 REBOOT to save all modified settings and reboot the ITP 5107S phone OUTSIDE CALLS MIRING AN OUTSIDE CALL Lift the handset and press an idle outside line button line group button or dial a line access code
83. k This will take you to the Main Auto Attendant Menu e Press plus the Subscriber number of your choice You will be prompted to enter you password At this point the inside and outside callers follow the same instructions You will hear a message stating the number of messages left in your mailbox You will then hear the Subscriber Services Menu with the following options 1 Listen to New Messages See Listening to your Message Record and Send Message See Sending Messages Review Saved Messages See Listening to your Message Access Manager See Access Manager Personal Greetings See Personal Greetings Mailbox Administration See Mailbox Administration Personal Services See Personal Services gt Return to Main Menu 59 Table of Contents Subscriber Services Menu Group Saved Listen to New Review Saved Record amp Send Access Personal Mailbox Personal Pause Resume Play Menu Exit Messages Messages Messages Messages Manager Greetings Administration Services Options E Group New Messages 3 4 Assign and or Edit Change Review Group Messages Menu Listen Menu b Record Menu 1 Follow 1 Primary Greeting 1 Message Alert 1 Work
84. key OR Press the CID key and then the INQUIRE soft key Dial the trunk number You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS key OR You may use NND to view more information about this call OR You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE If you are on a call Press the INQUIRE key Your existing call will go on hold OR Press the CID key and then the INQUIRE soft key to place the first call on hold Dial the trunk number You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS key OR You may use NND to view more information about this call OR You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE NOTES 1 If you are on an intercom call or you have Automatic Hold turned off you must finish the existing call or place it on hold before inquiring 2 Ifyou inquire about an outgoing call you will receive a call no longer avail able display REVIEWING PAST CALLER ID CALLS This feature allows you to review CID information for calls sent to your keyset This list can contain 10 50 calls in a last in first out basis The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your keyset but that you did not answer missed calls When reviewing this list you can press one button to dial the person back The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number access the CID infor mation stored in your REVIEW list Press the REVIEW key OR Press the CID key and then press the REVIEW soft key
85. keyset does not have a SAVE but ton press the CID button the SCROLL button and then the SAVE soft key The sys tem must be using LCR to dial the saved number REDIALING A SAVED CALLER ID NUMBER To redial a number that has been saved press the SNR button or dial 17 NOTES 1 Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the saved number 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing STORING A CALLER ID NUMBER At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information you may save the CID number as a speed dial number in your personal speed dial list To store a Caller ID number in a personal speed dial bin Press the STORE button The system displays the speed dial bin in which the number was stored OR Press the CID button and then press the SCROLL button Press the STORE soft key The system displays the speed dial bin in which the number was stored NOTE Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the saved number If LCR is not being used on your system you will not be allowed to STORE CID numbers 55 INQUIRE CALLER PARK HOLD INFO If you are informed that an incoming call is on hold or has been parked for you you may view the Caller ID information before you retrieve the call This may influ ence how you choose to handle the call From an idle keyset
86. lation company when requested for a complete list of descriptions and extenders for any keys you may have programmed on your keyset NOTE Confirm that the cursor is placed correctly before you enter the extender LCR WITH CLEAR When you are making an outside call using LCR and dial an incorrect digit you can press the CLEAR soft key to reenter the telephone number You do not need to redial 9 to reaccess LCR BACKSPACE WITH LCR If you misdial while using LCR you can delete digits shown in the display by press ing the BSPC soft key as many times as necessary 53 TEXT MESSAGING This feature allows two digital keyset users to respond to each other with prepro grammed text messages After receiving an Off Hook Voice Announcement or Station Camp On you may respond with a text message while continuing to talk and listen to your outside party The other station can view this message and take the appropriate action or respond back with another text message You must be permitted to use the Text Messaging feature See your System Administrator or Technician to be assigned this feature They will assign you ten 10 blank messages You can create any 16 character messages 01 to 10 that are appropriate for your use NOTE See ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES for instructions on how to enter charac ters to create a text message Familiarization with the two digit message numbers you will use the most will make this procedure quick and
87. make calls while in the DND mode NOTES 1 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 f you place your keyset DND mode and you do not have a DND button your TSI button will flash to indicate DND status ONE TIME DND If you are on a call and you do not wish to be interrupted while on that call you can press the DND button and place your station in Do Not Disturb When you hang up at the end of the call DND will be automatically canceled and your key set will be able to receive new calls This feature requires a DND button MUTE You can mute the handset transmitter or the microphone during any conversa tion Press the MUTE button It will light red To resume speaking press the MUTE button again The light turns off BACKGROUND MUSIC When a music source is supplied you may listen to music through the speaker in your keyset While on hook press the HOLD button to hear music Press the HOLD button again to turn music off You can set the level of background music by using the VOLUME buttons while lis tening to the music This does not affect the speakerphone level 37 ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP To pick up an established call in progress at a single line extension connected to a computer modem on your PC Press the EP button for that station on your keyset and the call is automati cally moved to your keyset The single line extens
88. move to the next location OR Press the F key to program speed dial numbers 5 Press the transfer key to store and exit 1 10 OfficeServ 7100 USER INSTRUCTIONS TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 APRIL 2007 1 9 ADDING EXTENDERS TO KEYS This program allows you to assign key extenders to make a general access feature key more specific The feature keys that can have extenders are listed below FEATURE KEY DESCRIPTION EXTENDER BOSS Boss and Secretary 1 4 DP Direct Pickup Extension or station group number DS Direct Station Select Any extension number FWRD Call Forward 0 5 GPIK Group Pickup 01 20 IG In Out of Group Any group number you are part of MMPG Meet Me Page 0 9 PAGE Page 0 9 PARK Park orbits 0 9 RP Ring Plan 1 6 or HOLD for None SPD Speed Dial 00 49 500 999 PMSG Programmed Message 01 13 DIR Directory PERS 1 SYS 2 or STN 3 VT Voice Mail Transfer Voice Mail Group 501 519 SG Station Group Any group number 500 519 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press the transfer key followed by 107 201 EXT KTS Display shows the first station 01 CALL1 gt 2 Enter the key number e g 18 201 EXT KTS OR 18 DS Use UP and DOWN to scroll through the keys Use the right soft key to move the cursor R Press the key to be programmed 3 Dial the extender according to above table 201 EXT KTS Press the right soft key to return to step 2 18 5 gt DS207 OR Press the transfer key to store and exit OR Press the speaker key to store and a
89. must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before dialing BUSY STATION CAMP ON When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to wait for a callback MANUAL CAMP ON Press the CAMP key or dial 45 The called station will receive off hook ring tone repeated every few seconds and its first available CALL button will flash green to indicate your call is wait ing Wait for the called party to answer The called station must release its first call or place it on hold before answer ing your camp on NOTES 1 Ifyou receive No More Calls tone that station has no available key to accept your call Hang up or leave a message 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before dialing AUTO CAMP ON When you want to automatically camp on to a busy station without pressing the camp on button every time you call a busy station you can set your phone for auto camp on With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 081 to turn on auto camp on or 080 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection CALL PROCESSING Ifyou want to call a specific operator dial that person s extension number NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the hand SYSTEM HOLD set or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing When you are connected to any call press HOLD Th
90. network 51075 INITIALIZING THE 51075 Initially the ITP 5107S IP keyset will need to be setup to operate within the users network The Setup Menu is also used to make changes to the keyset in the event that the system information should change The option chosen via scroll key will be highlighted The station numbers will be automatically set by the OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 and the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems once the necessary information has been entered into the IP keyset Enter ID and password of the server as described below to register the phone See your system administrator for specific Network and Server addresses The addresses necessary to set up the 51075 IP Address of the ITP Network Gateway Address Subnet Mask P Address of System s MCP UserID Password SETUP MENU TO GET TO THE SET UP MENU UNPLUG THE POWER FROM THE ITP 5107S PHONE OR UNPLUG THE LAN CABLE IF USING POWER OVER ETHERNET PRESS AND HOLD THE BUTTON ON THE DIAL PAD WHILE PLUGGING IN THE POWER CORD OR LAN CABLE IF USING POWER OVER ETHERNET BACK INTO THE PHONE NOW RELEASE THE BUTTON gt 1 5 5 EASY WIZARD 2 SYSTEM INFORMATION Other items not shown on screen when scrolling down 3 NETWORK SETUP 5 SYSTEM SERVER SETUP 4 LOAD amp UPGRADE SETUP 6 FACTORY RESET Table of Contents ITP 5107S 6 FACTORY RESET 7 REBOOT NAVIGATING THE MENUS Once the IP setup men
91. not able to reach the desired person hang up Simply press the CONF button again to return to your previous conversation To drop a party from your conference call Press CONF and dial the extension or line number that is to be dropped Press CONF again to reestablish the conference NOTE To leave the conference hang up Control is passed to the next internal sta tion If there are no internal stations and you wish to leave outside lines connect ed together in a trunk to trunk conference press the CONF button plus the CALL button that the call appears on or follow the instructions to drop a party and use your extension number When they hang up the lines will release automatically Press CONF to rejoin a trunk to trunk conference CONFERENCE SPLITTING If you are the controlling party of a conference and your keyset has the Auto Hold feature turned on See Customizing Your Keyset and all of the outside lines involved in the conference appear as buttons on your keyset you can split the conference into separate calls as follows Press any one of the outside line buttons That outside line will remain steady green to indicate you are still connected to it All other outside lines in the conference will be placed on system hold at your keyset All intercom callers in the conference will be disconnected You may now speak with each caller privately and transfer them as usual or reestablish another conference 24 Table of Con
92. number extender assigned to it OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE may receive a voice announcement while on another call The calling sta tion must have an OHVA button When you are in DND you cannot receive OHVA calls The OHVA feature will work with intercom and transferred calls When you receive an OHVA and secure OHVA is ON you will hear the announce ment in the handset receiver if you are using the handset If secure OHVA is OFF then you will hear the announcement on the speaker if you are talking on the handset If you are using the speakerphone the announcement will always be heard through the speaker To make an off hook voice announcement e Dial the extension number or press the DSS button When you receive a busy signal press the OHVA button After the attention tone begin speaking Finish the call by replacing the handset Press the flashing CALL button on your keyset This will place the original party on hold and allow you to talk to the announcing party Toreturn to your first party press the button corresponding to your original call This will disconnect the OHVA call NOTES 1 When you are voice announcing to a station close to you use the handset to avoid an echo effect 2 You cannot off hook voice announce to single line telephones 47 BLOCK Your keyset be programmed with OHVA Block BLOCK button Pressing this button will prevent anyone from making an OH
93. on hold and connect you to the next call AUTO TIMER Timer in LCD that monitors call duration HEADSET USE Switches between headset and handset use HOT KEYPAD Allows for dialing without lifting handset first PAGE REJOIN Allows remaining portion of internal page to be played through keyset speaker after handset is replaced RING PREF Allows for automatically answering of calls when handset is lift ed Does not require button press AME PASSWORD Allows password protection of AME feature on set This prevents unauthorized listening to messages being left AUTO CAMPON Allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on to when a busy station is called DIS SPDNAME Allows the speed dial associated name to be displayed while number is being dialed SECURE OHVA Allows OHVA calls to be received by station in conversation on handset CALL COST DISP Display in LCD that monitors call cost for duration of call CID REVIEW ALL Allows user to review Caller ID information for calls sent to the station The list is programming dependent and operates on a first in first out basis Calls to displayed numbers can be returned with a single button press provided LCR is being used STOP CID DISPLAY Discontinues CID information after call is answered AUTO ANS CO CALL Allows CO calls to be auto answered on incoming calls Scroll to or dial 0 press ENTER Scroll to desired feature press ENTER to change option status Press CANCEL t
94. on hold before answer ing your camp on NOTES 1 If you receive No More Calls tone that station has no available button to accept your call Hang up or leave a message 21 2 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing AUTO CAMP ON When you want to automatically camp on to a busy station without pressing the camp on button every time you call a busy station you can set your phone for auto With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 081 to turn ON auto camp on or 080 to turn it OFF Press TRANSFER to store your selection From the LCD Press the MENU button Scroll to CONFIG option and press ENTER e Scroll to STATION ON OFF and press ENTER OR you may dial 0 and immediately enter the option Scroll to AUTO CAMPON option Press ENTER to change status e Press CANCEL to return to main configuration screen OR press END to return to idle screen CALLING YOUR SYSTEM OPERATOR Dial 0 and press SEND button to call your system operator or group of opera tors e Ifyou want to call a specific operator dial that person s extension number NOTE If the Hot keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 22 Table of Contents ITP 5112L CALL PROCESSING SYSTEM HOLD When you are connected to any call press HO
95. one group DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS DISA From outside of the office selected individuals can call into the OfficeServ 100 or OfficeServ 500 or OfficeServ 7000 Series system on special DISA line s A security code must be entered to gain access Once these individuals are in the system they can make outside calls using the office lines or call stations within the system Individuals who will use DISA must have their stations assigned for DISA access and must change their station passcodes The default passcode 1234 cannot be used Callin on the DISA line from any phone with tone dialing You will hear a dial tone Dial your security code your extension number plus your station passcode If you allowed access you will receive a dial tone Dial any line access code receive outside dial tone and then dial a tele phone number OR dial any extension number to call a station in the sys tem To make another call press receive dial tone and dial another number Press and hang up when finished NOTE Outgoing DISA calls are controlled by the dialing class of the station identi fied by the security code The DISA line must have disconnect supervision from the central office Insist that this service is verified by your installation service company DISA SECURITY A common practice among hackers is to repeatedly dial a known DISA access number usually with a computer and try a different passcode each time
96. option number 5 Forward Set Press ENTER Scroll to or dial the desired forward option and assign station number to forward your station to OR Table of Contents ITP 5121D ALL FWD NO BUSY FWD NO NOANS FWD NO DND FWD NO FWD CANCEL Press ENTER Scroll to or dial 1 FORWARD TYPE and scroll to or dial the desired for ward type Press ENTER to activate the desired call forward type Press CANCEL to return to main menu 2 Press END to exit programming ALARM REMINDER Allows you to set an Alarm Reminder Up to three alarms may be set Scroll or dial option number 6 Alarm Reminder Scroll or dial the desired Alarm number Alarm 1 3 Press ENTER Enter Alarm Type 0 NOT SET Disables alarm 1 TODAY Rings alarm one time only on the day set 2 DAILY Rings alarm daily at time set Press ENTER Display confirms setting and returns to that alarm set menu Scroll up to set ALARM TIME Press ENTER Enter ALARM TIME Military Format Press ENTER Display confirms setting Press CANCEL to return to main menu Press END to exit programming 63 Samsung Voicemail This section describes how to setup and use the various features available to a Subscriber A Subscriber is a person that has been authorized access to the vari ous features and services available in the Samsung Voicemail Please review this section carefully before you use your Authorized Features and Servi
97. plays 1 2 nse 3 oer 4 5 6 0 Volume 4 HOLD ANS RLS SPEAKER For handsfree operation and ringing Memory Redial Transfer Speaker ANSWER RELEASE KEY MICROPHONE For handsfree operation HOLD KEY 10 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH VOLUME CONTROL KEYS 8 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH TRI TRI COLORED LIGHTS Used for CALL Used to set independent COLORED LIGHTS Used to call buttons intercom calls outside lines levels for handset speaker stations directly to indicate busy and many other system features background music ring and conditions of other stations for One page volumes Touch dialing and many other system features 6 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset iDCS 8D KEYSET 32 CHARACTER DISPLAY Two lines with 16 characters each TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR Used to provide your keyset status SAMSUNG SCROLL KEY Used to scroll through displays iDCS 8D SOFT KEYS Used to activate features via the VOLUME display VOLUME CONTROL KEYS 1 Call 2 Message Transfer Speaker Used to set independent levels for handset speaker background music ring and page volumes 023 4 5 JG mo HOLD ANS RLS MICROPHONE For handsfree operation SPEAKER HOLD KEY ANSWER For handsfree RELEASE KEY operation and ringing 8 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH TRI COLORED LIGHTS Used to call stations d
98. press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing 3 Ifa message has been left at your keyset by a keyset in Auto Answer you must manually cancel the message after it has been returned PROGRAMMED MESSAGES When you will be away from your phone for any length of time you can leave a programmed station message Display stations calling you will see this message and be informed of your status or follow your instructions Dial 48 plus any of the message codes 01 20 listed on the back of this user guide Tocancel any of these messages you might have selected dial 48 plus 00 Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key You can have multiple programmed message keys PMSG and each one can have a different message code Press any programmed message PMSG button The message is set and the button will light red Press the button again to turn off Pressing another programmed message PMSG button will turn the previous one off and set a different programmed message 34 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset CONVENIENCE FEATURES DO NOT DISTURB Use this feature when you want to block calls to your keyset While on hook press the DND key or dial 401 The DND key lights steady red to remind you of this mode Tocancel DND press the DND key again or dial 400 The DND light turns off You can make calls wh
99. program HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press TRSF and then dial 106 201 SPEED NAME Display shows 00 23 Table of Contents System Admin 2 Dial the station number e g 205 OR 205 SPEED NAME press UP or DOWN to select the station 00 and press the right soft key to move the cursor 3 If the selected station has no speed dial bins this display will be shown and a new station may be selected 205 SPEED DIAL SPDBLK NOT EXIST 4 Dial the speed dial location e g 05 OR 205 SPEED NAME use UP or DOWN to scroll through the ig location numbers and use the right soft key to move the cursor OR press the left soft key to return to step 2 above 5 Enter the name using the procedure in Program Station Names and press the right soft key to return to step 2 OR press the left soft key to return to step 3 205 SPEED NAME 01 SAM SMITH 6 Press the F key to access Program Personal Speed Dial Numbers for Other Stations OR press TRSF to store and exit programming OR press SPK to store and advance to the next program CREATE PROGRAMMED STATION MESSAGES The programmed station message feature lets you set a message at your phone to notify users with Display Phones that you may be out of town This way when Display Phone users call their display will show OUT OF TOWN and they will know why you do not answer The OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 and OfficeServ
100. receive a busy signal but you do not want to wait for a callback MANUAL CAMP ON Press the CAMP button or dial 45 Thecalled station will receive off hook ring tone repeated every few seconds and its first available CALL button will flash green to indicate your call is wait ing Wait for the called party to answer The called station must release its first call or place it on hold before answer ing your camp on NOTES 1 If you receive No More Calls tone that station has no available button to accept your call Hang up or leave a message 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing AUTO CAMP ON When you want to automatically camp on to a busy station without pressing the camp on button every time you call a busy station you can set your phone for auto camp on e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 081 to turn on auto camp on or 080 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection 7 CALL PROCESSING e Ifyou want to call a specific operator dial that person s extension number NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the hand TEM HOLD set or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing When you are connected to any call press HOLD The call will flash green at your keyset If this call appears on a line button at other keysets it will flash red at th
101. set during a transferred call CLI display options are the following 0 NO DISPLAY No CLI data will be displayed 1 NUMBER FIRST The CLI number received from the Central Office will be displayed first 2 NAME FIRST The CLI name received from the Central Office will be displayed first Caller ID display options are the following 0 NO DISPLAY No CID data will be displayed 1 NUMBER FIRST The CID number received from the Central Office will be displayed first 2 NAME FIRST The CID name received from the Central Office will be displayed first ANI display options are the following 0 NO DISPLAY No ANI data will be displayed 1 NUMBER FIRST The ANI number received from the Central Office will be displayed first 2 NAME FIRST Since there is no name sent by the Central Office The only time you will receive a name is when your service company has programmed a name to be associated with the number otherwise your display will read no ANI name ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press the transfer key followed by 119 201 CID DISP Display shows NUMBER FIRST 1 23 OfficeServ 7100 TECHNICAL MANUAL 2 Dial 0 or 1 to select CID or ANI OR Press UP or DOWN to select CID or ANI and press the right soft key 3 Dial display option 0 1 or 2 e g 2 OR Press UP or DOWN to select option 4 Press the transfer key to store and exit 1 24 USER INSTRUCTIONS PART 1 APRIL 2007 201 ANI DISP NUMBER FIRST 201 CID DISP NAM
102. the ANS RLS key to be connected to the calling station Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS RLS key See Ring Preference under Customizing Your Keyset VOICE ANNOUNCE MODE When another station calls you your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and you will hear the caller s announcement e Press ANS RLS to turn on the microphone and speak handsfree OR lift the handset to reply e Tofinish the call replace the handset or press the ANS RLS key NOTE In order for C O calls to be answered handsfree AUTO ANS CO must be set ON AUTO ANSWER MODE When another station calls you your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and then automatically answer the call Your microphone and speaker are turned and you can speak handsfree For privacy use the handset Tofinish the call replace the handset or press the ANS RLS key NOTE In order for C O calls to be answered handsfree AUTO ANS CO must be set ON 16 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset BUSY STATION CALLBACK When you call another station and receive a busy signal e Press the key if programmed or dial 44 When the busy station becomes free your keyset will ring Lift the handset or press ANS RLS to call the now idle station NOTES 1 Acallback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds If you have set a callback your CBK key will light 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you
103. the RLS portion of the ANS RLS button An ANS RLS button may be assigned to the station as a programmable button NAVIGATION BUTTON CANCEL BUTTON This button is used to erase any characters or numbers The DS 5000 keysets incorporate a NAVIGATION button This button is designed to entered by the dial pad or to move to the previous screen assist the user in activating and using various station features more easily These features include FEATURE ACCESS CODES Outgoing Logs This user guide is written based on the default access code for using system fea Incoming Logs tures If the system numbering plan has been changed some of the access codes Speed Dial may not be correct Your installing company can inform you of the correct codes Directory Dial Forward Set Alarm Reminder With the NAVIGATION button the station user is no longer required to enter sta tion level programming to activate these frequently used features A few button presses and these features are activated The NAVIGATION button is divided into separate feature buttons These buttons are described below MENU BUTTON This button displays the station feature main menu so that the users can easily utilize various settings and helpful functions 5 5 5 The system provides several tones to assist you Some of these tones are already familiar to you Intercom Dial Tone A steady tone that indicates you can begin dialing Ringback
104. the Week Specific Day Time Exit ACCESS MANAGER RU The Access Manager allows the subscriber to set a number of options for when where and how and or if the Samsung Voicemail contacts you when a caller dials your extension number All of the options are toggled on off based on their cur rent status when you access them 77 Note ALL Access Manager options MUST be individually allowed by the System Administrator for each Subscriber They are 1 Follow Me Allows the subscriber to enter an alternate location and set how long the new destination Designated Location will be active This number may be an internal or external number This is useful if you are frequently traveling or changing the number where you can be reached When Follow Me is activated the transfer will be supervised and confirmed This means that if the call is not answered or if rejected by the Subscriber at the designated location it will be recalled to the Subscriber s mailbox 3 Call Blocking When this feature is active callers will not be transferred to your extension they will hear your blocked greeting if recorded and will go directly to your mailbox if they do not select any or are not offered any other options 4 CallForwarding Unlike Follow Me where the subscriber wants to take their calls at an alter nate location this feature allows the subscriber to pass control of his calls to another Subscriber The Forwarded To S
105. the announcement on the speaker if you are talking on the handset If you are using the speakerphone the announcement will always be heard through the speaker To make an off hook voice announcement Dialthe extension number or press the DSS button When you receive a busy signal press the OHVA button After the attention tone begin speaking Finish the call by replacing the handset Press the flashing CALL button on your keyset This will place the original party on hold and allow you to talk to the announcing party Toreturn to your first party press the button corresponding to your original call This will disconnect the OHVA call 39 NOTES 1 When you are voice announcing to a station close to you use the handset to avoid an echo effect 2 You cannot off hook voice announce to single line telephones OHVA BLOCK Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Block BLOCK button Pressing this button will prevent anyone from making an OHVA to you until you press the button again and cancel the blocking OHVA REJECT Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Reject REJECT button Pressing this button while receiving an OHVA call will disconnect the voice announcing party and return you to your original call IN GROUP OUT OF GROUP If your keyset is assigned to a station ring group you can remove your keyset from the group and then put it back in While you are out of the group you can receive calls
106. the feature access codes Sometimes due to programming requirements these codes may be changed If you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book please contact your installation and service company to determine the correct code THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW USER ORIENTATION The DS Series keysets incorporate buttons or keys that are used to access or acti vate the many features of your office phone system The DS 5021D keysets incor porate 21 programmable buttons These 21 buttons are arranged in three rows of seven across the face of the keyset Any of the system features or functions can be programmed to these buttons The three buttons above the top row of programmable buttons are soft keys These buttons assist in the use of the system features and functions Lines from the telephone company are C O lines Calls on these lines are referred to as outside calls Your system can have individual C O line keys or lines may be assigned to groups When they are in a group you access a line by dialing an access code or pressing a route button For example dial 9 or press a LOCAL but ton to get a local outside line If Least Cost Routing is used pressing the LCR but ton will automatically select a preprogrammed C O line according to what digits are dialed Each line in the system is numbered beginning with 701 then 702 703 etc Direct Station Selection DSS buttons are programmed to ring speci
107. the greeting again or exit without saving the greeting Note If you record only the greeting assigned to the No Answer Call Coverage Condition then that greeting will play to callers for all Call Coverage Conditions No Answer Busy Blocked Night and Rejected Caller In this case the salutation part of the greeting should be very general Edit Mailbox Greeting Used whenever a caller reaches your mailbox or if you have not recorded any of the Call Coverage greetings The way a caller is transferred to your mailbox greeting directly is by another subscriber transferring the caller to your mail box using the VT Voicemail Transfer key This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Mailbox Greeting Option feature Example Hi this is John Smith Please leave a message will call you as soon as can Note This greeting will only play if none of the 5 personal greetings has played to the caller A common usage for this Greeting is when another Subscriber is talking with a caller and uses the VT key on their phone to trans fer the caller directly to your Mailbox MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION The Mailbox Administration menu is used to turn on and off your pager notifica tion message alert options and other message control features 1 70 Message Alert When this function is activated the Samsung Voicemail will call any outside or inside telephone number after each message is left
108. them 65 Note ALL Access Manager options MUST be individually allowed the System Administrator for each Subscriber They are 1 Follow Me Allows the subscriber to enter an alternate location and set how long the new destination Designated Location will be active This number may be an internal or external number This is useful if you are frequently traveling or changing the number where you can be reached When Follow Me is activated the transfer will be supervised and confirmed This means that if the call is not answered or if rejected by the Subscriber at the designated location it will be recalled to the Subscriber s mailbox 3 Call Blocking When this feature is active callers will not be transferred to your extension they will hear your blocked greeting if recorded and will go directly to your mailbox if they do not select any or are not offered any other options 4 CallForwarding Unlike Follow Me where the subscriber wants to take their calls at an alter nate location this feature allows the subscriber to pass control of his calls to another Subscriber The Forwarded To Subscriber will now be in control of the caller and the caller will NOT return to originating Subscriber s Mailbox If the Forwarded To Subscriber does not answer the caller it will now follow what ever the Forwarded To Subscriber has set up for their call conditions The Caller will hear Forwarding to Subscriber before ac
109. to be re ASK THEM TO HOLD vealed to you This type of call can be stopped at the tele TMSG 03 SEND phone company by dialing an access code on your outside lines This will redirect these PRIVATE calls to an announce ACRI TO Een Wait for reply ment that states that you do not wish to receive calls that TMSG had Caller ID blocked The code to block these calls can V usually be found in the front section of the telephone direc tory 2524 OUT OF AREA The caller is calling from an area that cannot provide Caller ID information for example international calls or he she is calling from a type of circuit that cannot provide Caller ID information for example some outbound WATS lines PAYPHONE The caller is calling from a coin operated telephone The telephone company will send this information as there are no directory listings for pay phones The number will be de livered as usual INVALID CID INFO This is a message that will be displayed when CID informa tion is sent on the line but was somehow corrupted NOCID RECEIVED This is a message that will be displayed when there was no CID information sent on the line 52 53 NO CID DSP Caller ID Digital Signal Processors CIDDSP s are resources in the OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 and OfficeServ 7000 Series systems required for receiving CID data If there are no CIDDSP s available at the time a call comes in this is the message you wi
110. to receive dial tone OR press an idle outside line button line group button or dial a line access code to receive dial tone through the speaker OR press SPEAKER receive intercom dial tone and dial a line access code the telephone number Finish the call by replacing the handset NOTE You will receive No More Calls tone when you attempt to make a call and there is no button available for that line f Least Cost Routing is enabled on your phone system this button may be labeled LCR or accessed by dialing an access code usually 9 fyour system is programmed to require an authorization code before making a call dial k plus a valid code before selecting a C O line f your system is programmed to require an account code before making call press the ACC button or dial 47 plus a valid bin number press the ACC button again and then select a C O line See Account Codes for more information For more information on authorization and account codes see your system administrator NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing ANSWERING AN OUTSIDE CALL Liftthe handset and you are automatically connected to the ringing call See Ring Preference under Customizing Your Keyset OR press the FLASHING CALL button to automatically answer on the speakerphone NOTE If a call is flashing at your keyset but not ringin
111. to your extension forwarded to the extension where you are now Dial 606 plus your extension number e Receive confirmation tone and hang up If you want a specific extension s calls forwarded to your phone Remote Call Forward Dial 606 plus the desired extension number Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing FORWARD DND To forward your phone when you activate DND Dial 605 plus the extension number or group number Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing CALL FORWARD OPTIONS A display keyset may review or change call forward options and destinations Call forward access can be done via the keypad or by accessing the keyset display fea tures To review or change call forward options Press TRANSFER 102 The display will indicate the current call forward condition and destination OR Show 0 FORWARD CANCEL to indicate no forward is set 21 Dial 0 to cancel current condition OR Dial 1 5 to select the forward type OR Press UP or DOWN to select the forward type Press the right soft key to move the cursor Dialthe destination number e 9 202 OR Press UP or DOWN to select the destination Press the right soft key to move the curso
112. tone Hang up The MESSAGE key on the called station will light Standard tele phones receive special dial tone as a message indication or a lit message lamp if the phone is equipped with one and they are connected to an BMWSLI card or a 16MWSLI card on the system NOTES 1 Astation can have up to five message indications 2 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing CANCELING MESSAGES To cancel a message indication that you left at another station dial 42 plus the extension number of the station at which you left a message To cancel all message indications left at your keyset dial 42 plus your extension Your MESSAGE light will go out NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing 55 5 Press the MESSAGE key or dial 43 first station that left a message will be called automatically If that station does not answer your MESSAGE light will stay on Repeat until all messages have been returned in the order received 33 Your MESSAGE light will turn off when all messages have been returned NOTES 1 Display keyset users can view message indications and return them in any order See Viewing Message Indications under Display Features 2 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or
113. tones off or 041 to turn tones on Press TRANSFER to store your selection REJOINING A PAGE This feature allows you to hear the remaining portion of an ongoing internal page after you return your keyset to idle To enable this feature e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Dial 051 to turn this feature on or 050 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection RING PREFERENCE This feature automatically answers ringing calls when you lift the handset or press the SEND button This method will always answer calls in the order they arrived at your keyset When you turn ring preference off you must press the flashing button to answer a call allowing you to answer calls in the order you choose e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 061 to turn ring preference on or 060 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection 40 Table of Contents DS 5000 AUTO ANSWER CO CALLS This option will allow CO calls that directly ring your phone to auto answer When a CO call arrives at your station and this option set for ON your phone will sound two beeps the same as when a screened transfer is completed and you will be connected to the CO call In order for this option to work the station must also be programmed for auto answer see SET ANSWER MODE e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 151 to turn Auto Answer on or 150 to turn it off P
114. version information 2 Network Info Displays network mode IP address of phone network and gateway information 3 Netmask 4 Gateway Note that items 2 to 4 are only displayed when setting Manual IP NETWORK SETUP This menu allows you to individually setup the same parameters found in the Easy Wizard LOAD amp UPGRADE SETUP 1 Upgrade TFTP Server The IP address of the TFTP server containing the ITP software 2 Upgrade Start Starts the ITP software upgrade process SYSTEM SERVER SETUP 1 Server IP Address The IP address 2 Server ID The ID assigned to your ITP see your phone administrator for this information 3 Server Pass The password assigned to your ITP see your phone adminis trator for this information 6 FACTORY RESET This option resets ITP to factory default settings 7 REBOOT This option reboots the ITP NAVIGATING THE MENUS When programming within various menu options information can be entered via the dial pad keys using 0 9 and dial keys as well as utilizing the navigation button assembly The button used for editing and their features are summarized below BUTTON FEATURES Left and Right To move a cursor highlighted area or to erase what is entered MCSE save the current setting and end programming Ends cancel the current programming and return to the Main Menu
115. volume of the recording There are two levels of volume during playback Dialing this code will tog gle between the two levels Pause or resume during message playback Fast forward the message 5 seconds 63 99 Change playback speed of the recording There are two levels of speed during playback Dialing this code will toggle between the two speeds 0 Play options Pressing this key will play all the menu options available to you from this point 00 Hear the time and date and sender s information of the message you just heard Sender information is not available on outside calls Move to the next message This does not Save Discard the current mes sage it is retained as new Scan Plays first 7 seconds of a message then skips to next message This is similar to the scan button on a radio It will allow you to find a specific mes sage quickly To stop scanning press 1 Cancel and return to previous menu GROUP NEW OR OLD MESSAGES Messages can be grouped as either Reminders press 3 or Messages from a spe cific sender press 9 Additionally you can press and hear a summary of your mailbox contents a Number of messages b Number of reminders c Number of urgent messages d Number of messages needing a callback e Number of private messages f Number of fax messages RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE This option is used to send a message to another subscriber The steps are simple
116. you have Automatic Hold turned off you must finish the existing call or place it on hold before inquiring 2 Ifyou inquire about an outgoing call you will receive a call no longer avail able display REVIEWING PAST CALLER ID CALLS This feature allows you to review CID information for calls sent to your keyset This list can contain 10 50 calls in a last in first out basis The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your keyset but that you did not answer missed calls When reviewing this list you can press one button to dial the person back The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number access the CID infor mation stored in your REVIEW list e Press the REVIEW button OR Press the CID button and then press the REVIEW button 59 Ifyou have entries your review list the most recent call will be shown first e You can now CLEAR this entry OR Use NND to view more information about this call OR Press DIAL to call this person back OR Press SCROLL and then press STORE to save this number in a personal speed dial bin NOTES 1 Each keyset defaults with ten review bins Please see your system administra tor to determine the number of bins assigned to your keyset 2 Your system must have LCR correctly programmed to allow you to DIAL num bers from the review list or to STORE entries from the review list 60 Table of Contents ITP 5121D SPECIAL APPLICATION MENU Below are instructi
117. you that you can join a conversation Press the line button that he she has indicated OR e Dial the C O line number that he she has indicated 28 Table of Contents ITP 5121D DIALING FEATURES All DIALING FEATURES instructions are written to support Overlap Dialing mode This is the technical name for dialing from a telephone as it has been for many years recent years the cell phone industry has changed the cell phones to use Enblock Dialing With this dialing mode all the digits are dialed and then sent to the carrier after pressing the SEND key Please check your telephone setup to con firm what dialing mode is used SPEED DIALING You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system wide speed dial list of numbers 500 999 or from your personal list of numbers 00 49 Your system may be set for 950 system wide numbers If so the system speed dial access codes are 050 999 and the station speed dial codes are 000 049 e With the handset on hook press the MEMORY button or dial 16 Dial the desired speed dial number The telephone number is automatically dialed for you NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial list A station may be assigned up to fifty numbers 00 49 See your sy
118. your password Simply enter your pass word and you will now be logged in 75 76 Setting Up Message Alert From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 1 for Message Alert There 4 options available to you Press 1 to toggle message alert on and off Press 2 to set the schedule when you would like to be notified Press 3 to be notified on urgent messages only Press 4 to set the destination phone number Pager Notification When this function is activated the Samsung Voicemail will call your beeper service and notify you after each message is left in your voice mailbox From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 2 for pager notification There 4 options available to you Press 1 to toggle pager notification on and off Press 2 to set the schedule when you would like to be paged Press 3 to be notified on urgent messages only Press 4 to set the pager phone number Undelete When this function is activated the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to undelete any messages that you have recently deleted up to the pro grammed Daily Maintenance Time which is set to 3 a m by Default the following morning From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 3 for Deleted Messages Deleted voicemail messages are temporarily stored in memory until 3 a m the following day Se
119. 1 CALL1 2 Dial the station number e g 205 OR use 205 KEY EXTEND UP or DOWN to scroll through the station 01 CALL1 numbers and press the right soft key to move the cursor 3 Enter the key number e g 18 OR use 205 KEY EXTEND UP and DOWN to scroll through the keys 18 DS and use the right soft key to move the cursor OR press the key to be programmed 4 Dial the extender according to the list above and the system will display your selection If there are no more entries press the left soft key to return to step 2 5 Press TRSF to store and exit programming 205 KEY EXTEND OR press SPK to store and advance to the 18 DS207 next program 28 PROGRAMMING ACCOUNT CODES This program is used to add or change account code entries PROGRAM KEYS KEYPAD Used to enter the account code allowable digits 0 9 UP amp DOWN Used to select entry number FLASH amp TRSF Used to view and change only the used entries SPK RLS Used to clear data Open customer programming and follow the instructions below ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press TRSF and then dial 708 ACCOUNT CODE Display shows 001 2 Dial the account code entry e 9 005 ACCOUNT CODE OR press UP or DOWN to select the 005 entry number and press the right soft key to move the cursor 3 Enter the account code via the dial pad ACCOUNT CODE e g 1234 maximum of 12 digits and 005 123456789012 press the right soft key to move the cursor back to step 2 4 P
120. 36 12 37 13 38 14 39 15 40 16 41 17 42 18 43 19 44 20 45 21 46 22 47 23 48 24 49 78 79 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset NOTES NOTES NOTES Tobe of Contents STD Telephone TABLE OF CONTENTS STANDARD TELEPHONE ABOUT THIS BOOK 1 USER GUIDE THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW 2 3 OUTSIDE CALLS Making Outside Callisti oai Qut dtr sae cp 4 for Outside Call cicius enter to p 4 5 Ciis ti atts tessile td 4 OfficeServ 1 00 OfficeServ 500 4 5 sy Line Queuing With 5 OfficeServ 7000 Series INTERCOM CALLS Calling 6 Pussy SN E E 7 0 6 Bus Staton ccd canara 7 7 6 Busy 6 Calling 7 2007 CALL PROCESSING Hie elm Rl RET 8 0 NR 9 Tratister with Camp Onu edes tacta tace atta 9 Transfer Cancel dera n 9 9 Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in Col WANING ianuas cou 10 this guide for any reason Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior notice to changes 0 0 and manufacturing Settin
121. 5 Seconds Menu Options 8 Pause Resume 99 Change Record Playback 2 51 00 0 NOTE All options shown MAY NOT be authorized If option is not available please speak to your system administrator 72 73 GETTING STARTED Using your new Samsung Voicemail Subscriber Services is as simple as following a few simple spoken instructions First time users should read this section as a tutorial You should start with the following steps Access your Subscriber Services Menu You already know how to do this From the Subscriber Services Menu Record a Primary No Answer Personal Greeting Dial 5 1 Record a Mailbox Greeting Dial 5 7 Change your access code Password Dial 7 1 Record your name Dial 7 2 Enter your directory name Dial 7 3 After you have completed the steps above your Subscriber Services are set up and ready to use LISTEN TO YOUR MESSAGES If there are new messages in your mailbox your VMMSG key will be lit Call the Samsung Voicemail by pressing this key and when prompted enter your pass word You will then be at the Subscriber Services Menu Select 1 to listen to new messages or 3 to listen to saved messages Note After you enter your password if Autoplay of New Messages is enabled and you have new messages the SVMi E Series will begin to play them automatically A subscriber can control this feature From the Subscriber Service
122. 66 above except you do not need to dial the desired group number See your installation company for the assigned access code MY GROUP PICKUP PRIVACY RELEASE This feature will allow another station to join in our conversation by releasing pri vacy on the from your phone To Release Privacy While you are talking on a C O line and you wish to have other internal parties or up to three join the conversation Press the PRB button the PRB indicator will be steady Inform the other party that he she may now join the conversation After the other party or parties has joined the conversation and you wish to return privacy to the line so that no one else can join the conversation press the PRB button a second time the PRB button LED will be off To Join a Non Private Conversation When someone has informed you that you can join a conversation Press the line button that he she has indicated OR Dialthe C O line number that he she has indicated 30 Table of Contents ITP 5112L DIALING FEATURES All DIALING FEATURES instructions are written to support Overlap Dialing mode This is the technical name for dialing from a telephone as it has been for many years In recent years the cell phone industry has changed the cell phones to use Enblock Dialing With this dialing mode all the digits are dialed and then sent to the carrier after pressing the SEND key Please check your telephone setup to con firm w
123. 70 44 Headset 44 pop 45 Key Confirmation TONE t 45 REJOINING a Page 45 Rete 45 Auto Snswel CC Calls 46 Display Speed Dial NaMe ausi eias accicasa coin titii tees aa scere sla 46 46 46 47 DISPLAY FEATURES Interactive Display IS 48 48 Call LOG TT 49 Dial 49 Call Progress 50 Display dic coa ci 50 Call Duration 50 Auto TIME 50 0 50 Viewing Message 05 51 Alarm Reminder Massages 51 52 Personal Speed Dial Malfibs 52 SANON LIAN GS cro opa esistere eite evt ere 52 Managing Key ASSIGNMENTS 53 0 53 Backspace witi EOR ettet resection eroe 53 MENT EE e uacua A 54 55 56 60 0 57 60 SPECIAL APPLICATION MENU
124. 7000 systems allow 15 mes sages to be programmed in the system list in MMC 715 and each station can pro gram 5 messages individually PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Select the message number 24 KEYPAD Used to enter characters HOLD Press to clear entry Open customer programming and follow the instructions below ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press TRSF and then dial 715 Display shows the first message PGM MESSAGE 01 GIVE ME THE CALL 2 Dial in the message number e g 11 OR press UP or DOWN to scroll through the messages and press the right soft key to move the cursor PGM MESSAGE 16 EMPTY MESSAGE 3 Enter in the message using the procedure in Program Station Names and press the right soft key to return to step 2 above PGM MESSAGE 16 IN THE SHOWROOM 4 Press TRSF to store and exit programming OR press SPK to store and advance to the next program SET ALARM APPOINTMENT REMINDER WITH MESSAGE Keyset users can set their own alarms but standard telephone users cannot The system administrator can set alarm appointment reminders for other stations in the system PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Scroll through extensions HOLD Press to clear data KEYPAD Used to enter data Open customer programming and follow the instructions below ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press TRSF and then dial 116 201 ALM REM 1 Display shows HHMM NOTSET 25 Table of Contents System Admin Dial the station number e g 205
125. 9 Personal Speed Dial 135 49 49 Managing 08 50 0 Backspace With 0 0 50 Text aininn ie 51 52 C ller D cobi t ubi cte soeben dati rd cota ced 53 57 ANI cna cca cete iier eco enar coit rc crc dnce 54 57 Table of Contents 51075 SAMSUNG Voicemail s Accessing your Subscriber Services Menu Diagram Getting Starte RI RR Listen to your Messages Subscriber Services Menu Listening to Old or New Messages Group Neworold Messages ssa colto tides tii Record Seded a Messag accade iit oii cash besa o trc acted Atcess d Rea Chu occa da iiaa Personal ansssstecaumaizsmaas ABOUT THIS BOOK Mailbox Samsung s new OfficeServ Technology keyset model 51075 is part of the Personal Administration OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 and OfficeServ 7000 Series noi iaceo The ITP 51075 IP keyset represents a new concept of Internet phone in that it uses SNORO cia a nd
126. ADMINISTRATION 8 PAUSE RESUME 0 Table of Contents 51075 PLAY MENU OPTIONS EXIT TO AUTO ATTENDANT PERSONAL SERVICES LISTENING OLD OR NEW MESSAGES 55 77 Play replay the message you just heard Play the previous message Save the message you just heard and listen to the next message Delete the message you just heard and listen to the next message Reply to the message This will allow you to leave a message in the mailbox of the sender if the sender has a mailbox on this system Return the call directly to the telephone number that left the message This will work for internal and external callers but Caller ID service is need ed to use this feature on an outside call Deliver a fax copy This will allow you to receive attached faxmail document s Faxmail docu ments can be delivered to any fax machine of your choice as long as out calling is authorized You can also have faxmail messages automatically delivered to the fax machine of your choice Forward the message and saves a copy The subscriber can be selected by dialing their mailbox number nnn using the directory service or you may also add comments and leave it as a memo to yourself The Send and Copy Service option 6 allows a user to send copies of a mes sage to multiple recipients easily A different introduction message may be left for each recipient Rewind the message 5 seconds Change playback
127. AM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll and move cursor KEYPAD Used to enter characters HOLD Press to clear entry Open customer programming and follow the instructions below ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press TRSF and then dial 404 Display shows 701 TRUNK NAME 2 Dial trunk e g 704 OR press UP or DOWN to select trunk and press the right soft key to move the cursor 704 TRUNK NAME 3 Enter the trunk name using the procedure 704 TRUNK NAME in Program Station Names and press the SAMSUNG right soft key to return to step 2 4 Press TRSF to store and exit programming OR press SPK to store and advance to the next program PROGRAM STATION GROUP NAMES This program is used to assign a character name or identification for each station group You may assign a name 11 characters long PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll and move cursor KEYPAD Used to enter characters HOLD Press to clear entry Open customer programming and follow the instructions below ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press TRSF and then dial 602 Display shows the first group 501 SGR NAME 2 Dial the group number e g 505 OR press the UP or DOWN key to make a selection and press the left or right soft key to move the cursor 505 SGR NAME 3 Enter the name using the method 505 SGR NAME in Program Station Names SAMSUNG 4 Press the left or right soft key to return to step 2 OR press TRSF to store and exit programming OR press
128. Blocked are the most com monly used Call Conditions This guide can be used by Subscribers from within the office or from telephones outside the office The basic operation is the same but the access method will be different See the Subscriber Services Menu Diagram for more details Note that some features and prompts detailed here may not be available to all Subscribers See your System Administrator if you have questions about feature availability 58 Table of Contents ITP 5107S ACCESSING YOUR MAILBOX Also known as Subscriber Services Menu Inside Callers Subscriber logging in from their Desk e Dial the voicemail access number or press the key assigned to ring voicemail VMMSG Enter your personal password when prompted the default password is 0000 Outside Callers Subscribers calling from Cell Phones or outside of the office environment Dial the phone number that will be answered by the voicemail The main greeting will answer e At the main greeting dial plus your Subscriber or mailbox number Subscriber and Mailbox numbers will usually match your extension number Enter your personal password when prompted the default password is 0000 Access your Subscriber Services or Mailbox from a Station other than your Own or checking a mailbox associated with a different station e Press the VMMSG key or dial the voicemail group number You will be prompted to enter a password Press
129. CALLI NG OTH ER STATIONS e Ifyou want to call a specific operator dial that person s extension number Lift the handset Dial the extension number or group number Wait for the party to answer f you hear several brief tone bursts instead of ringback tone the station you called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer Begin speaking immediately after the tone Finish the call by replacing the handset ANSWERING INTERCOM CALLS Lift the handset and you are automatically connected to the ringing call Finish the call by replacing the handset BUSY STATION CALLBACK When you call another station and you receive a busy signal Hookflash receive transfer tone dial 44 receive transfer tone and hang up When the busy station becomes free your telephone will ring Lift the handset to automatically call the now idle station NOTE You have 30 seconds to answer or the callback will be canceled BUSY STATION CAMP ON When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to wait for a callback Hookflash receive transfer tone dial 45 The called station will receive off hook ring or camp on tone You will hear ringback tone e Wait for the called party to answer The called station must release its first call or put it on hold before answering your camp on CALL PROCESSING HOLDING CALLS When you are connected to any call hookflash receive transfer tone and dia
130. COUNT CODES When equipped with optional equipment your system will allow calls to be charged to a specific account During any outside call press the account ACC button Enterthe 3 digit account code bin number when prompted OR If your button has an extender of 000 enter the account code maximum 12 characters including and 4 and press 000 again OR If your button has an extender other than 000 001 999 account code con tained in that bin will automatically be entered for your LOCKING YOUR KEYSET You can lock your keyset to control misuse of your phone while you are away You can unlock it when you return Your default station passcode is 1234 Ue LOCKED eat LOCKED Au CALLS Hold Button LED Flashes Hold Button LED Solid Make outside calls YES Receive outside calls YES YES NO Make intercom calls YES YES NO Receive intercom calls YES YES NO 35 e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 100 Dial your four digit station passcode 1 to locking outgoing 2 for locked all calls or 0 to unlock Press TRANSFER to store your selection MANUAL SIGNALLING Use this feature when you want to send a brief 500ms ring burst to another sta tion regardless of the status of your phone on hook off hook handsfree DND or ringing To send a signal to another station Press the Manual Signalling MS button You may press the MS button r
131. Calls PS scutes cls bet cada b 5 Busy Station scc eter tds A Calling Yo System ODaFatOFamsdstastieuzeteti ons etriteristeet ioo cos teft 20 CALL PROCESSING Holding 5 21 22 5 22 23 Transfer 23 23 Cal 23 Conference Calls i 25 26 27 27 8 0 DIALING FEATURES Spese Sh i dik i 29 Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers 29 30 One Touch Speed 30 Lost Number Redial 30 With Redial cesa 31 Save Number With 31 Chaim Di Ius RR Automate Badio RE aes chants 31 Pulse to Tone Change sanidad dau ded de andan paa p 32 7 32 PAGING AND MESSAGING Making Mal TR 33 Making an External Page ssa anaana uota onda 33 bz RES 33 Meet Me 0 ata rasa tot sicco tb ctun ceti ten dette 34 Call Park ang Pag asit dicar tcrra nra ou dad 34 Messages Set ang Cancel aan
132. D service is need ed to use this feature on an outside call Deliver a fax copy This will allow you to receive attached faxmail document s Faxmail docu ments can be delivered to any fax machine of your choice as long as out calling is authorized You can also have faxmail messages automatically delivered to the fax machine of your choice Forward the message and saves a copy The subscriber can be selected by dialing their mailbox number nnn using the directory service or you may also add comments and leave it as a memo to yourself The Send and Copy Service option 6 allows a user to send copies of a mes sage to multiple recipients easily A different introduction message may be left for each recipient Rewind the message 5 seconds Change playback volume of the recording There are two levels of volume during playback Dialing this code will tog gle between the two levels Pause or resume during message playback Fast forward the message 5 seconds Table of Contents iDCS Keyset 99 Change playback speed of the recording There are two levels of speed during playback Dialing this code will toggle between the two speeds 0 Play options Pressing this key will play all the menu options available to you from this point 00 Hear the time and date and sender s information of the message you just heard Sender information is not available on outside calls Move to the next message This does not Sav
133. E If a call is flashing at your keyset but not ringing you must press the flash ing button to answer UNIVERSAL ANSWER Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device To answer calls ringing this device dial 67 or press the UA key This device can operate in any one of the six different ring plans NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before dialing 14 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset RECALL DIAL TONE Press the NEW button to disconnect your existing call wait for dial tone and then make a new call on the same line NOTE If this button does not appear on your keyset the FLASH key may be pro grammed to recall dial tone SENDING A FLASH While on an outside call press the FLASH key to send a flash to the telephone company This is required for some custom calling features or CENTREX use NOTE Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH CALLBACK If you receive a busy signal when you are selecting an outside line this means that the line or group of lines is busy e Press the key if programmed or dial 44 You will hear confirmation tone When the line becomes free the system will call you back Lift the handset or press the ANS RLS key to answer wait for dial tone and dial the telephone number or speed dial number again NOTES 1 Acallback will be canceled if not answered within 30 secon
134. E FIRST Table of Contents Enterprise IP Solutions OfficeServ ITP 5112L User Guide For OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 OfficeServ 7000 Series 04 2007 Copyright 2006 Samsung Telecommunications America All rights reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means graphic electronic or mechanical including recording taping photocopying or information retrieval systems without express written permission of the publisher of this material Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in this guide for any reason Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing may warrant Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide HomePage TableofContents ITP 5112L TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW 2 8 ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET 9 10 initializing the 26 10 IP Setup Mennien 10 11 Navigating the Menus 12 Setting the Networ
135. EDIAL While you are on an outside call listening to a busy signal and you want to redial the same number dialed Press the REDIAL button This will hang up your existing call and manually redial the same number dialed You can repeat this operation for a limited number of attempts NOTE If your keyset is programmed with Call Log Blocks then the Redial will access the call log when pressed SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL To save the number you just dialed for later use press the SNR button before hanging up To redial this saved number at any time press the SNR button or dial 17 The same line will be selected for you NOTES 1 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 2 The saved telephone number is stored in memory until you save another number 3 Redial does not apply to intercom calls CHAIN DIALING You may manually dial additional digits following a speed dial number or chain as many speed dial numbers together as required After the first speed number is dialed press MEMORY again and dial another speed number OR manually dial additional digits following a speed dial num ber AUTOMATIC REDIAL RETRY When you are making an outside call and you receive a busy signal the system can automatically redial the number for you It will automatically redial at a pre programmed interval for up to 15 attempts When you hear a bu
136. ER 5 PERSONAL GREETINGS 6 MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION 8 PAUSE RESUME 63 0 PLAY MENU OPTIONS EXIT TO AUTO ATTENDANT PERSONAL SERVICES LISTENING OLD OR NEW MESSAGES 55 77 64 Play replay the message you just heard Play the previous message Save the message you just heard and listen to the next message Delete the message you just heard and listen to the next message Reply to the message This will allow you to leave a message in the mailbox of the sender if the sender has a mailbox on this system Return the call directly to the telephone number that left the message This will work for internal and external callers but Caller ID service is need ed to use this feature on an outside call Deliver a fax copy This will allow you to receive attached faxmail document s Faxmail docu ments can be delivered to any fax machine of your choice as long as out calling is authorized You can also have faxmail messages automatically delivered to the fax machine of your choice Forward the message and saves a copy The subscriber can be selected by dialing their mailbox number nnn using the directory service or you may also add comments and leave it as a memo to yourself The Send and Copy Service option 6 allows a user to send copies of a mes sage to multiple recipients easily A different introduction message may be left for each recipient Rewind the message 5 seco
137. ER to store your selection SECURE OHVA This option allows you to receive OHVA calls via the speaker while you are on the handset e With you handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Press 131 to turn AUTO CAMP ON on or 130 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection 44 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset DISPLAY FEATURES INTERACTIVE DISPLAY KEYS The three keys below the display are substitutes for dedicated feature keys and ac cess codes Pressing one of these keys has the same effect as pressing a program mable key These keys are called soft keys as their functions are not fixed They change to present you with the best options for that call condition The use of soft keys allows the programmable keys to be used for more DSS and speed dial keys The SCROLL key is used to display options available to the user at a particular time or during a specific procedure Press this key once while in the idle state to view the three main categories available 201 STN NAME CALL OTHER ANS ANSWER Guides you through the options to answer calls OTHER Guides you through features other than making or answering calls CALL Guides you through the options to make a call Select one of the main categories CALL OTHER or ANS ANSWER Press the SCROLL key to display additional options available under each of the three main categories The symbol displayed as the last character on the lower line of the display indic
138. ETUP 5 SYSTEM SERVER SETUP 4 LOAD amp UPGRADE SETUP 6 FACTORY RESET 6 FACTORY RESET 7 REBOOT Once the IP SETUP MENU is displayed you can move to each menu in the Set Up by using the navigation buttons TheUP and DOWN directions buttons the navigation button assembly used to move the highlighted bar up or down to the desired option The LEFT and RIGHT buttons in the navigation button assembly are used to move the highlighted bar left or right to the desired option move to a sub menu and if a menu is at the last line that menu option will be executed e The 0 9 dial buttons are used to directly choose a menu or sub menu options The ENTER button in the navigation button assembly is used when saving a modification The MENU button in the navigation button assembly is used to to display the IP Setup Main Menu The END button in the navigation button assembly is used when canceling or editing the modification or existing programming The CANCEL button in the navigation button assembly is used to go back to the previous screen or to delete the last digit of a displayed option value Table of Contents ITP 5121D MENU STRUCTURE The IP SETUP MENU is configured as follows 1 SYSTEM EASY WIZARD This option will guide you through setting up all required parameters for con necting the ITP keyset to your system 2 SYSTEM INFORMATION 1 Version Info Provides boot rom software DSP an
139. F then you will hear the announcement on the speaker if you are talking on the handset If you are using the speakerphone the announcement will always be heard through the speaker To make an off hook voice announcement Dialthe extension number or press the DSS button When you receive a busy signal press the OHVA button After the attention tone begin speaking Finish the call by replacing the handset Press the flashing CALL button on your keyset This will place the original party on hold and allow you to talk to the announcing party Toreturn to your first party press the button corresponding to your original call This will disconnect the OHVA call 41 NOTES 1 When you are voice announcing to a station close to you use the handset to avoid an echo effect 2 You cannot off hook voice announce to single line telephones OHVA BLOCK Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Block BLOCK button Pressing this button will prevent anyone from making an OHVA to you until you press the button again and cancel the blocking OHVA REJECT Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Reject REJECT button Pressing this button while receiving an OHVA call will disconnect the voice announcing party and return you to your original call IN GROUP OUT OF GROUP If your keyset is assigned to a station ring group you can remove your keyset from the group and then put it back in While you are out of the group yo
140. HOT KEYPAD OFF 2 Dialthe option number from above list e g 4 Press UP or DOWN to select the option and Press the right soft key to move the cursor 201 STN ON OFF HOT KEYPAD ON 3 Press UP or DOWN to select ON or OFF Press the left or right soft key to return to step 2 OR Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF 201 STN ON OFF AUTO HOLD OFF If option 00 from above list is dialed at Step 2 201 STN ON OFF AUTO TIMER OFF If option 01 from above list is dialed at Step 2 201 If option 02 from above list is dialed at STN ON OFF Step 2 HEADSET USE ON If option O3 from above list is dialed at 201 STN ON OFF HOT KEYPAD ON Step 2 OfficeServ 0 USER INSTRUCTIONS TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 APRIL 2007 If option 04 from above list is dialed at 201 STN ON OFF Step 2 KEY TONE ON If option 06 from above list is dialed at 201 STN ON OFF Step 2 RING PREF ON If option 07 from above list is dialed at 201 STN ON OFF Step 2 DISPLAY TIME If option 08 from above list is dialed at 201 STN ON OFF Step 2 AUTO CAMPON If option 10 from above list is dialed at 201 STN ON OFF Step 2 AME PASSCODE 4 Press UP or DOWN to select ON or OFF 201 STN ON OFF Press the left or right soft key to return to HOT KEYPAD ON Step 2 5 Press transfer to store and exit OfficeServ 7100 USER INSTRUCTIONS TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 APRIL 2007 1 13 SELECTING A RING TONE Each keyset user can select one of eight ring fre
141. ION CAMP ON When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to wait for a callback MANUAL CAMP ON Press the CAMP button or dial 45 Thecalled station will receive off hook ring tone repeated every few seconds and its first available CALL button will flash green to indicate your call is wait ing Wait for the called party to answer The called station must release its first call or place it on hold before answer ing your camp on NOTES 1 If you receive No More Calls tone that station has no available button to accept your call Hang up or leave a message 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing AUTO CAMP ON When you want to automatically camp on to a busy station without pressing the camp on button every time you call a busy station you can set your phone for auto camp on e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 081 to turn on auto camp on or 080 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection Table of Contents DS 5000 CALLING YOUR SYSTEM OPERATOR Dial 0 to call your system operator or group of operators e Ifyou want to call a specific operator dial that person s extension number NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the hand set or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing CALL PROCESSING STEM HOLD
142. JOINING A PAGE This feature allows you to hear the remaining portion of an ongoing internal page after you return your keyset to idle To enable this feature e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Dial 051 to turn this feature on or 050 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection From the LCD Press MENU button Scroll to SETUP and press ENTER Scroll to STATION ON OFF and press ENTER OR you dial 6 and immediately enter the option Scroll to PAGE REJOIN press ENTER to change option status Press CANCEL to enter change and return to the Main Configuration Menu press END to return to idle screen RING PREFERENCE This feature automatically answers ringing calls when you lift the handset or press the SEND button This method will always answer calls in the order they arrived at your keyset When you turn ring preference off you must press the flashing button to answer a call allowing you to answer calls in the order you choose 53 e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 061 to turn ring preference on or 060 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection From the LCD Press MENU button Scroll to SETUP option press ENTER Scroll to STATION ON OFF and press ENTER OR you may dial 6 and imme diately enter the option Scroll to RING PREF press ENTER to change option status Press CANCEL to enter chan
143. K TONE 1000 ms ON 3000 ms OFF CONTINUOUS Busy Tone Indicates the station you dialed is busy BUSY TONE 500 ms ON 500 ms OFF CONTINUOUS DND No More Calls Tone Fast busy tone indicates the station you dialed is in the Do Not Disturb mode or cannot receive any more calls DND NO MORE CALLS TONE 250 ms ON 250 ms OFF FOR TEN SECONDS Transfer Conference Tone Indicates your call is being held and you TRANSFER CONF TONE 100 ms ON 100 ms OFF CONTINUOUS D 5 E o 5 e gt 5 D lt Confirmation Tone Very short beeps followed by dial tone indicate you have correctly set or canceled a system feature CONFIRMATION 50 ms 50 ms OFF FOR ONE SECOND programmable Error distinctive two level beeping tone indicates you have done something incorrectly Try again ERROR 50 ms of tone 1 50 ms of tone 2 FORTHREE SECONDS OUTSIDE CALLS MAKING AN OUTSIDE CALL Lift the handset and receive internal dial tone Diala C O line or line group access code Receive outside dial tone and then dial the telephone number Finish the call by replacing the handset If your system is programmed to require an authorization code before making a call Dial and a valid code You will hear confirmation tone followed by dial tone Select a CO line If your system is programmed to require an account code before makin
144. KER button before dialing INTERCOM CALLS OTHER STATIONS Dial the extension number or group number Wait for the party to answer If you hear a brief tone burst instead of ringback tone the station you called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer Begin speaking immediately after the tone Finish the call by replacing the handset or press the END button NOTES 1 If you have a DSS button assigned to an extension or station group you may press this button instead of dialing the number 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing ANSWERING INTERCOM CALLS When your keyset rings simply lift the handset OR press the SEND button to be connected to the calling station To finish the call replace the handset or press the END button See Ring Preference under Customizing Your Keyset VOICE ANNOUNCE MODE When another station calls you your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and you will hear the caller s announcement e Press SEND to turn on the microphone and speak handsfree OR lift the handset to reply To finish the call replace the handset or press the END button NOTE In order for C O calls to be answered handsfree AUTO ANS CO must be set ON AUTO ANSWER MODE When another station calls you your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and then automatically answer the call Yo
145. KEYS UP amp DOWN Select the extension number HOLD Press to reset the passcode to default settings Open customer programming and follow the instructions below ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press TRSF and then dial 202 Display shows CHANGE PASSCODE RING PLAN 0000 CHANGE PASSCODE DISA ALARM 5678 2 Use the UP and DOWN keys to scroll through the different options and press the right soft keys CHANGE PASSCODE RING PLAN 0000 3 Press HOLD to reset the passcode 4 Press TRSF to store and exit programming OR press SPK to store and advance to the next program SET DATE AND TIME DISPLAY Should it ever become necessary to correct the date and time displayed on all of the keysets do so as soon as you notice that they are incorrect Automatic Operating Mode will not work correctly and SMDR records will be of no value when the date and time are not correct The display format is the following W Day of the week Enter 0 for Sunday and 6 for Saturday MM Month Enter 01 for January and 12 for December DD Day of the month Enter a number in the range of 01 31 YY Year Enter the last two digits of the year HH Hours Use the 24 hour clock and enter a number in the range of 00 24 MM Minutes Enter a number in the range of 00 59 11 Table of Contents System Admin Failure to enter the time using the 24 hour clock will cause the date to change at 12 00 P M Open customer programming and follow the instruction
146. LAY Simultaneous display of Caller ID name and number on incoming CO calls on both lines of display keysets is supported on all OfficeServ systems On Transferred CO calls you can decide if you want to see the Caller ID name or Caller ID number in the display Regardless of which one is selected you can press the NND button to view the other pieces of Caller ID information To select the type of Caller ID infor mation you wish to view first e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 119 e 0 for CID options 1 for ANI options or 2 for CLI options e DialO if you do not wish to view CID information 1 to view the NUMBER first or 2 to view the NAME first Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection 54 Table of Contents 51075 VIEWING THE NEXT CALLER ID CALL In the event that you have a call waiting or a camped on call at your keyset you can press the NEXT button to display the Caller ID information associated with the call in queue at your keyset Either the CID name or CID number will show in the display depending on your Name Number selection To view Caller ID information for calls that have been camped on to your keyset press the NEXT button If your keyset does not have a NEXT button press the CID button and then the NEXT soft key SAVING THE CALLER ID NUMBER At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information you may press the SAVE button to save the CID number If your
147. LAY NUMBER DIALED Display keysets begin showing digits as they are dialed They will stay in the dis play until the call duration timer comes on automatically or the TIMER button is pressed If the call duration timer is not used the number dialed will be displayed until the call is released transferred or put on hold CALL DURATION TIMER The system can be set to automatically time outside calls few seconds after you dial a telephone number the timer appears in the display It appears immediately for incoming calls The call timer continues for the duration of the call Call dura tion times are displayed in minutes and seconds If a call lasts longer than 60 min utes the timer restarts You can press the TIMER key to manually begin timing a call Press it again to stop timing If you press it while the automatic timer is on the call duration time is restarted AUTO TIMER Display keyset users may have the timer automatically start when they answer incoming calls or after a short delay on an outgoing call e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Dial 011 to turn the auto timer on or 010 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection TIMER FUNCTION Display keyset users may use this feature as a simple stopwatch When the keyset is idle press the TIMER button to start timing Press the TIMER button again to stop timing Read the elapsed time in the display Liftthe handset an
148. LD The call will flash at the keyset If this call appears on a line button at other keysets it will flash at those keysets also take the caller off hold press that button and the flashing LED will go steady again Resume the conversation OR press the HOLD button The flashing LED will go steady again and you will be connected to the call again Resume the conversation NOTE While on a call pressing a line button route button or flashing CALL button will automatically put your first call on hold and connect you to the new call See Automatic Hold under Customizing Your Keyset EXCLUSIVE HOLD To place an outside call on hold at your phone so that other users cannot get it Press the HOLD button twice The call will flash on your keyset and this line will show a steady indication on other keysets Toretrieve the call press the flashing line button or press the HOLD button a third time NOTE Intercom calls will always be placed on exclusive hold REMOTE HOLD When you wish to place a call on hold at another station e Press TRANSFER and dial the station number or press the appropriate DSS button Press the HOLD button This will place the call on system hold on an available CALL button or Line button at the remote station and return you to dial tone NOTES 1 If the destination station does not have any free CALL buttons or line buttons you will hear No More Calls tone and must return to the other part
149. NAL PAGE To make an announcement through the external paging speakers Lift the handset Dial 55 plus zone number 5 6 7 or 8 OR dial 55 plus 9 to page all exter nal zones After the brief attention tone make the announcement ALL PAGE To page all designated keysets in internal zone 0 and all external zones at the same time Lift the handset and dial 55 plus After the brief attention tone make the announcement MEET ME PAGE ANSWER Make 3 page by dialing 54 plus any zone and instruct the paged person to dial 56 After completing the page hookflash and remain off hook until the paged person dials 56 from any phone The paged person will be automatically connected with you CALL PARK AND PAGE When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his her desk you can park the call and page the requested party e While in conversation hookflash and dial 55 The call is automatically parked at your station Dial the desired page zone and make the announcement Be sure to include your station number for example Mr Smith park 201 RETRIEVING PARKED CALL To retrieve a call that has been parked for you Lift the handset Dial 10 plus the station number that was announced You will connect ed to the parked call SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy signal you can set a message indication at that station
150. ND at the other station This button will light red when the other station is in use To transfer a call to a Boss in DND Press the TRANSFER button followed by the BOSS button Wait for the BOSS to answer to announce the call and hang up to complete the transfer OR e Hang up to complete a blind transfer after pressing the BOSS button EXECUTIVE DIVERT When the executive station is in the DIVERT mode all of his her calls will ring the secretary station Press the DIVERT button to pass a call while ringing 34 Table of Contents DS 5000 To transfer all calls to the Secretary e Press the DIVERT button while the phone is idle The LED will be lit and all calls will ring the secretary The secretary can call the BOSS in the DIVERT mode but all other users will ring the secretary the secretary can override the boss DIVERT GROUP LISTENING When you are engaged on a call and you are using the handset you may want other people to hear the distant party s voice over the speaker Press the LISTEN button to turn on the speaker The microphone is not in use so the distant party does not hear other parties present in your office Press LISTEN again to turn the speaker off and resume private conversation Repeat if necessary NOTE Depending on speaker volume and the acoustics of your office it may be advisable to turn the group listening feature off before hanging up This will elim inate a momentary squeal AC
151. NG A FLASH While on an outside call press the FLASH button to send a flash to the telephone company This is required for some custom calling features or CENTREX use NOTE Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH CALLBACK If you receive a busy signal when you are selecting an outside line this means that the line or group of lines is busy Press the button if programmed or dial 44 You will hear confirmation tone When the line becomes free the system will call you back Liftthehandsetor press the SEND button to answer wait for dial tone and dial the telephone number or speed dial number again NOTES 1 A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds If you have set a callback your CBK button will light 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing CANCELING CALLBACK A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds If you have set a callback your CBK button will light Your phone may have a maximum of five callbacks to lines and or stations set at a time To cancel a callback e Press the button if programmed or dial 44 You will hear confirmation tone While you are listening to confirmation tone press the HOLD button This will cancel the oldest set callback NOTE If the hot keypad feature is turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEA
152. NICAL MANUAL PART 1 APRIL 2007 1 2 LOCKING YOUR KEYSET You can lock your keyset to prevent other people from making or receiving calls while you are away You can unlock it when you return ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press the transfer key followed by 100 201 STN LOCK Display shows PASSCODE 2 Enter your passocde 201 STN LOCK Default is 1234 UNLOCKED 3 Enter 1 for locking outgoing calls Internal 201 STN LOCK calls will still be allowed LOCKED OUTGOING OR 4 Enter 2 for locking all calls Internal and 201 STN LOCK external calls will not be allowed LOCKED ALL CALLS 5 Enter 0 to unlock your phone 201 STN LOCK UNLOCKED 6 Press the transfer key to save and exit 1 3 OfficeServ 7100 USER INSTRUCTIONS TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 APRIL 2007 1 3 CHANGING YOUR PASSCODE Each keyset user can set or change his her individual passcode This passcode is used to lock or unlock keysets for toll restriction override and to access the DISA feature NOTE Default passcodes cannot be used for toll restriction override or for DISA access ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press the transfer key followed by 101 201 PASSCODE Display shows OLD CODE 2 Enter the existing passcode default 1234 201 PASSCODE OLD CODE 3 Enter the new passcode 201 PASSCODE NEW CODE 4 Reenter the new passcode to verify the number 201 PASSCODE If reentered correctly display shows VERIFY SUCCESS 5 Pressthe transfer key to save and ex
153. NLY The alarm is not set The alarm will ring at the programmed time and be canceled automatically 2 DAILY The alarm will ring each day at this time In addition each alarm may be accompanied by a 16 character message that will be displayed while the alarm is ringing NOTE These are the same three alarms described in Alarm Reminder This procedure allows a message to be added A display keyset is necessary to view messages ACTION DISPLAY 201 ALM REM 1 HHMM NOTSET 1 Press the transfer key followed by 116 Display shows 201 ALM REM 1 NOTSET 2 Dial 1 3 to select the alarm e g 2 OR HHMM Press UP or DOWN to select the alarm Press the right soft key to move the cursor 201 ALM REM 2 HHMM 1300 NOTSET 3 Enter the alarm time in 24 hour clock format e g 1300 Display automatically advances to step 4 201 ALM REM HHMM 1300 DAILY 4 Dialthe valid entry from the above list for the alarm type OR Press UP or DOWN to select the alarm type Press the right soft key to move the cursor 201 ALM REM TAKE MEDICATION 5 Enter messages using the method in Programming Your Station s Name Press the right soft key to return to step 2 6 Press the transfer key to store and exit 1 22 OfficeServ 7100 USER INSTRUCTIONS TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 APRIL 2007 1 18 CALLER ID DISPLAY The station user can change the order in which the CLI Caller ID and or ANI information is displayed on an LCD
154. O plus the ring plan passcode four digits and a 0 to cancel the ring plan time override and return to normal operation TEMPORARY RING PLAN CHANGE Press the RP button plus the ring plan passcode four digits and the ring plan 1 6 you wish to set system will remain in that ring plan until the next automat ic start time for the next ring plan goes into effect NOTE This button may also be assigned an extender of one of the six ring plans Example An RP button is given an extender of 3 RP3 and the operation of this button is a push on push off type of operation with the system always returning to ring plan 1 when the key is turned off When the system is operating in ring plan 3 the RP3 button will light steady red and when off the light will also turn off Table of Contents System Admin CALLING THE SYSTEM OPERATOR Any station that dials 0 will ring its assigned operator If tenant service is used each tenant may have a different operator or operator group Calls to the system or tenant operator are easily identified because the CALL key will have a fast flash ing red light Station users will never receive a busy signal when they dial 0 or the operator group number The calls will continue ringing in queue until answered NETWORKING When 2 or more systems are networked a single station or operator group may receive all calls to a single operator Please consult with your service company if required OPERATOR RECALL
155. ORD MMC 110 set to YES you must enter your station password to listen to messages being left This will prevent unauthorized people from listening to messages being left for you If the password option is turned on while a message is being left press the flash ing AME indicator and enter your station password not your Samsung Voicemail password You will then hear the message being left Call Record If you have a call record button assigned to your phone you may press it at any time to record the conversation in progress If you have a display keyset you will also have the soft key options to pause and time the message 87 SHORTCUTS Calling Calling a station that is busy or does not answer you can press to immediately send the call to the called parties mailbox Call Divert to Voicemail While receiving an incoming ringing call dial to immediately send the caller to your personal voicemail box This will override the call forward no answer set ting Direct Messaging DSS To make it easy to leave messages for others in your office without hav ing to dial their extension number first keyset users may simply dial plus a mailbox extension number and leave a message directly If you dial a busy exten sion press to connect directly with the mailbox Self Memo Reminder Pressing will leave a message in your own mailbox This is useful to remind yourself of things to do now or in the fu
156. OWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPK Used to store data and advance to next program HOLD Used to clear previous entry ANS RLS Used to select ALL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press TRSF 315 SET RELOCATION Display shows EXT _ EXT 2 Enter first station number e g 202 SET RELOCATION Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor EXT 202 EXT _ 3 Enter second station number e g 210 SET RELOCATION Press RIGHT soft key to enter data EXT 202 EXT 210 4 Display will return to STEP 1 SET RELOCATION Go to STEP 2 EXT EXT OR press TRSF to store and exit programming 34 Table of Contents System Admin N 5 5 5 2 YSTEM MAINTENANCE S ALARMS zn z z z z z z z z z z The OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 and OfficeServ 7000 systems provide a feature a that self checks for any failures If a failure does occur in the software or hardware 9 9 a fault error will be generated and buffered to an alarm report During an alarm 2 9 9 a state every phone with an assigned SYSTEM ALARM button will ring and cause utton to flash amber one with a display shou e 1 the SYSTEM ALARM button to flash amber A ph th a display should b 9 use
157. OWN to select the forward type Press the right soft key to move the cursor e Dial the destination number 202 OR Press UP or DOWN to select the destination and press the right soft key to move the cursor e Dial 1 to set OR press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO and press TRANSFER to store and exit 29 STATION CALL PICKUP To pick up answer a call ringing at another station lift the handset and dial 65 plus the extension number of the ringing phone If you have a DP key assigned with a station number you only need to press this DP key with the flashing light to answer this ringing station NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing GROUP CALL PICKUP To pick up answer a call ringing in any pickup group lift the handset and dial 66 plus the desired group number 01 20 on the OfficeServ 100 and OfficeServ 7100 01 99 on the OfficeServ 500 M and 01 99 on the OfficeServ 500 L and OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400 Series or press the flashing GROUP PICKUP button if available NOTES 1 A group pickup button can have an extender for a specific pickup group 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing the access code MY GROUP PICKUP If desired a new access code can be assigned to pickup ringing calls in the same pickup group as you are in Like
158. OfficeServ 7100 USER INSTRUCTIONS TECHNICAL MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS APRIL 2007 TABLE OF CONTENTS USER INSTRUCTIONS SECTION PART DESCRIPTION PAGE 1 ENHANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING 1 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 1 2 LOCKING YOUR KEYSET 1 4 1 3 CHANGING YOUR PASSCODE suena iatis 15 1 4 CALL FORWARDING ssecula aeos 1 6 1 5 SETTING YOUR ANSWER MODE haue iate 1 8 1 6 PROGRAMMING YOUR STATION S NAME 1 9 1 7 PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED DIAL LOCATIONS 1 11 1 8 NAMING YOUR PERSONAL SPEED DIAL LOCATIONS 112 1 9 ADDING EXTENDERS KEYS 1 13 1240 CHECKING STATION STATUS iecit 1 14 111 CHANGING YOUR TIME AND DATE DISPLAY 1 15 148 SETTING STATION ON OFF OPTIONS 1 16 118 SELECTING A RING TONE 1 19 ji __ Gee eee 1 20 STATION VOLUME 1 21 116 SETTING A PROGRAMMED MESSAGE 1 28 117 ALARM REMINDER WITH MESSAGE 1 24 10 _ ID DISPLAY eese eee Ee ee ERTS 1 25 2 ITP 5112L USER GUIDE 3 ITP 5121D USER GUIDE 4 ITP 5107S USER GUIDE 5 DS 5000 SERIES USER GUIDE 6 KEYSET USER GUIDE 7 STANDARD TELEPHONE USER GUIDE
159. PORTED ON os 71001 ANI Automatic Number Identification is a feature offered by some telephone service providers that provides the calling party s telephone number This service is only available E amp M Tie Lines on a 1 digital trunk ANI is similar to Caller Identification CID but the format and information of the calling person is differ ent CID uses FSK signalling and ANI uses signalling Usually with ANI a call ing party s identity is the Listed Directory Number LDN unless a separate bill to number has been specified in which case the bill to number will be sent Note that ANI does not provide calling party NAME only the number The phone system can provide calling number to name translation table WHAT IS CLI On ISDN circuits calling party information is called CLI and is supported on both BRI BRI not supported on the OfficeServ 7100 and PRI type circuits On BRI cir cuits the system only supports number delivery and like ANI a name can be attached to the telephone number of frequent callers via the Caller ID translation table On 5ESS and NI2 PRI circuits both name and number support is provided on the OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 and on the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems SELECTING YOUR CALLER ID DISPLAY Simulteneous display of Caller ID and Number on Incoming CO calls on both lines of display keysets is supported on all OfficeServ systems On Transferred CO calls you can decide if you want t
160. ROLL BUTTON UP towards the station display will bring the cursor back towards the Main Screen By scrolling up or down you cause the cursor to move back and forth through the screens in the same manner as the UP DOWN arrows on the top SELECT BUT TONS work NAVIGATION BUTTON The 5112L keysets incorporate a Navigation Button This button is designed to assist the user in activating and using various station features more easily These features include Outgoing Call Log Incoming Call Log Speed Number Search Call Forward Assign and Alarm Assign With the NAVIGATION BUTTON the station user is no longer required to enter station level programming to activate these frequently used features A few but ton presses and these features are activated The NAVIGATION BUTTON is divided into separate feature buttons These but tons are described below MENU BUTTON This button displays the station feature main menu which is configured in icons so that the users can easily utilize various settings and helpful functions SEND BUTTON If the station is programmed for Enblock Dial Mode when dialing an outside telephone number or internal station number you must press the SEND button to initiate the call This button is also used when reviewing recently received or called numbers and answering incoming calls The SEND button operates as the ANS portion of the ANS RLS button An ANS RLS button may be assigned to the station as a programmable
161. Redial the new passcode to verify If successful you will hear two beeps Four beeps indicate an incorrect code Reenter the code again Press TRANSFER to store the new passcode 38 Table of Contents DS 5000 SET ANSWER MODE INTERCOM You can receive internal calls in one of three modes see Answering Intercom Calls under ntercom Calls for descriptions e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 103 0 for Ringing 1 for Auto Answer or 2 for Voice Announce Press TRANSFER to store your selection SET ANSWER MODE CO Your incoming CO calls can be set to follow the intercom answer mode e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 15 to access AUTO ANS CO Press the VOLUME UP or DOWN key to change status Press TRANSFER to store your selection NOTE When your keyset is programmed for Auto Answer and you have Forward No Answer FNA turned on you must answer screened transfers by pressing the SEND button before your FNA timer expires or the call will forward AUTOMATIC HOLD While on an outside call pressing a line button route button or a flashing CALL button will automatically put your call on hold and connect you to the next call This feature can be turned on or off at your keyset e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 001 to turn Automatic Hold on or 000 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection NOTE Intercom calls can be aut
162. S Transferred calls that go unanswered will recall to the station that originated the transfer Should the station that originated the transfer not answer the recall the call will be sent to the operator as a transfer recall A call left on hold will recall the station that put it on hold If the hold recall is unan swered at the station that originated the hold the call is sent to the operator Both types of recalls will ring and have a slow flashing amber light on the LINE key or CALL key NETWORKING When 2 or more systems are networked a single station or operator group may receive all recalls to a single operator Please consult with your service company if required EXECUTIVE BARGE IN If you want to break into another conversation you must be allowed to barge in and the other station and trunk must not be secure Dialthe desired extension or trunk number and listen for the busy signal Press the BARGE button and begin speaking after the tone Hang up when you are finished The system can be set for one of the three following barge in options No barge in allowed Barge in with intrusion tone Barge in without intrusion tone service observing When the second or third option is selected the barger will take priority over the line This means unless you barger hang up first the station or line you barged into will still be connected to you when the station you barged into hangs up When the third option is
163. S LAYOUT a JL Ja J LG Jla Jla CD E F 5 5 5 8D KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT 28D KEYSET 18D KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT Transfer Speaker DS 5000 SERIES KEYSETS 7S KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT A D VOLUME a 6 gt a TED Transfer Speaker 14D KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT I BI I J Im m w uw 21D KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT J IC 1 jJ IC Cs jw ju wj jw Open customer programming and follow the instructions below ACTION 1 Press TRSF and then dial 705 Display shows the first number Dial the speed bin desired e g 505 OR press UP or DOWN to choose and press the right soft key to move the cursor Enter the access code e g 9 the system will automatically insert a dash followed by the phone number up to 24 digits long and press the right soft key to return to step 2 DISPLAY SYS SPEED DIAL 500 SYS 505
164. SETS The key can be used for the following special characters space amp 7 lt gt iF di Jas 7 and 1 When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character press UP to move the cursor one space to the right 2 Other symbols are available for DIAL ACTION DISPLAY 1 Pressthe transfer key followed by 104 201 STN NAME Display shows 2 Enter the station name using the procedure 201 STN NAME described above SAMSUNG 3 Press the transfer key to store and exit OfficeServ 7100 USER INSTRUCTIONS TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 APRIL 2007 1 7 PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED DIAL LOCATIONS You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial list Each station user begins with ten numbers 00 09 and may be assigned up to fifty numbers See your system administrator to determine the amount assigned to your station NOTE Press button B for flash and button C for pause Display keyset users may want to hide some speed dial numbers so they will not show in the display Before entering a telephone number press button E All digits after this will be hidden Press button E again to begin displaying digits If your system uses rotary or pulse dialing C O lines pressing button D before entering a speed dial will cause all subsequent digits to be sent as DTMF tones until the D button is pressed again ACTION DISPLAY 1 Pre
165. TATION 201 LINDA received a call on line 702 STATION 205 JOHN is talking on line 701 Talking on line 702 702 01 15 701 05 25 CONF PAGE MUTE 49 Transfer CALLER 10 RETURN WHAT IS CALLER ID Caller ID is the name given to the telephone company provided feature that de 205 busy livers the telephone number and sometimes the name of the person calling your OHVA CAMP ON phone There are two types of Caller ID the first delivers the calling party s tele NT phone number only and the second sometimes referred to as Deluxe Caller ID delivers both the calling party s telephone number and name as listed in the tele OHVA to 205 OHVA from 201 phone directory TMSG REJECT The phone system can handle both types of Caller ID in fact the case of num ber only delivery the system can be programmed to insert a name for a specific Wait for reply GIVE THE CALL telephone number However even though you are paying to receive Caller ID TMSG 01 SEND information there are some circumstances that mean you will not receive this in formation The six most common reasons are listed below along with the display information that the system will provide Dial 03 or press twice PRIVATE The caller does not wish his her name or number to be re ASK THEM TO HOLD vealed to you This type of call can be stopped at the tele TMSG 03 SEND phone company by dialing an access code on your outside lines This will redirect these PRIVATE c
166. TIMER button to manually begin timing a call Press it again to stop timing If you press it while the automatic timer is on the call duration time is restarted AUTO TIMER Display keyset users may have the timer automatically start when they answer incoming calls or after a short delay on an outgoing call e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Dial 011 to turn the auto timer on or 010 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection TIMER FUNCTION Display keyset users may use this feature as a simple stopwatch When the keyset is idle press the TIMER button to start timing Press the TIMER button again to stop timing Read the elapsed time in the display Liftthe handset and replace it The display will return to date and time 50 Table of Contents ITP 5121D VIEWING MESSAGE INDICATIONS You can view all of your message indications before you return them e With the handset on hook press the MESSAGE button with the red flashing light The first station that left a message indication will be displayed Press the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the stations that left mes sage indications Use the soft keys to reply clear or advance to the next mes sage Press the END button to return your keyset to the idle condition ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES See also Special Application Menu Name Search When you use the alarm appointment reminder feature you create
167. TTINGS Note Remember if you know what digits to press you can enter them at any time you do not have to wait to be prompted This feature can be toggled on off at anytime Also if it is off you will be prompted within each subscriber menu to press zero for more options This enables you to still be able to find out what to do if you were to get lost and extended prompting was disabled This menu allows you to make changes to basic setup settings that are rarely changed Use these when you initially set up your personal Subscriber settings You probably will not need to change them after that 1 Setting your Password KEYSET USER FEATURES From the Subscriber Services Menu press 7 1 The following options are available if you have a display keyset They require setup The current password will be played and you will have the chance to by the System Administrator change it Message Waiting Lights 2 Recording your Nane When new messages are left in your mailbox the voicemail message light on your Use this option to record your name Your recorded name is played in several keyset will flash Press this flashing key VMMSG and follow the prompts to different situations It is important to record your name for proper operation retrieve messages This key may be pressed at any time to log into your Subscriber of the Samsung Voicemail Main Menu From the Subscriber Services Menu press 7 2 The current name will be pla
168. The hacker hopes to eventually chance upon the correct passcode and thus gain access to your system The OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 and OfficeServ 7000 Series security feature counts the number of sequential incorrect passcode attempts If a certain number is reached DISA is disabled and the system sends an alarm to designated display stations The number of passcode attempts and the disable duration are both programmable In addition the OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 and OfficeServ 7000 systems will print an SMDR record a cus tomer provided printer is required each time an incorrect passcode is entered The DISA alarm will ring for a programmable time before canceling the ringing however the DISA alarm display will remain until the alarm is cleared To clear the DISA alarm follow the following procedure Lift the handset and dial 58 Enterthe DISA alarm passcode see your service company Replace the handset WARNING As it is impossible to prevent unauthorized access to your telephone sys tem by hackers we suggest that you do not turn the DISA feature on unless you intend to use it If you do use this feature it is good practice to fre quently change passcodes and periodically review your telephone records for unauthorized use FORCED ACCOUNT CODES VERIFIED When set for this option the user must enter an account code for all outgoing calls The account code entered will be verified from a system list Force
169. Tone Indicates the station you dialed is ringing RINGBACK TONE 1000 ms ON 3000 ms OFF m CONTINUOUS Busy Tone Indicates the station you dialed is busy BUSY TONE 500 ms 500 ms OFF pu E CONTINUOUS DND No More Calls Tone Fast busy tone indicates the station you dialed is in the Do Not Disturb mode or cannot receive any more calls DND NO MORE CALLS TONE 250 ms ON 250 ms OFF E FOR TEN SECONDS Transfer Conference Tone Indicates your call is being held and you can dial another party TRANSFER CONF TONE 100 ms ON 100 ms OFF PLLA CONTINUOUS Confirmation Tone Very short beeps followed by dial tone indicate you have correctly set or canceled a system feature CONFIRMATION 50 ms ON 50 ms OFF FOR ONE SECOND programmable Error Tone A distinctive two level beeping tone indicates you have done something incorrectly Try again ERROR 50 ms of tone 1 50 ms of tone 2 FOR THREE SECONDS Table of Contents DS 5000 DS 5021D Programmable Buttons 21 Soft Button LCD Panel Status Indicator IC Scroll Button Speaker Volume Button c Keyset Redial Button Support Navigation Button Dial Button Speaker Button Microphone Conference Button Hold Button Transfer Button DS 5014D Programmable Buttons 14
170. UP or DOWN to select the display mode 201 DAY FORMAT Press the right soft key to move the cursor COUNTRY ORIENTAL 3 Press the right soft key to return to step 2 OR Press the left soft key to return to step 3 4 Press the transfer key to store and exit 1 13 OfficeServ 7100 USER INSTRUCTIONS TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 APRIL 2007 1 12 SETTING STATION ON OFF OPTIONS The OfficeServ 7100 allows the system administrator to set any of the keyset features listed below FEATURES DESCRIPTION Automatically places an existing C O call 00 AUTO HOLD on hold if a CALL button trunk key or trunk route key is pressed during that call Automatically starts the stopwatch timer during a C O call When ON this feature disables the hookswitch allowing a headset user to answer all calls by pressing the ANS RLS button When ON this feature allows the user to 03 HOT KEYPAD dial directory numbers without having to first lift the handset or press the SPK button Allows the user to hear a slight tone when pressing buttons on keyset Allows the user to hear the latter part of 05 PAGE REJOIN page announcements if keyset becomes free during a page When OFF requires the user to press the 06 RING PREF fast flashing button to answer a ringing call after lifting the handset This field is reserved and can not be used for U S software Keyset users can allow intercom calls to 08 AUTO CAMP ON camp on to other keysets without having to pr
171. VA to you until you press the button again and cancel the blocking OHVA REJECT Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Reject REJECT button Pressing this button while receiving an OHVA call will disconnect the voice announcing party and return you to your original call IN GROUP OUT OF GROUP If your keyset is assigned to a station ring group you can remove your keyset from the group and then put it back in While you are out of the group you can receive calls to your extension number but not calls to the group number If you have IN OUT button with the group number assigned Press the IN OUT button The button indicator will be lit steady when your keyset is in the group Press the IN OUT button again to exit the group and the indicator will go blank Repeat as necessary If you do not have an IN OUT button Dial the IN OUT access code number number then 0 to exit the group or 1 to enter the group then the group NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the hand set or press SPEAKER button The IN OUT button can include an extender to indicate the specific group that this button will affect This means that if you are in multiple groups you can de cide for which groups you will receive calls 48 Table of Contents ITP 5112L CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET AME PASSWORD This feature allows people using the AME feature to enable password protection This will prevent u
172. a 16 charac ter reminder message When the alarm rings your message will appear instead of ALARM REMINDER To program reminder messages Press TRANSFER and then dial 116 Dial the alarm number 1 2 or 3 Dialthetime you want the alarm to go off Enter the time as HHMM hours minutes using the 24 hour clock e Dial 0 NOT SET 1 TODAY or 2 DAILY to select the alarm type Write your message using the dial pad keys Each press of a key selects a char acter Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position For exam ple if your message is TAKE MEDICATION press 8 once to get the letter T Press 2 once to get A Press 5 twice to get Continue selecting characters from the following table to complete your message Press the TRANSFER button to store the alarm and reminder message e Repeat for each alarm if needed COUNT 1 2 3 4 5 DIAL 0 lt gt 0 DIAL 1 space 1 DIAL 2 2 DIAL 3 D E F 3 DIAL 4 G H 5 4 DIAL 5 1 L 5 DIAL 6 M N 0 51 DIAL 7 0 R 5 7 DIAL 8 0 V Q 8 DIAL 9 2 9 1 NOTES 1 When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previ ous character press UP to move the cursor one space to the right 2 Other symbols are available for DIAL To cancel an individual alarm and reminder message Press TRANSFER and then dial 112 Dial alarm number 1 2 or 3 Press th
173. able to you Press 1 to toggle message alert on and off Press 2 to set the schedule when you would like to be notified Press 3 to be notified on urgent messages only Press 4 to set the destination phone number Pager Notification When this function is activated the Samsung Voicemail will call your beeper service and notify you after each message is left in your voice mailbox From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 2 for pager notification There are 4 options available to you Press 1 to toggle pager notification on and off Press 2 to set the schedule when you would like to be paged Press 3 to be notified on urgent messages only Press 4 to set the pager phone number Undelete When this function is activated the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to undelete any messages that you have recently deleted up to the pro grammed Daily Maintenance Time which is set to 3 a m by Default the fol lowing morning From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 3 for Deleted Messages Deleted voicemail messages are temporarily stored in memory until 3 a m the following day Select this option to recover undelete previously delet ed messages during this period of time Undelivered Retrieval When this function is activated the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to recall any messages you have sent that have NOT yet been p
174. ach the base pedestal e Plug the line cord into the jack on the base of the keyset marked with the LJ symbol and route it through one of the cable channels in the bottom of the base pedestal Table of Contents iDCS Keyset ADDING KEYSET DAUGHTERBOARD MODULE ADDING AN iDCS 14 BUTTON KEY STRIP Place the keyset face down on a flat surface Place the keyset face down on a flat surface e Remove the base pedestal by placing your thumbs over the attachment clips Remove the base pedestal by placing your thumbs over the attachment clips and press outward while simultaneously pressing down on the keyset body and press outward while simultaneously pressing down on the keyset body with your fingertips with your fingertips Remove the ribbon cable knockout from the bottom of the keyset e Remove the two knockouts from the bottom of the keyset Clip the 14 button strip to the side of the keyset e Plugin the daughter module and secure with the two screws provided Plug one end of the ribbon cable into the keyset and the other end into the 14 button strip e Place the support bracket over the ribbon cable and secure with the six screws provided e Reattach the base pedestal SECURING SCREWS REMOVE KNOCKOUTS REMOVE KNOCKOUTS CONNECT RIBBON CABLE OUTSIDE CALLS AN OUTSIDE CALL Lift the handset and press an idle outside line button li
175. ad that corresponds to the first letter of the name you wish to search for Use the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the names Press the DIAL soft key to dial the number NOTE A DIR button can have an extender to take you directly to one of the above lists PERS SYS or STN CALL PROGRESS DISPLAYS During everyday call handling your keyset display will provide information that is helpful and in some cases invaluable Displays like CALL FROM 203 TRANSFER TO 202 701 RINGING TRANSFER FM 203 708 busy Camp on to 204 Recall from 204 Call for 501 message frm 204 and FWD ALL to 204 keep you in formed of what is happening and where you are In some conditions you are prompted to take an action and in other cases you receive directory information 57 DISPLAY NUMBER DIALED Display keysets begin showing digits as they are dialed They will stay in the dis play until the call duration timer comes on automatically or the TIMER button is pressed If the call duration timer is not used the number dialed will be displayed until the call is released transferred or put on hold CALL DURATION TIMER The system can be set to automatically time outside calls A few seconds after you dial a telephone number the timer appears in the display It appears immediately for incoming calls The call timer continues for the duration of the call Call dura tion times are displayed in minutes and seconds If a call lasts lo
176. age Personal Extended 5 Fax Only Messages Place Find Me 6 Personal Greetings 6 Information 7 Administration 4 Prompting Call to Sender Discard Recording and Rerecord Auto Set 7 Edit Only 8 Pause Resume 8 Pause Resume 8 Pause Resume Deliver Copy Night Intercept Mailbox Greeting Menu Prompting Menu Prompting Menu Prompting of Fax Message Set Delivery Options 8 Pause Resume 9 Record and Send o Play Forward a Menu Prompting Broadcast Message Menu Options 31 9 Copy of Message Specify Future Delivery Pause Resume Rewind Play 0 Play 0 Play Record Cancel Return Menu Prompting 5s Access Coverage Menu Options Menu Options a Reminder to Subscriber Services eoones SEND Message Then Group Change PY Play Cancel Return Play A Specific Sender Play Message Inventory Play Menu Options Cancel Return to Subscriber Services i 8 9 a a 9 9 a G a a a a aaa 2 Playback Volume Pause Resume Message Playback Fast Forward 5 Seconds Change Playback Speed Skip to Next Message Scan Messages Play Menu Options Play Message Information Cancel Return to Subscriber Services LEES GE 5 5 3 3 5 8 3 5 Seconds Change Playback Volume Pause Resume Record Playback Fast Forward 5 Seconds Change Playback Speed SEND Me
177. al 42 plus the extension number of that station To cancel all message indications left at your phone Lift the handset and dial 42 plus your extension number Replace the handset PROGRAMMED MESSAGES When you will be away from your phone for any length of time you may leave a programmed station message Display stations calling you will see this message and be informed of your status or follow your instructions Lift the handset and dial 48 plus any message code 01 20 listed on the back of this user guide Listen for confirmation tone and hang up Tocancel this message lift the handset and dial 48 plus 00 CONVENIENCE FEATURES DO NOT DISTURB Use Do Not Disturb DND when you want to block calls to your keyset Lift the handset and then dial 401 e cancel DND lift the handset and then dial 400 You are able to make calls while in the DND mode ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE When your station is programmed to receive calls from the door phone You will receive three short rings repeatedly Liftthe handset and you will be connected to the door phone e Ifan electric door lock release is installed hookflash receive confirmation tone and dial 13 to release the lock CALLING THE DOOR PHONE ROOM MONITORING You can call the door phone and listen to what is happening outside or in anoth er room Lift the handset and then dial the extension number of the door box You will be connected t
178. all Coverage Conditions No Answer Busy Blocked Night and Rejected Caller In this case the salutation part of the greeting should be very general 7 Edit Mailbox Greeting Used whenever a caller reaches your mailbox or if you have not recorded any of the Call Coverage greetings The way a caller is transferred to your mailbox greeting directly is by another subscriber transferring the caller to your mail box using the VT VoiceMail Transfer key This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Mailbox Greeting Option feature Example Hi this is John Smith Please leave a message will call you as soon as can Note This greeting will only play if none of the 5 personal greetings has played to the caller A common usage for this Greeting is when another Subscriber is talking with a caller and uses the VT key on their phone to trans fer the caller directly to your Mailbox MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION The Mailbox Administration menu is used to turn on and off your pager notifica tion message alert options and other message control features 1 Message Alert When this function is activated the Samsung Voicemail will call any outside or inside telephone number after each message is left in your voice mailbox To hear your message at the remote location when the Samsung Voicemail calls you after you pick up the telephone and answer you will be instructed that there is a message and to enter
179. all Record If you have a call record button assigned to your phone you may press it at any time to record the conversation in progress If you have a display keyset you will also have the soft key options to pause and time the message 75 SHORTCUTS Calling Calling a station that is busy or does not answer you can press to immediately send the call to the called parties mailbox Call Divert to Voicemail While receiving an incoming ringing call dial to immediately send the caller to your personal voicemail box This will override the call forward no answer set ting Direct Messaging DSS To make it easy to leave messages for others in your office without hav ing to dial their extension number first keyset users may simply dial plus a mailbox extension number and leave a message directly If you dial a busy exten sion press to connect directly with the mailbox Self Memo Reminder Pressing will leave a message in your own mailbox This is useful to remind yourself of things to do now or in the future Messages can be sent with future delivery so you can have the system call you when items become due INTERACTIVE DISPLAYS Display keyset users have the added advantage of using the soft keys and displays to play save delete reply call forward rewind pause fast forward change the vol ume get message information or help Viewing Mailbox Contents If you have new messages in addit
180. allows you to make changes to basic setup settings that are rarely changed Use these when you initially set up your personal Subscriber settings You probably will not need to change them after that 1 Setting your Password From the Subscriber Services Menu press 7 1 The current password will be played and you will have the chance to change it 2 Recording your Name Use this option to record your name Your recorded name is played in several different situations It is important to record your name for proper operation of the Samsung Voicemail system From the Subscriber Services Menu press 7 2 The current name will be played and you will have the chance to change it Note It is possible that if you do not record your name and or enter your Directory Name described below you will not be included in the Dial by Name Directory 3 Entering your Directory Name Use this option to enter your Directory Name Your Directory Name is used callers to find you if they do not know your extension number From the Subscriber Services Menu press 7 3 The current Directory Name will be played as a string of digits that are equal to your name spelled out on your telephone keypad Follow the instructions to enter a new name You will be prompted to enter your last name and then your first name This must be done in order for the directory feature to work correctly Note It is possible that i
181. alls to an announce ACRI TO Een Wait for reply ment that states that you do not wish to receive calls that TMSG had Caller ID blocked The code to block these calls can V usually be found in the front section of the telephone direc tory 2524 OUT OF AREA The caller is calling from an area that cannot provide Caller ID information for example international calls or he she is calling from a type of circuit that cannot provide Caller ID information for example some outbound WATS lines PAYPHONE The caller is calling from a coin operated telephone The telephone company will send this information as there are no directory listings for pay phones The number will be de livered as usual INVALID CID INFO This is a message that will be displayed when CID informa tion is sent on the line but was somehow corrupted NO CID RECEIVED This is a message that will be displayed when there was no CID information sent on the line 50 51 NO CID DSP Caller ID Digital Signal Processors CIDDSP s are resources in the OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 and OfficeServ 7000 Series systems required for receiving CID data If there are no CIDDSP s available at the time a call comes in this is the message you will see on your display NOTE The Caller ID features may require optional software and or hardware Please see your service and installation company for details WHAT IS ANI 11 eam suP
182. ally From the Network Mode Setup Menu select 1 MANUAL IP and press l NETWORK MODE SET UP SPEAKER Next press the HOLD button 2 IP ADDRESS SET UP twice to get to the NETWORK SETUP MENU as seen here 3 NETMASK SETUP Enter the IP keyset s IP address the net 4 GATEWAY SETUP work s netmask and gateway as shown Select the 2 IP ADDRESS SET UP INPUT IP ADDRESS amp PRESS OK menu and press SPEAKER the LCD will 2 display this message the user enter its IP address Check if there is any currently saved IP address of the phone on the LCD If the IP address has not been set the LCD displays nothing The user can enter the IP address using 0 9 dial buttons and button for entering a Save that address by pressing the SPEAKER button Use the HOLD button to backspace Select the NETMASK SET UP menu and press SPEAKER the LCD will display the following message and the user XXX XXX XXX enter a new Netmask IP address Use the HOLD button to backspace INPUT NETMASK amp PRESS OK Check if there is any currently saved subnet mask address of the phone on the LCD If the subnet mask address has not been set the display will show nothing Press any dial buttons from 0 9 and button to enter the subnet mask IP address and then save that subnet mask IP address by pressing the SPEAKER but ton Use the HOLD button to backspace Select 4 GATEWAY SET UP
183. ame time Lift the handset Press the PAGE key or dial 55 Dial or press the ALL PAGE key After the attention tone make your announcement NOTE The LED on the PAGE key will only light when All Page is in progress 31 Lift the handset Press the Meet Me Page MMPG key or dial 54 e the desired zone number After the attention tone instruct the paged person to dial 56 Press WAIT or TRANSFER e Remain off hook until the person dials 56 from any phone The paged person will be automatically connected with you CALL PARK AND PAGE When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his her desk you can park the call prior to paging The iDCS offers two different methods MANUAL PARK ORBITS e While in conversation press the PARK button e Entered a desired orbit number 0 9 if the orbit number is busy dial another orbit number Display users can press k to automatically place the call in any available orbit number and see the number in the display Remember the selected orbit number e Replace the handset when finished Lift the handset and make a page announcement as previously described example John Smith park two To retrieve a parked call from orbit Press the PARK button and dial the announced orbit number 0 9 You will be connected to the parked call NOTES 1 You must have a PARK button or park access code to retrieve and place cal
184. amming OR press SPK to store and advance to the next program 20 PROGRAM PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS FOR OTHER STATIONS Individual station users can program their own numbers but in cases where this is not practical or for single line telephone users this program allows a system administrator to view or change any station s speed dial numbers The station speed dial codes are 00 49 or 000 049 Each station begins with ten numbers 00 09 and can be assigned more in blocks of ten up to a maximum of fifty num bers Each speed dial number consists of a line access code and the telephone number to be dialed The access code can be any line group individual line station group or individual extension The speed dial number can be up to 24 characters long including FLASH and PAUSE NOTE If Least Cost Routing LCR is used the LCR access code must be entered When you are entering a speed dial number there are some special keys that you will need to use These are the bottom row of programmable keys on the LCD 12B and LCD 248 keysets and are known as keys D E and PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Scrolls through extension numbers and speed dial bins KEYPAD Used to enter number HOLD Press to clear entry A Does not have a function B Inserts a FLASH C Inserts a PAUSE D Changes the dialing type from pulse to tone E Hides and displays digits F Changes display to speed dial name entry
185. and offers a number of options for sending or redirecting messages as well as provides several ways to notify you of new mes sages Another very common Subscriber Service is Access Manager This allows you con trol over when and where you receive your calls as well as what to speak to your callers in the event you are unable to speak to them directly The events are referred to as Call Conditions No Answer Busy and Blocked are the most com monly used Call Conditions This guide can be used by Subscribers from within the office or from telephones outside the office The basic operation is the same but the access method will be different See the Subscriber Services Menu Diagram for more details Note that some features and prompts detailed here may not be available to all Subscribers See your System Administrator if you have questions about feature availability 70 Table of Contents ITP 5112L ACCESSING YOUR MAILBOX Also known as Subscriber Services Menu Inside Callers Subscriber logging in from their Desk e Dial the voicemail access number or press the key assigned to ring voicemail VMMSG Enter your personal password when prompted the default password is 0000 Outside Callers Subscribers calling from Cell Phones or outside of the office environment Dial the phone number that will be answered by the voicemail The main greeting will answer e At the main greeting dial plus your Subscrib
186. and then the flashing button OR finish the first call and hang up the waiting call will ring Lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer NOTE Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold When using the speakerphone the camp on tone will come through the speaker CONFERENCE CALLS You may conference up to five parties you and four others in any combination of outside lines and internal stations in any order While engaged a conversation press the CONFERENCE button and receive conference tone e Make another call either intercom or outside press the CONFERENCE button and receive conference tone Make another call or press the CONFERENCE button to join all parties e Repeat the last step until all parties are added NOTE When attempting to add another party to the conference and you are not able to reach the desired person hang up Simply press the CONFERENCE button again to return to your previous conversation To drop a party from your conference call e Press CONFERENCE and dial the extension or line number that is to be dropped Press CONFERENCE again to reestablish the conference 26 Table of Contents ITP 5112L NOTE To leave the conference hang up Control is passed to the next internal sta tion If there are no internal stations and you wish to leave outside lines connect ed together in a trunk to trunk conference press the CONFERENCE button plus the CALL button that the call appears
187. anged to that of the authorization code USING AUTHORIZATION CODES After going off hook the station user must dial Q followed by a four digit authori zation code If you enter a correct code you will hear confirmation tone and then receive a dial tone and you can make an outside call in the usual manner The sta tion then follows the dialing class for that authorization code If you enter an incor rect code the station returns error tone This code may or may not print on SMDR reports depending on SMDR programming USING THE TIE LINE OUTGOING Your office can be connected to another system with a tie line Use this line to make calls to stations in the other system If programming allows you can access lines the other system to make outside calls Tie line calls be put hold transferred and conferenced in the same manner as are other outside calls Lift the handset or press the SPK or MONITOR key Dial the tie line access code or press the tie line key When you receive dial tone from the other system you can dial extension numbers or access outside lines You must know the extension numbers and the line access codes for the other system Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS RLS or the MONITOR key if you are using a 7 button phone NOTE Outgoing calls are controlled by the station s dialing class INCOMING Station users in the other system can access the tie line and make inter
188. any of the Call Coverage greetings The way a caller is transferred to your mailbox greeting directly is by another subscriber transferring the caller to your mail box using the VT Voicemail Transfer key This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Mailbox Greeting Option feature Example Hi this is John Smith Please leave me a message will call you as soon as can Note This greeting will only play if none of the 5 personal greetings has played to the caller A common usage for this Greeting is when another Subscriber is talking with a caller and uses the VT key on their phone to trans fer the caller directly to your Mailbox MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION The Mailbox Administration menu is used to turn on and off your pager notifica tion message alert options and other message control features 1 Message Alert When this function is activated the Samsung Voicemail will call any outside or inside telephone number after each message is left in your voice mailbox To hear your message at the remote location when the Samsung Voicemail calls you after you pick up the telephone and answer you will be instructed that there is a message and to enter your password Simply enter your pass word and you will now be logged in 81 82 Setting Up Message Alert From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 1 for Message Alert There 4 options avail
189. any or are not offered any other options 4 CallForwarding Unlike Follow Me where the subscriber wants to take their calls at an alter nate location this feature allows the subscriber to pass control of his calls to another Subscriber The Forwarded To Subscriber will now be in control of the caller and the caller will NOT return to originating Subscriber s Mailbox If the Forwarded To Subscriber does not answer the caller it will now follow what ever the Forwarded To Subscriber has set up for their call conditions The Caller will hear Forwarding to Subscriber before actually being forwarded 5 Call Screening If this is turned on the caller will be asked their name and the Samsung Voicemail will play this name to you before the transfer giving you an option to accept or reject the call 6 Find Me Find Me when enabled will attempt to locate the subscriber by calling a list of preprogrammed phone numbers The stored phone numbers are entered in Personal Services 2 if allowed by the Administrator The stored tele phone number list can contain up to 9 preprogrammed telephone numbers The Find Me feature only use the first five 7 Night Intercept This feature is dependent on your weekly availability schedule which is entered in Personal Services 3 if allowed the Administrator When Night Intercept is active the Samsung Voicemail will first ring your extension then play your primary No
190. arding Calls 23 25 25 MGODI PICKU 25 Privacy Release 26 DIALING FEATURES 18 e 7 Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers 27 28 One To ch Speed 28 Lost Number Redial co acie cad cc a a pras ta Cod decade 28 Manual Retry with Belial aca ain anie c borsa obec asta 29 Save Number With Redial usan atas eH raa ni oceans 29 Ecl SRI PERS 29 Automatic 0 29 Pulse t5 Tone ChanecVel 30 Meme SUR i iti d cud 30 PAGING AND MESSAGING Making cn asta a t coats 31 ab ca Gatti 31 bro met 31 Meet MG unciis a fece arca 32 Call Park and P ac icm aii t dcn Ga cache az cs tub 32 Messages Setan Cale ise ssi sistat ta stereo pecr i D retenti 33 RETUNING 33 Programmed 34 CONVENIENCE FEATURES Po cet aici cela 35 One Tite 35 ME 35 Background MUS C 35 Established Call 36 Appointment Reminder Alarm Clock 36 Door Phone Cans in
191. as been assigned Subscriber Administration privileges 83 PERSONAL SERVICES The Personal Administration Menu is used to set your password and record your name Many of these features must be allowed by the System Administrator 1 84 Workload Management Allows you to access to all reminders both Active and Pending If authorized you can group your reminders as Commitments Follow Ups or Tasks for bet ter organization The system will flag each reminder as Active or Pending pending means scheduled for future delivery Stored Numbers Allows you to enter up to 9 stored phone numbers The first five of these are used in the Find Me feature but any of them 1 9 can be easily dialed using only one digit followed by the pound key to be used by many other features from within your subscriber space ie Follow Me Message Alert Pager Alert and Direct Call Schedule Availability Allows you to enter a weekly availability schedule for use with Night Personal Greeting and the Auto Night Intercept feature Follow the spoken directions to enter the days of the week and times you are generally available to talk to your callers All other times you will be considered unavailable Place a Direct Call Allows you to place a direct call out of the Samsung Voicemail from any where You may either dial the number or dial a single digit 1 5 that corre sponds to a stored number See Personal Services 2 Stored Numbe
192. as simple as following a few simple spoken instructions First time users should read this section as a tutorial You should start with the following steps Access your Subscriber Services Menu You already know how to do this From the Subscriber Services Menu Record a Primary No Answer Personal Greeting Dial 5 1 Record a Mailbox Greeting Dial 5 7 Change your access code Password Dial 7 1 Record your name Dial 7 2 Enter your directory name Dial 7 3 After you have completed the steps above your Subscriber Services are set up and ready to use LISTEN TO YOUR MESSAGES If there are new messages in your mailbox your VMMSG key will be lit Call the Samsung Voicemail by pressing this key and when prompted enter your pass word You will then be at the Subscriber Services Menu Select 1 to listen to new messages or 3 to listen to saved messages Note After you enter your password if Autoplay of New Messages is enabled and you have new messages the Samsung Voicemail will begin to play them auto matically A subscriber can control this feature From the Subscriber Services Menu 6 5 toggles Autoplay of New Messages ON OFF SUBSCRIBER SERVICES MENU The following is a list of all the options available in the Subscriber Main Menu 1 LISTENING TO NEW MESSAGES 11 GROUP NEW MESSAGES 2 RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE 3 LISTENING TO OLD MESSAGES 33 GROUP OLD MESSAGES 4 ACCESS MANAG
193. at particular speed dial entry and press ENTER ONE TOUCH SPEED DIALING You may assign any speed dial number to an already existing One Touch Speed Dial button for quick and easy dialing of frequently used numbers While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 107 Press a One Touch Speed Dial button Dial the speed dial number 00 49 or 500 999 that you want assigned to this button Press TRANSFER to store your selection To call this telephone number just press the One Touch Speed Dial button NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the hand set or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing DIRECTORY DIALING Press the SCREEN button twice Scroll to the first Fixed Feature screen Press the DIRECTORY button Press the soft button associated with the desired option STN Accesses Station name directory SYSTEM Accesses System speed dial name list PERS Accesses your personal speed dial name list Enter the first digit of the desired party Press the UP DOWN buttons to scroll to the desired entry Press the appropriate operation soft button 33 DIAL Dials the displayed number PREVIOUS Moves you to the previous entry EXIT Exit programming and return to idle screen NEXT Moves you to the next entry e Press END to return to idle screen LAST NUMBER REDIAL To redial the last telephone number you dialed press the REDIAL button or dial 19 To redial the last tele
194. at will be answered by the Samsung Voicemail The main greeting will answer At the main greeting dial plus your Subscriber or mailbox number Subscriber and Mailbox numbers will usually match your extension number Enter your personal password when prompted the default password is 0000 Access your Subscriber Services or Mailbox from a Station other than your Own or checking a mailbox associated with a different station e Press the VMMSG key or dial the voicemail group number You will be prompted to enter a password Press k This will take you to the Main Auto Attendant Menu Press plus the Subscriber number of your choice You will be prompted to enter you password At this point the inside and outside callers follow the same instructions You will hear a message stating the number of messages left in your mailbox You will then hear the Subscriber Services Menu with the following options 1 Listen to New Messages See Listening to your Message Record and Send Message See Sending Messages Review Saved Messages See Listening to your Message Access Manager See Access Manager Personal Greetings See Personal Greetings Mailbox Administration See Mailbox Administration Personal Services See Personal Services gt B Return to Main Menu Table of Contents DS 5000 GETTING STARTED Using your new Samsung Voicemail Subscriber Services is
195. at your station and this option set for ON your phone will sound two beeps the same as when a screened transfer is completed and you will be connected to the CO call In order for this option to work the station must also be programmed for auto answer see SET ANSWER MODE e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 151 to turn Auto Answer on or 150 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection NOTE Outside lines must ring your station directly for the Auto Answer CO to work Lines ringing a station group will not cause your phone to Auto Answer the call DISPLAY SPEED DIAL NAME This option allows you to view the name associated with a speed dial number as it is dialed With you handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Press 111 to turn DISP SPDNAME on or 110 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection CALLER ID REVIEW ALL This feature allows display keyset users to review Caller ID information for calls sent to their stations This list can be from ten to fifty calls in a first in first out basis The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your station but that you did not answer When reviewing this list you can press one button to dial the person back The system must be using LCR to dial the stored num ber With you handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Press 121 to turn CID REVIEW ALL on or 120 to turn it off Press TRANSF
196. ates that there are additional options Press the SCROLL key to display these additional options User instructions will be displayed in lower case letters Options assigned to soft keys will be in upper case letters DIRECTORY INFORMATION An 11 character directory name can be assigned to each extension number Display keyset users can view the name of the called or calling station before an swering Each outside line can have an 11 character directory name Incoming calls can be easily identified and answered with different greetings Outside and internal calls ringing to a station group will display CALL FOR xxx where xxx is the station group number This allows you to answer calls directed to you differently than calls directed to your group 45 CALL LOG This system can log both incoming and outgoing calls placed from or to your tele phone You must have a LOG button programmed on your keyset and assigned a review list Each IN and OUT list can be up to 50 numbers maximum They are assigned in blocks of 10 each To view your incoming and outbound call logs e Press the LOG key Press either the IN or OUT key e View the first IN OUT telephone number At this point you may select one of the three options related to this number or use the UP DOWN keys to scroll through your list of calls Press the CLEAR key to erase this number from the list e Press the NND key repeatedly to view the Name Number or Date associat
197. ation about this call OR You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE If you are on a call Press the INQUIRE button Your existing call will go on hold OR Press the CID button and then the INQUIRE soft key to place the first call on hold Dialthe trunk number You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button OR You may use NND to view more information about this call OR You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE NOTES 1 If you are on an intercom call or you have Automatic Hold turned off you must finish the existing call or place it on hold before inquiring 2 Ifyou inquire about an outgoing call you will receive a call no longer avail able display REVIEWING PAST CALLER ID CALLS This feature allows you to review CID information for calls sent to your keyset This list can contain 10 50 calls in a last in first out basis The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your keyset but that you did not answer missed calls When reviewing this list you can press one button to dial the person back The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number access the CID infor mation stored in your REVIEW list e Press the REVIEW button OR Press the CID button and then press the REVIEW button 54 Table of Contents DS 5000 If you have entries in your review list the most recent call will be shown first You can now CLEAR this entry OR Use NND to view more i
198. atures and services available in the Samsung Voicemail Please review this section carefully before you use your Authorized Features and Services known as Subscriber Services Voicemail is one of the Subscriber Services available Your voice mail box has the capability of storing private messages and offers a number of options for sending or redirecting messages as well as provides several ways to notify you of new mes sages Another very common Subscriber Service is Access Manager This allows you con trol over when and where you receive your calls as well as what to speak to your callers in the event you are unable to speak to them directly The events are referred to as Call Conditions No Answer Busy and Blocked are the most com monly used Call Conditions This guide can be used by Subscribers from within the office or from telephones outside the office The basic operation is the same but the access method will be different See the Subscriber Services Menu Diagram for more details Note that some features and prompts detailed here may not be available to all Subscribers See your System Administrator if you have questions about feature availability 59 Table of Contents Subscriber Services Menu Group Saved Listen to New Review Saved Record amp Send Access Personal Mailbox Personal Pause Resume Play Menu Exit Messages Messages Messages Messages Manager Greetings Administration Services Options E
199. aximum 12 characters including and 4 and press 000 again OR If your button has an extender other than 000 001 999 account code con tained in that bin will automatically be entered for your LOCKING YOUR KEYSET You can lock your keyset to control misuse of your phone while you are away You can unlock it when you return e Press MENU button Scroll to MY PHONE option Press ENTER Scroll to LOCKED option and press ENTER OR you may press 4 and imme diately access option e Enter the PASSWORD Press ENTER Default Password is 1234 UseDirection button to scroll LEFT RIGHT to choose desired mode 1 UNLOCKED No restrictions User may complete internal and outside calls 2 LOCKED OUT Restricted to incoming calls only No outside calls can be made 3 LOCKED ALL No calls incoming or outgoing allowed to or from the set Press ENTER 46 Table of Contents ITP 5112L Press CANCEL to return to Main Config Menu OR press END to return to idle screen MANUAL SIGNALLING Use this feature when you want to send a brief 500ms ring burst to another sta tion regardless of the status of your phone on hook off hook handsfree DND or ringing To send a signal to another station Press the Manual Signalling MS button You may press the MS button repeatedly to send multiple signals to the des ignated station NOTE Your phone must have a Manual Signalling MS button with a station
200. ber Display users can press k to automatically place the call in any available orbit number and see the number in the display Remember the selected orbit number e Replace the handset when finished Lift the handset make a page announcement as previously described example John Smith park two To retrieve a parked call from orbit e Press the PARK button and dial the announced orbit number 0 9 You will be connected to the parked call NOTES 1 You must have a PARK button or park access code to retrieve and place calls in park orbits 2 If the parked call is not retrieved within a pre programmed period of time it will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light You cannot park and page intercom calls 3 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing AUTOMATIC PARK WITH PAGE BUTTON While in conversation press the PAGE button The call is automatically parked at your station Receive page tone and dial a desired page zone number Make announcement indicating your extension number or the line number Hang up 29 retrieve an automatically parked call Dial 10 plus the number that was announced If you have a PAGPK button press it and dial the number that was announced If you have a PARK button press it and dial the announced orbit number You will be connected to the parked call NOTES
201. box 3 Call Blocking When this feature is active callers will not be transferred to your extension they will hear your blocked greeting if recorded will go directly to your mailbox if they do not select any or are not offered any other options 4 CallForwarding Unlike Follow Me where the subscriber wants to take their calls at an alter nate location this feature allows the subscriber to pass control of his calls to another Subscriber The Forwarded To Subscriber will now be in control of the caller and the caller will NOT return to originating Subscriber s Mailbox If the Forwarded To Subscriber does not answer the caller it will now follow what ever the Forwarded To Subscriber has set up for their call conditions The Caller will hear Forwarding to Subscriber Name before actually being forwarded 5 Call Screening If this is turned on the caller will be asked their name and the Samsung Voicemail will play this name to you before the transfer giving you an option to accept or reject the call 6 FindMe Find Me when enabled will attempt to locate the subscriber by calling a list of preprogrammed phone numbers The stored phone numbers are entered in Personal Services 2 if allowed by the Administrator The stored tele phone number list can contain up to 9 preprogrammed telephone numbers The Find Me feature only use the first five 7 Night Intercept This feature is dependent on your weekly a
202. button ENTER BUTTON This button is used to select a menu option or to save changes made to a menu or submenu option DIRECTION BUTTON The DIRECTION BUTTON is the donut shaped ring which surrounds the ENTER button This button is used to navigate within the menus There are directional arrows stenciled into this button which indicate which direction the cursor will be moved Note that the DIRECTION BUTTON has four icons at the top bottom left and right of the ENTER button These icons are used to navigate directly to particular programming options from the CALENDAR screen Pressing the top INFO icon will take you directly to the STATUS INFO SCREEN The bottom TONE icon will take you to the Sound Screen Menu The left side MESSAGE icon will take you to the Text Message Menu The right side PHONE icon will take you to the PhoneBook Menu e END BUTTON This button is used to disconnect a call after a conversation or to move to the initial screen The END button operates as the RLS portion of the ANS RLS button An ANS RLS button may be assigned to the station as a programmable button CANCEL BUTTON This button is used to erase any characters or numbers entered by the dial button or to move to the previous screen After pressing the MENU button use the direction button to highlight the desired menu icon For multiple screen options the UP DOWN arrows at the either side of the top of the LCD may be used to scroll on a p
203. button to scroll to the desired message then press SEND The basics steps in text messaging are Press TEXT MESSAGE soft key to begin text messaging Dial the 2 digit number for the desired message Confirm this is the intended message then press SEND Wait for a reply from the other station steps 1 2 amp 3 When any station presses EXIT the displays at both stations return to their previous call progress condition Unde At all times after step 1 you can talk and listen to your caller while repeating steps 2 The example on the following page will better demonstrate how to use Text Messaging In this example station 201 is making an off hook voice announce ment to station 205 who after hearing the announcement will respond with a text message 60 Table of Contents ITP 5112L STATION 201 LINDA received a call on line 702 Talking on line 702 702 01 15 CONF PAGE MUTE Press TRANSFER Transfer RETURN Dial 205 205 busy OHVA CAMP ON v OHVA to 205 Wait for reply ASK THEM TO HOLD TMSG EXIT v 702 01 45 CONF PAGE MUTE STATION 205 JOHN is talking on line 701 701 05 25 OHVA from 201 TMSG REJECT GIVE THE CALL TMSG 01 SEND Dial 03 or press twice ASK THEM TO HOLD TMSG 03 SEND Wait for reply 701 05 55 CONF PAGE MUTE 61 CALLER ID SELECTING YOUR CALLER ID DISPLAY You can decide if you want to see the Caller ID name or Caller ID number in the display Rega
204. button while the phone is idle The LED will be lit and all calls will ring the secretary The secretary can call the BOSS in the DIVERT mode but all other users will ring the secretary the secretary can override the boss DIVERT GROUP LISTENING When you are engaged on a call and you are using the handset you may want other people to hear the distant party s voice over the speaker Press the LISTEN button to turn on the speaker The microphone is not in use so the distant party does not hear other parties present in your office Press LISTEN again to turn the speaker off and resume private conversation Repeat if necessary NOTE Depending on speaker volume and the acoustics of your office it may be advisable to turn the group listening feature off before hanging up This will elim inate a momentary squeal ACCOUNT CODES When equipped with optional equipment your system will allow calls to be charged to a specific account During any outside call press the account ACC button Enter the digit account code bin number when prompted OR If your button has an extender of 000 enter the account code maximum 12 characters including and and press 000 again OR If your button has an extender other than 000 001 999 account code con tained in that bin will automatically be entered for your LOCKING YOUR KEYSET You can lock your keyset to control misuse of your phone while you are away You ca
205. buttons are programmed to ring specific stations You can press a DSS button instead of dialing the extension number The 5112L keyset provides distinctive ring patterns Outside calls have a single ring tone repeated Internal calls have a double ring tone repeated Door phone calls and alarm appointment reminders have a triple ring tone repeated FULL DUPLEX SPEAKERPHONE All ITP keysets are speakerphones Pressing the SEND button will answer an incoming call on the speakerphone Pressing the END button will release the call on the speakerphone Switching from the handset to the speakerphone is easy Press the SPEAKER but ton and hang up the handset Table of Contents ITP 5112L TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR The terminal status indicator light is positioned on the top right corner of the key set above the display The terminal status indicator is a tri colored red green and amber light that provides greater visibility of your keysets status than the indi vidual button LEDs The terminal status indicator provides the following indica tions Busy Off Hook Steady Red Intercom Ring Flashing Red Outside Call Ring Flashing Blue Recall Ring Flashing Amber Message Waiting Flashing Red Do Not Disturb Fast Flash Red at 1 Second Intervals SELECT BUTTONS The 5112L keysets incorporate twelve select buttons These buttons are posi tioned six on either side of the LCD screen The top left and right buttons
206. case anes alas 37 Executiver Secietarnr 37 Executive 37 SHOU ONL E edat 38 38 Locking Your Keyset isc ict ct a ne dacs sa ania 38 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset iS itd ma 39 Olt HOOK Vojice ANNOUNCE 39 40 40 0 daos ova cob d 40 GroUp OUE Of GEO 40 CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET AME Athans C 41 Auto Cap O riinas ai 41 Select Rig TONE sts ner aciem cO dad cha bc batte 41 Change Your iesus cn c esci dort ta eon letal uev enti 41 Set Answer Mode Intercom 42 Set Answer Mode CO 42 Automate Hold BR CRT docti ard 42 Headset usse diete teste 42 0 43 Key IN ii ck cee cuca 43 E 43 E IR 43 Auto ASW Gt 44 Display Speed Dial NaMe
207. cate your internet connection Network Setup If 1 Manual IP is selected the Network Setup 1 sub menu will be displayed Setting IP Manually 2 Subnet 3 Gateway The user directly enters the IP address subnet mask and gateway address as follows Ifthe 1 IP menu is selected the LCD will display Address the following message and the user can enter the ITP s address Check if there is any currently saved IP address of the phone on the LCD If the IP address has not been set the LCD displays nothing The user can enter the address using 0 9 dial buttons and button can save that IP address by press ing the Enter button of navigation button assembly Ifthe 2 Subnet menu is selected the user can enter a new Netmask IP address Check if there is any currently saved subnet mask address of the phone on the LCD If the subnet mask address has not been set the display will show nothing Press dial buttons from 0 9 and button to enter the subnet mask address and then save that subnet mask IP address by pressing the Enter button of navigation button assembly If the 3 Gateway menu is selected the user can Gateway enter a new gateway address XXX XXX XXX XXX The user can check if there is any gateway IP address of the phone that is current ly saved on the LCD If the gateway IP address has not bee
208. ce into separate calls as follows Press any one of the outside line buttons That outside line will remain steady green to indicate you are still connected to it All other outside lines in the conference will be placed on system hold at your keyset All intercom callers in the conference will be disconnected You may now speak with each caller privately and transfer them as usual or reestablish another conference 22 Table of Contents ITP 5107S FORWARDING CALLS You may forward your calls to another station group of stations or an external telephone number Program a destination for the type of forwarding you want as detailed below If you have FWD ALL FWD BUSY and FWD NO ANSWER buttons press to turn that forward feature on A steady red light reminds you what for ward condition is activated You can clear all call forward conditions set at your station by lifting the handset and dialing 600 FORWARD ALL CALLS To forward all your calls under any condition to another station Dial 601 plus the extension or group number Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTES 1 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 2 The station that receives a Forwarded All call can transfer the call to the for warded station This is useful when you are expecting an important call but you do not wish to be disturbed by other calls 3 W
209. ced on transfer hold e the extension number Consult with the internal party Press TRANSFER to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call NOTE Repeatedly pressing the TRANSFER button will toggle between the outside party and internal extension If necessary you may disconnect either one of the parties by pressing the DROP button RETRIEVING CALLS HELD AT ANOTHER STATION When a line is on hold and it appears on your keyset press the line button with the red flashing light When a line is on hold and it does not appear on your keyset dial 12 plus the line number or the extension number of the station that placed the call on hold NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing TRANSFERRING CALLS Transfer is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways You can do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can do a blind transfer without notification e While on a call press the TRANSFER button and dial an extension number or group number Your call is automatically put on transfer hold OR Press a DSS button or station group button Your call is automatically put on transfer hold Hang up when you hear ringing this is an unscreened or blind transfer OR Wait for the called party to answer and advise him her of the call and hang up If the transfer is refuse
210. ces known as Subscriber Services Voicemail is one of the Subscriber Services available Your voicemail box has the capability of storing private messages and offers a number of options for sending or redirecting messages as well as provides several ways to notify you of new messages Another very common Subscriber Service is Access Manager This allows you con trol over when and where you receive your calls as well as what to speak to your callers in the event you are unable to speak to them directly The events are referred to as Call Conditions No Answer Busy and Blocked are the most com monly used Call Conditions This guide can be used by Subscribers from within the office or from telephones outside the office The basic operation is the same but the access method will be different See the Subscriber Services Menu Diagram for more details Note that some features and prompts detailed here may not be available to all Subscribers See your System Administrator if you have questions about feature availability 64 Table of Contents ITP 5121D ACCESSING YOUR MAILBOX Also known as Subscriber Services Menu Inside Callers Subscriber logging in from their Desk Dial the voicemail access number or press the key assigned to ring the voicemail VMMSG Enter your personal password when prompted the default password is 0000 Outside Callers Subscribers calling from Cell Phones or outside of the office
211. ch Press BOSS SECR button and establish a connection Press the EXE SECR MSG button The first message screen is displayed Pressing the DOWN arrow in the upper left corner of the LCD will scroll you to the second screen Pressing the UP arrow in the upper right corner of the LCD will return you to the first screen This method gives you the option to transfer the call to another station if so desired Scroll to the desired message Press MENU button for options Send Edit and Remove SEND Sends the message to the other end EDIT Enter message from the dial pad REMOVE Deletes message Use remove option to delete the Blank Message default message From the BOSS station in DND Receive three short double ring bursts followed by the text message from the Secretary e Press ENTER to invoke REPLY option OR scroll to OK option and press ENTER If REPLY option is activated the Select Message screen is displayed Scroll to the desired message and press ENTER The message is sent to the Secretary keyset display and the Secretary station has the option to reply if so desired Sending a text message from the BOSS keyset to the Secretary keyset from the idle condition Press the EXE SECR MSG button Press the NEXT button if there are more than two Secretary stations assigned to that BOSS station all Secretary keysets will be displayed the case of mul tiple Secretary stations scroll to th
212. ch for Use the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the names Press the DIAL soft key to dial the number NOTE A DIR button have an extender to take you directly to one of the above lists PERS SYS or STN 49 CALL PROGRESS DISPLAYS During everyday call handling your keyset display will provide information that is helpful and in some cases invaluable Displays like CALL FROM 203 TRANSFER TO 202 701 RINGING TRANSFER FM 203 708 busy Camp on to 204 Recall from 204 Call for 501 message frm 204 and FWD ALL to 204 keep you in formed of what is happening and where you are In some conditions you are prompted to take an action and in other cases you receive directory information DISPLAY NUMBER DIALED Display keysets begin showing digits as they are dialed They will stay in the dis play until the call duration timer comes on automatically or the TIMER button is pressed If the call duration timer is not used the number dialed will be displayed until the call is released transferred or put on hold CALL DURATION TIMER The system can be set to automatically time outside calls A few seconds after you dial a telephone number the timer appears in the display It appears immediately for incoming calls The call timer continues for the duration of the call Call dura tion times are displayed in minutes and seconds If a call lasts longer than 60 min utes the timer restarts You can press the
213. ciascun 35 8 35 36 CONVENIENCE FEATURES pst 37 ND css cance danas A Ed 37 Mte nana 37 BackgrouNA MUSIC el bd M d 37 Established Call Wy Bia giudice cotone cercate te 38 Appointment Reminder Alarm Clock 38 Poor PHONE ce ssa na 39 Executive Secretary HOtNE css aston Dh otc at sacar 39 Executive DIVEN cidit cba db 39 40 0 20 Lagos 40 un 41 i ct acted cea 41 0 42 42 Wi ctroup Out of GPO 42 HomePage Table of Contents ITP 5121D CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET AME PASSWONG Catedral 43 Auto CAMP Ofi 43 SSMU Ln 43 Change TE AG tot Rt 43 Set Answer Mode 0 44 Set Answer Mode CO 44 PANT to rns Ho 100
214. com calls to stations in your system Answer tie line calls ringing at your station as you would any other outside call They can be put on hold transferred and conferenced in the same manner as are other outside calls IN AND OUT ON TIE LINE NOT SUPPORTED ON OS 7100 Users accessing the tie line from the other system can get a line in your system and make outgoing calls These calls can be controlled by assigning a dialing class to the tie line For further information see your service company Table of Contents System Admin CALLER ID SPECIAL FEATURES NOTE The Caller ID features below require optional software and or hard ware Please ask your installation and service company for details ABANDON CALL LIST The system has a system wide abandoned calls list that stores CID information for the last 100 calls on the OfficeServ 7000 Series OfficeServ 500 M and L ver sion and 50 calls on the OfficeServ 100 that rang but were not answered and were accompanied with valid CID information Calls with CID information consist ing of OUT OF AREA PAYPHONE or PRIVATE will not be stored in the list The aban doned calls list is accessed using the system administrator s passcode When re viewing this list you are provided options to CLEAR the entry or DIAL the num ber You can use the NND key to toggle between the CID name CID number and the date and time the call came in The system must be using LCR to dial numbers from the abandone
215. conds Open customer programming and follow the instructions below PROGRAM KEYS KEYPAD Used to set timer values UP amp DOWN Used to select extension number SPK RLS Save data and advance to next program ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press TRSF and then dial 502 201 NO ANS FWD Display shows 010 SEC 30 2 Dial the station number e g 205 OR 205 NO ANS FWD press UP or DOWN key to select the 010 SEC station and press the right soft key OR OR press ANS RLS to select all stations ALL NO ANS FWD and press the right soft key 010 SEC 3 Press UP or DOWN key to select the 205 DTMF DUR station timer and press the right soft key 0100 MS 4 Enter the new value via the dial pad 205 DTMF DUR e 9 0300 and the system will return 0100 0 to step 2 5 Press TRSF to store and exit programming OR press SPK to store and advance to the next program ADDING NAMES TO THE TRANSLATION TABLE This program allows the system administrator or technician to associate a CID or ANI number received from the Central Office with a name programmed in this translation table If there is no match between a received number and a name this table no CID name or no ANI name will be displayed The translation table consists of 1000 entries in the OfficeServ 500 M and OfficeServ 7100 and OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems or 2000 entries in the OfficeServ 500 L system or 500 entries in the OfficeServ 100 sys tem with each entry compris
216. cord name This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Call Screening feature Example Hi this is John Smith I m sorry but am not available to speak with you at this time If someone else can help you please enter the extension number now Or to leave me a message press 1 69 6 Edit Personal Greetings You may also edit record each one of the greetings 1 9 at any time Select a greeting number to edit and follow the instructions to record your greeting When you are done recording your greeting you will be able to lis ten to the greeting you recorded save the greeting you recorded and return to the previous menu record the greeting again or exit without saving the greeting Note If you record only the greeting assigned to the No Answer Call Coverage Condition then that greeting will play to callers for all Call Coverage Conditions No Answer Busy Blocked Night and Rejected Caller In this case the salutation part of the greeting should be very general Edit Mailbox Greeting Used whenever a caller reaches your mailbox or if you have not recorded any of the Call Coverage greetings The way a caller is transferred to your mailbox greeting directly is by another subscriber transferring the caller to your mail box using the VT Voicemail Transfer key This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Mailbox Greeting Option feature Example Hi t
217. d NOTE You must have an assigned EP key button on your regular keyset for the single line station APPOINTMENT REMINDER ALARM CLOCK This feature works like an alarm clock Use it to remind yourself of an appointment later in the day TODAY ONLY or as a daily reminder every day DAILY You can set up to three alarms Each one can be either a TODAY ONLY or a DAILY alarm When the alarm rings you will hear three short rings repeated three times Lift the handset to answer the alarm If you do not the alarm will alert you two more times at five minute intervals To set alarms Press TRANSFER and then dial 112 Dial the alarm number 1 2 or 3 Dialthe time at which you want the alarm to sound Enter the time as HHMM hours and minutes using the 24 hour clock 0 NOT SET 1 TODAY ONLY or 2 DAILY to select the alarm type Press TRANSFER to save e Repeat for each alarm if needed To cancel individual alarms Press TRANSFER and then dial 112 Dial alarm number 1 2 or 3 Press the HOLD key NOTE Display keysets can show a reminder message See Alarm Reminder Messages under Display Features 36 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE When you are programmed to receive calls from a door phone You will receive three short rings repeated Lift the handset or press ANS RLS key You are connected to the door phone e Ifan electric door lock release is installed
218. d Request a Call Back Private Delivery Reply Required Exit 3 2 Scheduling Future Delivery If after recording a message you select 5 to schedule future delivery you will be able to set message attributes and set this message as Immediate Delivery Next Few Hours End of Current Business Day based on your Availability Schedule Beginning of Next Business Day based on your Availability Schedule A Coming Day of the Week Specific Day Time Exit ACCESS MANAGER The Access Manager allows the subscriber to set a number of options for when where and how and or if the Samsung Voicemail contacts you when a caller dials your extension number All of the options are toggled on off based on their cur rent status when you access them 66 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset Note ALL Access Manager options MUST be individually allowed by the System Administrator for each Subscriber They are 1 Follow Allows the subscriber to enter an alternate location and set how long the new destination Designated Location will be active This number may be an internal or external number This is useful if you are frequently traveling or changing the number where you can be reached When Follow Me is activated the transfer will be supervised and confirmed This means that if the call is not answered or if rejected by the Subscriber at the designated location it will be recalled to the Subscriber s mail
219. d you will be reconnected to the outside line when the called station hangs up or you can press TRANSFER to return to the outside party If you wish to send the call to another extension without waiting for the 22 Table of Contents ITP 5121D first station to hang up simply press another DSS button OR Press the CALL button or line button to return to the outside party and begin the transfer process again When you are transferring a call to a keyset set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer the transferred call will always ring NOTES 1 Afterthe inside party answers you may alternate back and forth between the parties by pressing the TRANSFER button 2 If you receive No More Calls tone that station has no button available to re ceive another call Press TRANSFER to return to the other party 3 You cannot transfer an Intercom call by pressing DSS button You must press the TRANSFER button and dial the destination extension number TRANSFER WITH CAMP ON When you are transferring a call to another station and you receive a busy signal you may camp the call on to this station Simply hang up when you hear the busy signal The called party will be alerted that a call is waiting for them NOTE If you receive No More Calls tone that station has no button available to receive another call Press TRANSFER to return to the outside caller TRANSFER TO VOICEMAIL This feature is used to send a call directly to a voice mailb
220. d as a Subscriber Administrator you may send a message to ALL mailboxes in the system From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 9 for Broadcast Messages This option will only be available if your mailbox has been assigned Subscriber Administration privileges 77 PERSONAL SERVICES The Personal Administration Menu is used to set your password and record your name Many of these features must be allowed by the System Administrator 1 78 Workload Management Allows you to access to all reminders both Active and Pending If authorized you can group your reminders as Commitments Follow Ups or Tasks for bet ter organization The system will flag each reminder as Active or Pending pending means scheduled for future delivery Stored Numbers Allows you to enter up to 9 stored phone numbers The first five of these are used in the Find Me feature but any of them 1 9 can be easily dialed using only one digit followed by the pound key to be used by many other features from within your subscriber space ie Follow Me Message Alert Pager Alert and Direct Call Schedule Availability Allows you to enter a weekly availability schedule for use with Night Personal Greeting and the Auto Night Intercept feature Follow the spoken directions to enter the days of the week and times you are generally available to talk to your callers All other times you will be considered u
221. d calls list To view the list of abandoned incoming calls for which CID information has been received Dial 64 and dial the system administrator passcode Scroll through the entries using the VOL keys CID ON SMDR The Station Message Detail Records SMDR report can be set to include the CID name and number for incoming calls This format expands the printout to 113 characters You must use a wide carriage printer or an 80 column printer set to the condensed print option NUMBER TO NAME TRANSLATION The system provides a translation table of 1000 entries in the OfficeServ 7100 7200 and OfficeServ 500 and 2000 entries in the OfficeServ 500 the OfficeServ 7400 and 500 entries on the OfficeServ 100 for use in areas that do not provide name and number sometimes called deluxe Caller ID or when ANI is received When the CID or ANI number is received the table is searched When a match is found the system will display the corresponding name from the table This will allow users in areas that do not support deluxe Caller ID or have only ANI service to provide names for callers Table of Contents System Admin CALLER ID SPECIAL FEATURES INVESTIGATE Investigate allows selected stations with a special class of service to investi gate any call in progress If CID information is available for an incoming call you will know to whom this station user is speaking For outgoing calls you can se
222. d feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing CALL FORWARD OPTIONS A display keyset may review or change call forward options and destinations Call forward access can be done via the keypad or by accessing the keyset display fea tures To review or change call forward options e Press TRANSFER 102 The display will indicate the current call forward condition and destination OR Show 0 FORWARD CANCEL to indicate no forward is set 26 Table of Contents ITP 5121D Dial 0 to cancel current condition OR Dial 1 5 to select the forward type OR Press UP or DOWN to select the forward type Press the right soft key to move the cursor Dialthe destination number e 9 202 OR Press UP or DOWN to select the destination Press the right soft key to move the cursor Dial 1 to set OR Press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO Press TRANSFER to store and exit STATION CALL PICKUP To pick up answer a call ringing at another station lift the handset and dial 65 plus the extension number of the ringing phone If you have a DP key assigned with a station number you only need to press this DP key with the flashing light to answer this ringing station NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing GROUP CALL PICKUP To pick up answer a call ringing in any pickup group lift t
223. d hardware version information 2 Network Info Displays network mode IP address of phone network and gateway information 3 Netmask 4 Gateway Note that items 2 to 4 are only displayed when setting Manual IP 3 NETWORK SETUP This menu allows you to individually setup the same parameters found in the Easy Wizard 4 LOAD amp UPGRADE SETUP 1 Upgrade TFTP Server The IP address of the TFTP server containing the ITP software 2 Upgrade Start Starts the ITP software upgrade process 5 SYSTEM SERVER SETUP 1 Server Address The IP address 2 Server ID The ID assigned to your ITP see your phone administrator for this information 3 Server 55 password assigned to your ITP see your phone adminis tratror for this information 6 FACTORY RESET This option resets ITP to factory default settings 7 REBOOT This option reboots the NAVIGATING THE MENUS When programming within various menu options information can be entered via the dial pad keys using 0 9 and dial keys as well as utilizing the navigation button assembly The button used for editing and their features are summarized below BUTTON FEATURES Left and Right To move a cursor highlighted area or to erase what is entered To save the current setting and end programming To cancel the current programming and return to the Main Menu tiec move back to the pr
224. d is 60 You may redial any of these 1 You will receive No More Calls tone when you attempt to make a call and calls from the Call Log there is no button available for that line 2 If Least Cost Routing is enabled on your phone system this button may Press the SEND button to display the first page of the CALL LOG be labeled LCR or accessed by dialing an access code usually 9 Use the SCROLL button or the DIRECTION button to navigate to the desired 3 f your system is programmed to require an authorization code before number Use the UP and DOWN arrows associated with the top left and right making a call dial k plus a valid code before selecting a C O line soft keys to advance and return through the CALL LOG Screens 4 If your system is programmed to require an account code before making When the desired number is highlighted press the SEND button a call press the ACCT button or dial 47 plus a valid bin number press the The number will be automatically dialed ACCT button again and then select a line ANS ne A CALL For more information on authorization and account codes see your system administrator Lift the handset and you are automatically connected to the ringing call See Ring Preference under Customizing Your Keyset OR press the SEND button NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset to automatically answer on the speakerphone or press the SPEAKER button before d
225. d out the RIGHT side of the keyset as you look at it face down Plug an eight conductor ethernet cable from the wall into the jack marked LAN on the back of the keyset Connect the ITP keyset to any port on the local network e If your ITP will share LAN connection with a PC plug an eight conductor eth ernet cable from the PC into the jack marked PC on the back of the keyset e Plug the power connector from the power adapter provided into the power jack on the back of the keyset The power adapter is not required if the ITP is connected to a LAN connection that provides power over the ethernet The ITP 5112L supports the power over ethernet feature when it is connected to a IEEE 802 3af compliant LAN switch or power injector port IMPORTANT NOTES Becareful not to connect the Network LAN cable into the PC connector of the phone To prevent damaging the keyset only use the Power Adapter that came with the 5112LD keyset This manual assumes that the ITP keysets are connected to a functioning local IP network The local IP network must be able to communicate with the MCP and card in the OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 or the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems over IP This is assumed regardless of whether the IP keyset is on a local or remote network e Before using your ITP 5112L phone press the MENU button select Sound Screen then select option 8 Screen Saver If you choose User Define you can se
226. d reminder message e Repeat for each alarm if needed COUNT 1 2 3 4 5 DIAL 0 lt gt 0 DIAL 1 space 1 DIAL 2 2 DIAL 3 D E F 3 DIAL 4 G H 4 DIAL 5 1 L 5 DIAL 6 M N 0 6 46 Table of Contents DS 5000 DIAL 7 P Q R S 7 DIAL 8 T U V Q 8 DIAL 9 W X Y Z 9 DIAL 1 NOTES 1 When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previ ous character press UP to move the cursor one space to the right 2 Other symbols are available for DIAL To cancel an individual alarm and reminder message Press TRANSFER and then dial 112 Dial alarm number 1 2 or 3 e Press the HOLD button Press the TRANSFER button PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES Each personal speed dial number can have an 11 character name assigned to it This name is used to select the speed dial bin when you are dialing by directory Press TRANSFER and then dial 106 Dial the speed dial bin number 00 49 Write your message using the procedure described in Alarm Reminder Mes sages Press the TRANSFER button to store the speed dial name Repeat for each speed dial bin if necessary STATION NAMES You can assign an 11 character name to your keyset This allows other display key set users to call you using the directory dial feature To program a station name Press TRANSFER and then dial 104 Enterthe 11 character name using the procedure described in Alarm Remind er Messages
227. d replace it The display will return to date and time 47 VIEWING MESSAGE INDICATIONS You can view all of your message indications before you return them With the handset on hook press the MESSAGE key with the red flashing light The first station that left a message indication will be displayed Press the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the stations that left mes sage indications Use the soft keys to reply clear or advance to the next mes sage Press the ANS RLS key to return your keyset to the idle condition ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES When you use the alarm appointment reminder feature you create a 16 charac ter reminder message When the alarm rings your message will appear instead of ALARM REMINDER To program reminder messages Press TRANSFER and then dial 116 Dialthe alarm number 1 2 or 3 Dial the time you want the alarm to go off Enter the time as HHMM hours minutes using the 24 hour clock e Dial 0 NOT SET 1 TODAY or 2 DAILY to select the alarm type Write your message using the dial pad keys Each press of a key selects a char acter Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position For exam ple if your message is TAKE MEDICATION press 8 once to get the letter T Press 2 once to get A Press 5 twice to get Continue selecting characters from the following table to complete your message Press the TRANSFER key to store the alarm and re
228. d so that the alarm information can viewed When alarm occurs the user 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 lt 2 2 press the SYSTEM ALARM button to view and scroll through the alarms This will silence the audible part of the alarm but the SYSTEM ALARM button will continue to flash until your Service Company views and clears the alarms the 5 Q Q 9 9 9 9 9 9 alarm report located the system software 5 gt o 9 gt 1 gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 2 Zr n 2 2 212 a o o o o o o o o o 2 gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt 0 a 5 2 2 2 2 2 5 5 ax eo gt gt gt gt gt 4 5 5 E Lo Del 0 o o o o o o o Zz gt 2 gt 5 o a 85 5 Oe 9 0 2 xd o 9 8 5 6 a Ba DCS Keysets and 32 button not supported the OS 7100 35 36
229. d the TSI will stay on until all messages have been returned in the order received Your MESSAGE button indicator will stop flashing and the TSI will turn off when all messages have been returned NOTES 1 Display keyset users can view message indications and return them in any order See Viewing Message Indications under Display Features 38 Table of Contents ITP 5112L 2 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 3 Ifa message has been left at your keyset by a keyset in Auto Answer you must manually cancel the message after it has been returned PROGRAMMED MESSAGES When you will be away from your phone for any length of time you can leave a programmed station message Display stations calling you will see this message and be informed of your status or follow your instructions Dial 48 plus any of the message codes 01 20 listed on the back of this user guide To cancel any of these messages you might have selected dial 48 plus 00 Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button You can have multiple programmed message buttons PMSG and each one have a different message code Press any programmed message PMSG button The message is set and the PGM MSG button indicator will be l
230. d verified codes can contain the digits 0 9 OfficeServ 500 amp 7100 999 entries OfficeServ 100 500 entries OfficeServ 7200 amp 7400 999 entries Table of Contents System Admin NOT VERIFIED When set for this option the user must enter an account code for all outgoing calls but the account code is not verified against the system list Non verified account codes can contain the digits 0 9 and st USING FORCED ACCOUNT CODES Liftthe handset and press the ACCT CODE key or dial 47 Enter the account code Press the account code button again press TRSF or hookflash on an SLT If a correct code is entered you will hear a dial tone and you can make an outside call in the usual manner If an incorrect code is entered the station returns error tone This code will always print on SMDR reports For information on entering and changing forced account codes see the system administrator programming sec tion of this book AUTHORIZATION CODES Authorization codes are used to validate a station user and give permission to make a call These four digit authorization codes can be either forced or optional but if used are always verified from a system list of 500 entries on the OfficeServ 500 M or L version the OfficeServ 7100 OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400 250 entries on the OfficeServ 100 and OfficeServ 7100 Each authorization code has an associated class of service When the code is entered the class of service is ch
231. de To activate this feature e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 031 to turn the Hot Keypad on or 030 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection KEY CONFIRMATION TONE You can hear a short beep confirmation tone each time you press a button on the dial pad This tone can be turned on or off While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 040 to turn tones off or 041 to turn tones on Press TRANSFER to store your selection REJOINING A PAGE This feature allows you to hear the remaining portion of an ongoing internal page after you return your keyset to idle To enable this feature e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Dial 051 to turn this feature on or 050 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection RING PREFERENCE This feature automatically answers ringing calls when you lift the handset or press the ANS RLS key This method will always answer calls in the order they arrived at your keyset When you turn ring preference off you must press the flashing button to answer a call allowing you to answer calls in the order you choose e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 061 to turn ring preference on or 060 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection 43 AUTO ANSWER CALLS This option will allow CO calls that directly ring your phone to auto answer When a CO call arrives
232. described in this book please con tact your installation and service company to determine the correct code THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW USER ORIENTATION The ITP model telephones are called IP keysets The IP keyset incorporates but tons or keys that are used to access or activate the many features of your office phone system The lower five buttons ten total that reside on either side of the Large Display screen are programmable buttons This means they can be pro grammed for a specific function on your keyset and that same button can be something different on another keyset See the system manager to get your most frequently used features assigned to your programmable buttons The top button on either side of the Large Display Screen scrolls through the var ious levels of the programmable button display screens Lines from the telephone company are C O lines Calls on these lines are referred to as outside calls Your system can have individual C O line buttons or lines may be assigned to groups When they are in a group you access a line by dialing an access code or pressing a route button For example dial 9 or press a LOCAL but ton to get a local outside line If Least Cost Routing is used pressing the LCR but ton will automatically select a preprogrammed line according to what digits are dialed Each line in the system is numbered beginning with 701 then 702 703 etc Direct Station Selection DSS
233. dial 13 to unlock the door CALLING THE DOOR PHONE ROOM MONITOR You may call the door phone and listen to what may be happening outside or in another room Dial the extension number of the door phone You will be connected to the door phone and you can listen or have con versation e electric door lock release is installed dial 13 to unlock the door NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key EXECUTIVE SECRETARY HOT LINE If programmed an executive and a secretary can have a hot line between them When the executive station is in the DND mode all of its calls will ring the secre tary station Either person can press the BOSS key to make a voice call to the other station Using the hot line will override DND at the other station This key will light red when the other station is in use To transfer a call to a Boss in DND Press the TRANSFER key followed by the BOSS key e Wait for the BOSS to answer to announce the call and hang up to complete the transfer OR Hangup to complete a blind transfer after pressing the BOSS key EXECUTIVE DIVERT When the executive station is in the DIVERT mode all of his her calls will ring the secretary station Press the DIVERT key to pass call while ringing 37 To transfer all calls to the Secretary Press the DIVERT key while the phone is idle The LED will be lit and all calls w
234. directory information you can store the number you are given using the SAVE feature There is no need for pencil and paper While you are talking on an outside call press SAVE Dialthe telephone number as it is dictated to you on the keypad Press SAVE to store the number To dial the number press the SNR button It will select the same line and dial the stored number If necessary you can select a different line and then press the SNR button 30 Table of Contents ITP 5107S PAGING AND MESSAGING MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE To make an announcement through the keyset speakers in the idle condition e Lift the handset Press the PAGE button or dial 55 e Dialthe desired zone number 0 1 2 3 or 4 After the attention tone make your announcement NOTE If you have a dedicated page zone button it is not necessary to press PAGE and dial a zone number MAKING AN EXTERNAL PAGE To make an announcement through the external paging speakers Lift the handset e Press the PAGE button or dial 55 Dialthe desired zone number 5 6 7 or 8 OR Dial 9 to page all external zones After the attention tone make your announcement NOTE If you have a dedicated page zone button it is not necessary to press PAGE and dial a zone number ALL PAGE To page all designated keysets in internal zone 0 and all external zones at the same time Lift the handset Press the PAGE button or dial 55 Dial k or press t
235. ds If you have set a callback your CBK key will light 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before dialing CANCELING CALLBACK A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds If you have set a callback your CBK key will light Your phone may have a maximum of five callbacks to lines and or stations set at a time To cancel a callback e Press the key if programmed or dial 44 You will hear confirmation tone While you are listening to confirmation tone press the HOLD key This will cancel the oldest set callback NOTES 1 Ifthe hot keypad feature is turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before dialing INTERCOM CALLS OTHER STATIONS Dial the extension number or group number Wait for the party to answer If you hear a brief tone burst instead of ringback tone the station you called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer Begin speaking immediately after the tone Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS RLS key NOTES 1 If you have a DSS key assigned to an extension or station group you may press this key instead of dialing the number 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing ANSWERING INTERCOM CALLS When your keyset rings simply lift the handset OR press
236. dset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 24 Table of Contents ITP 5112L TRANSFERRING CALLS Transfer is used to send any calls to another extension in one of two ways You can do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can do a blind transfer without notification e While on a call press the TRANSFER button and dial an extension number or group number Your call is automatically put on transfer hold OR press DSS button or station group button Your call is automatically put on transfer hold Hang up when you hear ringing this is unscreened or blind transfer for the called party to answer and advise him her of the call and hang up If the transfer is refused you will be reconnected to the outside line when the called station hangs up or you can press TRANSFER to return to the outside party f you wish to send the call to another extension without waiting for the first station to hang up simply press another DSS button OR press the CALL button or line button to return to the outside party and begin the trans fer process again When you are transferring call to a keyset set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer the transferred call will always ring NOTES 1 Afterthe inside party answers you may alternate back and forth between the parties by pressing the TRANSFER button 2 If you receive No More Calls tone that station has no b
237. dvance to the next program 1 11 OfficeServ 7100 USER INSTRUCTIONS TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 APRIL 2007 1 10 CHECKING STATION STATUS This program displays the following attributes of a station port This is a read only feature 0 PORT Cabinet 2 Slot 3 1 PICKUP GROUP None 01 20 2 SGR Station Group Number 3 BOSS SECR None 1 4 4 PAGE Page Zone 1 4 5 COS NO COS 1 30 per Ring Plan 01 06 6 TENANT GROUP 1 ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press the transfer key followed by 108 201 STN STATUS Display shows PORT C1 S02 P01 2 Press UP or DOWN to view the status items 201 STN STATUS TYPE 24B US SET 3 Press the transfer key to exit 1 12 OfficeServ 7100 USER INSTRUCTIONS TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 APRIL 2007 1 11 CHANGING YOUR TIME AND DATE DISPLAY Display keysets will always have the date and time displayed when not in use You can select from the following display options 0 COUNTRY Sets overall display format and has two options 0 ORIENTAL MM DD DAY 1 WESTERN DAY DD MM HH MM 1 CLOCK Sets format of clock display and has two options 0 12 HOUR Displays 1 as 01 00 24 HOUR Displays 1 as 13 00 2 DISPLAY Sets format of DAY and MONTH display and has two options 0 UPPER CASE Displays Friday as FRI and March as MAR LOWER CASE Displays Friday as Fri and March as Mar ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press the transfer key followed by 109 201 DAY FORMAT Display shows COUNTRY WESTERN 2 Press
238. e Discard the current mes sage it is retained as new Plays first 7 seconds of a message then skips to next message This is similar to the scan button on a radio It will allow you to find a specific mes sage quickly To stop scanning press 1 Cancel and return to previous menu o GROUP NEW OLD MESSAGES Messages can be grouped as either Reminders press 3 or Messages from a spe cific sender press 9 Additionally you can press and hear a summary of your mailbox contents a Number of messages b Number of reminders c Number of urgent messages d Number of messages needing a callback e Number of private messages f Number of fax messages RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE This option is used to send a message to another subscriber The steps are simple a Enter the recipient s mailbox number or if this is not known enter to use the system directory 65 Record your message at the tone After recording the message you will hear the Send Menu with the following functions Review Continue Recording Discard and Re Record Set Message Attributes Delivery Options Schedule Future Delivery Save and Send then Send a Copy to Someone Else Save and Send the Recording 0 Setting Message Attributes If after recording a message you select 4 you can set up any combination of the following delivery options Urgent Delivery Return Receipt Requeste
239. e ALL PAGE button After the attention tone make your announcement NOTE The LED on the PAGE button will only light when an All Page is in progress 33 Lift the handset Press the Meet Me Page MMPG button or dial 54 Dial the desired zone number After the attention tone instruct the paged person to dial 56 Press WAIT or TRANSFER e Remain off hook until the person dials 56 from any phone The paged person will be automatically connected with you CALL PARK AND PAGE When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his her desk you can park the call prior to paging There are two different methods MANUAL PARK ORBITS While in conversation press the PARK button Entered a desired orbit number 0 9 if the orbit number is busy dial another orbit number Display users can press k to automatically place the call in any available orbit number and see the number in the display Remember the selected orbit number Replace the handset when finished Lift the handset and make a page announcement as previously described example John Smith park two To retrieve a parked call from orbit e Press the PARK button and dial the announced orbit number 0 9 You will be connected to the parked call NOTES 1 You must have a PARK button or park access code to retrieve and place calls in park orbits 2 Ifthe parked call is not retrieved within a pre programmed period o
240. e HOLD button e Press the TRANSFER button PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES Each personal speed dial number can have an 11 character name assigned to it This name is used to select the speed dial bin when you are dialing by directory Press TRANSFER and then dial 106 Dialthe speed dial bin number 00 49 Write your message using the procedure described in Alarm Reminder Mes sages Press the TRANSFER button to store the speed dial name Repeat for each speed dial bin if necessary STATION NAMES You can assign an 11 character name to your keyset This allows other display key set users to call you using the directory dial feature To program a station name Press TRANSFER and then dial 104 Enterthe 11 character name using the procedure described in Alarm Remind er Messages Press TRANSFER to store the name 52 Table of Contents ITP 5121D MANAGING KEY ASSIGNMENTS You can view your key assignments and add extenders to some of your program mable keys for easy one touch operation of frequently used features While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 107 Use the VOLUME buttons to scroll through all of your programmable buttons OR press the programmable button to which you want to add the extender When you reach a key listed below dial the corresponding extender Press TRANSFER to store and exit programming Please refer to the Enhanced Display Programming Section provided by your instal
241. e Press the INQUIRE button OR Press the CID button and then the INQUIRE soft key Dial the trunk number You may use NND to view more information about this call OR You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE If you are on a call Press the INQUIRE button Your existing call will go on hold OR Press the CID button and then the INQUIRE soft key to place the first call on hold Dial the trunk number You may use NND to view more information about this call OR You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE NOTES 1 If you are on an intercom call or you have Automatic Hold turned off you must finish the existing call or place it on hold before inquiring 2 Ifyou inquire about an outgoing call you will receive a call no longer avail able display REVIEWING PAST CALLER ID CALLS This feature allows you to review CID information for calls sent to your keyset This list can contain 10 50 calls in a last in first out basis The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your keyset but that you did not answer missed calls When reviewing this list you can press one button to dial the person back The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number access the CID infor mation stored in your REVIEW list e Press the REVIEW button OR Press the CID button and then press the REVIEW button you have entries in your review list the most recent call will be shown first
242. e UP DOWN keys to scroll through your list of calls Press the CLEAR button to erase this number from the list Press the NND key repeatedly to view the Name Number or Date associated with this call Press the DIAL key to call this number These options are the same for the incoming or outgoing call logs DIAL BY NAME Each station or speed dial number can have an associated directory name sta tion or speed dial number can be selected by scrolling alphabetically through a directory name list This on line phone book allows the user to look up and dial any station or speed dial number in seconds Press the DIR button DIRECTORY Select the directory you wish to use PERS personal speed dial numbers SYS system speed dial numbers or STN station names Dialthe key on the keypad that corresponds to the first letter of the name you wish to search for Use the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the names Press the DIAL soft key to dial the number NOTE A DIR button can have an extender to take you directly to one of the above lists PERS SYS or STN 46 Table of Contents ITP 5107S CALL PROGRESS DISPLAYS During everyday call handling your keyset display will provide information that is helpful and in some cases invaluable Displays like CALL FROM 203 TRANSFER TO 202 701 RINGING TRANSFER FM 203 708 busy Camp on to 204 Recall from 204 Call for 501 message frm 204 and
243. e allows two digital keyset users to respond to each other with prepro grammed text messages After receiving an Off Hook Voice Announcement or Station Camp On you may respond with a text message while continuing to talk and listen to your outside party The other station can view this message and take the appropriate action or respond back with another text message You must be permitted to use the Text Messaging feature See your System Administrator or Technician to be assigned this feature They will assign you ten 10 blank messages You can create any 16 character messages 01 to 10 that are appropriate for your use NOTE See ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES for instructions on how to enter charac ters to create a text message Familiarization with the two digit message numbers you will use the most will make this procedure quick and easy However if you do not know them use the UP DOWN button to scroll to the desired message then press SEND The basics steps in text messaging are Press TMSG soft key to begin text messaging Dial the 2 digit number for the desired message Confirm this is the intended message then press SEND Wait for a reply from the other station steps 1 2 amp 3 When any station presses EXIT the displays at both stations return to their previous call progress condition Sn oe pU NS c At all times after step 1 you can talk and listen to your caller while repeating steps 2 The following example will b
244. e and Pending If authorized you can group your reminders as Commitments Follow Ups or Tasks for bet ter organization The system will flag each reminder as Active or Pending pending means scheduled for future delivery Stored Numbers Allows you to enter up 9 stored phone numbers The first five of these are used in the Find Me feature but any of them 1 9 can be easily dialed using only one digit followed by the pound key to be used by many other features from within your subscriber space ie Follow Me Message Alert Pager Alert and Direct Call Schedule Availability Allows you to enter a weekly availability schedule for use with Night Personal Greeting and the Auto Night Intercept feature Follow the spoken directions to enter the days of the week and times you are generally available to talk to your callers All other times you will be considered unavailable Place a Direct Call Allows you to place a direct call out of the Samsung Voicemail from any where You may either dial the number or dial a single digit 1 5 that corre sponds to a stored number See Personal Services 2 Stored Numbers This feature must be authorized by the System Administrator and can be limited or opened to internal local and long distance calls Personal Administration This area is used during the initial set up of your Subscriber Settings see next section 73 Table of Contents DS 5000 PERSONAL ADMINISTRATION SE
245. e and automatically redial the same number for you You will hear the call being made through the keyset speaker The micro phone is muted When the called party answers lift the handset or press the flashing SPEAK ER to begin speaking NOTES 1 If you make another call auto redial is canceled 2 Tocancelan auto retry lift and replace the handset PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER When making an outside call on a dial pulse line press All digits dialed after the with be sent as tones MEMO REDIALING When you are calling directory information you can store the number you are given using the SAVE feature There is no need for pencil and paper While you are talking on an outside call press SAVE e Dialthe telephone number as it is dictated to you on the key pad e Press SAVE to store the number To dial the number press the SAVE REPEAT button It will select the same line and dial the stored number If necessary you can select a different line and then press the SAVE REPEAT button 35 Press WAIT or TRANSFER PAG ESSAG e Remain off hook until the person dials 56 from any phone The paged person will be automatically connected with you MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE CALL PARK AND PAGE To make an announcement through the keyset speakers in the idle condition When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his her desk you can park the call prior to paging The OfficeServ 100 OfficeSer
246. e call will flash green at your keyset If this call appears on a line key at other keysets it will flash red at those keysets Totake the caller off hold press that key and the green flashing light will go steady green again Resume the conversation NOTE While on a call pressing a line key route key or flashing CALL button will automatically put your first call on hold and connect you to the new call See Automatic Hold under Customizing Your Keyset EXCLUSIVE HOLD To place an outside call on hold at your phone so that other users cannot get it Press the HOLD button twice The call will flash green on your keyset and this line will show a steady red light on other keysets retrieve the call press the flashing green line button or press the HOLD button a third time NOTE Intercom calls will always be placed on exclusive hold REMOTE HOLD When you wish to place a call on hold at another station Press TRANSFER and a dial the station number or press the appropriate DSS key Press the HOLD key This will place the call on system hold on an available CALL button or Line Key at the remote station and return you to dial tone NOTES 1 If the destination station does not have any free CALL buttons or line keys you will hear No More Calls tone and must return to the other party by pressing the TRANSFER key or the RETURN soft key in the display 2 Intercom calls cannot be remote held HOLD RECALL If you l
247. e continuing to talk and listen to your outside party The other station can view this message and take the appropriate action or respond back with another text message You must be permitted to use the Text Messaging feature See your System Administrator or Technician to be assigned this feature They will assign you ten 10 blank messages You can create any 16 character messages 01 to 10 that are appropriate for your use NOTE See ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES for instructions on how to enter charac ters to create a text message Familiarization with the two digit message numbers you will use the most will make this procedure quick and easy However if you do not know them use the UP DOWN key to scroll to the desired message then press SEND The basics steps in text messaging are Press TMSG soft key to begin text messaging Dial the 2 digit number for the desired message Confirm this is the intended message then press SEND Wait for a reply from the other station steps 1 2 amp 3 When any station presses EXIT the displays at both stations return to their previous call progress condition Uude e NA c At all times after step 1 you can talk and listen to your caller while repeating steps 2 The example on the following page will better demonstrate how to use Text Messaging In this example station 201 is making an off hook voice announce ment to station 205 who after hearing the announcement will respond with a text me
248. e cursor left and right HOLD Used to clear an entry ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press TRSF and then dial 512 RING PLAN Display shows FOLLOW1 2 Press the right soft key to move the RING PLAN cursor to bottom half of display FOLLOWL 3 Enter the desired ring plan e g 0 6 RING PLAN Display will return to STEP 1 FOLLOW4 4 Press UP or DOWN to change display ASSIGN HOLIDAY to holiday assignment 0 5 5 Press the right soft key to move the ASSIGN HOLIDAY cursor to bottom half of display ole 6 Enter a desired holiday date ASSIGN HOLIDAY e g 1225 01 7 Press TRSF to store and exit ASSIGN HOLIDAY programming OR press SPK to store 01 1225 and advance to the next program 33 Table of Contents System Admin CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION This program is used to swap information associated with two stations All assign ments such as trunk ring station group station COS station speed dial etc will fol low this program 18 button keysets and 28 button keysets can be exchanged If incompatible set types are selected the system will provide an ERROR NO MATCH message 18 button and 28 button key assignments should be taken in consider ation when relocating these type of sets The table below shows which phones can be switched with each other NOTE order to use this program it must first be activated by a technician Please see your installing company to have this done if you wish to use this program PROGRAM KEYS UP amp D
249. e desired Secretary press the soft key asso ciated with that Secretary and press NEXT button Scroll to the desired message and press the associated soft key or ENTER The message is sent Executive Divert From the BOSS keyset when the keyset rings press the EXEC DIVERT button The call is forwarded to the Secretary station 45 Pressing the EXEC DIVERT button when the keyset is in idle status will divert all calls after to the Secretary station Pressing the EXEC DIVERT button again will cancel the divert function GROUP LISTENING When you are engaged on a call and you are using the handset you may want other people to hear the distant party s voice over the speaker Press the LISTEN button to turn on the speaker The microphone is not in use so the distant party does not hear other parties present in your office Press LISTEN again to turn the speaker off and resume private conversation Repeat if necessary NOTE Depending on speaker volume and the acoustics of your office it may be advisable to turn the group listening feature off before hanging up This will elim inate a momentary squeal ACCOUNT CODES When equipped with optional equipment your system will allow calls to be charged to a specific account During any outside call press the account ACC button Enter the digit account code bin number when prompted OR If your button has an extender of 000 enter the account code m
250. e display 2 Intercom calls cannot be remote held HOLD RECALL If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer it will recall your station The button that the call appears on will have a slow flashing amber light When your phone rings lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer the recall Table of Contents DS 5000 e Ifyou do not answer this recall within a pre programmed period of time it will go to the system operator CONSULTATION HOLD When you are talking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with anoth er extension Press the TRANSFER button you will receive transfer dial tone Your call is placed on transfer hold e the extension number Consult with the internal party Press TRANSFER to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call NOTE Repeatedly pressing the TRANSFER button will toggle between the outside party and internal extension If necessary you may disconnect either one of the parties by pressing the DROP button RETRIEVING CALLS HELD AT ANOTHER STATION When a line is on hold and it appears on your keyset press the line button with the red flashing light When a line is on hold and it does not appear on your keyset dial 12 plus the line number or the extension number of the station that placed the call on hold NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you beg
251. e first station that left a message indication will be displayed Press the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the stations that left mes sage indications Use the soft keys to reply clear or advance to the next mes sage Press the END button to return your keyset to the idle condition PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES Each personal speed dial number can have an 11 character name assigned to it This name is used to select the speed dial bin when you are dialing by directory Press TRANSFER and then dial 106 e Dial the speed dial bin number 00 49 Write your message using the procedure described in Alarm Reminder Press the TRANSFER key to store the speed dial name e Repeat for each speed dial bin if necessary See Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers Section STATION NAMES See Application Program Menus My Phone MANAGING KEY ASSIGNMENTS You can view your key assignments and add extenders to some of your program mable keys for easy one touch operation of frequently used features e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 107 Use the VOLUME buttons to scroll through all of your programmable buttons OR press the programmable button to which you want to add the extender When you reach a key listed below dial the corresponding extender Press TRANSFER to store and exit programming Please refer to the Enhanced Display Programming Section provided by your instal lation company when requested fo
252. e is supplied you may listen to music through the speaker in your keyset While on hook press the HOLD button to hear music Press the HOLD button again to turn music off You can set the level of background music by using the VOLUME buttons while lis tening to the music This does not affect the speakerphone level 40 Table of Contents ITP 5112L ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP To pick up an established call in progress at a single line extension connected to a computer modem on your PC Press the EP button for that station on your keyset and the call is automati cally moved to your keyset The single line extension on your modem will be disconnected NOTE You must have an assigned EP button button on your regular keyset for the single line station APPOINTMENT REMINDER ALARM REMINDER ALARM CLOCK This feature works like an alarm clock Use it to remind yourself of an appointment later in the day TODAY ONLY or as a daily reminder every day DAILY You can set up to three alarms Each one can be either a TODAY ONLY or a DAILY alarm When the alarm rings you will hear three short rings repeated three times Lift the handset to answer the alarm If you do not the alarm will alert you two more times at five minute intervals Set alarm for desired duration Everyday Once These alarms can be used to remind you of an appointment later in the day Once or as a daily reminder Everyday There are two possible alar
253. e lit Call the Samsung Voicemail by pressing this key and when prompted enter your pass word You will then be at the Subscriber Services Menu Select 1 to listen to new messages or 3 to listen to saved messages Note After you enter your password if Autoplay of New Messages is enabled and you have new messages the Samsung Voicemail will begin to play them auto matically A subscriber can control this feature From the Subscriber Services Menu 6 5 toggles Autoplay of New Messages ON OFF SUBSCRIBER SERVICES MENU The following is a list of all the options available in the Subscriber Main Menu 1 LISTENING TO NEW MESSAGES 11 GROUP NEW MESSAGES 2 RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE 3 LISTENING TO OLD MESSAGES 33 GROUP OLD MESSAGES 4 ACCESS MANAGER 5 PERSONAL GREETINGS 6 MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION 8 PAUSE RESUME 63 0 PLAY MENU OPTIONS EXIT TO AUTO ATTENDANT PERSONAL SERVICES LISTENING OLD OR NEW MESSAGES 55 77 64 Play replay the message you just heard Play the previous message Save the message you just heard and listen to the next message Delete the message you just heard and listen to the next message Reply to the message This will allow you to leave a message in the mailbox of the sender if the sender has a mailbox on this system Return the call directly to the telephone number that left the message This will work for internal and external callers but Caller I
254. e lit solid to indicate this Pressing the button while the button indicator is lit solid will cause the keyset to return to handset mode and the button indicator will go blank HOT KEYPAD On your phone system your keyset s keypad can be made live or hot so that it is not necessary to lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing Calls can be made and features activated by simply dialing the C O line number trunk group access code intercom number or feature access code e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 031 to turn the Hot Keypad on or 030 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection 52 Table of Contents ITP 5112L From the LCD e Press MENU button Scroll to SETUP option press ENTER Scroll to STATION ON OFF and press ENTER OR you may dial 6 and immediately enter the option Scroll to HOT KEYPAD press ENTER to change option status Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu press END to return to idle screen KEY CONFIRMATION TONE You can hear a short beep confirmation tone each time you press a button on the dial pad This tone can be turned on or off e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 040 to turn tones off or 041 to turn tones on Press TRANSFER to store your selection Additional ring tones can be selected from the SOUND SCREEN Keytone Select option RE
255. e me a message press 1 Busy Greeting Played to a caller when you are already talking to someone on your extension or the telephone at your Designated Location This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Busy Greeting feature this is John Smith I m on another line right now If someone else can help you please enter the extension number now Or to leave a message press 1 Call Blocking Greeting Used while Call Blocking is enabled in your Access Manager or if your phone is forwarded ALL or DND This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Call Blocking feature Example Hi this is John Smith Sorry missed your call but I m going to be out of the office for the next few hours If someone else help you please enter the extension number now Or to leave me a message press 1 Night Greeting Used during the time period you are scheduled UNAVAILABLE usually after business hours during the evening and at night This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Scheduling feature Example Hi this is John Smith I ve left the office for the evening If you would like to try someone else please enter the extension number now Or to leave me a message press 1 Call Screening Greeting Used while Call Screening is enabled and you REJECT a caller after listening to the caller s record name This o
256. e the number that was dialed After investigating you may barge in on the conversation disconnect the call or hang up your phone to end the investigation your keyset press the INVESTIGATE key Enter your station passcode Default passcodes cannot be used Enter the station number to be investigated You can now press BARGE to barge in on the conversation OR You can press NND to view more information about the call OR You can press DROP to disconnect the call NOTES 1 If the call is an outgoing call the NND key will not appear 2 This feature requires optional software and or hardware Please ask your installation and service company for details WARNING This feature may violate state or federal laws concerning the right to privacy Samsung Telecommunications America is in no way re sponsible for the possible misuse of this feature NOTE This information is NOT repeated in this user guide OTS SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR PROGRAMMING CUSTOMER LEVEL ACCESS Before any customer programs can be accessed you must first open system pro gramming using the passcode you have been assigned You must use a display keyset Should it become necessary to change this passcode see your service com pany While on hook press TRSF and then dial 200 Your display shows ENABLE CUS PROG PASSCODE Dial the four digit passcode The display shows ENABLE CUS PROG DISABLE
257. e to get A Press 5 twice to get Continue selecting characters from the following table to complete your message Press the TRANSFER button to store the alarm and reminder message e Repeat for each alarm if needed COUNT 1 2 3 4 5 0 lt gt 0 DIAL 1 5 1 DIAL 2 2 DIAL 3 D E 3 DIAL 4 G H 4 DIAL 5 J K L 5 DIAL 6 M N 0 A 6 48 Table of Contents 51075 DIAL 7 0 R S 7 DIAL 8 U V Q 8 DIAL 9 W X Y Z 9 DIAL 1 NOTES 1 When the character you want appears on the same pad key as the previ ous character press UP to move the cursor one space to the right 2 Other symbols are available for DIAL To cancel an individual alarm and reminder message Press TRANSFER and then dial 112 Dial alarm number 1 2 or 3 e Press the HOLD button e Press the TRANSFER button PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES Each personal speed dial number can have an 11 character name assigned to it This name is used to select the speed dial bin when you are dialing by directory Press TRANSFER and then dial 106 Dial the speed dial bin number 00 49 Write your message using the procedure described in Alarm Reminder Mes sages Press the TRANSFER button to store the speed dial name Repeat for each speed dial bin if necessary STATION NAMES You can assign an 11 character name to your keyset This allows other display key set users to cal
258. e your selection From the LCD Press the MENU button from the idle screen Select SETUP Select STATION ON OFF Scroll to SECURE OHVA and press ENTER to change status e Press CANCEL to return to option Main Screen Press the END to return to idle screen 55 DISPLAY FEATURES DIRECTORY INFORMATION An 11 character directory name can be assigned to each extension number Display keyset users can view the name of the called or calling station before an swering Each outside line can have an 11 character directory name Incoming calls can be easily identified and answered with different greetings Outside and internal calls ringing to a station group will display CALL FOR xxx where xxx is the station group number This allows you to answer calls directed to you differently than calls directed to your group CALL LOG The system can log both incoming and outgoing calls placed from or to your tele phone You must have a LOG button programmed on your keyset and assigned a review list Each IN and OUT list can be up to 50 numbers maximum They are assigned in blocks of 10 each Press the LOG key Press either the IN or OUT key e View the first IN OUT telephone number At this point you may select one of the three options related to this number or use the UP DOWN keys to scroll through your list of calls e Press the CLEAR button to erase this number from the list Press the NND key repeatedly to view t
259. easy However if you do not know them use the UP DOWN button to scroll to the desired message then press SEND The basics steps in text messaging are Press TMSG soft key to begin text messaging Dial the 2 digit number for the desired message Confirm this is the intended message then press SEND Wait for a reply from the other station steps 1 2 amp 3 When any station presses EXIT the displays at both stations return to their previous call progress condition ew At all times after step 1 you can talk and listen to your caller while repeating steps 2 The following example will better demonstrate how to use Text Messaging In this example station 201 is making an off hook voice announcement to station 205 who after hearing the announcement will respond with a text message STATION 201 LINDA received a call on line 702 STATION 205 JOHN is talking on line 701 Talking on line 702 702 01 15 701 05 25 CONF PAGE MUTE 54 Table of Contents ITP 5121D Press TRANSFER Transfer RETURN Dial 205 205 busy OHVA CAMP ON 6 205 Wait for reply ASK THEM TO HOLD TMSG EXIT v 702 01 45 CONF PAGE MUTE OHVA from 201 TMSG REJECT GIVE THE CALL TMSG 01 SEND Dial 03 or press twice ASK THEM TO HOLD TMSG 03 SEND v Wait for reply 701 05 55 CONF PAGE MUTE 55 CALLER ID WHAT IS CALLER ID Caller ID is the name given to the telephone company provided feature
260. eate Programmed Station Messages Set Alarm Appointment Reminder with Message Managing Key rte ee tet treu ens Piogtansmindg COSS inuasit e Adding Names to the Translation Table 150 0 0 octo dere trees SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ALARMS 36 Table of Contents System Admin ABOUT THIS BOOK This book contains instructions for special features that every telephone user may not need to know The owner can decide who the system administrator will be and who will have access to these features Station users can be trained on only the items that apply to them This procedure will help control costs and telephone abuse Several of the features listed in this book are specific to the system operator or attendant position You can have more than one operator or set your system up to be used without an operator The designated system administrator can access specific programs and modify some functions to better manage the OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 OfficeServ 7000 Series office telephone systems Instructions are detailed and easy to follow When assistance is needed contact your installation and service company SPECIAL FEATURES SYSTEM RING PLANS Your system is designed to have a maximum of six different Ring Plans Each ring plan can be programmed to allow
261. eave a call on hold longer than the hold timer it will recall your station The button that the call appears on will have a slow flashing amber light When your phone rings lift the handset or press the ANS RLS key to answer the recall e If you do not answer this recall within a pre programmed period of time it will go to the system operator CONSULTATION HOLD When you are talking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with anoth er extension Press the TRANSFER key you will receive transfer dial tone Your call is placed on transfer hold Dial the extension number Consult with the internal party Press TRANSFER to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call NOTE Repeatedly pressing the TRANSFER key will toggle between the outside party and internal extension If necessary you may disconnect either one of the parties by pressing the DROP button RETRIEVING CALLS HELD AT ANOTHER STATION When a line is on hold and it appears on your keyset press the line button with the red flashing light When a line is on hold and it does not appear on your keyset dial 12 plus the line number or the extension number of the station that placed the call on hold NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing TRANSFERRING CALLS Transfer is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways You
262. eave a message directly If you dial a busy exten sion press to connect directly with the mailbox Self Memo Reminder Pressing will leave a message in your own mailbox This is useful to remind yourself of things to do now or in the future Messages can be sent with future delivery so you can have the system call you when items become due INTERACTIVE DISPLAYS Display keyset users have the added advantage of using the soft keys and displays to play save delete reply call forward rewind pause fast forward change the vol ume get message information or help Viewing Mailbox Contents If you have new messages in addition to the Terminal Status Indicator TSI you will be able to use the keyset displays and soft keys to communicate with the Samsung Voicemail 82 Table of Contents ITP 5121D PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS CODE NAME TELEPHONE NUMBER 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 83 Table of Contents ITP 5121D PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS NOTES CODE NAME TELEPHONE NUMBER 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
263. ed with this call Press the DIAL key to call this number This options are the same for the incoming or outgoing call logs DIAL BY NAME Each station or speed dial number have an associated directory name A sta tion or speed dial number can be selected by scrolling alphabetically through a directory name list This on line phone book allows the user to look up and dial any station or speed dial number in seconds e Press the DIR key DIRECTORY Selectthe directory you wish to use PERS personal speed dial numbers SYS system speed dial numbers or STN station names Dialthe key on the keypad that corresponds to the first letter of the name you wish to search for Use the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the names Press the DIAL soft key to dial the number NOTE A DIR key can have an extender to take you directly to one of the above lists PERS SYS or STN 46 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset CALL PROGRESS DISPLAYS During everyday call handling your keyset display will provide information that is helpful and in some cases invaluable Displays like CALL FROM 203 TRANSFER TO 202 701 RINGING TRANSFER FM 203 708 busy Camp on to 204 Recall from 204 Call for 501 message frm 204 and FWD ALL to 204 keep you in formed of what is happening and where you are In some conditions you are prompted to take an action and in other cases you receive directory information DISP
264. ed Listen to New Review Saved Record amp Send Access Personal Mailbox Personal Pause Resume Play Menu Messages Messages Messages Messages Manager Greetings Administration Services Options E Group New Messages 3 Assign and or Edit Change Review Group Messages Menu D lt Listen Menu Record Menu 1 Follow 1 Primary Greeting 1 Message Alert 1 Workload roup ay or a Directory ssign and or Edit ange lit Store 4 Gi PI 4 Dii 2 Assi d or Edi 2 Chi 2 Edit 5 Urgent Messages Message of Subscribers Busy Greeting Pager Notification Telephone Numbers Play Previous Create 1 i Group 4 iB Assign and or Edit Review Deleted Change Change 2 Callback Requests Message Reminder Block Calls 3 Blocking Greeting 3 Messages 3 Weekly Schedule 1 Password E Edi R Undeli Ri d Group Message Enter the Recipient s Number ssign and or Edit eview Undelivere ecor 3 Reminders 4 can forwarding 4 Night Greeting 4 Messages 5 Direct Call 2 Name Discard 4 Message 5 cas 5 Assign and or Edit 5 Auto Play 3 Enter Directory Private Messages 9 8 Screened Greeting New Messages Name Reply to Sender Stop Append to Group Recording Edit Only Auto Play Mess
265. ed of a ten digit telephone number and a 16 digit name See Program Station Names Open customer programming and follow the instructions below PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPK Used to store data and advance to next MMC HOLD Used to clear previous entry 31 Table of Contents System Admin ACTION 1 Press TRSF and then dial 728 Display shows first entry 2 Dialentry number e g 005 or 0005 OR use UP and DOWN to scroll through entries and press right soft key to select entry 3 Enter telephone number and press right soft key to advance to name entry OR enter telephone number and press left soft key to return to step 2 above 4 Enterthe name using the method in Program Station Names and press right or left soft key to return to step 2 above OR press SPK to save and advance to next MMC OR press TRSF to save and exit programming DEFAULT DATA NONE DISPLAY TRANSLATION 001 DIGIT TRANSLATION 005 DIGIT _ TRANSLATION 005 DIGIT 0 TRANSLATION 005 SAMSUNG TELECOM 32 HOLIDAY This program provides the ability to set as many as 20 different holidays Each hol iday will override the System Operating Mode for that particular date with a pro grammed ring plan PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through options KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Mov
266. ed to your keyset 2 Your system must have LCR correctly programmed to allow you to DIAL num bers from the review list or to STORE entries from the review list 64 Table of Contents APPLICATION PROGRAM MENUS Much of the call processing of the ITP 5112L can be accomplished by using the various feature function screens on the LCD Below are instructions for additional call processing and special applications that can be accomplished via the LCD programming These screens features and functions can be accessed by pressing the MENU button Follow the below user information to utilize these features and functions After pressing the MENU button use the direction button to high light desired menu icon For multi ple screen options the UP DOWN arrows at the top left and right sides of the LCD may be used to scroll on a per page basis Press ENTER to access that menu To nav igate within the menu you may scroll to the desired option func tion dial the associated option function number or press the asso ciated select button on either side of the display Press END button to exit programming PHONEBOOK This menu allows you to maintain a contact list of addresses phone numbers names speed numbers and call logs Refer to Speed Dialing and Programming Section E DIARY 1 WAKE UP CALL Set Wake Up call for desired duration Everyday Monday Saturday Monday Friday Using the direction
267. edial a number that has been saved press the SNR button or dial 17 NOTES 1 Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the saved number 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing STORING A CALLER ID NUMBER At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information you may save the CID number as a speed dial number in your personal speed dial list To store a Caller ID number in a personal speed dial bin Press the STORE button The system displays the speed dial bin in which the number was stored OR Press the CID button and then press the SCROLL button Press the STORE soft key The system displays the speed dial bin in which the number was stored NOTE Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the saved number If LCR is not being used on your system you will not be allowed to STORE CID numbers 53 INQUIRE CALLER ID PARK HOLD INFO If you are informed that an incoming call is on hold or has been parked for you you may view the Caller ID information before you retrieve the call This may influ ence how you choose to handle the call From an idle keyset e Press the INQUIRE button OR Press the CID button and then the INQUIRE soft key Dial the trunk number You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button OR You may use NND to view more inform
268. ee eRe eee Getting Starile ec i ech ici crs garb Listen to your Messages Subscriber Services Menu Listening to Old or New Messages Group New or Old Messages Record and Send a Message Access Mahlagel ui Personal Greetings Mailbox Administration Message Broadcast duda secti dcn ctos ud Personal Services Personal Administration Settings Keyser User Reabllle5 cto acce RO Interactive 8 PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS 78 79 HomePage Table of Contents 055000 ABOUT THIS BOOK Samsung s new DS 5000 Series is part of the OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 and OfficeServ 7000 Series The DS 5000 keysets incorporate an LCD screen which provides important infor mation for the user to make using the keyset easier and more convenient Your keyset is the most visible part of your telephone system Please take the time to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation of your keyset Keep this guide handy as you may need to look up instructions for infrequently used features Learning to use your keyset correctly will make everyday telephone communica tions a breeze This book is written based on the factory default settings for
269. eenter the group dial an access code plus the group number e g 501 plus 1 LOCKING YOUR STATION LOCKED osculis LOCKED m CALLS Hold Button LED Flashes Hold Button LED Solid Make outside calls YES NO ACCESS DENIED NO Receive outside calls YES YES NO Make intercom calls YES YES NO Receive intercom calls YES YES NO To lock your phone from making outgoing calls Lift handset to go offhook and dial 15100 plus your station passcode default 1234 then dial 1 Listen for system dial tone and replace handset Your station is now locked from making outgoing calls Table of Contents STD Telephone To lock your station from making both internal and outgoing calls PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS Lift handset to go offhook and dial 15100 plus your station passcode default 1234 then dial 2 CODE NAME TELEPHONE NUMBER Listen for system dial tone and replace handset Your station is now locked from making both internal and outgoing calls 00 To unlock your phone 01 Lift handset to go offhook and dial 15100 plus your station passcode default 1234 then dial 0 02 Listen for system dial tone and replace handset Your station is now 03 unlocked 04 CHANGING YOUR STATION 05 PASSCODE 06 To change your station user passcode 07 Lift handset to go offhook then dial 15101 08 Then dial your existing station passcode Then dial a new passcode must be four digits 09 L
270. eive internal calls in one of three modes see Answering Intercom Calls under ntercom Calls for descriptions While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 103 Dial 0 for Ringing 1 for Auto Answer or 2 for Voice Announce Press TRANSFER to store your selection From the LCD Press MENU button Scroll to SETUP option press ENTER Scroll to ANSWERING MODE and press ENTER OR you dial 1 and immediately enter the option Select desired station ring type setting Ring Auto Answer or Voice Announce Press ENTER to select and SAVE Press CANCEL to return to the Main Option Page OR press END to return to idle screen NOTE When your keyset is programmed for Auto Answer and you have Forward No Answer FNA turned on you must answer screened transfers by pressing the SEND button before your FNA timer expires or the call will forward SET ANSWER MODE CO Your incoming CO calls can be set to follow the intercom answer mode While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 15 to access AUTO ANS CO Press the VOLUME UP or DOWN key to change status Press TRANSFER to store your selection AUTOMATIC HOLD While on an outside call pressing a line button route button or a flashing CALL button will automatically put your call on hold and connect you to the next call This feature can be turned on or off at your keyset e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and the
271. elect button on the display associated with the number to redial use the DIRECTION or SCROLL button to move the cursor to the desired IMPORTANT Put phone in OVERLAP MODE Press the ENTER button to display the detailed information of the number Press the MENU button Press the SEND button to dial the number or press ENTER again Select SETUP and then select DIAL MODE Change it to OVERLAP If your phone is not in OVERLAP mode you must DIALING THE MOST RECENT OUTGOING always press the SEND button after dialing the digits to send the call Liftthehandsetand press an idle outside line button line group button or dial INCOMING N U MB ER a line access code to receive dial tone OR press an idle outside line button Press the SEND button The most recent call Internal or External to or from line group button or dial a line access code to receive dial tone through the the station will be displayed speaker OR lift the handset and dial the Trunk Group access code or sim Continue to press the SEND button and the system will automatically dial the ply start dialing number for you Dialthe telephone number or the Intercom number Finish the call by replacing the handset To disconnect a speakerphone call MAKING CALLS FROM THE CALL LOG press the END button The Station Call Log displays the last outgoing station and incoming trunk calls NOTES The total number of calls that can be displaye
272. en to saved messages Note After you enter your password if Autoplay of New Messages is enabled and you have new messages the Samsung Voicemail will begin to play them auto matically subscriber can control this feature From the Subscriber Services Menu 6 5 toggles Autoplay of New Messages ON OFF SUBSCRIBER SERVICES MENU The following is a list of all the options available in the Subscriber Main Menu 1 LISTENING TO NEW MESSAGES 11 GROUP NEW MESSAGES 2 RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE 3 LISTENING TO OLD MESSAGES 33 GROUP OLD MESSAGES 4 ACCESS MANAGER 5 PERSONAL GREETINGS 6 MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION 8 PAUSE RESUME 0 Table of Contents ITP 5121D PLAY MENU OPTIONS EXIT TO AUTO ATTENDANT PERSONAL SERVICES LISTENING OLD OR NEW MESSAGES 55 77 Play replay the message you just heard Play the previous message Save the message you just heard and listen to the next message Delete the message you just heard and listen to the next message Reply to the message This will allow you to leave a message in the mailbox of the sender if the sender has a mailbox on this system Return the call directly to the telephone number that left the message This will work for internal and external callers but Caller ID service is need ed to use this feature on an outside call Deliver a fax copy This will allow you to receive attached faxmail document s Faxmail docu ments can be delivered
273. en you are transferring a call to another station and you receive a busy signal you may camp the call on to this station Simply hang up when you hear the busy signal The called party will be alerted that a call is waiting for them NOTE If you receive No More Calls tone that station has no button available to receive another call Press TRANSFER to return to the outside caller TRANSFER TO VOICEMAIL This feature is used to send a call directly to a voice mailbox Your keyset must have a correctly programmed VT button to accomplish this To transfer a call directly to a voice mailbox e While on a call press the VT button and dial the mailbox number Hang up when dialing is completed CALL WAITING If an outside call has been camped on to your phone or another station has camped on to you You will hear a tone in the earpiece and the call that is waiting for you camped on will flash In addition the bottom line of the display will indicate the number of the station or trunk party camped on Press the flashing button to answer your other call will go on hold automati cally if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set If not you must press HOLD and then the flashing button OR 21 Finish the first call hang up the waiting call will ring the handset NOTE Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold CONFERENCE CALLS You may conference up to five parties you and four others in any combinatio
274. ents DS 5000 Lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer NOTE Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold CONFERENCE CALLS You may conference up to five parties you and four others in any combination of outside lines and internal stations in any order While engaged in a conversation press the CONF button and receive confer ence tone e Make another call either intercom or outside press the CONF button and receive conference tone Make another call or press the CONF button to join all parties e Repeat the last step until all parties are added NOTE When attempting to add another party to the conference and you are not able to reach the desired person hang up Simply press the CONF button again to return to your previous conversation To drop a party from your conference call Press CONF and dial the extension or line number that is to be dropped Press CONF again to reestablish the conference NOTE To leave the conference hang up Control is passed to the next internal sta tion If there are no internal stations and you wish to leave outside lines connect ed together in a trunk to trunk conference press the CONF button plus the CALL button that the call appears on or follow the instructions to drop a party and use your extension number When they hang up the lines will release automatically Press CONF to rejoin a trunk to trunk conference CONFERENCE SPLITTING If you are the controlling pa
275. epeatedly to send multiple signals to the des ignated station NOTE Your phone must have a Manual Signalling MS button with a station number extender assigned to it OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE Keysets may receive a voice announcement while on another call The calling sta tion must have an OHVA button When you are in DND you cannot receive OHVA calls The OHVA feature will work with intercom and transferred calls When you receive an OHVA and secure OHVA is ON you will hear the announce ment in the handset receiver if you are using the handset If secure OHVA is OFF then you will hear the announcement on the speaker if you are talking on the handset If you are using the speakerphone the announcement will always be heard through the speaker To make an off hook voice announcement Dialthe extension number or press the DSS button When you receive a busy signal press the OHVA button After the attention tone begin speaking Finish the call by replacing the handset Press the flashing CALL button on your keyset This will place the original party on hold and allow you to talk to the announcing party Toreturn to your first party press the button corresponding to your original call This will disconnect the OHVA call NOTES 1 When you are voice announcing to a station close to you use the handset to avoid an echo effect 2 You cannot off hook voice announce to single line telephones 36 Table of Con
276. er or mailbox number Subscriber and Mailbox numbers will usually match your extension number Enter your personal password when prompted the default password is 0000 Access your Subscriber Services or Mailbox from a Station other than your Own or checking a mailbox associated with a different station e Press the VMMSG key or dial the voicemail group number You will be prompted to enter a password Press This will take you to the Main Auto Attendant Menu Press st plus the Subscriber number of your choice You will be prompted to enter you password At this point the inside and outside callers follow the same instructions You will hear a message stating the number of messages left in your mailbox You will then hear the Subscriber Services Menu with the following options 1 Listen to New Messages See Listening to your Message Record and Send Message See Sending Messages Review Saved Messages See Listening to your Message Access Manager See Access Manager Personal Greetings See Personal Greetings Mailbox Administration See Mailbox Administration Personal Services See Personal Services gt B Return to Main Menu 71 Table of Contents ITP 5112L Subscriber Services Menu
277. er timer in MMC 502 expires 4 BUSY NO ANSWER This option will activate both the BUSY option and the NO ANSWER option at the same time 5 FWD DND This option will forward all calls to the programmed destination whenever the forwarded station goes into DND ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press the transfer key followed by 102 201 FORWARD Display shows 0 FORWARD CANCEL OfficeServ 7100 USER INSTRUCTIONS TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 APRIL 2007 2 Dial 0 to select forward type 201 FORWARD OR 1 ALL CALL NONE Press UP or DOWN to select forward type and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 3 Dial destination number e g 201 201 FORWARD OR 1 ALL CALL 205 Press UP or DOWN to select destination and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor 4 Dial 1 for YES 0 for NO 201 FORWARD OR CURENTLY SET YES Press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO and press RIGHT soft key to return to step 2 5 Pressthe transfer key to store and exit 1 6 OfficeServ 7100 USER INSTRUCTIONS TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 APRIL 2007 1 5 SETTING YOUR ANSWER MODE Each keyset can have its answer mode for intercom calls set to one of the following options RING The station will ring in one of eight custom ring patterns Calls are answered by pressing the ANS RLS key or lifting the handset giving a short attention tone the station will automatically answer calls on the speakerphone When a C O line is transferred to a station in Auto Answer the
278. er calls directed to you differently than calls directed to your group 48 Table of Contents ITP 5121D CALL LOG The system can log both incoming and outgoing calls placed from or to your tele phone You must have a LOG button programmed on your keyset and assigned a review list Each IN and OUT list can be up to 50 numbers maximum They are assigned in blocks of 10 each Press the LOG key Press either the IN or OUT key View the first IN OUT telephone number At this point you may select one of the three options related to this number or use the UP DOWN keys to scroll through your list of calls Press the CLEAR button to erase this number from the list Press the NND key repeatedly to view the Name Number or Date associated with this call Press the DIAL key to call this number These options are the same for the incoming or outgoing call logs DIAL BY NAME Each station or speed dial number have an associated directory name sta tion or speed dial number can be selected by scrolling alphabetically through a directory name list This on line phone book allows the user to look up and dial any station or speed dial number in seconds Press the DIR button DIRECTORY Select the directory you wish to use PERS personal speed dial numbers SYS system speed dial numbers or STN station names e Dialthe key on the keypad that corresponds to the first letter of the name you wish to sear
279. er does not wish his her name or number to be re vealed to you This type of call can be stopped at the tele phone company by dialing an access code on your outside lines This will redirect these PRIVATE calls to an announce ment that states that you do not wish to receive calls that have had Caller ID blocked The code to block these calls can usually be found in the front section of the telephone direc tory OUT OF AREA The caller is calling from an area that cannot provide Caller ID information for example international calls or he she is calling from a type of circuit that cannot provide Caller ID information for example some outbound WATS lines PAYPHONE The caller is calling from a coin operated telephone The telephone company will send this information as there are no directory listings for pay phones The number will be de livered as usual INVALID CID INFO This is a message that will be displayed when CID informa tion is sent on the line but was somehow corrupted NOCID RECEIVED This is a message that will be displayed when there was no CID information sent on the line 53 NO CID DSP Caller ID Digital Signal Processors CIDDSP s are resources in the OfficeServ 100 the OfficeServ 500 and OfficeServ 7000 Series systems required for receiving CID data If there are no CIDDSP s available at the time a call comes in this is the message you will see on your display NOTE The Caller ID features may require optiona
280. er page basis Press ENTER to access that menu To navigate within the menu you may scroll to the desired option function dial the associated option function number or press the associ ated select button on either side of the display Press the END button to exit programming FEATURE ACCESS CODES This user guide is written based on the default access code for using system fea tures If the system numbering plan has been changed some of the access codes may not be correct Your installing company can inform you the correct codes Table of Contents ITP 5112L SYSTEM TONES The system provides several tones to assist you Some of these tones are already familiar to you Intercom Dial Tone A steady tone that indicates you can begin dialing Ringback Tone Indicates the station you dialed is ringing RINGBACK TONE 1000 ms ON 3000 ms OFF m E CONTINUOUS Busy Tone Indicates the station you dialed is busy BUSY 500 ms ON 500 ms OFF umm 3 CONTINUOUS DND No More Calls Tone Fast busy tone indicates the station you dialed is in the Do Not Disturb mode or cannot receive any more Calls DND NO MORE CALLS TONE 250 ms ON 250 ms OFF E E FOR TEN SECONDS Transfer Conference Tone Indicates your call is being held and you can dial another party TRANSFER CONF TONE 100 ms ON 100 ms OFF PLL CONTINUOUS Confirmation Tone Very short beeps followed by dial tone indicate you have correctly set or
281. er sd cinia E ec eic o Busy Line Queuing With 0 3 00 15 Canceling Call Dack 15 INTERCOM CALLS Calling Other Sta thos a Answering Intercom Calls Answer B sy Busy Station Camp usce cin sensato tiras eer Calling Syste 18 CALL PROCESSING lel fe late 19 20 5 201 Transfer With Camp ON cuui scri dst aa racha et 21 Lii o o ane tod c 21 Cal 21 Conference Calls ai 23 24 25 25 26 DIALING FEATURES Speed DIS 27 Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers 27 28 One Touch Speed Mg a con 28 Last Number Redial uua actio o a caa acr oia Ra 28 haria Retro With Redial desi 29 Save Number With 29 Chaim Di oc es Dees 29
282. er set ting Direct Messaging DSS To make it easy to leave messages for others in your office without hav ing to dial their extension number first keyset users may simply dial plus a mailbox extension number and leave a message directly If you dial a busy exten sion press to connect directly with the mailbox Self Memo Reminder Pressing will leave a message in your own mailbox This is useful to remind yourself of things to do now or in the future Messages can be sent with future delivery so you can have the system call you when items become due INTERACTIVE DISPLAYS Display keyset users have the added advantage of using the soft keys and displays to play save delete reply call forward rewind pause fast forward change the volume get message information or help Viewing Mailbox Contents If you have new messages in addition to the Terminal Status Indicator TSI you will be able to use the keyset displays and soft keys to communicate with the Samsung Voicemail 77 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS CODE NAME TELEPHONE NUMBER CODE NAME TELEPHONE NUMBER 00 25 01 26 02 27 03 28 04 29 05 30 06 31 07 32 08 33 09 34 10 35 11
283. er station to join in our conversation by releasing pri vacy on the COO from your phone To Release Privacy While you are talking on a C O line and you wish to have other internal parties or up to three join the conversation Press the PRB button the PRB button will light steady red Inform the other party that he she may now join the conversation After the other party or parties has joined the conversation and you wish to return privacy to the line so that no one else can join the conversation press the PRB button a second time the PRB button will be off To Join a Non Private Conversation When someone has informed you that you can join a conversation e Press the line button that he she has indicated OR e Dial the C O line number that he she has indicated 23 DIALING FEATURES All DIALING FEATURES instructions are written to support Overlap Dialing mode This is the technical name for dialing from a telephone as it has been for many years recent years the cell phone industry has changed the cell phones to use Enblock Dialing With this dialing mode all the digits are dialed and then sent to the carrier after pressing the SEND key Please check your telephone setup to con firm what dialing mode is used SPEED DIALING You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system wide speed dial list of numbers 500 999 or from your personal list of numbers 00 49 Your system may be set f
284. erns Outside calls have a single ring tone repeated Internal calls a double ring tone repeated Door phone calls and alarm appointment reminders have a triple ring tone repeated CALL INDICATIONS The keys on your phone have light emitting diodes LEDs These are tri colored LEDs that light green red or amber green and red together Intercom calls also called internal calls always appear on your CALL buttons They will always light green You can have up to eight CALL buttons but at least two are recommended Outside calls appear on individual line keys if they are assigned When an individ ual line is not assigned to its own key it will appear on a CALL button Table of Contents iDCS Keyset Your outside calls will light green on your keyset and red on other keysets You never lose sight of your calls while they are on hold They stay right where you put them and are identified with a green flashing light Some simple rules to remember Any steady LED indicates the line or feature is in use A fast flashing green LED indicates new call ringing in Aslow flashing green or red LED indicates a call is on hold Aslow flashing amber LED indicates a recall to your keyset SPEAKERPHONE iDCS keysets are speaker phones Pressing the ANS RLS key will answer or release a call on the speakerphone Switching from the handset to the speaker phone is easy Press the SPEAKER key and hang up the hand
285. ersokial usta Message Broadcast u s Personal Services Personal Administration Settings Keyset User Features DS noinen titre tendu Gta qu Edad a et rca raram rri Interactive displays ausu dots docto PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS 89 90 Table of Contents ITP 5112L ABOUT THIS BOOK Samsung s new OfficeServ technology keyset model ITP 5112L is part of the OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 and OfficeServ 7000 Series The ITP 5112L IP keyset represents a new concept of Internet phone in that it uses an IP address to Send Receive voice and data For voice communications the ITP 5112L uses the data network line already in place in most offices and increasing number of homes The ITP 5112L IP keysets also incorporate a large LCD color screen which provides important information for the user to make using the keyset easier and more con venient Please take the time to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation of your keyset Keep this guide handy as you may need to look up instructions for infrequently used features This book is written based on factory default settings for the feature access codes Sometimes due to programming requirements these codes may be changed If you find that a feature code does not work as
286. ess HOLD to reset the passcode 205 PASSCODE PASSCODE 1234 4 Press the right soft key to return to step 2 OR press TRSF to store and exit programming OR press SPK to store and advance to the next program DEFAULT DATA ALL STATION PASSCODES 1234 PROGRAM STATION NAMES This program is used to assign a character name or identification for each exten sion You may assign a name of 11 characters long PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll and move cursor KEYPAD Used to enter characters HOLD Press to clear entry Open customer programming and follow the instructions below ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press TRSF and then dial 104 Display shows 201 STN NAME 2 Dial station number e g 205 OR press UP or DOWN to select the station and press the right soft key to move the cursor 205 STN NAME 3 Enter the station name using the 205 STN NAME procedure described on the next page SAM SMITH and press the right soft key to return to step 2 Table of Contents System Admin 4 Press TRSF to store and exit programming OR press SPK to store and advance to the next program NOTE Directory information is always 11 characters DEFAULT DATA NONE Names are written using the keypad Each press of a key will select a character Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position For example if the directory name is SAM SMITH press the number 7 three times to get the letter S Press the
287. ess a CAMP ON key 01 AUTO TIMER 02 HEADSET USE 04 KEY TONE 07 NOT FOR USA 09 NOT FOR USA If this option is set to YES station users 10 AME PASSCODE who have AME set must enter their station password to listen to messages being left If this option is set to ON the user will have the name associated with the speed dial number shown in the display after the number has been dialed If this setting is set to OFF the CID review list will only store CID information for calls 12 CID REVIEW ALL that were not answered at the station and reject the information for calls that were answered 11 DISP SPD OfficeServ 7100 TECHNICAL MANUAL USER INSTRUCTIONS PART 1 APRIL 2007 FEATURES DESCRIPTION When set to OFF an OHVA will be heard through the keyset speaker rather than the handset 13 SECURE OHVA 14 NOT FOR USA This option determines whether CO calls arriving at a station will be auto answered if auto answer is selected in MMC 103 For ITP phones with 2 Line Display Set to ON will require user to press SEND button to make a call it works like a cell phone Enblock dialing must be enabled in 15 AUTO ANS CO 16 ENBLOCK 2LED MMC 861 When ON all incoming calls will not ring at 17 STN NO RING stations ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press the transfer key followed by 110 201 STN ON OFF Display shows AUTO HOLD OFF 201 STN ON OFF
288. ess the HOLD button twice The call will flash green on your keyset and this line will show a steady red light on other keysets retrieve the call press the flashing green line button or press the HOLD button a third time NOTE Intercom calls will always be placed on exclusive hold REMOTE HOLD When you wish to place a call on hold at another station Press TRANSFER and a dial the station number or press the appropriate DSS button Press the HOLD button This will place the call on system hold on an available CALL button or Line Button at the remote station and return you to dial tone NOTES 1 If the destination station does not have any free CALL buttons or line buttons you will hear No More Calls tone and must return to the other party by press ing the TRANSFER button or the RETURN soft key in the display 2 Intercom calls cannot be remote held HOLD RECALL If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer it will recall your station The button that the call appears on will have a slow flashing amber light When your phone rings lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer the recall 21 e Ifyou do not answer this recall within a pre programmed period of time it will go to the system operator CONSULTATION HOLD When you are talking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with anoth er extension Press the TRANSFER button you will receive transfer dial tone Your call is pla
289. et must be set to forward on no answer to voicemail After ringing your station the caller will be connected to your voicemail and hear your personal greeting before leaving a message During this time you will be monitoring the connection between the caller and your voicemail box At this time you will only be monitoring the call you can not talk to the other party until you answer You may pick up the call at any time or ignore it To activate this feature press the AME button The associated indicator will be lit steady Press again to turn off If this key is pressed while a station is ringing dur ing forward no answer the feature will be turned on for the current call only While the caller is leaving a message or ringing you may Press 4 to immediately put the caller in your voice mailbox and monitor it Press to immediately disconnect your station The caller continues to leave a message normally Pick up the handset and monitor privately 74 Table of Contents ITP 5107S AME Password If your keyset has AME PASSWORD MMC 110 set to YES you must enter your station password to listen to messages being left This will prevent unauthorized people from listening to messages being left for you If the password option is turned on while a message is being left press the flash ing AME indicator and enter your station password not your Samsung Voicemail password You will then hear the message being left C
290. etter demonstrate how to use Text Messaging In this example station 201 is making an off hook voice announcement to station 205 who after hearing the announcement will respond with a text message STATION 201 LINDA received a call on line 702 STATION 205 JOHN is talking on line 701 Talking on line 702 702 01 15 701 05 25 CONF PAGE MUTE 51 Transfer CALLER 10 RETURN WHAT IS CALLER ID Dial 205 Caller ID is the name given to the telephone company provided feature that de 205 busy livers the telephone number and sometimes the name of the person calling your OHVA CAMP ON phone There are two types of Caller ID the first delivers the calling party s tele NT phone number only and the second sometimes referred to as Deluxe Caller ID delivers both the calling party s telephone number and name as listed in the tele OHVA to 205 OHVA from 201 phone directory TMSG REJECT The phone system can handle both types of Caller ID in fact the case of num ber only delivery the system can be programmed to insert a name for a specific Wait for reply GIVE THE CALL telephone number However even though you are paying to receive Caller ID TMSG 01 SEND information there are some circumstances that mean you will not receive this in formation The six most common reasons are listed below along with the display information that the system will provide Dial 03 or press twice PRIVATE The caller does not wish his her name or number
291. evious screen or delete the last digit of the displayed option value To enter between IP address fields 01 9 To enter numerical values SETTING THE NETWORK PARAMETERS Utilize the following programming steps to program the ITP 5121D keyset to operate within the users network Network Parameter Setup From the Setup Main Menu select 3 NET WORK SETUP to set or modify the network 3 NETWORK MODE SET UP parameters Select the Network Mode Setup and press 1 ENTER the LCD will display this message 2 DHCP If 1 MANUAL IP is selected the user must enter the IP address of the IP key set Then enter the subnet mask and gateway value for the customer net work 2 DHCP is selected the IP address subnet mask and gateway value will be obtained automatically if a DHCP server is present Table of Contents ITP 5121D Setting IP Manually From the Network Mode Setup Menu TONER MODE SEE Ue select 1 MANUAL IP and press ENTER Next press the END button to get to the 2 ADDRESS SET UP NETWORK SETUP MENU as seen here 3 NETMASK SETUP 4 GATEWAY SETUP Enter the IP address of the IP keyset Next enter the netmask and gateway address for the customer network If the 2 IP ADDRESS SET UP menu is selected press ENTER the LCD will dis INPUT IP ADDRESS amp PRESS OK play this message and the user XXX XXX XXX enter its IP address
292. ew a list of the 30 most recent outgoing calls from the keyset You may return the call directly from the displayed sta tus Scroll or dial option number 1 Outgoing Call Log Press ENTER Scroll to the desired PHONE NUMBER and press the SEND button to automatically dial the number OR e Press CANCEL to return to Main Menu OR Press END to exit programming 2 INCOMING LOGS Allows you to view a list of the 30 most recent incoming calls to the keyset You may return the call directly from the displayed status Scroll or dial option number 2 Incoming Call Log Scroll to the desired PHONE NUMBER and press the SEND button to automatically dial the number OR e Press CANCEL to return to Main Menu 56 Table of Contents DS 5000 OR Press END to exit programming SPEED DIAL Allows you to search through Station and System Speed Dial Numbers You may dial the number directly from the displayed status Scroll or dial option number 3 Speed Dial e Press ENTER Scroll to option or dial desired option 1 Personal Speed 2 System Speed e Press ENTER OR Scroll to the desired number and press the SEND button to automatical ly dial the number OR e Press CANCEL to return to main menu OR e Press END to exit programming DIRECTORY DIAL Allows you to search for station speed system speed and station numbers based on their associated programmed name Scroll or dial option number 4 Directo
293. extension on your modem will be disconnected NOTE You must have an assigned EP button button on your regular keyset for the single line station APPOINTMENT REMINDER ALARM CLOCK This feature works like an alarm clock Use it to remind yourself of an appointment later in the day TODAY ONLY or as a daily reminder every day DAILY You set up to three alarms Each one can be either a TODAY ONLY or a DAILY alarm When the alarm rings you will hear three short rings repeated three times Lift the handset to answer the alarm If you do not the alarm will alert you two more times at five minute intervals To set alarms Press TRANSFER and then dial 112 e Dial the alarm number 1 2 or 3 Dialthe time at which you want the alarm to sound Enter the time as HHMM hours and minutes using the 24 hour clock Dial 0 NOT SET 1 TODAY ONLY or 2 DAILY to select the alarm type e Press TRANSFER to save e Repeat for each alarm if needed To cancel individual alarms Press TRANSFER and then dial 112 Dial alarm number 1 2 or 3 Press the HOLD button NOTE Display keysets can show a reminder message See Alarm Reminder Messages under Display Features 36 Table of Contents ITP 5107S ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE When you are programmed to receive calls from a door phone You will receive three short rings repeated Liftthe handset You are connected to the door phone e Ifan electric door
294. f authorized you can group your reminders as Commitments Follow Ups or Tasks for bet ter organization The system will flag each reminder as Active or Pending pending means scheduled for future delivery Stored Numbers Allows you to enter up to 9 stored phone numbers The first five of these are used in the Find Me feature but any of them 1 9 can be easily dialed using only one digit followed by the pound key to be used by many other features from within your subscriber space ie Follow Me Message Alert Pager Alert and Direct Call Schedule Availability Allows you to enter a weekly availability schedule for use with Night Personal Greeting and the Auto Night Intercept feature Follow the spoken directions to enter the days of the week and times you are generally available to talk to your callers All other times you will be considered unavailable Place a Direct Call Allows you to place a direct call out of the Samsung Voicemail from any where You may either dial the number or dial a single digit 1 5 that corre sponds to a stored number See Personal Services 2 Stored Numbers This feature must be authorized by the System Administrator and can be limited or opened to internal local and long distance calls Personal Administration This area is used during the initial set up of your Subscriber Settings see next section Table of Contents ITP 5107S PERSONAL ADMINISTRATION SETTINGS This menu
295. f time it will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light You cannot park and page intercom calls 3 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing AUTOMATIC PARK WITH PAGE BUTTON e While in conversation press the PAGE button The call is automatically parked at your station Receive page tone and dial a desired page zone number Make announcement indicating your extension number or the line number Hang up 34 Table of Contents ITP 5121D To retrieve an automatically parked call Dial 10 plus the number that was announced If you have a PAGPK button press it and dial the number that was announced If you have a PARK button press it and dial the announced orbit number You will be connected to the parked call NOTES 1 If the call is not retrieved within a pre programmed period of time it will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light You cannot park and page intercom calls 2 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy signal you can leave a message indication Press the MESSAGE button or dial 43 and receive confirmation tone Hang up The MESSAGE button on the called station will light Standard
296. f you do not record your name described above and or enter your Directory Name you will not be included in the Dial by Name Directory 4 Extended Prompting Use this option to drastically reduce the number of prompts played in the subscriber interface mailbox prompts Change this setting only if you are very familiar with the user operation of the Samsung Voicemail 73 Note Remember if you know what digits to press you can enter them at time you do not have to wait to be prompted This feature can be toggled on off at anytime Also if it is off you will be prompted within each subscriber menu to press zero for more options This enables you to still be able to find out what to do if you were to get lost and extended prompting was disabled KEYSET USER FEATURES The following options are available if you have a display keyset They require setup by the System Administrator Message Waiting Lights When new messages are left in your mailbox the voicemail message light on your keyset will flash Press this flashing key VMMSG and follow the prompts to retrieve messages This key may be pressed at any time to log into your Subscriber Main Menu Answer Machine Emulation If you have an Answer Machine Emulation key programmed on your keyset you can use it to monitor calls going to your voicemail and optionally answer them The operation of this feature is similar to screening a call on a home answering machine Your keys
297. fic stations You can press a DSS button instead of dialing the extension number CALL INDICATIONS The buttons on your phone have light emitting diodes LEDs These are tri colored LEDs that light green red or amber green and red together Intercom calls also called internal calls always appear on your CALL buttons They will always light green You can have up to eight CALL buttons but at least two are recommended Outside calls appear on individual line buttons if they are assigned When an indi vidual line is not assigned to its own button it will appear on a CALL button Your outside calls will light green on your keyset and red on other keysets You never lose sight of your calls while they are on hold They stay right where you put them and are identified with a green flashing light Table of Contents DS 5000 Some simple rules to remember Any steady LED indicates the line or feature is in use Afast flashing green LED indicates a new call ringing in A slow flashing green or red LED indicates a call is on hold A slow flashing amber LED indicates a recall to your keyset SPEAKERPHONE All DS keysets are speakerphones Pressing the SEND button will answer an incoming call on the speakerphone Pressing the END button will release the call on the speakerphone Switching from the handset to the speakerphone is easy Simply press the SPEAK ER button and hang up the handset VOLUME CONTROLS The DS 5000 key
298. for quick and easy dialing of frequently used numbers e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 107 Press a One Touch Speed Dial button Dial the speed dial number 00 49 or 500 999 that you want assigned to this button Press TRANSFER to store your selection To call this telephone number just press the One Touch Speed Dial button NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing LAST NUMBER REDIAL To redial the last telephone number you dialed press the REDIAL button or dial 19 NOTES 1 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 2 Redial does not apply to intercom calls 28 Table of Contents ITP 5107S MANUAL RETRY WITH REDIAL While you are on an outside call listening to a busy signal and you want to redial the same number dialed Press the REDIAL button This will hang up your existing call and manually redial the same number dialed You can repeat this operation for a limited number of attempts NOTE If your keyset is programmed with Call Log Blocks then the Redial will access the call log when pressed SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL To save the number you just dialed for later use press the SNR button before hanging up To redial this saved number at any time press the SNR button or dial 17 The same line wil
299. fthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing CANCELING CALLBACK A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds If you have set a callback your CBK button will light Your phone may have a maximum of five callbacks to lines and or stations set at a time To cancel a callback e Press the button if programmed dial 44 You will hear confirmation tone While you are listening to confirmation tone press the HOLD button This will cancel the oldest set callback NOTE If the hot keypad feature is turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing INTERCOM CALLS OTHER STATIONS Dial the extension number or group number Wait for the party to answer If you hear a brief tone burst instead of ringback tone the station you called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer Begin speaking immediately after the tone Finish the call by replacing the handset NOTES 1 If you have a DSS button assigned to an extension or station group you may press this button instead of dialing the number 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing ANSWERING INTERCOM CALLS When your keyset rings simply lift the handset OR press the FLASHING CALL button to be connected to the calling station
300. g ing up To redial this saved number at any time press the SNR key or dial 17 The same line will be selected for you NOTES 1 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing 2 The saved telephone number is stored in memory until you save another number 3 Redial does not apply to intercom calls CHAIN DIALING You may manually dial additional digits following a speed dial number or chain as many speed dial numbers together as required After the first speed number is dialed press MEMORY again and dial another speed number OR manually dial additional digits following a speed dial num ber AUTOMATIC REDIAL RETRY When you are making an outside call and you receive a busy signal the system can automatically redial the number for you It will automatically redial at a pre programmed interval for up to 15 attempts When you hear a busy signal press the RETRY button Thesystem will reserve the line and automatically redial the same number for you You will hear the call being made through the keyset speaker The micro phone is muted 29 When the called party answers lift the handset or press the flashing SPEAK ER to begin speaking NOTES 1 Ifyou make another call auto redial is canceled 2 Tocancela retry lift and replace the handset PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER When making an outside call on a dial pulse line press
301. g you must press the flash ing button to answer UNIVERSAL ANSWER Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device To answer calls ringing this device dial 67 or press the UA button This device can operate in any one of the six different ring plans NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing 14 Table of Contents ITP 5107S RECALL DIAL TONE Press the NEW button to disconnect your existing call wait for dial tone and then make a new call on the same line NOTE If this button does not appear on your keyset the FLASH button may be programmed to recall dial tone SENDING A FLASH While on an outside call press the FLASH button to send a flash to the telephone company This is required for some custom calling features or CENTREX use NOTE Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH CALLBACK If you receive a busy signal when you are selecting an outside line this means that the line or group of lines is busy Press the button if programmed or dial 44 You will hear confirmation tone When the line becomes free the system will call you back Lift the handset to answer wait for dial tone and dial the telephone number or speed dial number again NOTES 1 Acallback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds If you have set a callback your CBK button will light 2 I
302. g Up END RN 10 may warrant Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from Forwa rding Nou Calls ira dini 10 12 the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide Call Pickup DIALING FEATURES Speed NINN coi tna leh ts Aba Ed 13 Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers 13 Last Number Redlal i coris esas D ctia 13 Save Number wit Redial uuuadauanasccinma cinta as coi tutiei ders tute 13 Pulse to 14 PAGING AND MESSAGING Making an bera Page icai Making an External Page Meet Me Page Answer Call Park Page Retrieving a Parked Call Setting a Message Indication Returning Messages Canceling a Message Programmed Messages CONVENIENCE FEATURES Do Not DISEUFDaas a dise tein ctii aetna cos bc 18 Dodt alls 18 Account COO Lacinia 18 19 utat ates ctis tenis amateurs 19 pu d Qui m 19 Station Passcodle 20 PERSONAL SPEED DIAL LIST 21 22 Table of Contents ABOUT THIS BOOK This boo
303. g a call Dial 47 and a valid code Hookflash and receive transfer tone Select a line For more information see your system administrator ANSWERING AN OUTSIDE CALL Liftthe handset You are automatically connected to the ringing call Finish the call by replacing the handset UNIVERSAL ANSWER Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device To answer calls ringing this device dial 67 This device can operate in any system ring mode SENDING A FLASH While you are on an outside call hookflash receive transfer tone and dial 49 to send a flash to the telephone company This may be required for some custom call ing features or CENTREX lines Note Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit Table of Contents STD Telephone RECALL DIAL TONE Hookflash and then dial 18 to disconnect your outside call and receive telephone company dial tone for a new call BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH CALLBACK If you receive a busy signal when you select an outside line While on that call hookflash receive transfer tone and dial 44 When the line becomes free the system will call you back Lift the handset receive dial tone and dial the telephone number or the speed dial number again NOTE A callback will be canceled if it is not answered within 30 seconds INTERCOM CALLS Lift the handset and dial 0 to call your system operator or group of tors
304. gback tone the station you called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer Begin speaking immediately after the tone Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the END button NOTES 1 If you have a DSS button assigned to an extension or station group you may press this button instead of dialing the number 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing DIALING THE MOST RECENT OUTGOING Press the SEND button The most recent call Internal or External to system to or from the station will be displayed Continue to press the SEND button and the system will automatically dial the number for you ANSWERING INTERCOM CALLS When your keyset rings simply lift the handset OR press the SEND button to be connected to the calling station Finished the call by replacing the handset or pressing the END button See Ringing Preference under Customizing Your Keyset VOICE ANNOUNCE MODE When another station calls you your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and you will hear the caller s announcement e Press the SEND button to turn on the microphone and speak handsfree OR lift the handset to reply e To finish the call replace the handset or press the END button NOTE In order for C O calls to be answered handsfree AUTO ANS CO must be set to ON 20 Table of Contents ITP 5112L
305. ge Walking Class of Service lut of GOUD tn bte tis rita Direct Inward System Access DISA 5 DISA SEGUY oiu decoro MAT DELI UA 6 FORCE AGCO WME COGBS a 6 7 Authorization Codes Msi the Te LiNE essa sense i guru tesa tore Don cot epu treu CALLER ID SPECIAL FEATURES Abandon Call Elettronica cuc tt ea ccu 9 CO SVIBR Lodi uu LE it 9 N mber to Name Translation 9 HomePage Table of Contents System Admin SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR PROGRAMMING Customer Lavel ACCESS a 10 Customer Level Access Using the PROG Key 10 Change Feature PasscOUe ae T Set ano 11 12 Reset Station Passcodes to Default 12 13 Program StatoM NaM eS A MONK Lem celeb Program Station Group Names Program System Speed Dial Numbers 18 20 Program System Speed Dial 05 20 Program Personal Speed Dial Numbers for Other Stations 21 23 Program Personal Speed Dial Names for Other Stations 23 24 Cr
306. ge and return to Main Configuration Menu press END to return to idle screen AUTO ANSWER CO CALLS This option will allow CO calls that directly ring your phone to auto answer When a CO call arrives at your station and this option set for ON your phone will sound two beeps the same as when a screened transfer is completed and you will be connected to the CO call In order for this option to work the station must also be programmed for auto answer see Set Answer Mode Press MENU button Scroll to SETUP option press ENTER Scroll to STATION ON OFF and press ENTER OR you may dial 6 and imme diately enter the option Scroll to AUTO ANS CO CALL press ENTER to change option status Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu press END to return to idle screen NOTE Outside lines must ring your station directly for the Auto Answer CO to work Lines ringing a station group will not cause your phone to Auto Answer the call DISPLAY SPEED DIAL NAME This option allows you to view the name associated with a speed dial number as it is dialed With you handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Press 111 to turn DISP SPDNAME on or 110 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection From the LCD Press MENU button Scroll to SETUP option press ENTER 54 Table of Contents ITP 5112L Scroll to STATION ON OFF and press ENTER OR you may dial
307. ge to another subscriber The steps are simple a Enter the recipient s mailbox number or if this is not known enter to use the system directory 65 Record your message at the tone After recording the message you will hear the Send Menu with the following functions Review Continue Recording Discard and Re Record Set Message Attributes Delivery Options Schedule Future Delivery Save and Send then Send a Copy to Someone Else Save and Send the Recording 0 Setting Message Attributes If after recording a message you select 4 you can set up any combination of the following delivery options Urgent Delivery Return Receipt Requested Request a Call Back Private Delivery Reply Required Exit 3 2 Scheduling Future Delivery If after recording a message you select 5 to schedule future delivery you will be able to set message attributes and set this message as Immediate Delivery Next Few Hours End of Current Business Day based on your Availability Schedule Beginning of Next Business Day based on your Availability Schedule A Coming Day of the Week Specific Day Time Exit ACCESS MANAGER The Access Manager allows the subscriber to set a number of options for when where and how and or if the Samsung Voicemail contacts you when a caller dials your extension number All of the options are toggled on off based on their cur rent statu
308. hat dialing mode is used SPEED DIALING You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system wide speed dial list of numbers 500 999 or from your personal list of numbers 00 49 Your system may be set for 950 system wide numbers If so the system speed dial access codes 050 999 and the station speed dial codes are 000 049 From the Main Fixed Feature screen with the handset on hook press the SPEED DIAL button or dial 16 e Dial the desired speed dial number The telephone number is automatically dialed for you NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing From the LCD e Press the MENU button Scroll to the PHONEBOOK option press ENTER Scroll to SEARCH press ENTER Choose the method to be used to initiate a speed call as described below SEARCH Search and initiate speed dial calls by Speed Dial Number Associated Names Telephone Numbers Assigned Groups or Previous Calls registered to the phone Scroll to or dial the associated number of the desired function Search Outgoing Call Incoming Call Missed Call New Number Edit Group Delete All My Own Number and press ENTER Once in the menu you may dial the selected number change delete or regis ter the number When the information is displayed press ENTER to dial the number press MENU to display further options 31 1
309. have a DP key assigned with a station number you only need to press this DP key with the flashing light to answer the ringing station NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing GROUP CALL PICKUP To pick up answer a call ringing in any pickup group lift the handset and dial 66 plus the desired group number or press the flashing GROUP PICKUP key if avail able GROUP NUMBERS 01 20 OfficeServ 100 amp OfficeServ 7100 01 99 OfficeServ 500 M 01 99 OfficeServ 500 L 01 99 OfficeServ 7200 amp OfficeServ 7400 NOTES 1 Agroup pickup key can have an extender for a specific pickup group 2 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before dialing the access code MY GROUP PICKUP If desired a new access code can be assigned to pickup ringing calls in the same pickup group as you are in Like 66 above except you do not need to dial the desired group number See your installation company for the assigned access code MY GROUP PICKUP 25 PRIVACY RELEASE This feature will allow another station to join in our conversation by releasing pri vacy on the from your phone To Release Privacy While you are talking on a C O line and you wish to have other internal parties up to three join the conversation Press the PRB key the PRB key will light steady red
310. have a different message code Press any programmed message PMSG button The message is set and the button will light red Press the button again to turn off Pressing another programmed message PMSG button will turn the previous one off and set a different programmed message 31 CONVENIENCE FEATURES DO NOT DISTURB Use this feature when you want to block calls to your keyset e While on hook press the DND button or dial 401 The DND button lights steady red to remind you of this mode Tocancel DND press the DND button again or dial 400 The DND light turns off You can make calls while in the DND mode NOTES 1 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 f you place your keyset DND mode and you do not have a DND button your TSI button will flash to indicate DND status ONE TIME DND If you are on a call and you do not wish to be interrupted while on that call you can press the DND button and place your station in Do Not Disturb When you hang up at the end of the call DND will be automatically canceled and your key set will be able to receive new calls This feature requires a DND button MUTE You can mute the handset transmitter or the microphone during any conversa tion Press the MUTE button It will light red Toresume speaking press the MUTE button again The light turns off BACKGROUND MUSIC When a music source is
311. he ALL PAGE button After the attention tone make your announcement NOTE The LED on the PAGE button will only light when an All Page is in progress 31 Lift the handset Press the Meet Me Page MMPG button or dial 54 Dial the desired zone number After the attention tone instruct the paged person to dial 56 Press WAIT or TRANSFER e Remain off hook until the person dials 56 from any phone The paged person will be automatically connected with you CALL PARK AND PAGE When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his her desk you can park the call prior to paging There are two different methods MANUAL PARK ORBITS While in conversation press the PARK button Entered a desired orbit number 0 9 if the orbit number is busy dial another orbit number Display users can press k to automatically place the call in any available orbit number and see the number in the display Remember the selected orbit number Replace the handset when finished Lift the handset and make a page announcement as previously described example John Smith park two To retrieve a parked call from orbit e Press the PARK button and dial the announced orbit number 0 9 You will be connected to the parked call NOTES 1 You must have a PARK button or park access code to retrieve and place calls in park orbits 2 Ifthe parked call is not retrieved within a pre programmed period
312. he LCD Press MENU button Scroll to SOUND SCREEN option and press ENTER Scroll to RING TONE SELECT and press ENTER OR you dial 1 and immediately enter the option Select from one of the three categories 1 Standard Ring Tones 2 Melody or 3 MyRing Tones Press ENTER to select Use LEFT RIGHT arrow buttons to scroll through the available ring tones and press ENTER to SAVE Press CANCEL to return to the Main Option Page OR press END to return to idle screen CHANGE YOUR PASSCODE From the factory your station passcode is 1234 You can change your station pass code whenever you desire While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 101 Dial your old passcode Dial a new passcode must be four characters You can use 0 9 Redial the new passcode to verify If successful you will hear two beeps Four beeps indicate an incorrect code Reenter the code again Press TRANSFER to store the new passcode From the LCD Press MENU button Scroll to MY PHONE option and press ENTER Scroll to CHANGE PASSWORD and press ENTER OR you may dial 3 and immediately enter the option Enter CURRENT PASSWORD press ENTER Enter NEW PASSWORD and press ENTER Enter NEW PASSWORD again for confirmation and press ENTER e Press CANCEL to return to the Main Option Page OR press END to return to idle screen 50 Table of Contents ITP 5112L SET ANSWER MODE INTERCOM You can rec
313. he Name Number or Date associated with this call Press the DIAL key to call this number These options are the same for the incoming or outgoing call logs You can also review your Call Log by following the steps below From the idle screen you can press the MENU button Select PHONEBOOK Select Outgoing Incoming or Missed Call Logs 56 Table of Contents ITP 5112L DIAL BY NAME Each station or speed dial number can have an associated directory name sta tion or speed dial number can be selected by scrolling alphabetically through a directory name list This on line phone book allows the user to look up and dial any station or speed dial number in seconds Press MENU button Scroll to PHONEBOOK option press ENTER Scroll to SEARCH and press ENTER OR you may dial 1 and immediately enter the option Scroll to BY NAME press ENTER Enter NAME to search for and press ENTER e Name is displayed press ENTER number is displayed Press SEND button to automatically call by number Press MENU button for more options Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu OR press END to return to idle screen You can also use the Dial by Name feature by following these steps Press the DIR button DIRECTORY Select the directory you wish to use PERS personal speed dial numbers SYS system speed dial numbers or STN station names Dialthe button on the keyp
314. he call appears on will have a slow flashing amber light When your phone rings lift the handset or press the FLASHING CALL button to answer the recall e Ifyou do not answer this recall within a pre programmed period of time it will go to the system operator CONSULTATION HOLD When you are talking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with anoth er extension Press the TRANSFER button you will receive transfer dial tone Your call is placed on transfer hold e the extension number Consult with the internal party Press TRANSFER to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call NOTE Repeatedly pressing the TRANSFER button will toggle between the outside party and internal extension If necessary you may disconnect either one of the parties by pressing the DROP button RETRIEVING CALLS HELD AT ANOTHER STATION When a line is on hold and it appears on your keyset press the line button with the red flashing light When a line is on hold and it does not appear on your keyset dial 12 plus the line number or the extension number of the station that placed the call on hold NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing TRANSFERRING CALLS Transfer is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways You can do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or
315. he handset and dial 66 plus the desired group number or press the flashing GROUP PICKUP button if available GROUP NUMBERS 01 20 OfficeServ 100 and OfficeServ 7100 01 99 OfficeServ 500 M 01 99 OfficeServ 500 L 01 99 OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400 NOTES 1 A group pickup button can have an extender for a specific pickup group 2 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing the access code MY GROUP PICKUP If desired a new access code can be assigned to pickup ringing calls in the same pickup group as you are in Like 66 above except you do not need to dial the desired group number See your installation company for the assigned access code MY GROUP PICKUP 27 PRIVACY RELEASE This feature will allow another station to join in our conversation by releasing pri vacy on the C O from your phone To Release Privacy While you are talking on a C O line and you wish to have other internal parties up to three join the conversation Press the PRB button the PRB button will light steady red Inform the other party that he she may now join the conversation After the other party or parties has joined the conversation and you wish to return privacy to the line so that no one else can join the conversation press the PRB button a second time the PRB button will be off To Join a Non Private Conversation When someone has informed
316. he station numbers will be automatically set by the OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 and the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems once the necessary information has been entered into the IP keyset Enter ID and password of the server as described below to register the phone See your system administrator for specific Network and Server addresses The addresses necessary to set up the 5121 are JP Address of the ITP Network Gateway Address Subnet Mask P Address of System s MCP e User ID Password To get to the Set Up Menu unplug the power from the ITP 5121D phone or unplug the LAN cable if using Power over Ethernet press and hold the MENU but ton while plugging in the power cord or LAN cable if using Power over Ethernet back into the phone Now release the MENU button gt 1 5 5 EASY WIZARD 2 SYSTEM INFORMATION Other items not shown on screen when scrolling down press down arrow on nav igation disc 3 NETWORK SETUP 5 SYSTEM SERVER SETUP 4 LOAD amp UPGRADE SETUP 6 FACTORY RESET 6 FACTORY RESET 7 REBOOT SETUP To enter the SETUP MENU press the MENU button as soon as the ITP 5121D phone is connected to the power supply or Power over Ethernet LAN port When entering the IP setup menu the LCD displays the following options gt 1 SYSTEM EASY WIZARD 2 SYSTEM INFORMATION Other items not shown on screen when scrolling down press down on navigation disc 3 NETWORK S
317. hen a station user places his her keyset in Forward All mode and he she does not have a FORWARD ALL button the TRANSFER button will light to in dicate Forward All has been set and calls to this station have been transferred elsewhere FORWARD BUSY To forward calls to another station when you are on the phone Dial 602 plus the extension or group number Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press SPEAKER before you begin dialing FORWARD NO ANSWER To forward calls to another station when you do not answer Dial 603 plus the extension or group number e Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 23 FORWARD BUSY NO ANSWER If you have both a Forward on Busy destination and a Forward No Answer desti nation programmed you may set both of these at the same time Dial 604 e Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing FORWARD FOLLOW ME When you want all calls to your extension forwarded to the extension where you are now Dial 606 plus your extension number e Receive confirmation tone and hang up If you want a specific extension s calls forwarded to your p
318. hey arrived at your keyset When you turn ring preference off you must press the flashing button to answer a call allowing you to answer calls in the order you choose e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 061 to turn ring preference on or 060 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection 45 AUTO ANSWER CALLS This option will allow CO calls that directly ring your phone to auto answer When a CO call arrives at your station and this option set for ON your phone will sound two beeps the same as when a screened transfer is completed and you will be connected to the CO call order for this option to work the station must also be programmed for auto answer see SET ANSWER MODE e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 151 to turn Auto Answer on or 150 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection NOTE Outside lines must ring your station directly for the Auto Answer CO to work Lines ringing a station group will not cause your phone to Auto Answer DISPLAY SPEED DIAL NAME This option allows you to view the name associated with a speed dial number as it is dialed With you handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Press 111 to turn DISP SPDNAME on or 110 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection CALLER ID REVIEW ALL This feature allows display keyset users to review Caller ID information for calls sent to the
319. his is John Smith Please leave me a message will call you as soon as can Note This greeting will only play if none of the 5 personal greetings has played to the caller A common usage for this Greeting is when another Subscriber is talking with a caller and uses the VT key on their phone to trans fer the caller directly to your Mailbox MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION The Mailbox Administration menu is used to turn on and off your pager notifica tion message alert options and other message control features 1 70 Message Alert When this function is activated the Samsung Voicemail will call any outside or inside telephone number after each message is left in your voice mailbox To hear your message at the remote location when the voicemail calls you after you pick up the telephone and answer you will be instructed that there is a message and to enter your password Simply enter your password and you will now be logged in Table of Contents DS 5000 Setting Up Message Alert From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 1 for Message Alert There 4 options available to you Press 1 to toggle message alert on and off Press 2 to set the schedule when you would like to be notified Press 3 to be notified on urgent messages only Press 4 to set the destination phone number Pager Notification When this function is activated the Samsung Voicemail will call your bee
320. hone Remote Call Forward Dial 606 plus the desired extension number Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing FORWARD DND To forward your phone when you activate DND Dial 605 plus the extension number or group number Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing CALL FORWARD OPTIONS A display keyset may review or change call forward options and destinations Call forward access can be done via the keypad or by accessing the keyset display fea tures To review or change call forward options e Press TRANSFER 102 The display will indicate the current call forward condition and destination OR Show 0 FORWARD CANCEL to indicate no forward is set 24 Table of Contents ITP 5107S Dial 0 to cancel current condition OR Dial 1 5 to select the forward type OR Press UP or DOWN to select the forward type Press the right soft key to move the cursor Dialthe destination number e 9 202 OR Press UP or DOWN to select the destination Press the right soft key to move the cursor Dial 1 to set OR Press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO Press TRANSFER to store and exit STATION CALL PICKUP To pick up answer a call ringing at another station lif
321. hook press TRANSFER and then dial 100 Dial your four digit station passcode 1 to locking outgoing 2 for locked all calls or 0 to unlock Press TRANSFER to store your selection 38 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset LOCKED LOCKED m CALLS Hold Button LED Flashes Hold Button LED Solid Make outside calls YES NO ACCESS DENIED NO Receive outside calls YES YES NO Make intercom calls YES YES NO Receive intercom calls YES YES NO MANUAL SIGNALLING Use this feature when you want to send a brief 500ms ring burst to another station regardless of the status of your phone on hook off hook handsfree DND or ringing To send a signal to another station Press the Manual Signalling MS key You may press the MS key repeatedly to send multiple signals to the desig nated station NOTE Your phone must have a Manual Signalling MS key with a station number extender assigned to it OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE Keysets may receive a voice announcement while on another call The calling sta tion must have an OHVA key When you are DND you cannot receive OHVA calls The OHVA feature will work with intercom and transferred calls When you receive an OHVA and secure OHVA is ON you will hear the announcement in the handset receiver if you are using the handset If secure OHVA is OFF then you will hear the announcement on the speaker if you are talking on the handset If you are us
322. ialing While a call is ringing in the display will indicate the type of call coming in station number and name trunk number and name etc NOTES 1 Ifa call is flashing at your keyset but not ringing you must press the flashing button to answer 2 While a call is ringing in press the SCREEN button to display the programma ble button screen This will enable you to view and invoke any of the station features that you may wish UNIVERSAL ANSWER Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device To answer calls ringing this device dial 67 press the UA button This device can oper ate in any one of the six different ring plans NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing RECALL DIAL TONE Press the NEW button to disconnect your existing call wait for dial tone and then make a new call on the same line NOTE If this button does not appear on your keyset the FLASH button may be programmed to recall dial tone SENDING A FLASH While on an outside call press the FLASH button to send a flash to the telephone company This is required for some custom calling features or CENTREX use NOTE Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH CALLBACK If you receive a busy signal when you are selecting an outside line this means that the line or group of lines is busy Press the CALLBACK button
323. icked up by the recip ient From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 4 for Undelivered Messages Table of Contents ITP 5112L This useful feature will allow you to cancel any messages that have NOT yet been picked up by the recipient 5 Auto Play New Messages If this option is enabled after you enter your password correctly any new messages will immediately begin to play To enable or if already enabled tog gle and disable this feature From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Wi Press 5 to Set Auto Play of New Messages 6 Auto Play Message Information If this option is enabled the date time and sender s name will be played auto matically before each message If this is disabled the information must be requested manually by pressing 00 To enable or if already enabled toggle and disable this feature From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 6 to Set Auto Play of Message Information MESSAGE BROADCAST This option will only be available if it has been allowed by the System Administrator Broadcast to All Mailboxes If you have been designated as a Subscriber Administrator you may send a message to ALL mailboxes in the system From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 9 for Broadcast Messages This option will only be available if your mailbox h
324. if possible when a busy station is called e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Press 081 to turn CAMP ON on or 080 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection SELECT RING TONE Each keyset user can select any one of eight ring frequencies While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 111 Dial 1 8 or press the UP and DOWN buttons to hear each tone When you hear the tone that you prefer press TRANSFER to save it NOTE Specific lines or stations may be programmed to ring with a different tone than what you have selected for your keyset CHANGE YOUR PASSCODE From the factory your station passcode is 1234 You can change your station pass code whenever you desire e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 101 Dial your old passcode new passcode must be four characters You can use 0 9 Redial the new passcode to verify If successful you will hear two beeps Four beeps indicate an incorrect code Reenter the code again Press TRANSFER to store the new passcode 43 SET ANSWER MODE INTERCOM You can receive internal calls in one of three modes see Answering Intercom Calls under Intercom Calls for descriptions e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 103 Dial 0 for Ringing 1 for Auto Answer or 2 for Voice Announce Press TRANSFER to store your selection NOTE When your keyset is programmed for Auto Answer and you have Fo
325. igned by the installing technician Use this program to assign extenders to the following keys KEY DESCRIPTION EXTENDER BOSS Boss Secretary 1 4 Direct Pickup Extension number or station group number DS usse Direct Station Any extension number FWRD Call Forwarding 0 7 Group Pick Up 01 20 In Out of Group Any group number you are part of Meet Me 0 9 65 Page 0 9 Park orbits 0 9 Ring Plan 1 6 HOLD for none Speed 00 49 500 999 PMSG Programmed Messages 01 30 Only 20 on the OS7100 PERS 1 SYS 2 or STN 3 Voice Mail Group Number 501 519 for the OfficeServ 100 amp 7100 501 539 for the OfficeServ 500 M 501 579 for the OfficeServ 500 L 501 539 for the OfficeServ 7200 501 579 for the OfficeServ 7400 27 Table of Contents System Admin PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Select the extension number KEYPAD Used to enter extender codes HOLD Used to clear the displayed data Open customer programming and follow the instructions below ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press TRSF and then dial 107 201 KEY EXTEND Display shows the first station 0
326. ile in the DND mode NOTES 1 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key 2 f you place your keyset DND mode and you do not have DND key your TSI key will flash to indicate DND status ONE TIME DND If you are on a call and you do not wish to be interrupted while on that call you can press the DND key and place your station in Do Not Disturb When you hang up at the end of the call DND will be automatically canceled and your keyset will be able to receive new calls This feature requires DND key MUTE You can mute the handset transmitter or the microphone during any conversa tion Press the MUTE key It will light red To resume speaking press the MUTE button again The light turns off BACKGROUND MUSIC When a music source is supplied you may listen to music through the speaker in your keyset While on hook press the HOLD button to hear music Press the HOLD button again to turn music off You can set the level of background music by using the VOLUME keys while listen ing to the music This does not affect the speakerphone level 35 ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP To pick up an established call in progress at a single line extension connected to a computer modem on your PC Press the EP key for that station on your keyset the call is automatically moved to your keyset Thesingle line extension on your modem will be disconnecte
327. ility Enter ALARM TIME Military Format Press ENTER Display confirms setting Press CANCEL to return to main menu Press END to exit programming 59 Samsung Voicemail Subscriber Services Menu Table of Contents Group New Messages Group Saved Messages Listen to New Review Saved Messages Messages Record amp Send Messages Manager Access E C Group Messages Menu 6 Listen Menu Record Menu 4 Follow Me 11 2 4 5 31 x Group Urgent Messages Group Callback Requests Group Reminders Group Private Messages Group Fax Only Messages Pause Resume Menu Prompting Group A Specific Sender Play Message Inventory Play Menu Options Cancel Return to Subscriber Services 8 9 a 09 9 9 2 Play Message Play Previous 4 For Directory of Subscribers Message Save F Message Ent Discard Message To Create a HE Reminder 3 Reply to Sender Place Call to Sender Deliver Copy of Fax Message Forward a Copy of Message Rewind 5 Seconds Change Playback Volume Pause Resume Message Playback Fast Forward 5 Seconds Change Playback Speed Skip to Next Message Scan Messages
328. ill be able to set message attributes and set this message as Immediate Delivery Next Few Hours End of Current Business Day based on your Availability Schedule Beginning of Next Business Day based on your Availability Schedule A Coming Day of the Week Specific Day Time Exit ACCESS MANAGER 5 The Access Manager allows the subscriber to set a number of options for when where and how and or if the Samsung Voicemail contacts you when a caller dials your extension number All of the options are toggled on off based on their cur rent status when you access them 71 Note ALL Access Manager options MUST be individually allowed the System Administrator for each Subscriber They are 1 Follow Me Allows the subscriber to enter an alternate location and set how long the new destination Designated Location will be active This number may be an internal or external number This is useful if you are frequently traveling or changing the number where you can be reached When Follow Me is activated the transfer will be supervised and confirmed This means that if the call is not answered or if rejected by the Subscriber at the designated location it will be recalled to the Subscriber s mailbox 3 Call Blocking When this feature is active callers will not be transferred to your extension they will hear your blocked greeting if recorded and will go directly to your mailbox if they do not select
329. ill be shown and a new station may be selected 205 SPEED DIAL SPDBLK NOT EXIST 22 4 Dial the location number e g 05 OR 205 SPEED DIAL press UP or DOWN to select the location 5g _ and press the right soft key to move the cursor OR press the left soft key to return to step 2 5 Enter the trunk access code e g 9 205 SPEED DIAL followed by the number to be dialed 05 9 4264100_ e g 4264100 OR press the right soft key to return to step 2 OR press the left soft key to return to step 3 OR press HOLD to clear an entry if an error is made use the DOWN key to step back 6 Press the F key to access Program Station Speed Dial Names OR press TRSF to save and exit programming OR press SPK to save and advance to the next program DEFAULT DATA NO SPEED DIAL NUMBERS PROGRAMMED PROGRAM PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES FOR OTHER STATIONS Each individual station user can program his her own names but in cases where it is impractical or for single line telephone users this program allows a system administrator to view or change any station s speed dial names The station speed dial codes are 00 49 Each station begins with ten numbers 00 09 and can be assigned more in blocks of ten up to a maximum of fifty numbers PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Used to scroll through extension numbers and speed dial bins KEYPAD Used to enter selections SOFT KEYS Move cursor left and right SPK Used to store data and advance to next
330. ill ring the secretary The secretary can call the BOSS in the DIVERT mode but all other users will ring the secretary the secretary can override the boss DIVERT GROUP LISTENING When you are engaged on a call and you are using the handset you may want other people to hear the distant party s voice over the speaker Press the LISTEN key to turn on the speaker The microphone is not in use so the distant party does not hear other parties present in your office Press LISTEN again to turn the speaker off and resume private conversation Repeat if necessary NOTE Depending on speaker volume and the acoustics of your office it may be advisable to turn the group listening feature off before hanging up This will elim inate a momentary squeal ACCOUNT CODES When equipped with optional equipment your system will allow calls to be charged to a specific account During any outside call press the account ACC key e Enterthe 3 digit account code bin number when prompted OR If your key has an extender of 000 enter the account code maximum 12 char acters including and and press 000 again OR If your key has an extender other than 000 001 999 account code contained in that bin will automatically be entered for your LOCKING YOUR KEYSET You can lock your keyset to control misuse of your phone while you are away You can unlock it when you return Your default station passcode is 1234 While on
331. in categories CALL OTHER or ANS ANSWER Press the SCROLL button to display additional options available under each of the three main categories The symbol displayed as the last character on the lower line of the display indicates that there are additional options Press the SCROLL button to display these additional options User instructions will be displayed in lower case letters Options assigned to soft keys will be in upper case letters DIRECTORY INFORMATION An 11 character directory name can be assigned to each extension number Display keyset users can view the name of the called or calling station before an swering Each outside line can have an 11 character directory name Incoming calls can be easily identified and answered with different greetings Outside and internal calls ringing to a station group will display CALL FOR xxx where xxx is the station group number This allows you to answer calls directed to you differently than calls directed to your group 45 CALL LOG The system can log both incoming and outgoing calls placed from or to your tele phone You must have a LOG button programmed on your keyset and assigned a review list Each IN and OUT list can be up to 50 numbers maximum They are assigned in blocks of 10 each e Press the LOG key Press either the IN or OUT key View the first IN OUT telephone number At this point you may select one of the three options related to this number or use th
332. in dialing TRANSFERRING CALLS Transfer is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways You can do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can do a blind transfer without notification e While on a call press the TRANSFER button and dial an extension number or group number Your call is automatically put on transfer hold OR Press a DSS button or station group button Your call is automatically put on transfer hold Hang up when you hear ringing this is an unscreened or blind transfer OR Wait for the called party to answer and advise him her of the call and hang up If the transfer is refused you will be reconnected to the outside line when the called station hangs up or you can press TRANSFER to return to the outside party If you wish to send the call to another extension without waiting for the 17 first station to hang up simply press another DSS button Press the CALL button or line button to return to the outside party and begin the transfer process again When you are transferring a call to a keyset set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer the transferred call will always ring NOTES 1 After the inside party answers you may alternate back and forth between the parties by pressing the TRANSFER button 2 If you receive No More Calls tone that station has no button available to re ceive another call Press TRANSFER to return to the other party 3 You ca
333. in your voice mailbox To hear your message at the remote location when the Samsung Voicemail calls you after you pick up the telephone and answer you will be instructed that there is a message and to enter your password Simply enter your pass word and you will now be logged in Table of Contents iDCS Keyset Setting Up Message Alert From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 1 for Message Alert There 4 options available to you Press 1 to toggle message alert on and off Press 2 to set the schedule when you would like to be notified Press 3 to be notified on urgent messages only Press 4 to set the destination phone number Pager Notification When this function is activated the Samsung Voicemail will call your beeper service and notify you after each message is left in your voice mailbox From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Wi Press 2 for pager notification There 4 options available to you Press 1 to toggle pager notification on and off Press 2 to set the schedule when you would like to be paged Press 3 to be notified on urgent messages only Press 4 to set the pager phone number Undelete When this function is activated the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to undelete any messages that you have recently deleted up to the pro grammed Daily Maintenance Time which is set to 3 a m by Default the fo
334. inal status indicator light is positioned on the top right corner of the key set above the display The terminal status indicator is a tri colored red green and amber light that provides greater visibility of your keysets status than the indi vidual button LEDs The terminal status indicator provides the following indica tions Busy Off Hook Steady Red ntercom Ring Flashing Red Outside Call Ring Flashing Green Recall Ring Flashing Amber Message Waiting Flashing Red Do Not Disturb Fast Flash Red at 1 Second Intervals CONFERENCE BUTTON The CONFERENCE button allows the user to set up a call with up to 5 parties sta tion or trunk TRANSFER BUTTON Transfer is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways You can do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can do a blind transfer without notification HOLD BUTTON The HOLD button maintains the call at your keyset while enabling you to call other stations or consult coworkers in confidence SPEAKER BUTTON The SPEAKER button allows you to initiate a conversation from the keyset with out lifting the handset or switch to speaker phone mode if you are currently on handset FEATURE ACCESS CODES This user guide is written based on the default access code for using system fea tures If the system numbering plan has been changed some of the access codes may not be correct Your installing company can inform yo
335. indicate this Pressing the button while the light is lit will cause the keyset to return to handset mode and the light will go out HOT KEYPAD On your phone system your keyset s keypad can be made live or hot so that it is not necessary to lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing Calls can be made and features activated by simply dialing the C O line number trunk group access code intercom number or feature access code ac tivate this feature e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 031 to turn the Hot Keypad on or 030 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection KEY CONFIRMATION TONE You can hear a short beep confirmation tone each time you press a button on the dial pad This tone can be turned on or off While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 040 to turn tones off or 041 to turn tones on Press TRANSFER to store your selection REJOINING A PAGE This feature allows you to hear the remaining portion of an ongoing internal page after you return your keyset to idle To enable this feature With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Dial 051 to turn this feature on or 050 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection RING PREFERENCE This feature automatically answers ringing calls when you lift the handset or press the SEND button This method will always answer calls in the order t
336. ing the speakerphone the announcement will always be heard through the speaker To make an off hook voice announcement Dial the extension number or press the DSS key When you receive a busy signal press the OHVA key After the attention tone begin speaking Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS RLS key Press the flashing CALL button on your keyset This will place the original party on hold and allow you to talk to the announcing party Toreturn to your first party press the key corresponding to your original call This will disconnect the OHVA call NOTES 1 When you are voice announcing to a station close to you use the handset to avoid an echo effect 2 You cannot off hook voice announce to single line telephones 39 If your keyset is associated with a DCS 32 Button Add On Module DCS 32 AOM 5 not supported on the OfficeServ 7100 you can receive Executive OHVA calls Executive Off Hook Voice Announce allows you to engage in conversation on your keyset and simultaneously receive and reply handsfree to an OHVA through your DCS 32 Button Add On Module AOM Use caution because the conversa tion through the AOM may possibly be heard by the caller on the keyset When you receive an executive OHVA through your AOM Reply by speaking in the direction of the microphone in the AOM unit Adjust the volume with the VOLUME keys on the AOM unit Press the SPK key on the AOM to disconnect
337. ing 5 Screened Greeting 5 New Messages 3 Name Reply to Sender Stop Append to 5 Group Recording Find Me 6 Edit Only 6 Auto Play Message Personal 4 Extended Fax Only Messages Place Personal Greetings Information Administration Prompting 7 x Play Message Inventory Play Menu Options Cancel Return to Subscriber Services 8 9 a 09 9 9 2 Copy of Message Pause Resume Message Playback Fast Forward 5 Seconds Change Playback Speed Skip to Next Message Scan Messages Play Menu Options Play Message Information Cancel Return to Subscriber Services ej 83 5 5 3 3 8 3 Specify Future Delivery Rewind 5 Seconds Change Playback Volume Pause Resume Record Playback Fast Forward 5 Seconds Change Playback Speed SEND Message Then Exit Record Play Menu Options Cancel Return to Subscriber Services 6 7 Bm o Cancel Return to Subscriber Services NOTE All options shown MAY NOT be authorized If an option is not available please speak to your system administrator 60 Menu Prompting 9 Record and Send Broadcast Message gt Cancel Return to Subscriber Services 0 Play Menu Options 8 Pause Resume Rewind Play
338. ing on your OfficeServ 100 or OfficeServ 500 or OfficeServ 7000 Series system type OfficeServ 500 40 Groups amp OfficeServ 7200 500 through 539 or 5000 through 5039 depending if your system is setup for 4 digits numbering plan OfficeServ 500L 80 Groups amp OfficeServ 7400 500 through 579 or 5000 though 5079 depending if your system is setup for 4 digits numbering plan Table of Contents System Admin OfficeServ 100 20 Groups amp OfficeServ 7100 500 through 519 these can be changed to 4 digits if required To create a backup or relief operator position assign the main operator and one or more backup individuals to the operator group All but the main operator should be out of the group When it is necessary to use a backup operator put the desired backup station in the group and remove the main operator When incoming call traffic is heavy you can have another station put itself in the operator group along with the main operator to handle the extra call load If the station does not have an IN OUT key Lift the handset and dial the feature access code Dial the group number Dial 0 to be out of the group or dial 1 to be in the group Receive confirmation tone and hang up If the station has an IN OUT key Press the IN OUT key It will light red when the station is the group Press the IN OUT key again The light is off when the station is out of the group NOTE A station can be in more than
339. ion on your modem will be disconnected NOTE You must have an assigned EP button button on your regular keyset for the single line station APPOINTMENT REMINDER ALARM CLOCK This feature works like an alarm clock Use it to remind yourself of an appointment later in the day TODAY ONLY or as a daily reminder every day DAILY You set up to three alarms Each one can be either a TODAY ONLY or a DAILY alarm When the alarm rings you will hear three short rings repeated three times Lift the handset to answer the alarm If you do not the alarm will alert you two more times at five minute intervals To set alarms Press TRANSFER and then dial 112 e Dial the alarm number 1 2 or 3 Dialthe time at which you want the alarm to sound Enter the time as HHMM hours and minutes using the 24 hour clock Dial 0 NOT SET 1 TODAY ONLY or 2 DAILY to select the alarm type e Press TRANSFER to save e Repeat for each alarm if needed To cancel individual alarms Press TRANSFER and then dial 112 Dial alarm number 1 2 or 3 Press the HOLD button NOTE Display keysets can show a reminder message See Alarm Reminder Messages under Display Features 38 Table of Contents ITP 5121D ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE When you are programmed to receive calls from a door phone You will receive three short rings repeated Liftthe handset or press SEND button You are connected to the door phone e Ifan
340. ion to the Terminal Status Indicator TSI you will be able to use the keyset displays and soft keys to communicate with the Samsung Voicemail 76 Table of Contents ITP 5107S PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS CODE NAME TELEPHONE NUMBER 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 77 PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS CODE NAME TELEPHONE NUMBER 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 78 Table of Contents DS 5000 Enterprise IP Solutions OfficeServ DS 5000 Series User Guide For OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 and OfficeServ 7000 Series 04 2007 __ Table of Contents 055000 TABLE OF CONTENTS ABOUT THIS 00 1 THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW 2 8 ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET 9 DS 5000 KEYSETS SETUP iaa 10 OUTSIDE CALLS aki 0 11 Answering an Outside Callao i Universal
341. ir stations This list can be from ten to fifty calls in a first in first out basis The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your station but that you did not answer When reviewing this list you can press one button to dial the person back The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number e With you handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Press 121 to turn CID REVIEW ALL on or 120 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection SECURE OHVA This option allows you to receive OHVA calls via the speaker while you are on the handset With you handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Press 131 to turn AUTO CAMP ON on or 130 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection 46 Table of Contents ITP 5121D ENBLOCK DIALING This option allows you to dial digits then press the SEND button to make the call like a cellphone e While the handset on hook press TRANSFER then dial 110 Dial 161 to turn Enblock Dialing ON or 160 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection 47 DISPLAY FEATURES INTERACTIVE DISPLAY KEYS The three keys below the display are substitutes for dedicated feature keys and ac cess codes Pressing one of these buttons has the same effect as pressing a pro grammable button These buttons are called soft keys as their functions are not fixed They change to present you with the best options for that call condition The use
342. irectly to indicate busy conditions of other stations for One Touch dialing and many other system features iDCS 648 iDCS 148 STRIP a o a E m w w a E a 14 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH RED LIGHTS Used to call stations directly to indicate busy conditions of other stations for One Touch dialing and many other system features w w o o A w w m m M w w Uo w w w w 5 o Un A A a ES Ut w B o a 64 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH RED LIGHTS Used to call stations directly to indicate busy conditions of other stations for One Touch dialing and many other system features KEYSET DAUGHTER MODULES 28 AND 18 BUTTON KEYSETS ONLY iDCS 28D and 18D button keysets can have one of three different types of daugh ter module installed on them to enhance the operation of the keyset or to provide an additional local port depending on the type of module iDCS KDB DIGITAL LINE INTERFACE FKDBD inor supporten on os 71001 If your keyset is connected to a Digital Line Interface DLI port that supports 2B D operation your installing company can determine this you may install a daugh ter module that provides a Digital Line Interface
343. irectory information you can store the number you are given using the SAVE feature There is no need for pencil and paper While you are talking on an outside call press SAVE Dialthe telephone number as it is dictated to you on the keypad Press SAVE to store the number To dial the number press the SNR button It will select the same line and dial the stored number If necessary you can select a different line and then press the SNR button 32 Table of Contents ITP 5121D PAGING AND MESSAGING MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE To make an announcement through the keyset speakers in the idle condition e Lift the handset Press the PAGE button or dial 55 e Dialthe desired zone number 0 1 2 3 or 4 After the attention tone make your announcement NOTE If you have a dedicated page zone button it is not necessary to press PAGE and dial a zone number MAKING AN EXTERNAL PAGE To make an announcement through the external paging speakers Lift the handset e Press the PAGE button or dial 55 Dialthe desired zone number 5 6 7 or 8 OR Dial 9 to page all external zones After the attention tone make your announcement NOTE If you have a dedicated page zone button it is not necessary to press PAGE and dial a zone number ALL PAGE To page all designated keysets in internal zone 0 and all external zones at the same time Lift the handset Press the PAGE button or dial 55 Dial k or press th
344. is key will affect This means that if you are in multiple groups you can decide for which groups you will receive calls 40 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET AME PASSWORD This feature allows customers using the AME feature to enable password protec tion This will prevent unauthorized users from listening to your messages being left The passcode is the same as your station passcode This feature only applies if there is an Samsung voicemail installed in the system and your keyset has a pro grammed AME key e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 101 to turn on AME PASSCODE or 100 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection AUTO CAMP ON This option allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on if possible when a busy station is called e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Press 081 to turn CAMP ON on or 080 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection SELECT RING TONE Each keyset user can select any one of eight ring frequencies While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 111 Dial 1 8 or press the UP and DOWN keys to hear each tone When you hear the tone that you prefer press TRANSFER to save it NOTE Specific lines or stations may be programmed to ring with a different tone than what you have selected for your keyset CHANGE YOUR PASSCODE From the factory your station passcode is 1234 You ca
345. is idle The LED will be lit and all calls will ring the secretary The secretary can call the BOSS in the DIVERT mode but all other users will ring the secretary the secretary can override the boss DIVERT GROUP LISTENING When you are engaged on a call and you are using the handset you may want other people to hear the distant party s voice over the speaker Press the LISTEN button to turn on the speaker The microphone is not in use so the distant party does not hear other parties present in your office Press LISTEN again to turn the speaker off and resume private conversation Repeat if necessary NOTE Depending on speaker volume and the acoustics of your office it may be advisable to turn the group listening feature off before hanging up This will elim inate a momentary squeal ACCOUNT CODES When equipped with optional equipment your system will allow calls to be charged to a specific account During any outside call press the account ACC button Enterthe 3 digit account code bin number when prompted OR If your button has an extender of 000 enter the account code maximum 12 characters including and and press 000 again OR If your button has an extender other than 000 001 999 account code con tained in that bin will automatically be entered for your LOCKING YOUR KEYSET You can lock your keyset to control misuse of your phone while you are away You can unlock it when you re
346. isten for confirmation tone then replace the handset 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 20 21 NOTES PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS CODE NAME TELEPHONE NUMBER 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 22 NOTES Table of Contents SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION AND SPECIAL FEATURES GUIDE for OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 OfficeServ 7000 Series April 2007 Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in this guide for any reason Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing may warrant Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide TABLE CONTENTS ABOUT THIS BOOK enn SPECIAL FEATURES ola TS Manual Ring Plan Change Temporary Ring Plan Override calling The System ODSTOLOF zucca eiectus 3 Operator Recalls oeste thc eoe ett scatti iio eor QUA Re 3 Executive Bar
347. it 14 OfficeServ 7100 USER INSTRUCTIONS TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 APRIL 2007 1 4 CALL FORWARDING The OfficeServ 7100 allows the system administrator to program the call forward destinations for other station users This MMC also allows call forward to be set after the destination has been entered The OfficeServ 7100 system allows four types of call forwarding FORWARD ALL FORWARD NO ANSWER FORWARD BUSY and FORWARD DND There is an additional option FORWARD BUSY NO ANSWER that allows both of these options to be activated at the same time provided that destinations have been entered for both The destinations for all these forwards can be either an internal number or an external number 0 FORWARD CANCEL 3 NO ANSWER 1 ALL CALL 4 BUSY NO ANSWER 2 BUSY FORWARD DND FORWARD CANCEL This option will cancel any call forwarding set in MMC 102 It will not remove the programmed destination and will not override any preset forward settings in MMC 316 1 ALL CALL This option when set will forward all calls to the programmed destination If the programmed destination is a station then that station can call the forwarded station to put calls through 2 BUSY This option when set will forward calls to the programmed destination when the forwarded keyset is busy 3 NO ANSWER This option when set will forward calls to the programmed destination if the forwarded station does not answer a call before the forward no answ
348. it steady Press the button again to turn off the programmed message and the indicator will go blank Pressing another programmed message PMSG button will turn the previous one off and set a different programmed message 39 CONVENIENCE FEATURES DO NOT DISTURB Use this feature when you want to block calls to your keyset e While on hook press the DND button or dial 401 The DND button indicator will be lit steady to remind you of this mode Tocancel DND press the DND button again or dial 400 The DND button indi cator goes blank You can make calls while in the DND mode NOTES 1 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 If you place your keyset in DND mode and you do not have a DND button your TSI button will flash to indicate DND status ONE TIME DND If you are on a call and you do not wish to be interrupted while on that call you can press the DND button and place your station in Do Not Disturb When you hang up at the end of the call DND will be automatically canceled and your key set will be able to receive new calls This feature requires a DND button MUTE You can mute the handset transmitter or the microphone during any conversa tion Press the MUTE button The MUTE button indicator will be lit steady Toresume speaking press the MUTE button again The MUTE button indica tor goes blank BACKGROUND MUSIC When a music sourc
349. k Parameters icit 12 OUTSIDE CALLS Making Outside 16 Dialing from the Outgoing Incoming Menu 17 Dialing the Most Recent Outgoing Incoming Number 17 Making Calls from the Call Log 17 17 Universal sent 18 Recall Dial TONG A 18 Sendinga Fah a 18 Buisy Line Que ing with Callback 18 19 INTERCOM CALLS Calling 20 Dialing the Most Recent Outgoing Incoming 20 5 20 Voice ANNOUNCE MOTE 20 su bia 21 bet b pH Rc cru Eder dU 21 Busy Station 7 21 Calling vour System DEBeRator tust eset 22 CALL PROCESSING SSS Bet ete ert et eet diee carved 23 Eclusive Hold s i ces 23 Remote Hold RR RR REM 23 Hold Recall Consultation Hold Retrieving Calls Held at Another 5 24 alls Transfer with Camp On Transfer to Voicemail Call
350. klet provides instructions for using an industry standard single line tele phone set with the OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 and OfficeServ 7000 Series sys tems A variety of single line sets from many different manufacturers are available Check with your service and installation company to ensure proper operation with the OfficeServ 100 the OfficeServ 500 and the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems Please take the time to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation of your standard telephone Keep it handy You may need to look up instructions for infrequently used features Learning to use your telephone correctly will make everyday telephone commu nications a breeze This book is written based on the factory default settings for the feature access codes Sometimes due to programming requirements these codes may be changed If you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book please contact your installation and service company to determine the correct code THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW USER ORIENTATION Lifting the handset on your telephone will provide the OfficeServ 100 the OfficeServ 500 and the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems with dial tone This is also referred to as internal or intercom dial tone To get an outside line from the tele phone company dial an access code usually the digit 9 To call another station in your system simply dial its extension number See your system directory list f
351. l like a cellphone e While the handset on hook press TRANSFER then dial 110 Dial 161 to turn Enblock Dialing ON or 160 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection 42 DISPLAY FEATURES INTERACTIVE DISPLAY KEYS The three keys below the display are substitutes for dedicated feature keys and ac cess codes Pressing one of these buttons has the same effect as pressing a pro grammable button These buttons are called soft keys as their functions are not fixed They change to present you with the best options for that call condition The use of soft keys allows the programmable buttons to be used for more DSS and speed dial buttons The SCROLL button is used to display options available to the user at a particular time or during a specific procedure Press this button once while in the idle state to view the three main categories available 201 STN NAME CALL OTHER ANS ANSWER Guides you through the options to answer calls OTHER Guides you through features other than making or answering calls CALL Guides you through the options to make a call Select one of the main categories CALL OTHER or ANS ANSWER Press the SCROLL button to display additional options available under each of the three main categories The symbol displayed as the last character on the lower line of the display indicates that there are additional options Press the SCROLL button to display these additional options User instructions wi
352. l 11 The call will now be on hold You may now make or receive a second call take the caller off hold lift the handset and dial 11 You are now con nected to the call You may resume your conversation NOTE A standard telephone can put only one call on hold at a time HOLD RECALL If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer the call will recall your sta tion When your phone rings lift the handset to answer the recall do not answer this recall within a pre programmed period of time it will go to the operator group RETRIEVING CALLS ON HOLD AT ANOTHER STATION When a line is on hold at any other station Lift the handset and dial 12 plus the extension number of the station that placed the call on hold OR dial 12 plus the line number if you know what it is CONSULTATION HOLD When you are speaking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with an other extension Hookflash and receive transfer tone Your call is placed on transfer hold Dial an extension number Consult with the internal party Hookflash to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call NOTE Repeatedly pressing the hookflash will flip flop between the outside and inside parties except if the destination station is set for Auto Answer or Voice Announce or the system has Transfer Cancel activated Table of Contents STD Telephone TRANSFERRING CALLS Transfer is used to send an
353. l DOWN and ENTER VALUE to be converted Scroll DOWN select CONVERSION UNIT Press ENTER to display answer MESSAGE This menu allows the user to send and receive text messages to from other ITP 5112L phones and Softphones The user can also store up to 10 messages on the phone 1 SEND MESSAGE a SEND MESSAGE Select this option to enter and send a new text mes sage In the field enter the EXTENSION of the RECIPIENT phone In the MSG box enter your MESSAGE and press ENTER to send 66 Table of Contents ITP 5112L b RETRIEVE MESSAGE Select this option to RETRIEVE a saved message fro the Message Box When selected a list of saved messages will be shown You can select one of these messages and open it or you can press the MENU buttons for deleting editing or sending 2 RECEIVE BOX When this item is selected all incoming text messages will be shown If you select a received message then press MENU you can REPLY RESEND or DELETE the message 3 SENT BOX This shows a list of sent messages You can press MENU and RESEND and DELETE messages 4 MESSAGE BOX This item allows you to save up to 10 messages on your phone You can send any of these messages at any time Select 1 Edit Message to CREATE a new message Select 2 Message List to VIEW and EDITall saved messages Press MENU to ADD EDIT ot DELETE messages SOUND SCREEN This option allows the user to set ring tones volume and screen setti
354. l be selected for you NOTES 1 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 2 The saved telephone number is stored in memory until you save another number 3 Redial does not apply to intercom calls CHAIN DIALING You may manually dial additional digits following a speed dial number or chain as many speed dial numbers together as required After the first speed number is dialed press MEMORY again and dial another speed number OR manually dial additional digits following a speed dial num ber AUTOMATIC REDIAL RETRY When you are making an outside call and you receive a busy signal the system can automatically redial the number for you It will automatically redial at a pre programmed interval for up to 15 attempts When you hear a busy signal press the RETRY button Thesystem will reserve the line and automatically redial the same number for you You will hear the call being made through the keyset speaker The micro phone is muted 29 When the called party answers lift the handset or press the flashing SPEAK ER to begin speaking NOTES 1 Ifyou make another call auto redial is canceled 2 Tocancela retry lift and replace the handset PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER When making an outside call on a dial pulse line press All digits dialed after the with be sent as tones MEMO REDIALING When you are calling
355. l software and or hardware Please see your service and installation company for details WHAT IS ANI suPPORTED ON os 71001 ANI Automatic Number Identification is a feature offered by some telephone service providers that provides the calling party s telephone number This service is only available E amp M Tie Lines on a 1 digital trunk ANI is similar to Caller Identification CID but the format and information of the calling person is differ ent CID uses FSK signalling and ANI uses signalling Usually with ANI a call ing party s identity is the Listed Directory Number LDN unless a separate bill to number has been specified in which case the bill to number will be sent Note that ANI does not provide calling party NAME only the number The phone system can provide calling number to name translation table WHAT IS CLI On ISDN circuits calling party information is called CLI and is supported on both BRI not supported on OS 7100 and PRI type circuits on the OfficeServ 100 and on the OfficeServ 500 systems On BRI circuits the OfficeServ 100 and the OfficeServ 500 only support number delivery and like ANI a name can be attached to the telephone number of frequent callers via the Caller ID translation table On 5ESS and NI2 PRI circuits both name and number support is provided on the OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 and OfficeServ 7000 Series systems SELECTING YOUR CALLER ID DISPLAY Simu
356. l you using the directory dial feature To program a station name Press TRANSFER and then dial 104 Enterthe 11 character name using the procedure described in Alarm Remind er Messages Press TRANSFER to store the name 49 MANAGING KEY ASSIGNMENTS You can view your key assignments and add extenders to some of your program mable keys for easy one touch operation of frequently used features e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 107 Use the VOLUME buttons to scroll through all of your programmable buttons OR press the programmable button to which you want to add the extender When you reach a key listed below dial the corresponding extender Press TRANSFER to store and exit programming Please refer to the Enhanced Display Programming Section provided by your instal lation company when requested for a complete list of descriptions and extenders for any keys you may have programmed on your keyset NOTE Confirm that the cursor is placed correctly before you enter the extender LCR WITH CLEAR When you are making an outside call using LCR and dial an incorrect digit you can press the CLEAR soft key to reenter the telephone number You do not need to redial 9 to reaccess LCR BACKSPACE WITH LCR If you misdial while using LCR you can delete digits shown in the display by press ing the BSPC soft key as many times as necessary 50 Table of Contents ITP 5107S TEXT MESSAGING This featur
357. lay Screened Greeting Edit Only New Messages Auto Play Message Personal Greetings Edit Only Information Mailbox Greeting Pause Resume Record and Send Menu Prompting Play Broadcast Message Play Menu Options Cancel Return 51 6 9 o Menu Options to Subscriber Services Cancel Return to Subscriber Services Personal Services 1 7 3 s 7 31 e Pause Resume Review Workload Edit Stored Telephone Numbers Change Weekly Schedule Place Direct Call Personal Administration Pause Resume Menu Prompting Record a Reminder Play Menu Options Cancel Return to Subscriber Services Play Menu Exit Options 4 Change Password Record 2 Name 3 Enter Directory Name 4 Extended Prompting 8 Pause Resume Menu Prompting 0 Play Menu Options Cancel Return to Subscriber Services 61 DS 5000 ACCESSING YOUR MAILBOX Also known as Subscriber Services Menu Inside Callers Subscriber logging in from their Desk Dial the voicemail access number or press the key assigned to ring the Samsung Voicemail VMMSG Enter your personal password when prompted the default password is 0000 Outside Callers Subscribers calling from Cell Phones or outside of the office environment Dialthe phone number th
358. le continuing to talk and listen to your outside party The other station can view this message and take the appropriate action or respond back with another text message You must be permitted to use the Text Messaging feature See your System Administrator or Technician to be assigned this feature They will assign you ten 10 blank messages You can create any 16 character messages 01 to 10 that are appropriate for your use NOTE See ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES for instructions on how to enter charac ters to create a text message Familiarization with the two digit message numbers you will use the most will make this procedure quick and easy However if you do not know them use the UP DOWN button to scroll to the desired message then press SEND The basics steps in text messaging are Press TMSG soft key to begin text messaging Dial the 2 digit number for the desired message Confirm this is the intended message then press SEND Wait for a reply from the other station steps 1 2 amp 3 When any station presses EXIT the displays at both stations return to their previous call progress condition Sn oe pU NS c At all times after step 1 you can talk and listen to your caller while repeating steps 2 The following example will better demonstrate how to use Text Messaging In this example station 201 is making an off hook voice announcement to station 205 who after hearing the announcement will respond with a text message S
359. le pressing and holding the MENU button Once the CONFIGURATION MENU is displayed you can move to each menu in the Set Up by using the navigation buttons and 1 9 dial buttons of the ITP 5112L IP phone UP and DOWN directions buttons in the navigation button assembly used to move the highlighted bar up or down to the desired option The LEFT and RIGHT buttons in the navigation button assembly are used to move the highlighted bar left or right to the desired option move to a sub menu and if a menu is at the last line that menu option will be executed Table of Contents ITP 5112L The 0 9 dial buttons are used to directly choose a menu or sub menu options The ENTER button in the navigation button assembly is used when saving a modification The MENU button in the navigation button assembly is used to to display the IP Setup Main Menu The END button in the navigation button assembly is used when canceling or editing the modification or existing programming The CANCEL button in the navigation button assembly is used to go back to the previous screen or to delete the last digit of a displayed option value MENU STRUCTURE The IP SETUP MENU is configured as follows 1 SYSTEM EASY WIZARD This option will guide you through setting up all required parameters for con necting the ITP keyset to your system SYSTEM INFORMATION 1 Version Info Provides boot rom software DSP and hardware
360. lect this option to recover undelete previously delet ed messages during this period of time Undelivered Retrieval When this function is activated the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to recall any messages you have sent that have NOT yet been picked up by the recipient From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 4 for Undelivered Messages Table of Contents ITP 5121D This useful feature will allow you to cancel any messages that have NOT yet been picked up by the recipient 5 Auto Play New Messages If this option is enabled after you enter your password correctly any new messages will immediately begin to play To enable or if already enabled toggle and disable this feature From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 5 to Set Auto Play of New Messages 6 Auto Play Message Information If this option is enabled the date time and sender s name will be played auto matically before each message If this is disabled the information must be requested manually by pressing 00 To enable if already enabled toggle and disable this feature From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 6 to Set Auto Play of Message Information MESSAGE BROADCAST This option will only be available if it has been allowed by the System Administrator Broadcast to All Mailboxes If you have been designate
361. lecting a C O line f your system is programmed to require an account code before making call press the ACC button or dial 47 plus a valid bin number press the ACC button again and then select C O line See Account Codes for more information For more information on authorization and account codes see your system administrator NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing ANSWERING AN OUTSIDE CALL Liftthe handset and you are automatically connected to the ringing call See Ring Preference under Customizing Your Keyset OR press the SEND but ton to automatically answer on the speakerphone NOTE If a call is flashing at your keyset but not ringing you must press the flash ing button to answer UNIVERSAL ANSWER Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device To answer calls ringing this device dial 67 or press the UA button This device can operate in any one of the six different ring plans NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing 16 Table of Contents ITP 5121D RECALL DIAL TONE Press the NEW button to disconnect your existing call wait for dial tone and then make a new call on the same line NOTE If this button does not appear on your keyset the FLASH button may be programmed to recall dial tone SENDI
362. ll be displayed in lower case letters Options assigned to soft keys will be in upper case letters DIRECTORY INFORMATION An 11 character directory name can be assigned to each extension number Display keyset users can view the name of the called or calling station before an swering Each outside line can have an 11 character directory name Incoming calls can be easily identified and answered with different greetings Outside and internal calls ringing to a station group will display CALL FOR xxx where xxx is the station group number This allows you to answer calls directed to you differently than calls directed to your group 43 LL LOG See also Special Application Menu Outgoing Call Log The system can log both incoming and outgoing calls placed from or to your tele phone You must have a LOG button programmed on your keyset and assigned a review list Each IN and OUT list can be up to 50 numbers maximum They are assigned in blocks of 10 each Press the LOG key Press either the IN or OUT key e View the first IN OUT telephone number At this point you may select one of the three options related to this number or use the UP DOWN keys to scroll through your list of calls Press the CLEAR button to erase this number from the list e Press the NND key repeatedly to view the Name Number or Date associated with this call Press the DIAL key to call this number These options are the same for the incomi
363. ll is not retrieved within a pre programmed period of time it ALL PAGE will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light You cannot park and page intercom calls 3 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing To page all designated keysets in internal zone 0 and all external zones at the same time Liftthe handset Press the PAGE button or dial 55 AUTOMATIC PARK WITH PAGE BUTTON Dial K or press the ALL PAGE button e While in conversation press the PAGE button The call is automatically parked After the attention tone make your announcement at your station Receive page tone and dial a desired page zone number NOTE The indicator on the PAGE button will be lit steady when an All Page is in Make announcement indicating your extension number or the line number progress Hang up MEET ME PAG E To retrieve an automatically parked call Lift the handset Dial 10 plus the number that was announced If you PAGPK button Press the Meet Me Page MMPG button or dial 54 press it and dial the number that was announced If you have a PARK button Dial the desired zone number press it and dial the announced orbit number After the attention tone instruct the paged person to dial 56 36 37 You will be connected to the parked call NOTES 1 Ifthe call is not retrieved within a pre programmed period of ti
364. ll see on your display NOTE The Caller ID features may require optional software and or hardware Please see your service and installation company for details WHAT IS ANI suPPORTED ON THE Os 71001 ANI Automatic Number Identification is a feature offered by some telephone service providers that provides the calling party s telephone number This service is only available E amp M Tie Lines on a 1 digital trunk ANI is similar to Caller Identification CID but the format and information of the calling person is differ ent CID uses FSK signalling and ANI uses signalling Usually with ANI a call ing party s identity is the Listed Directory Number LDN unless a separate bill to number has been specified in which case the bill to number will be sent Note that ANI does not provide calling party NAME only the number The phone system can provide calling number to name translation table WHAT IS CLI On ISDN circuits calling party information is called CLI and is supported on both BRI BRI not supported on the OfficeServ 7100 and PRI type circuits On BRI cir cuits the system only supports number delivery and like ANI a name can be attached to the telephone number of frequent callers via the Caller ID translation table On 5ESS and NI2 PRI circuits both name and number support is provided on the OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 and OfficeServ 7000 Series systems SELECTING YOUR CALLER ID DISP
365. llowing morning From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 3 for Deleted Messages Deleted voice mail messages are temporarily stored in memory until 3 a m the following day Select this option to recover undelete previously delet ed messages during this period of time Undelivered Retrieval When this function is activated the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to recall any messages you have sent that have NOT yet been picked up by the recip ient W From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 4 for Undelivered Messages 71 This useful feature will allow you to cancel any messages that have NOT yet been picked up by the recipient 5 Auto Play New Messages If this option is enabled after you enter your password correctly any new messages will immediately begin to play To enable or if already enabled tog gle and disable this feature From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 5 to Set Auto Play of New Messages 6 Auto Play Message Information If this option is enabled the date time and sender s name will be played auto matically before each message If this is disabled the information must be requested manually by pressing 00 To enable or if already enabled toggle and disable this feature From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 6 to Se
366. load 4 Group Play For a Directory 2 Assign and or Edit 2 Change 2 Edit Stored Urgent Messages Message of Subscribers Busy Greeting Pager Notification Telephone Numbers Play Previous Create Group 3H 6 Assign and or Edit Review Deleted Change Change 2 Callback Requests Message Reminder 3 3 Blocking Greeting 3 Messages 3 Weekly Schedule 1 Password E Edi R Undeli Ri d Group Message Enter the Recipient s Number ssign and or Edit eview Undelivere ecor 3 Reminders 4 can forwarding 4 Night Greeting 4 Messages 5 Direct Call 2 Name Discard 4 Message 5 cas 5 Assign and or Edit 5 Auto Play 3 Enter Directory Private Messages 9 8 Screened Greeting New Messages Name Reply to Sender Stop Append to Group Recording Edit Only Auto Play Message Personal Extended 5 Fax Only Messages Place Find Me 6 Personal Greetings 6 Information 7 Administration 4 Prompting Call to Sender Discard Recording and Rerecord Auto Set 7 Edit Only 8 Pause Resume 8 Pause Resume 8 Pause Resume Deliver Copy Night Intercept Mailbox Greeting Menu Prompting Menu Prompting Menu Prompting of Fax Message Set Delivery Options 8 Pause Resume 9 Record and Send o Pe Forward a Menu Prompting Broadcast Message Menu Options x A Specific Sender Play Message Inventory Play Menu Options Cancel Return to Subscriber Services
367. lock release is installed dial 13 to unlock the door CALLING THE DOOR PHONE ROOM MONITOR You may call the door phone and listen to what may be happening outside or in another room Dial the extension number of the door phone You will be connected to the door phone and you can listen or have con versation e electric door lock release is installed dial 13 to unlock the door NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button EXECUTIVE SECRETARY HOT LINE If programmed an executive and a secretary can have a hot line between them When the executive station is in the DND mode all of its calls will ring the secre tary station Either person can press the BOSS button to make a voice call to the other sta tion Using the hot line will override DND at the other station This button will light red when the other station is in use To transfer a call to a Boss in DND Press the TRANSFER button followed by the BOSS button Wait for the BOSS to answer to announce the call and hang up to complete the transfer OR e Hang up to complete a blind transfer after pressing the BOSS button EXECUTIVE DIVERT When the executive station is in DIVERT mode all of his her calls will ring the secretary station Press the DIVERT key to pass a call while ringing 37 To transfer all calls to the Secretary Press the DIVERT button while the phone
368. ls in park orbits 2 Ifthe parked call is not retrieved within a pre programmed period of time it will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light You cannot park and page intercom calls 3 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing AUTOMATIC PARK WITH PAGE KEY e While in conversation press the PAGE button The call is automatically parked at your station Receive page tone and dial a desired page zone number announcement indicating your extension number or the line number Hang up 32 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset To retrieve an automatically parked call Dial 10 plus the number that was announced If you have a PAGPK key press it and dial the number that was announced If you have a PARK key press it and dial the announced orbit number You will be connected to the parked call NOTES 1 If the call is not retrieved within a pre programmed period of time it will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light You cannot park and page intercom calls 3 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy signal you can leave a message indication Press the MESSAGE key or dial 43 and receive confirmation
369. lteneous display of Caller ID name and number on incoming CO calls on both lines of display keysets is supported on all OfficeServ systems on transferred CO calls you can decide if you want to see the Caller ID name or Caller ID number in the first line of the display Regardless of which one is selected you can press the NND key to view the other pieces of Caller ID information To select the type of Caller ID information you wish to view of transferred calls first e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 119 e 0 for CID options 1 for ANI options or 2 for CLI options DialO if you do not wish to view CID information 1 to view the NUMBER first or 2 to view the NAME first Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection 54 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset VIEWING THE NEXT CALLER ID CALL In the event that you have a call waiting or a camped on call at your keyset you can press the NEXT key to display the Caller ID information associated with the call in queue at your keyset Either the CID name or CID number will show in the display depending on your Name Number selection To view Caller ID information for calls that have been camped on to your keyset press the NEXT key If your keyset does not have a NEXT key press the CID key and then the NEXT soft key SAVING THE CALLER ID NUMBER At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information you may press the SAVE key to save the CID number
370. ly tried to transfer to was busy or did not answer TRANSFER RECALL All calls that you have transferred screened unscreened and camped on will automatically recall to your station if they are not answered in a pre programmed period of time WAITING If an outside call has been camped on to your phone or another station is camped on to you You will receive camp on tone indicating another call is waiting Hookflash and then dial 11 to put the first call on hold Hang up and the waiting call will ring Lift the handset to answer Complete this call by transferring it or hanging up Liftthe handset and then dial 11 to return to your first call SETTING UP A CONFERENCE You may conference five parties you and four other parties in any combination of outside lines and internal stations in any order While you are engaged in a conversation hookflash receive transfer tone and dial 46 You will receive conference tone Make another call either intercom or outside After the called party answers hookflash and receive conference tone Make another call OR hookflash to join all parties Repeat as necessary To drop a party from your conference call e Hookflash receive confirmation tone and dial the extension or line number that is to be dropped Receive conference tone and dial 46 to rejoin the other parties NOTES To leave the conference hang up Control will be passed to the first i
371. mail box has the OR capability of storing private messages and offers a number of options for sending e Press END to exit programming or redirecting messages as well as provides several ways to notify you of new mes sages ALARM REMINDER Allows you to set an Alarm Reminder Up to three alarms 9 may be set Another very common Subscriber Service is Access Manager This allows you con trol over when and where you receive your calls as well as what to speak to your callers the event you are unable to speak to them directly The events are referred to as Call Conditions No Answer Busy and Blocked are the most com monly used Call Conditions Scroll or dial option number 6 Alarm Reminder Scroll or dial the desired Alarm number Alarm 1 3 Press ENTER Enter Alarm Type 0 NOT SET Disables alarm This guide can be used by Subscribers from within the office or from telephones 1 TODAY Rings alarm one time only on the day set outside the office The basic operation is the same but the access method will be 2 DAILY Rings alarm daily at time set different See the Samsung Voicemail Subscriber Services Menu Diagram for more Press ENTER Display confirms setting and returns to that alarm set menu Note that some features and prompts detailed here may not be available to all Scroll up to set ALARM TIME Subscribers See your System Administrator if you have questions about feature e Press ENTER availab
372. me 45 VIEWING MESSAGE INDICATIONS You can view all of your message indications before you return them e With the handset on hook press the MESSAGE button with the red flashing light The first station that left a message indication will be displayed Press the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the stations that left mes sage indications Use the soft keys to reply clear or advance to the next mes sage Press the END button to return your keyset to the idle condition ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES See also Special Application Menu Name Search When you use the alarm appointment reminder feature you create a 16 charac ter reminder message When the alarm rings your message will appear instead of ALARM REMINDER To program reminder messages Press TRANSFER and then dial 116 Dial the alarm number 1 2 or Dialthetime you want the alarm to go off Enter the time as HHMM hours minutes using the 24 hour clock Dial 0 NOT SET 1 TODAY or 2 DAILY to select the alarm type Write your message using the dial pad keys Each press of a key selects a char acter Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position For exam ple if your message is TAKE MEDICATION press 8 once to get the letter T Press 2 once to get A Press 5 twice to get Continue selecting characters from the following table to complete your message Press the TRANSFER button to store the alarm an
373. me it will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light You cannot park and page intercom calls 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy signal you can leave a message indication Press the MESSAGE button OR dial 43 and receive confirmation tone Hang up The message button on the Main Programmable Button screen and the TSI will flash at the called station NOTES 1 Astation can have up to five message indications 2 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing CANCELING MESSAGES To cancel a message indication that you left at another station dial 42 plus the extension number of the station at which you left a message To cancel all message indications left at your keyset dial 42 plus your extension Your MESSAGE button indicator will stop flashing and the TSI will go out NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing RENAMING MESSAGES Press the MESSAGE button or dial 43 The first station that left a message will be called automatically If that station does not answer your MESSAGE button indicator will continue to flash an
374. me as HHMM hours and minutes using the 24 hour clock Dial 0 NOT SET 1 TODAY or 2 DAILY to select the alarm type Write your message using the dial pad keys Each press of a key selects a char acter Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position For exam ple if your message is TAKE MEDICATION press 8 once to get the letter T Press 2 once to get A Press 5 twice to get Continue selecting characters from the following table to complete your message Press the TRANSFER key to store the alarm and reminder message Repeat for each alarm if needed From the LCD 42 Press MENU button Select E DIARY Select DAILY PLANNER Press direction button UP DOWN to set the month Press direction button LEFT RIGHT to set the date Press ENTER on the desired date Press MENU then ADD Enter the TIME desired for the alarm in 24 hour format Enter the message in the CONTENTS field Table of Contents ITP 5112L Write your message using the dial pad buttons Each press of a key selects a character Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position For example if your message is TAKE MEDICATION press 8 once to get the letter Press 2 once to get A Press 5 twice to get Continue selecting charac ters from the following table to complete the message Enter ALARM ALERT period Set RING TONE When all information is set press ENTER COUNT 1 2 3 4 5 DIAL
375. menu and press SPEAKER the LCD will display the INPUT GATEWAY amp PRESS OK following message and the user can XXX XXX XXX XXX enter a new gateway address Check if there is any currently saved Gateway IP address of the phone on the LCD If the gateway IP address has not been set the LCD displays nothing The user can enter the gateway IP address by using 0 9 and button and can save that IP address by pressing the SPEAKER button Use the HOLD button to backspace NOTE In the 3 NETWORK SET UP MENU 1 NETWORK MODE SETUP option when 2 DHCP is selected the IP address Netmask and Gateway will not be dis played on the LCD Press HOLD to exit to Main Menu Load and Upgrade Set Modify The fourth item 4 LOAD amp UPGRADE SET UP sets or modifies the IP phone s software version Use extreme caution when upgrading the keyset Only use this if you are upgrading your IP keyset firmware Select the 4 LOAD amp UPGRADE SET UP item and move to the lower level The screen below is displayed 1 UPGRADE TFTP SERVER 2 UPGRADE START Select option 1 UPGRADE TFTP SERVER and enter the IP address of the TFTP server containing the ITP software Use 01 91 and button to enter the IP address Press SPEAKER to save Select option 2 UPGRADE START and press SPEAKER to start the upgrade process Press HOLD to exit Table of Contents ITP 5107S System Server Setup From the Main Setup Menu the fifth
376. minder message e Repeat for each alarm if needed COUNT 1 2 3 4 5 DIAL 0 0 DIAL 1 1 DIAL 2 2 DIAL 3 D E F 3 DIAL 4 G H 4 DIAL 5 J K L 5 DIAL 6 M N 0 A 6 DIAL 7 P Q R 5 7 48 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset DIAL 8 T U V Q 8 DIAL 9 2 9 NOTES 1 When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previ ous character press UP to move the cursor one space to the right 2 Other symbols are available for DIAL To cancel an individual alarm and reminder message Press TRANSFER and then dial 112 Dial alarm number 1 2 or 3 e Press the HOLD key Press the TRANSFER key PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES Each personal speed dial number can have an 11 character name assigned to it This name is used to select the speed dial bin when you are dialing by directory Press TRANSFER and then dial 106 Dial the speed dial bin number 00 49 Write your message using the procedure described in Alarm Reminder Mes sages Press the TRANSFER key to store the speed dial name e Repeat for each speed dial bin if necessary STATION NAMES You can assign an 11 character name to your keyset This allows other display key set users to call you using the directory dial feature To program a station name Press TRANSFER and then dial 104 Enter the 11 character name using the procedure described in Alarm Remind er Me
377. ms Each can be either a today Once or a daily Everyday alarm To set alarms Press TRANSFER and then dial 112 Dial the alarm number 1 2 or 3 Dialthe time at which you want the alarm to sound Enter the time as HAMM hours and minutes using the 24 hour clock Dial 0 NOT SET 1 TODAY ONLY or 2 DAILY to select the alarm type Press TRANSFER to save e Repeat for each alarm if needed To cancel individual alarms Press TRANSFER and then dial 112 Dial alarm number 1 2 or 3 Press the HOLD key 41 From the LCD Press MENU button Scroll to E DIARY option press ENTER Scroll to ALARM option and press ENTER OR you may dial 2 and immedi ately enter the option Choose the desired ALARM NUMBER 1 2 Enter TIME via the dial pad in 24 hour format Set RING TONE via the direction button left right Each tone is heard Set REPEAT DURATION via the direction button Press ENTER when finished To clear alarm Scroll to CLEAR option in Alarm Clock setting screen and press ENTER DAILY PLANNER Scheduling feature with message Allows the scheduling of up to 30 alarm reminders Each of these reminders can have an associated message of up to 32 characters These reminders can be scheduled to ring one hour before one half hour before or right at the exact time set Press TRANSFER and then dial 116 Dial the alarm number 1 2 or 3 Dial the time you want the alarm to go off Enter the ti
378. n Press the STORE button The system displays the speed dial bin in which the number was stored OR Press the CID button and then press the SCROLL button Press the STORE soft key The system displays the speed dial bin in which the number was stored NOTE Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the saved number If LCR is not being used on your system you will not be allowed to STORE CID numbers 58 Table of Contents ITP 5121D INQUIRE CALLER ID PARK HOLD INFO If you are informed that an incoming call is on hold or has been parked for you you may view the Caller ID information before you retrieve the call This may influ ence how you choose to handle the call From an idle keyset Press the INQUIRE button OR Press the CID button and then the INQUIRE soft key Dialthe trunk number You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button OR You may use NND to view more information about this call OR You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE If you are on a call e Press the INQUIRE button Your existing call will go on hold OR Press the CID button and then the INQUIRE soft key to place the first call on hold Dialthe trunk number You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button OR You may use NND to view more information about this call OR You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE NOTES 1 If you are on an intercom call or
379. n change your station pass code whenever you desire While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 101 Dial your old passcode Diala new passcode must be four characters You can use 0 9 Redial the new passcode to verify If successful you will hear two beeps Four beeps indicate an incorrect code Reenter the code again Press TRANSFER to store the new passcode 41 SET ANSWER INTERCOM You can receive internal calls in one of three modes see Answering Intercom Calls under Intercom Calls for descriptions e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 103 0 for Ringing 1 for Auto Answer or 2 for Voice Announce Press TRANSFER to store your selection NOTE When your keyset is programmed for Auto Answer and you have Forward No Answer FNA turned on you must answer screened transfers by pressing the ANS RLS key before your FNA timer expires or the call will forward SET ANSWER MODE CO Your incoming CO calls can be set to follow the intercom answer mode While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 15 to access AUTO ANS CO Press the VOLUME UP or DOWN key to change status Press TRANSFER to store your selection NOTE When your keyset is programmed for Auto Answer and you have Forward No Answer FNA turned on you must answer screened transfers by pressing the ANS RLS key before your FNA timer expires or the call will forward AUTOMATIC HOLD While on an
380. n dial 110 e Dial 001 to turn Automatic Hold on or 000 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection 51 From the LCD e Press MENU button Scroll to SETUP option and press ENTER Scroll to STATION ON OFF and press ENTER OR you may dial 6 and immediately enter the option Scroll to AUTO HOLD press ENTER to change option status Press CANCEL to enter change and return to the Main Configuration Menu press END to return to idle screen NOTE Intercom calls can be automatically put on hold by pressing TRANSFER HEADSET OPERATION Keyset users can switch between headset mode and handset mode When using headset mode press the SEND and END buttons to answer and release calls e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 021 to use the headset or 020 to use the handset Press TRANSFER to store your selection From the LCD Press MENU button Scroll to SETUP option press ENTER Scroll to STATION ON OFF and press ENTER OR you may dial 6 immediately enter the option Scroll to HEADSET USE and press ENTER to change option status Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu press END to return to idle screen Your keyset may be equipped with a Headset mode button If it is so equipped pressing this button while the button indicator is blank will cause the keyset to enter headset mode and the button indicator to b
381. n of outside lines and internal stations in any order While engaged a conversation press the CONF button and receive confer ence tone Make another call either intercom or outside press the CONF button and receive conference tone another call or press the CONF button to join all parties e Repeat the last step until all parties are added NOTE When attempting to add another party to the conference and you are not able to reach the desired person hang up Simply press the CONF button again to return to your previous conversation To drop a party from your conference call Press CONF and dial the extension or line number that is to be dropped Press CONF again to reestablish the conference NOTE To leave the conference hang up Control is passed to the next internal sta tion If there are no internal stations and you wish to leave outside lines connect ed together in a trunk to trunk conference press the CONF button plus the CALL button that the call appears on or follow the instructions to drop a party and use your extension number When they hang up the lines will release automatically Press CONF to rejoin a trunk to trunk conference CONFERENCE SPLITTING If you are the controlling party of a conference and your keyset has the Auto Hold feature turned on See Customizing Your Keyset and all of the outside lines involved in the conference appear as buttons on your keyset you can split the conferen
382. n set the LCD will show nothing Use any dial buttons from 0 9 and button to enter the gateway IP address and save it by pressing the Enter button of navigation buttons NOTE If DHCP mode is selected the IP address Netmask and Gateway will not be displayed on the LCD 1 w Load and Upgrade Set Modify The fourth item 4 Load amp Upgrade Setup sets or modifies the IP phone s soft ware version Use extreme caution when upgrading the keyset Select the 4 Load amp Upgrade item The screen below is displayed l TFTP Server Setup 2 Upgrade Start 1 Server Setup This option is used to enter the IP address of the TFTP Server which hosts the ITP software 2 Upgrade Start When you select this option the software from the TFTP server will be pushed to the ITP phone Registering and Authenticating the ITP to your System The fifth item 5 System Server Setup sets or modifies settings related to the registering the ITP to the MCP Select the 5 System Server Setup The screen below will be displayed 1 System Server 2 System ID 3 System Password You can set modify the IP address of the MCP at the 1 System Server item The screen below is displayed when you enter the item The server IP is the IP address of the MCP Server IP Address XXX XXX XXX XXX You can confirm the current IP address of the authentication server at the LCD panel The address is left blank if it is not
383. n unlock it when you return Your default station passcode is 1234 e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 100 Dial your four digit station passcode Dial 1 to locking outgoing 2 for locked all calls or 0 to unlock Press TRANSFER to store your selection 40 Table of Contents ITP 5121D 1 2 P LOCKED OUTGOING LOCKED ALL CALLS Hold Button LED Flashes Hold Button LED Solid Make outside calls YES NO NO ACCESS DENIED Receive outside calls YES YES NO Make intercom calls YES YES NO Receive intercom calls YES YES NO MANUAL SIGNALLING Use this feature when you want to send a brief 500ms ring burst to another sta tion regardless of the status of your phone on hook off hook handsfree DND or ringing To send a signal to another station Press the Manual Signalling MS button You may press the MS button repeatedly to send multiple signals to the des ignated station NOTE Your phone must have a Manual Signalling MS button with a station number extender assigned to it OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE Keysets may receive a voice announcement while on another call The calling sta tion must have an OHVA button When you are in DND you cannot receive OHVA calls The OHVA feature will work with intercom and transferred calls When you receive an OHVA and secure OHVA is ON you will hear the announce ment in the handset receiver if you are using the handset If secure OHVA is OF
384. nal screen option This screen has options for setting the status of the keyset user This status update is viewable to EasySet users only Either person can press the BOSS button to make a voice call to the other sta tion Using the hot line will override DND at the other station This button will have a flashing indication when the other station is in use To transfer a call to a Boss in DND Press the TRANSFER button followed by the BOSS button e Wait for the BOSS to answer to announce the call and hang up to complete the transfer OR hang up to complete a blind transfer after pressing the BOSS button To send a text message to the Boss display Press the TRANSFER button followed by the EXE SECR MSG soft button Scroll to the desired message and press ENTER the BOSS station gets three short ring bursts followed by the message This method gives you the option to transfer the call to another station if so desired Press the TRANSFER button again to be reconnected to the caller Takethe necessary action the BOSS cancels DND and transfer the call or take a message OR press the EXE SECR MSG soft button scroll to the desired 44 Table of Contents ITP 5112L message and press ENTER while maintaining contact with t he caller This method does not give you the option to transfer the call to another station Take necessary action take message etc To set up the Executive Secretary messages 10 ea
385. nauthorized people from listening to your messages being left The passcode is the same as your station passcode This feature only applies if there is a SVMi card installed in the system and your keyset has a programmed AME button With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 101 to turn on AME PASSCODE or 100 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection From the LCD Press MENU button Scroll to SETUP option and press ENTER Scroll to STATION ON OFF and press ENTER OR you may dial 6 and immediately enter the option Scroll to AME password and press ENTER to change status Press CANCEL to return to the Main Option press END to return to the idle screen AUTO CAMP ON This option allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on if possible when a busy station is called e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Press 081 to turn CAMP ON on or 080 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection From the LCD Press MENU button Scroll to SETUP option and press ENTER Scroll to STATION ON OFF and press ENTER OR you may dial 6 and immediately enter the option Scroll to AUTO CAMP ON and press ENTER to change status Press CANCEL to return to the Main Option press END to return to the idle screen 49 SELECT RING Each ITP 5112L user can select from a variety of ring tones From t
386. navailable Place a Direct Call Allows you to place a direct call out of the Samsung Voicemail from any where You may either dial the number or dial a single digit 1 5 that corre sponds to a stored number See Personal Services 2 Stored Numbers This feature must be authorized by the System Administrator and can be limited or opened to internal local and long distance calls Personal Administration This area is used during the initial set up of your Subscriber Settings see next section Table of Contents ITP 5121D PERSONAL ADMINISTRATION SETTINGS This menu allows you to make changes to basic setup settings that are rarely changed Use these when you initially set up your personal Subscriber settings You probably will not need to change them after that 1 Setting your Password From the Subscriber Services Menu press 7 1 The current password will be played and you will have the chance to change it 2 Recording your Name Use this option to record your name Your recorded name is played in several different situations It is important to record your name for proper operation of the Samsung Voicemail system From the Subscriber Services Menu press 7 2 The current name will be played and you will have the chance to change it Note It is possible that if you do not record your name and or enter your Directory Name described below you will not be included in the Dial by Name Direc
387. ndard tele phones receive special dial tone as a message indication or a lit message lamp if the phone is equipped with one and they are connected to an BMWSLI card not available on the OfficeServ 100 or OfficeServ 7000 Series or a 16MWSLI card on the system NOTES 1 Astation can have up to five message indications 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing CANCELING MESSAGES To cancel a message indication that you left at another station dial 42 plus the extension number of the station at which you left a message To cancel all mes sage indications left at your keyset dial 42 plus your extension Your MESSAGE light will go out NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 55 5 Press the MESSAGE button or dial 43 The first station that left a message will be called automatically If that station does not answer your MESSAGE light will stay on Repeat until all messages have been returned in the order received Your MESSAGE light will turn off when all messages have been returned 33 NOTES 1 Display keyset users can view message indications and return them any order See Viewing Message Indications under Display Features 2 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset
388. nds Change playback volume of the recording There are two levels of volume during playback Dialing this code will tog gle between the two levels Pause or resume during message playback Fast forward the message 5 seconds Table of Contents DS 5000 99 Change playback speed of the recording There are two levels of speed during playback Dialing this code will toggle between the two speeds 0 Play options Pressing this key will play all the menu options available to you from this point 00 Hear the time and date and sender s information of the message you just heard Sender information is not available on outside calls Move to the next message This does not Save Discard the current mes sage it is retained as new Scan Plays first 7 seconds of a message then skips to next message This is similar to the scan button on a radio It will allow you to find a specific mes sage quickly To stop scanning press 1 Cancel and return to previous menu o GROUP NEW OR OLD MESSAGES Messages can be grouped as either Reminders press 3 or Messages from a spe cific sender press 9 Additionally you can press and hear a summary of your mailbox contents a Number of messages b Number of reminders c Number of urgent messages d Number of messages needing a callback e Number of private messages f Number of fax messages RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE This option is used to send a messa
389. ne group button or dial a line access code to receive dial tone OR press an idle outside line button line group button or dial a line access code to receive dial tone through the speaker OR press SPEAKER receive intercom dial tone and dial a line access code the telephone number Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS RLS key NOTE You will receive No More Calls tone when you attempt to make a call and there is no key available for that line f Least Cost Routing is enabled on your phone system this button may be labeled LCR or accessed by dialing an access code usually 9 f your system is programmed to require an authorization code before making a call dial plus a valid code before selecting a C O line f your system is programmed to require an account code before making call press the ACC button or dial 47 plus a valid bin number press the ACC button again and then select a line See Account Codes for more informa tion For more information on authorization and account codes see your system administrator NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before dialing ANSWERING AN OUTSIDE CALL Lift the handset and you are automatically connected to the ringing call See Ring Preference under Customizing Your Keyset OR press the 5 key to automatically answer on the speakerphone NOT
390. nes PAYPHONE The caller is calling from a coin operated telephone The telephone company will send this information as there are no directory listings for pay phones The number will be de livered as usual INVALID CID INFO This is a message that will be displayed when CID informa tion is sent on the line but was somehow corrupted NOCID RECEIVED This is a message that will be displayed when there was no CID information sent on the line 56 Table of Contents ITP 5121D NO CID DSP Caller ID Digital Signal Processors CIDDSP s are resources in the OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 and OfficeServ 7000 Series systems required for receiving CID data If there are no CIDDSP s available at the time a call comes in this is the message you will see on your display NOTE The Caller ID features may require optional software and or hardware Please see your service and installation company for details WHAT IS ANI supporten ON THE Os 7100 ANI Automatic Number Identification is a feature offered by some telephone service providers that provides the calling party s telephone number This service is only available E amp M Tie Lines a 1 digital trunk ANI is similar to Caller Identification CID but the format and information of the calling person is differ ent CID uses FSK signalling and ANI uses signalling Usually with ANI a call ing party s identity is the Listed Directory Number LDN unless
391. nformation about this call OR Press DIAL to call this person back OR Press SCROLL and then press STORE to save this number in a personal speed dial bin NOTES Each keyset defaults with ten review bins Please see your system administra tor to determine the number of bins assigned to your keyset Your system must have LCR correctly programmed to allow you to DIAL num bers from the review list or to STORE entries from the review list 55 SPECIAL APPLICATION MENU Below are instructions for additional call processing and special applications that can be accomplished via the LCD programming These features and functions can be accessed by pressing the MENU button Follow the user instructions below to utilize these features and functions After pressing the MENU button use the direction button to scroll to the desired menu option Press ENTER to access the menu To navigate within the menu you may scroll to the desired option function or dial the associated option function number Press END button to exit programming MENU OPTIONS Note that some of the features listed here may require system programming and configuration in order to function See your system administrator for details Press the MENU button to access the options below Use the UP DOWN direc tional button to scroll to and within option menus and sub menus You may also dial the option number after pressing the MENU button 1 OUTGOING LOGS Allows you to vi
392. ng or outgoing call logs DIA L BY NAM E See also Special Application Menu Name Search Each station or speed dial number can have an associated directory name sta tion or speed dial number can be selected by scrolling alphabetically through a directory name list This on line phone book allows the user to look up and dial any station or speed dial number in seconds Press the DIR button DIRECTORY Select the directory you wish to use PERS personal speed dial numbers SYS system speed dial numbers or STN station names Dialthe key on the keypad that corresponds to the first letter of the name you wish to search for Use the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the names Press the DIAL soft key to dial the number NOTE A DIR button can have an extender to take you directly to one of the above lists PERS SYS or STN 44 Table of Contents DS 5000 CALL PROGRESS DISPLAYS During everyday call handling your keyset display will provide information that is helpful and in some cases invaluable Displays like CALL FROM 203 TRANSFER TO 202 701 RINGING TRANSFER FM 203 708 busy Camp on to 204 Recall from 204 Call for 501 message frm 204 and FWD ALL to 204 keep you in formed of what is happening and where you are In some conditions you are prompted to take an action and in other cases you receive directory information DISPLAY NUMBER DIALED Display keysets begin showing digit
393. ng station To finish the call replace the handset or press the END button See Ring Preference under Customizing Your Keyset VOICE ANNOUNCE MODE When another station calls you your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and you will hear the caller s announcement Press SEND to turn on the microphone and speak handsfree OR lift the handset to reply To finish the call replace the handset or press the END button NOTE In order for C O calls to be answered handsfree AUTO ANS CO must be set ON AUTO ANSWER MODE When another station calls you your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and then automatically answer the call Your microphone and speaker are turned on and you can speak handsfree For privacy use the handset Tofinish the call replace the handset or press the END button NOTE In order for C O calls to be answered handsfree AUTO ANS CO must be set ON 13 BUSY STATION CALLBACK When you call another station and receive a busy signal Press the button if programmed or dial 44 When the busy station becomes free your keyset will ring Lift the handset or press SEND to call the now idle station NOTES 1 A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds If you have set a callback your CBK button will light 2 the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing BUSY STAT
394. ng you record it will play for all call coverage conditions This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Basic Greeting feature 79 80 Example Hi this is John Smith l m sorry am not available to answer your call If someone else can help you please enter the extension number now Or to leave me a message press 1 Busy Greeting Played to a caller when you are already talking to someone on your extension or the telephone at your Designated Location This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Busy Greeting feature Example Hi this is John Smith I m on another line right now If someone else can help you please enter the extension number now Or to leave a message press 1 Call Blocking Greeting Used while Call Blocking is enabled in your Access Manager or if your phone is forwarded ALL or DND This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Call Blocking feature Example Hi this is John Smith Sorry missed your call but I m going to be out of the office for the next few hours If someone else help you please enter the extension number now Or to leave me a message press 1 Night Greeting Used during the time period you are scheduled UNAVAILABLE usually after business hours during the evening and at night This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Scheduling feature E
395. nger than 60 min utes the timer restarts You can press the TIMER button to manually begin timing a call Press it again to stop timing If you press it while the automatic timer is on the call duration time is restarted AUTO TIMER Display keyset users may have the timer automatically start when they answer incoming calls or after a short delay on an outgoing call e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 011 to turn the auto timer on or 010 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection From the LCD Press MENU button Scroll to SETUP option press ENTER Scroll to STATION ON OFF and press ENTER OR you may dial 6 immediately enter the option Scroll to AUTO TIMER press ENTER Press ENTER to change option status Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu press END to return to idle screen TIMER FUNCTION Display keyset users may use this feature as a simple stopwatch When the keyset is idle press the TIMER button to start timing Press the TIMER button again to stop timing Read the elapsed time in the display Lift the handset and replace it The display will return to date and time 58 Table of Contents ITP 5112L VIEWING MESSAGE INDICATIONS You can view all of your message indications before you return them With the handset on hook press the MESSAGE button with the flashing indi cator Th
396. ngs Use the directional ARROW KEYS to browse and ENTER to save Ring Tone Select Select from 3 categories of ring tones from your phone Keytone Select Selects the tone heard when pressing any button on your phone Volume Sets various volume levels on your phone Select Background Select the background for your idle screen Menu Style Select from 2 menu formats Background Style Select from 2 color schemes for your phone menus Select Brightness Select screen brightness level Screen Saver Determines what time interval the screen saver or power save wil kick in CALL FORWARD See Transferring Calls Section Forwarding Calls 9 MV SETUP 1 ANSWERING MODE See Customizing Your Keyset Section Station Answering Mode Programming 2 ABSENT MESSAGE See Paging and Messaging Section 3 INTERNAL CALL Select incoming information display from internal caller Number or Name 67 4 5 68 AOM PAGE SETUP DIAL MODE Select dial type options enblock requires SEND button to com plete the call or overlap direct out dial Scroll to or dial 9 press ENTER Scroll LEFT RIGHT to select desired display option Press ENTER display confirms save STATION ON OFF Turn various features functions on off in the keyset These features are AUTO HOLD When on an outside call pressing a line button route button or flashing CALL button will automatically put your call
397. nnot transfer an Intercom call by pressing a DSS button You must press the TRANSFER button and dial the destination extension number TRANSFER WITH CAMP ON When you are transferring a call to another station and you receive a busy signal you may camp the call on to this station Simply hang up when you hear the busy signal The called party will be alerted that a call is waiting for them NOTE If you receive No More Calls tone that station has no button available to receive another call Press TRANSFER to return to the outside caller TRANSFER TO VOICEMAIL This feature is used to send a call directly to a voice mailbox Your keyset must have a correctly programmed VT button to accomplish this To transfer a call directly to a voice mailbox e While a call press the VT button and dial the mailbox number Hang up when dialing is completed CALL WAITING If an outside call has been camped on to your phone or another station has camped on to you You will hear a tone in the earpiece and the call that is waiting for you camped on will flash In addition the bottom line of the display will indicate the number of the station or trunk party camped on Press the flashing button to answer your other call will go on hold automati cally if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set If not you must press HOLD and then the flashing button OR Finish the first call and hang up the waiting call will ring Table of Cont
398. ns that you can assign specific greetings to are select ed by the following digits 1 Primary No Answer Greeting Used when in your office away from your desk or during the time period you are scheduled available If this is the only Personal Greeting you record it will play for all call coverage conditions This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Basic Greeting feature 73 74 Example Hi this is John Smith l m sorry am not available to answer your call If someone else can help you please enter the extension number now Or to leave me a message press 1 Busy Greeting Played to a caller when you are already talking to someone on your extension or the telephone at your Designated Location This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Busy Greeting feature this is John Smith I m on another line right now If someone else can help you please enter the extension number now Or to leave a message press 1 Call Blocking Greeting Used while Call Blocking is enabled in your Access Manager or if your phone is forwarded ALL or DND This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Call Blocking feature Example Hi this is John Smith Sorry missed your call but I m going to be out of the office for the next few hours If someone else help you please enter the extension number now Or to leave me
399. nt 65 Access 66 Personal NGS arta d 68 Mailbox ON 70 Message Broadcast eaae mise trece a ront 72 Personal er initi didicit rd 73 Personal Administration sssini 74 Keyset User Features Shoes PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS 78 79 Table of Contents iDCSKeyset ABOUT THIS BOOK Your iDCS keyset is the most visible part of your telephone system No matter what model keyset you are using telephone calls are handled the same way The 28D and 18D keysets have additional conveniences that are not available to 8D keyset users These are noted throughout this guide Please take the time to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation of your keyset Keep this guide handy You may need to look up instructions for infrequently used features Learning to use your keyset correctly will make everyday telephone communica tions a breeze This book is written based on the factory default settings for the feature access codes Sometimes due to programming requirements these codes may be changed If you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book please contact your installation and service com
400. nter nal station that was added If there are no internal stations and you wish to leave outside lines connected together in trunk to trunk conference follow the instruc tions to drop a party and use your extension number When the parties on the out side lines hang up the lines will release automatically proceeding disconnect supervision is supplied by the telephone company FORWARDING YOUR CALLS You may forward your calls to other stations or groups of stations When they are programmed Forward All Calls will have priority over Forward Busy and Forward No Answer conditions To clear all call forward conditions set at your station lift the handset and dial 600 NOTE It is not necessary to clear call forwarding to change your selection simply enter a new forward command Table of Contents STD Telephone FORWARD ALL CALLS To forward all of your calls to another station Lift the handset and dial 601 followed by the destination you want your calls to forward to This can be an internal within your system or external outside your system such as a cell phone number Receive confirmation tone and hang up To cancel Forward All Calls lift the handset and dial 600 0OR dial another for ward code e g 604 FORWARD BUSY To forward calls to another station when you are on the phone Lift the handset and dial 602 followed by the destination you want your calls to forward to This can be an internal within y
401. number 2 once to get the letter A Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message Press the A key to change the letter from upper case to lower case NOTE When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as does the previous character press the UP key to move the cursor to the right DCS KEYSETS NOT SUPPORTED ON THE OFFICESERV 7100 COUNT 1 2 3 4 5 DIAL 0 Q 2 0 1 space 1 DIAL 2 6 2 DIAL 3 D E F 3 DIAL 4 G H 5 4 DIAL 5 J K L 5 DIAL 6 M N 6 DIAL 7 5 amp 7 DIAL 8 T U Q 8 DIAL 9 X Y 9 DIAL 1 The key be used for the following special characters t space amp 96 ily 0 lj 0 n iDCS ITP DS 5000 KEYSETS COUNT DIAL 0 DIAL 1 DIAL 2 DIAL 3 DIAL 4 DIAL 5 DIAL 6 DIAL 7 DIAL 8 DIAL 9 DIAL 1 When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previ 1 lt space 34 2 gt x 0 ZA gt gt n ous character press UP to move the cursor space to the right 2 Other symbols are available for DIAL Table of Contents System Admin PROGRAM TRUNK NAMES This program is used to assign a character name or identification for each C O line You may assign a name of 11 characters long PROGR
402. o enter change and return to main Configuration menu 7 8 Table of Contents ITP 5112L OUT CODE SETUP NETWORK INFO Provides all IP network related information MY PHONE Used to personalize your keyset 1 MY NAME Enters the user s name on the phone The name registered here is displayed on the LCD screen od the opponent s phone when making an inter nal call LANGUAGE Sets a language between Korean and English CHANGE PASSWORD Changes the four digit password that can lock the phone from use LOCKED Sets the lock status of the phone This will restrict access to the phone UNLOCKED Full Access LOCKED OUT Restricts outgoing calls LOCK ALL Restricts complete access to phone PRIVATE LIFE PROTECTION Retricts access to the MENU button using a password PHONE VERSION Displays the software version of the telephone RESET TO DEFAULT Removes the data phone number messages set by the user and defaults the phone 69 Samsung Voicemail This section describes how to setup and use the various features available to a Subscriber A Subscriber is a person that has been authorized access to the vari ous features and services available in the Samsung Voicemail Please review this section carefully before you use your Authorized Features and Services known as Subscriber Services Voicemail is one of the Subscriber Services available Your voicemail box has the capability of storing private messages
403. o see the Caller ID name or Caller ID number in the display Regardless of which one is selected you can press the NND button to view the other pieces of Caller ID information To select the type of Caller ID informa tion you wish to view first e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 119 e Dial 0 for CID options 1 for ANI options or 2 for CLI options e Dial 0 if you do not wish to view CID information 1 to view the NUMBER first or 2 to view the NAME first Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection 52 Table of Contents 5 5000 VIEWING THE NEXT CALLER ID CALL In the event that you have a call waiting or a camped on call at your keyset you can press the NEXT button to display the Caller ID information associated with the call in queue at your keyset Either the CID name or CID number will show in the display depending on your Name Number selection To view Caller ID information for calls that have been camped on to your keyset press the NEXT button If your keyset does not have a NEXT button press the CID button and then the NEXT soft key SAVING THE CALLER ID NUMBER At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information you may press the SAVE button to save the CID number If your keyset does not have a SAVE but ton press the CID button the SCROLL button and then the SAVE soft key The sys tem must be using LCR to dial the saved number REDIALING A SAVED CALLER ID NUMBER To r
404. o the door phone You can listen or have a conver sation e Ifan electric door lock release is installed hookflash receive confirmation tone and dial 13 to release the lock ACCOUNT CODES When it is equipped with optional equipment your system allows calls to be charged to different accounts You can enter an account code in two ways To enter an account code by interrupting the conversation While on an outside call hookflash receive confirmation tone and dial 47 Dial the account code it may be a maximum of 12 characters including Q and e Hookflash to return to the conversation If you make an error repeat the procedure with the correct code Only the last account code dialed will be recorded Table of Contents STD Telephone To enter an account code after the outside party hangs up After the outside party hangs up hookflash receive confirmation tone and then dial 47 Dial the account code it may be a maximum of 12 characters including 4 NOTE If you wait for the outside party to hang up you must complete this dure within ten seconds You cannot repeat if you make a mistake IN OUT OF GROUP If your station is assigned to a hunt group this feature will allow you to dial an access code plus the group number e g 501 plus 0 to temporarily prevent your station from receiving any group calls You will still be able to receive calls that are dialed directly to your station To r
405. of Contents ITP 5112L STORING A CALLER ID NUMBER At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information you may save the CID number as a speed dial number in your personal speed dial list To store a Caller ID number in a personal speed dial bin Press the STORE button The system displays the speed dial bin in which the number was stored OR press the CID button and then press the SCROLL button Press the STORE soft key The system displays the speed dial bin in which the number was stored NOTE Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the saved number If LCR is not being used on your system you will not be allowed to STORE CID numbers INQUIRE CALLER ID PARK HOLD INFO If you are informed that an incoming call is on hold or has been parked for you you may view the Caller ID information before you retrieve the call This may influ ence how you choose to handle the call From an idle keyset e Press the INQUIRE button OR press the CID button and then the INQUIRE soft key Dial the trunk number You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button OR you may use NND to view more information about this call OR you can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE If you are on a call Press the INQUIRE button Your existing call will go on hold OR press the CID button and then the INQUIRE soft key to place the first call on hold Dialthe
406. of seven across the face of the keyset Any of the system features or functions can be programmed to these buttons The three buttons above the top row of programmable buttons are soft keys These buttons assist in the use of the system features and functions Lines from the telephone company are C O lines Calls on these lines are referred to as outside calls Your system can have individual C O line keys or lines may be assigned to groups When they are in a group you access a line by dialing an access code or pressing a route button For example dial 9 or press a LOCAL but ton to get a local outside line If Least Cost Routing is used pressing the LCR but ton will automatically select a preprogrammed C O line according to what digits are dialed Each line in the system is numbered beginning with 701 then 702 703 etc Direct Station Selection DSS buttons are programmed to ring specific stations You can press a DSS button instead of dialing the extension number CALL INDICATIONS The buttons on your phone have light emitting diodes LEDs These are tri colored LEDs that light green red or amber green and red together Intercom calls also called internal calls always appear on your CALL buttons They will always light green You can have up to eight CALL buttons but at least two are recommended Outside calls appear on individual line buttons if they are assigned When an indi vidual line is not assigned to its
407. of soft keys allows the programmable buttons to be used for more DSS and speed dial buttons The SCROLL button is used to display options available to the user at a particular time or during a specific procedure Press this button once while in the idle state to view the three main categories available 201 STN NAME CALL OTHER ANS ANSWER Guides you through the options to answer calls OTHER Guides you through features other than making or answering calls CALL Guides you through the options to make a call Select one of the main categories CALL OTHER or ANS ANSWER Press the SCROLL button to display additional options available under each of the three main categories The symbol displayed as the last character on the lower line of the display indicates that there are additional options Press the SCROLL button to display these additional options User instructions will be displayed in lower case letters Options assigned to soft keys will be in upper case letters DIRECTORY INFORMATION An 11 character directory name can be assigned to each extension number Display keyset users can view the name of the called or calling station before an swering Each outside line can have an 11 character directory name Incoming calls can be easily identified and answered with different greetings Outside and internal calls ringing to a station group will display CALL FOR xxx where xxx is the station group number This allows you to answ
408. of time it will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light You cannot park and page intercom calls 3 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing AUTOMATIC PARK WITH PAGE BUTTON e While in conversation press the PAGE button The call is automatically parked at your station Receive page tone and dial a desired page zone number Make announcement indicating your extension number or the line number Hang up 32 Table of Contents 51075 retrieve an automatically parked call Dial 10 plus the number that was announced If you have a PAGPK button press it and dial the number that was announced If you have a PARK button press it and dial the announced orbit number You will be connected to the parked call NOTES 1 If the call is not retrieved within a pre programmed period of time it will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light You cannot park and page intercom calls 2 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy signal you can leave a message indication Press the MESSAGE button or dial 43 and receive confirmation tone Hang up The MESSAGE button on the called station will light Sta
409. old Button Dial Button Microphone Speaker Button Table of Contents 51075 ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET Place the keyset face down on a flat surface Insert notched ends of the support bracket into the channels located in the upper section of the bottom panel Push towards the top of the keyset to lock in Plug the handset cord into the jack marked with the 3 symbol Route the handset cord out the RIGHT side of the keyset as you look at it face down Plug an eight conductor ethernet cable from the wall into the jack marked LAN on the back of the keyset Connect the ITP keyset to any port on the local network Plug the power connector from the power adapter provided into the power jack on the back of the keyset The power adapter is not required if the ITP is connected to a LAN connection that provides power over the ethernet The 51075 supports the power over ethernet feature when it is connected to a IEEE 802 3af compliant LAN switch or power injector port IMPORTANT NOTE To prevent damaging the keyset only use the Power Adapter that came with the 51075 keyset This manual assumes that the ITP keysets are connected to a functioning local IP network The local IP network must be able to communicate with the MCP and card in the OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 or the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems over IP This is assumed regardless of whether the IP keyset is on a local or remote
410. omatically put on hold by pressing TRANSFER HEADSET OPERATION Keyset users can switch between headset mode and handset mode When using headset mode press the SEND END button to answer and release calls With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 021 to use the headset or 020 to use the handset Press TRANSFER to store your selection 39 Your keyset be equipped with Headset mode button If it is so equipped pressing this button while the light is out will cause the keyset to enter headset mode and the light will illuminate to indicate this Pressing the button while the light is lit will cause the keyset to return to handset mode and the light will go out HOT KEYPAD On your phone system your 8675615 keypad can be made live or hot so that it is not necessary to lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing Calls can be made and features activated by simply dialing the C O line number trunk group access code intercom number or feature access code To ac tivate this feature e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 031 to turn the Hot Keypad on or 030 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection KEY CONFIRMATION TONE You can hear a short beep confirmation tone each time you press a button on the dial pad This tone can be turned on or off While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 040 to turn
411. on back The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number e With you handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Press 121 to turn CID REVIEW ALL on or 120 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection SECURE OHVA This option allows you to receive OHVA calls via the speaker while you are on the handset With you handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Press 131 to turn AUTO CAMP ON on or 130 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection 44 Table of Contents 51075 DISPLAY FEATURES INTERACTIVE DISPLAY KEYS The three keys below the display are substitutes for dedicated feature keys and ac cess codes Pressing one of these buttons has the same effect as pressing a pro grammable button These buttons are called soft keys as their functions are not fixed They change to present you with the best options for that call condition The use of soft keys allows the programmable buttons to be used for more DSS and speed dial buttons The SCROLL button is used to display options available to the user at a particular time or during a specific procedure Press this button once while in the idle state to view the three main categories available 201 STN NAME CALL OTHER ANS ANSWER Guides you through the options to answer calls OTHER Guides you through features other than making or answering calls CALL Guides you through the options to make a call Select one of the ma
412. on extension number TRANSFER WITH CAMP ON When you are transferring a call to another station and you receive a busy signal you may camp the call on to this station Simply hang up when you hear the busy signal The called party will be alerted that a call is waiting for them NOTE If you receive No More Calls tone that station has no key available to receive another call Press TRANSFER to return to the outside caller TRANSFER TO VOICE MAIL This feature is used to send a call directly to a voice mailbox Your keyset must have a correctly programmed VT key to accomplish this To transfer a call directly to a voice mailbox While on a call press the VT key and dial the mailbox number Hang up when dialing is completed CALL WAITING If an outside call has been camped on to your phone or another station has camped on to you Your keyset will ring and the call that is waiting for you camped on will flash green Press the flashing button to answer your other call will go on hold automati cally if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set If not you must press HOLD and then the flashing button OR Finish the first call and hang up the waiting call will ring Lift the handset or press the ANS RLS key to answer NOTE Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold 21 CONFERENCE CALLS You may conference up to five parties you and four others in any combination of outside lines and internal stations in
413. on or follow the instructions to drop a party and use your extension number When they hang up the lines will release auto matically Press CONFERENCE to rejoin a trunk to trunk conference CONFERENCE SPLITTING If you are the controlling party of a conference and your keyset has the Auto Hold feature turned on See Customizing Your Keyset and all of the outside lines involved in the conference appear as buttons on your keyset you can split the conference into separate calls as follows Press one of the outside line buttons That outside line indicator will remain steady to indicate you are still connected to it All other outside lines in the conference will be placed on system hold at your keyset All intercom callers in the conference will be disconnected You may now speak with each caller privately and transfer them as usual or reestablish another conference CONFERENCE GROUPS Users can create up to six Conference Groups with five members each including yourself They can then call all members or only selected members of this group at the same time As each member answers their status is indicated in the display Depending whether the member is either IN the conference or OUT of the confer ence they can be dropped or called with a single button press Each Conference Group can be programmed with a name for easy identification Creating a Conference Group e From the idle condition press the CONFERENCE button Pres
414. ons for additional call processing and special applications that can be accomplished via the LCD programming These features and functions can be accessed by pressing the MENU button Follow the user instructions below to utilize these features and functions After pressing the MENU button use the direction button to scroll to the desired menu option Press ENTER to access the menu To navigate within the menu you may scroll to the desired option function or dial the associated option function number Press END button to exit programming MENU OPTIONS Note that some of the features listed here may require system programming and configuration in order to function See your system administrator for details Press the MENU button to access the options below Use the UP DOWN direc tional button to scroll to and within option menus and sub menus You may also dial the option number after pressing the MENU button 1 OUTGOING LOGS Allows you to view a list of the 30 most recent outgoing calls from the keyset You may return the call directly from the displayed sta tus Scroll or dial option number 1 Outgoing Call Log Press ENTER Scroll to the desired PHONE NUMBER and press the SEND button to automatically dial the number OR Press CANCEL to return to Main Menu OR e Press END to exit programming 2 INCOMING LOGS Allows you to view a list of the 30 most recent incoming calls to the keyset You may return the call di
415. ontents ITP 5107S CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET AME 41 Atto Cap 41 Select PRO TONE sa al na as Or iad 41 Change Your Passcode 41 Set Answer Mode Intercom 42 Set Answer Mode CQ 4 42 Automate gt aia cac casi dica cial 42 Headset ODGBFatiOI zucca cech 42 NER 43 CES ia cU BD NOR 43 5 d Page cto tate 43 Ring Preference qt 43 E 44 Display Speed 44 a E d B REVIEW 44 SECUS 44 DISPLAY FEATURES Interactive Display 45 45 46 UN t 46 Call Progress Displays i a 47 Display Number i 47 Diratio ELIO 47 AULO EL 47 a 47 Viewing Messag IndicatiOlis aacuiaemoata ensis patas rate crises tuis ater 48 Alarm Reminder 48 4
416. or other access codes and extension numbers HOOKFLASH Throughout this guide you will see references to hookflash A hookflash is a momentary operation of the hookswitch required for a feature operation Some telephones have a FLASH key This key may be pressed instead of the hookswitch LINES Lines from the telephone company are C O lines Calls on these lines are referred to as outside calls These lines are accessed by dialing an access code For example dial 9 to get a local outside line or dial 800 8 for other line groups Each line in the system is numbered beginning with 701 and then 702 703 etc To get a specific line dial its three digit line number If Least Cost Routing LCR is pro grammed into the system you will only be required to dial 9 DISTINCTIVE RINGING The OfficeServ 100 the OfficeServ 500 and the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems provide distinctive ring patterns to your phone Outside calls have a single ring tone repeated Intercom calls have a double ring tone repeated Door phone calls and alarm appointment reminders have a triple ring tone repeated Table of Contents STD Telephone SYSTEM TONES The system provides several tones to assist you Some of these tones are already familiar to you Intercom Dial Tone A steady tone that indicates you can begin dialing CONTINUOUS Ringback Tone Indicates the station you dialed is ringing RINGBAC
417. or 950 system wide numbers If so the system speed dial access codes are 050 999 and the station speed dial codes are 000 049 e With the handset on hook press the MEMORY button or dial 16 Dialthe desired speed dial number Thetelephone number is automatically dialed for you NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial list A station may be assigned up to fifty numbers 00 49 See your system admin istrator to determine the amount assigned to your station While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 105 Diala speed dial number 00 49 Diala line or line group access code e Dialthe telephone number to be stored 24 digits maximum It can include k FLASH and PAUSE e Press TRANSFER to store the number NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 24 Table of Contents DS 5000 For the purposes of pro gramming speed dial num bers the programmable but tons are known as B C D E and F TheA button is not used The B button inserts a flash e The C button inserts a pause The D button is used for pulse to tone conversion If your system uses rotary or pulse dialing C O lines p
418. or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 3 Ifa message has been left at your keyset by a keyset in Auto Answer you must manually cancel the message after it has been returned PROGRAMMED MESSAGES When you will be away from your phone for any length of time you can leave a programmed station message Display stations calling you will see this message and be informed of your status or follow your instructions Dial 48 plus any of the message codes 01 20 listed on the back of this user guide Tocancel any of these messages you might have selected dial 48 plus 00 Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button You can have multiple programmed message buttons PMSG and each one can have a different message code Press any programmed message PMSG button The message is set and the button will light red Press the button again to turn off Pressing another programmed message PMSG button will turn the previous one off and set a different programmed message 34 Table of Contents ITP 5107S CONVENIENCE FEATURES DO NOT DISTURB Use this feature when you want to block calls to your keyset e While on hook press the DND button or dial 401 The DND button lights steady red to remind you of this mode Tocancel DND press the DND button again or dial 400 The DND light turns off Y
419. or quick and easy dialing of frequently used numbers e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 107 Press a One Touch Speed Dial button Dial the speed dial number 00 49 or 500 999 that you want assigned to this button Press TRANSFER to store your selection To call this telephone number just press the One Touch Speed Dial button NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing LAST NUMBER REDIAL To redial the last telephone number you dialed press the REDIAL button or dial 19 NOTES 1 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 2 Redial does not apply to intercom calls 30 Table of Contents ITP 5121D MANUAL RETRY WITH REDIAL While you are on an outside call listening to a busy signal and you want to redial the same number dialed Press the REDIAL button This will hang up your existing call and manually redial the same number dialed You can repeat this operation for a limited number of attempts NOTE If your keyset is programmed with Call Log Blocks then the Redial will access the call log when pressed SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL To save the number you just dialed for later use press the SNR button before hanging up To redial this saved number at any time press the SNR button or dial 17 The same line will
420. ore you begin dialing MESSAGES Press the MESSAGE button or dial 43 The first station that left a message will be called automatically If that station does not answer your MESSAGE light will stay on Repeat until all messages have been returned in the order received Your MESSAGE light will turn off when all messages have been returned 30 Table of Contents DS 5000 NOTES 1 Display keyset users can view message indications and return them in any order See Viewing Message Indications under Display Features 2 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 3 Ifa message has been left at your keyset by a keyset in Auto Answer you must manually cancel the message after it has been returned PROGRAMMED MESSAGES When you will be away from your phone for any length of time you can leave a programmed station message Display stations calling you will see this message and be informed of your status or follow your instructions Dial 48 plus any of the message codes 01 20 listed on the back of this user guide Tocancel any of these messages you might have selected dial 48 plus 00 Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button You can have multiple programmed message buttons PMSG and each one can
421. ormation or help Viewing Mailbox Contents If you have new messages in addition to the Terminal Status Indicator TSI you will be able to use the keyset displays and soft keys to communicate with the Samsung Voicemail 76 77 Table of Contents DS 5000 PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS CODE NAME TELEPHONE NUMBER CODE NAME TELEPHONE NUMBER 00 25 01 26 02 27 03 28 04 29 05 30 06 31 07 32 08 33 09 34 10 35 11 36 12 37 13 38 14 39 15 40 16 41 17 42 18 43 19 44 20 45 21 46 22 47 23 48 24 49 78 79 NOTES NOTES E 0 Table of Contents 5 10 5 ABOUT THIS BOOK 1 IDCS KEYSET THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW 3 1 USER GUIDE ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET 11 ADDING AN iDCS 14B KEY STRIP 12 ADDING A KEYSET DAUGHTERBOARD MODULE gt 13 for OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 and OUTSIDE CALLS Making ai Outside 14 OfficeServ 7000 Series Answering 14 14 Reca EIAS 15 Bus
422. orwarded All call can transfer the call to the for warded station This is useful when you are expecting an important call but you do not wish to be disturbed by other calls 3 When a station user places his her keyset in Forward All mode and he she does not have a FORWARD ALL button the TRANSFER button will light to in dicate Forward All has been set and calls to this station have been transferred elsewhere FORWARD BUSY To forward calls to another station when you are on the phone Dial 602 plus the extension or group number Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press SPEAKER before you begin dialing FORWARD NO ANSWER To forward calls to another station when you do not answer Dial 603 plus the extension or group number e Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 20 Table of Contents DS 5000 FORWARD BUSY NO ANSWER If you have both a Forward on Busy destination and a Forward No Answer desti nation programmed you may set both of these at the same time Dial 604 e Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing FORWARD FOLLOW ME When you want all calls
423. ose keysets Totake the caller off hold press that button and the green flashing light will go steady green again Resume the conversation NOTE While on a call pressing a line button route button or flashing CALL button will automatically put your first call on hold and connect you to the new call See Automatic Hold under Customizing Your Keyset EXCLUSIVE HOLD To place an outside call on hold at your phone so that other users cannot get it Press the HOLD button twice The call will flash green on your keyset and this line will show a steady red light on other keysets retrieve the call press the flashing green line button or press the HOLD button a third time NOTE Intercom calls will always be placed on exclusive hold REMOTE HOLD When you wish to place a call on hold at another station Press TRANSFER and a dial the station number or press the appropriate DSS button Press the HOLD button This will place the call on system hold on an available CALL button or Line Button at the remote station and return you to dial tone NOTES 1 If the destination station does not have any free CALL buttons or line buttons you will hear No More Calls tone and must return to the other party by press ing the TRANSFER button or the RETURN soft key in the display 2 Intercom calls cannot be remote held HOLD RECALL If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer it will recall your station The button that t
424. otify you after each message is left in your voice mailbox From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 2 for pager notification There 4 options available to you Press 1 to toggle pager notification on and off Press 2 to set the schedule when you would like to be paged Press 3 to be notified on urgent messages only Press 4 to set the pager phone number Undelete When this function is activated the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to undelete any messages that you have recently deleted up to the pro grammed Daily Maintenance Time which is set to 3 a m by Default the fol lowing morning From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 3 for Deleted Messages Deleted voicemail messages are temporarily stored in memory until 3 a m the following day Select this option to recover undelete previously delet ed messages during this period of time Undelivered Retrieval When this function is activated the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to recall any messages you have sent that have NOT yet been picked up by the recip ient From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 4 for Undelivered Messages Table of Contents ITP 5107S This useful feature will allow you to cancel any messages that have NOT yet been picked up by the recipient 5 Auto Play New Messages If this option is
425. ou can make calls while in the DND mode NOTES 1 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button 2 f you place your keyset DND mode and you do not have a DND button your TSI button will flash to indicate DND status ONE TIME DND If you are on a call and you do not wish to be interrupted while on that call you can press the DND button and place your station in Do Not Disturb When you hang up at the end of the call DND will be automatically canceled and your key set will be able to receive new calls This feature requires a DND button MUTE You can mute the handset transmitter or the microphone during any conversa tion Press the MUTE button It will light red To resume speaking press the MUTE button again The light turns off BACKGROUND MUSIC When a music source is supplied you may listen to music through the speaker in your keyset While on hook press the HOLD button to hear music Press the HOLD button again to turn music off You can set the level of background music by using the VOLUME buttons while lis tening to the music This does not affect the speakerphone level 35 ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP To pick up an established call in progress at a single line extension connected to a computer modem on your PC Press the EP button for that station on your keyset and the call is automati cally moved to your keyset The single line
426. our system or external outside your system such as a cell phone number Receive confirmation tone and hang up To cancel Forward Busy lift the handset and dial 600 another forward code e 9 604 FORWARD NO ANSWER To forward calls to another station when you do not answer Liftthe handset and dial 603 followed by the destination you want your call to forward to This can be an internal within your system or external out side your system such as a cell phone number Receive confirmation tone and hang up To cancel Forward No Answer lift the handset and dial 600 OR dial another forward code e g 604 FORWARD NO ANSWER BUSY To forward calls to another station when you do not answer or when you are on the phone Lift the handset and dial 604 Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTE This option will only work if Forward No Answer and Forward Busy destina tions are already programmed To cancel Forward No Answer Busy lift the handset and dial 600 OR dial another forward code e g 601 FORWARD FOLLOW When you want all calls to your extension forwarded to the extension where you are now Dial 606 plus your extension number Receive confirmation tone and hang up If you want a specific extension s calls forwarded to your phone Remote Call Forward Dial 606 plus the desired extension number Receive confirmation tone and hang up To cancel Forward Foll
427. outside call pressing a line key route key or a flashing CALL button will automatically put your call on hold and connect you to the next call This fea ture can be turned on or off at your keyset e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 001 to turn Automatic Hold on or 000 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection NOTE Intercom calls can be automatically put on hold by pressing TRANSFER HEADSET OPERATION Keyset users can switch between headset mode and handset mode When using headset mode press the ANS RLS key to answer and release calls With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 021 to use the headset or 020 to use the handset Press TRANSFER to store your selection 42 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset Your keyset may be equipped with a Headset mode key If it is so equipped press ing this key while the light is out will cause the keyset to enter headset mode and the light will illuminate to indicate this Pressing the key while the light is lit will cause the keyset to return to handset mode and the light will go out HOT KEYPAD On your phone system your keyset s keypad can be made live or hot so that it is not necessary to lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dial ing Calls be made and features activated by simply dialing the line num ber trunk group access code intercom number or feature access co
428. ow lift the handset and dial 600 another for ward code e 9 601 FORWARD DND To forward your phone when you activate DND Dial 605 followed by the destination you want your calls to forward to This can be an internal within your system or external outside your system such as a cell phone number Receive confirmation tone and hang up STATION CALL PICKUP To pick up answer a call ringing at another station Lift the handset and dial 65 plus the extension number of the ringing phone GROUP CALL PICKUP To pick up answer a call ringing in any pickup group Lift the handset and dial 66 plus the desired group number GROUP NUMBERS 01 20 OfficeServ 100 and OfficeServ 7100 01 99 OfficeServ 500 M 01 99 OfficeServ 500 01 99 OfficeServ 7200 OfficeServ 7400 NOTE Station and group pickup features cannot be used to answer recalls to sta tion only new ringing calls and operator recalls Table of Contents STD Telephone DIALING FEATURES SPEED DIALING You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system wide speed dial list of numbers 500 999 or from your personal list of numbers 00 49 Lift the handset and dial 16 Dial the desired speed dial number The telephone number is automatically dialed for you NOTE You system may be set for 950 system wide numbers If so the system speed dial access codes are 050 999 and the station speed dial codes are 000 049
429. own button it will appear on a CALL button Your outside calls will light green on your keyset and red on other keysets You never lose sight of your calls while they are on hold They stay right where you put them and are identified with a green flashing light Table of Contents ITP 5121D Some simple rules to remember Any steady LED indicates the line or feature is in use Afast flashing green LED indicates a new call ringing in A slow flashing green or red LED indicates a call is on hold Aslow flashing amber LED indicates a recall to your keyset FULL DUPLEX SPEAKERPHONE All ITP keysets are speakerphones Pressing the SEND button will answer an incoming call on the speakerphone Pressing the END button will release the call on the speakerphone Switching from the handset to the speakerphone is easy Simply press the SPEAK ER button and hang up the handset VOLUME CONTROLS The ITP 5121D keyset uses the UP and DOWN buttons to adjust the ringer volume while the keyset is ringing the speaker volume while the speakerphone is in use and the handset volume while you are listening These three levels will be stored in memory until changed If background music is turned on at your keyset the vol ume buttons will also control the level of music The volume of pages heard through the speaker of a keyset can be adjusted during a page announcement by using the volume buttons There are 16 levels for each volume setting The vol
430. ox Your keyset must have a correctly programmed VT button to accomplish this To transfer a call directly to a voice mailbox e While on a call press the VT button and dial the mailbox number Hang up when dialing is completed CALL WAITING If an outside call has been camped on to your phone or another station has camped on to you You will hear a tone in the earpiece and the call that is waiting for you camped on will flash In addition the bottom line of the display will indicate the number of the station or trunk party camped on Press the flashing button to answer your other call will go on hold automati cally if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set If not you must press 23 HOLD and then the flashing button Finish the first call and hang up the waiting call will ring Lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer NOTE Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold CONFERENCE CALLS You may conference up to five parties you and four others in any combination of outside lines and internal stations in any order While engaged in a conversation press the CONF button and receive confer ence tone Make another call either intercom or outside press the CONF button and receive conference tone Make another call or press the CONF button to join all parties e Repeat the last step until all parties are added NOTE When attempting to add another party to the conference and you are
431. ox number nnn using the directory service or you may also add comments and leave it as a memo to yourself The Send and Copy Service option 6 allows a user to send copies of a mes sage to multiple recipients easily A different introduction message may be left for each recipient 7 Rewind the message 5 seconds 77 Change playback volume of the recording There are two levels of volume during playback Dialing this code will tog gle between the two levels 8 Pause or resume during message playback 9 Fast forward the message 5 seconds 75 99 Change playback speed of the recording There are two levels of speed during playback Dialing this code will toggle between the two speeds 0 Play options Pressing this key will play all the menu options available to you from this point 00 Hear the time and date and sender s information of the message you just heard Sender information is not available on outside calls Move to the next message This does not Save or Discard the current mes sage it is retained as new Scan Plays first 7 seconds of a message then skips to next message This is similar to the scan button on a radio It will allow you to find a specific mes sage quickly To stop scanning press 1 Cancel and return to previous menu GROUP NEW OR OLD MESSAGES Messages can be grouped as either Reminders press 3 or Messages from a spe cific sender press 9 Additionall
432. p all the conference group members are disconnected When you want to hang up but keep the other members in the conference press the MENU button the select SUPERVISOR then cursor to another internal sta tion then press ENTER and hang up Control of the conference is passed to this station You are free to go about your business FORWARDING CALLS This option allows for one button Call Forward setting You may forward your calls to another station station group or external destination Call forwarding may be set in several different manners 1 From the dial pad dial 60 plus the extender see below that corresponds with the type of forwarding desired followed by the station number to forward to 60 0 Call Forward Cancel Cancels all call forwarding from the station 60 1 Call Forward All Calls Forwards all calls under any condition 60 2 Call Forward Busy Forward calls to another station when you are on the phone 60 3 Call Forward No Answer Forward calls to another station when you don t answer 60 4 Call Forward Busy No Answer Sets both Forward Busy and Forward No Answer 60 5 Call Forward DND Forwards calls when you activate DND 60 6 Call Forward Follow Me Forward calls to the station where you cur rently are 28 Table of Contents ITP 5112L 2 From the LCD e Press the MENU button scroll to the CALL FORWARD icon press ENTER Scroll to the desired Forward Option Press ENTER button You will
433. p to three join the conversation Press the PRB button the PRB button will light steady red Inform the other party that he she may now join the conversation After the other party or parties has joined the conversation and you wish to return privacy to the line so that no one else can join the conversation press the PRB button a second time the PRB button will be off To Join a Non Private Conversation When someone has informed you that you can join a conversation Press the line button that he she has indicated OR e Dial the C O line number that he she has indicated 26 Table of Contents ITP 5107S DIALING FEATURES SPEED DIALING You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system wide speed dial list of numbers 500 999 or from your personal list of numbers 00 49 Your system may be set for 950 system wide numbers If so the system speed dial access codes are 050 999 and the station speed dial codes are 000 049 e With the handset on hook press the MEMORY button or dial 16 e Dialthe desired speed dial number The telephone number is automatically dialed for you NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial list A station may be assigned up to fifty numbers 00 49 See your
434. pany to determine the correct code THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW USER ORIENTATION iDCS telephones are called keysets They contain buttons or keys that are used to access or activate the many features of your office phone system The keys with paper designation strips are programmable keys This means they can be pro grammed for a specific function on your keyset and that same button can be something different on another keyset See the system manager to get your most frequently used features assigned to your programmable keys When changes are made be sure that your programmable keys are relabeled properly Lines from the telephone company are C O lines Calls on these lines are referred to as outside calls Your system can have individual C O line keys or lines may be assigned to groups When they are in a group you access a line by dialing an access code or pressing a route button For example dial 9 or press a LOCAL key to get a local outside line If Least Cost Routing is used pressing the LCR key will automatically select a preprogrammed C O line according to what digits are dialed Each line in the system is numbered beginning with 701 then 702 703 etc Direct Station Selection DSS keys are programmed to ring specific stations You can press a DSS key instead of dialing the extension number A DSS key lights red when that station is busy Busy Lamp Indication iDCS keysets provide distinctive ring patt
435. parties mailbox If the password option is turned on while a message is being left press the flash ing AME indicator and enter your station password not your Samsung Voicemail Call Divert to Voicemail password You will then hear the message being left While receiving an incoming ringing call dial to immediately send the caller Call Record to your personal voicemail box This will override the call forward no answer setting If you have a call record button assigned to your phone you may press it at any time to record the conversation in progress If you have a display keyset you will Direct Messaging also have the soft key options to pause and time the message 4 DSS To make it easy to leave messages for others in your office without hav ing to dial their extension number first keyset users may simply dial plus a mailbox extension number and leave a message directly If you dial a busy exten sion press to connect directly with the mailbox Self Memo Reminder Pressing will leave a message in your own mailbox This is useful to remind yourself of things to do now or in the future Messages can be sent with future delivery so you can have the system call you when items become due INTERACTIVE DISPLAYS Display keyset users have the added advantage of using the soft keys and displays to play save delete reply call forward rewind pause fast forward change the vol ume get message inf
436. password At this point the inside and outside callers follow the same instructions You will hear a message stating the number of messages left in your mailbox You will then hear the Subscriber Services Menu with the following options 1 Listen to New Messages See Listening to your Message Record and Send Message See Sending Messages Review Saved Messages See Listening to your Message Access Manager See Access Manager Personal Greetings See Personal Greetings Mailbox Administration See Mailbox Administration Personal Services See Personal Services gt B Return to Main Menu Table of Contents iDCS Keyset GETTING STARTED Using your new Samsung Voicemail Subscriber Services is as simple as following a few simple spoken instructions First time users should read this section as a tutorial You should start with the following steps Access your Subscriber Services Menu You already know how to do this From the Subscriber Services Menu Record a Primary No Answer Personal Greeting Dial 5 1 Record a Mailbox Greeting Dial 5 7 Change your access code Password Dial 7 1 Record your name Dial 7 2 Enter your directory name Dial 7 3 After you have completed the steps above your Subscriber Services are set up and ready to use LISTEN TO YOUR MESSAGES If there are new messages in your mailbox your VMMSG key will b
437. pecific mes sage quickly To stop scanning press 1 Cancel and return to previous menu GROUP NEW OR OLD MESSAGES Messages can be grouped as either Reminders press 3 or Messages from a spe cific sender press 9 Additionally you can press and hear a summary of your mailbox contents a Number of messages b Number of reminders c Number of urgent messages d Number of messages needing a callback e Number of private messages f Number of fax messages RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE This option is used to send a message to another subscriber The steps are simple a Enter the recipient s mailbox number or if this is not known enter to use the system directory 70 Table of Contents ITP 5121D b Record your message at the tone After recording the message you will hear the Send Menu with the following functions Review Continue Recording Discard and Re Record Set Message Attributes Delivery Options Schedule Future Delivery Save and Send then Send a Copy to Someone Else Save and Send the Recording 0 Setting Message Attributes If after recording a message you select 4 you can set up any combination of the following delivery options Urgent Delivery Return Receipt Requested Request a Call Back Private Delivery Reply Required Exit 3 2 A Scheduling Future Delivery If after recording a message you select 5 to schedule future delivery you w
438. per service and notify you after each message is left in your voice mailbox From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Wi Press 2 for pager notification There are 4 options available to you Press 1 to toggle pager notification on and off Press 2 to set the schedule when you would like to be paged Press 3 to be notified on urgent messages only Press 4 to set the pager phone number Undelete When this function is activated the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to undelete any messages that you have recently deleted up to the pro grammed Daily Maintenance Time which is set to 3 a m by Default the fol lowing morning From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 3 for Deleted Messages Deleted voicemail messages are temporarily stored in memory until 3 a m the following day Select this option to recover undelete previously delet ed messages during this period of time Undelivered Retrieval When this function is activated the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to recall any messages you have sent that have NOT yet been picked up by the recip ient From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 4 for Undelivered Messages 71 This useful feature will allow you to cancel any messages that have NOT yet been picked up by the recipient 5 Auto Play New Messages If this option is enabled
439. phone number you dialed from the Main Fixed screen press the LAST REDIAL button NOTES 1 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 2 Redial does not apply to intercom calls MANUAL RETRY WITH REDIAL While you are on an outside call listening to a busy signal and you want to redial the same number dialed e Press the REDIAL button This will hang up your existing call and manually redial the same number dialed You can repeat this operation for a limited number of attempts SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL To save the number you just dialed for later use press the SAVE REPEAT button before hanging up To redial this saved number at any time press the SAVE REPEAT button or dial 17 The same line will be selected for you NOTES 1 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 2 The saved telephone number is stored in memory until you save another number 3 Redial does not apply to intercom calls 34 Table of Contents ITP 5112L AUTOMATIC REDIAL RETRY When you are making an outside call and you receive a busy signal the system can automatically redial the number for you It will automatically redial at a pre pro grammed interval for up to 15 attempts When you hear a busy signal press the AUTO RETRY button The system will reserve the lin
440. ple stopwatch When the keyset is idle press the TIMER button to start timing Press the TIMER button again to stop timing Read the elapsed time in the display Lift the handset and replace it The display will return to date and time 47 VIEWING MESSAGE INDICATIONS You can view all of your message indications before you return them e With the handset on hook press the MESSAGE button with the red flashing light The first station that left a message indication will be displayed Press the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the stations that left mes sage indications Use the soft keys to reply clear or advance to the next mes sage ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES See also Special Application Menu Name Search When you use the alarm appointment reminder feature you create a 16 charac ter reminder message When the alarm rings your message will appear instead of ALARM REMINDER To program reminder messages Press TRANSFER and then dial 116 Dialthe alarm number 1 2 or Dialthetime you want the alarm to go off Enter the time as HHMM hours minutes using the 24 hour clock e Dial 0 NOT SET 1 TODAY or 2 DAILY to select the alarm type Write your message using the dial pad keys Each press of a key selects a char acter Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position For exam ple if your message is TAKE MEDICATION press 8 once to get the letter T Press 2 onc
441. poken instructions First time users should read this section as a tutorial You should start with the following steps Access your Subscriber Services Menu You already know how to do this From the Subscriber Services Menu e Record a Primary No Answer Personal Greeting Dial 5 1 Record a Mailbox Greeting Dial 5 7 Change your access code Password Dial 7 1 Record your name Dial 7 2 Enter your directory name Dial 7 3 After you have completed the steps above your Subscriber Services are set up and ready to use LISTEN TO YOUR MESSAGES If there are new messages in your mailbox your VMMSG key will be lit Call the Samsung Voicemail by pressing this key and when prompted enter your pass word You will then be at the Subscriber Services Menu Select 1 to listen to new messages or 3 to listen to saved messages Note After you enter your password if Autoplay of New Messages is enabled and you have new messages the Samsung Voicemail will begin to play them auto matically subscriber can control this feature From the Subscriber Services Menu 6 5 toggles Autoplay of New Messages ON OFF SUBSCRIBER SERVICES MENU The following is a list of all the options available in the Subscriber Main Menu 1 LISTENING TO NEW MESSAGES 11 GROUP NEW MESSAGES 2 RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE 3 LISTENING TO OLD MESSAGES 33 GROUP OLD MESSAGES 4 ACCESS MANAGER 5 PERSONAL GREETINGS 6 MAILBOX
442. pper section of the bottom panel Push towards the top of the keyset to lock in Plug the handset cord into the jack marked with the 3 symbol Route the handset cord out the RIGHT side of the keyset as you look at it face down Plug the four conductor line cord from the wall into the jack with the symbol the bottom of the keyset DS 5000 SETUP OUTSIDE CALLS MENU STRUCTURE AN OUTSIDE CALL The SETUP MENU is configured as follows Lift the handset and press an idle outside line button line group button or dial a line access code to receive dial tone OR press an idle outside line button 1 INFORMATION line group button or dial a line access code to receive dial tone through the 1 Outgoing press SPEAKER receive intercom dial tone and dial a line 2 Incoming Log access code 3 Speed Dial e Dial the telephone number 4 Directory Dial Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the END button Forward Set NOTE You will receive No More Calls tone when you attempt to make a call and 4 Alarm Reminder there is no button available for that line NAVIGATING THE MENUS Least Cost Routing is enabled on your phone system this button may be labeled LCR or accessed by dialing an access code usually 9 fyour system is programmed to require an authorization code before making a call dial plus a valid code before selecting a C O line If your system is
443. preference on or 060 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection AUTO ANSWER CO CALLS This option will allow CO calls that directly ring your phone to auto answer When a CO call arrives at your station and this option set for ON your phone will sound two beeps the same as when a screened transfer is completed and you will be 43 connected to the call order for this option to work the station must also be programmed for auto answer see SET ANSWER MODE e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 151 to turn Auto Answer on or 150 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection NOTE Outside lines must ring your station directly for the Auto Answer CO to work Lines ringing a station group will not cause your phone to Auto Answer DISPLAY SPEED DIAL NAME This option allows you to view the name associated with a speed dial number as it is dialed With you handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Press 111 to turn DISP SPDNAME on or 110 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection CALLER ID REVIEW ALL This feature allows display keyset users to review Caller ID information for calls sent to their stations This list can be from ten to fifty calls in a first in first out basis The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your station but that you did not answer When reviewing this list you can press one button to dial the pers
444. programmed to require an account code before making a The button used for editing and their features are summarized below call press the ACC button or dial 47 plus a valid bin number press the ACC button again and then select C O line See Account Codes for more information When programming within various menu options information can be entered via the dial pad keys using 0 9 and k dial keys as well as utilizing the navigation button assembly BUTTON FEATURES For more information on authorization and account codes see your system Left and Right To move a cursor highlighted area or to erase what is administrator entered NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset Enter To save the current setting and end programming or press the SPEAKER button before dialing E cancel the current programming return to the Main Menu ANSWERING AN OUTSIDE CALL 8 To move back to the previous screen or delete the last Lift the handset and you are automatically connected to the ringing call digit of the displayed option value See Ring Preference under Customizing Your Keyset OR press the SEND but OILO To enter numerical values ton to automatically answer on the speakerphone NOTE If a call is flashing at your keyset but not ringing you must press the flash ing button to answer UNIVERSAL ANSWER Outside lines may
445. ption is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Call Screening feature Example Hi this is John Smith I m sorry but am not available to speak with you at this time If someone else can help you please enter the extension number now Or to leave me a message press 1 Table of Contents ITP 5107S 6 Edit Personal Greetings You may also edit record each one of the greetings 1 9 at any time Select a greeting number to edit and follow the instructions to record your greeting When you are done recording your greeting you will be able to lis ten to the greeting you recorded save the greeting you recorded and return to the previous menu record the greeting again or exit without saving the greeting Note If you record only the greeting assigned to the No Answer Call Coverage Condition then that greeting will play to callers for all Call Coverage Conditions No Answer Busy Blocked Night and Rejected Caller In this case the salutation part of the greeting should be very general 7 Edit Mailbox Greeting Used whenever a caller reaches your mailbox or if you have not recorded any of the Call Coverage greetings The way a caller is transferred to your mailbox greeting directly is by another subscriber transferring the caller to your mail box using the VT VoiceMail Transfer key This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Mailbox Greeting Option feature Example Hi thi
446. quencies ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press the transfer key followed by 111 201 RING TONE Display shows SELECTION 6 2 Dial 1 8 to select the ring tone 201 RING TONE OR SELECTION 5 Press UP or DOWN to select the ring tone Press the right soft key to move the cursor 3 Press the transfer key to store and exit OfficeServ 7100 USER INSTRUCTIONS TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 APRIL 2007 1 14 ALARM REMINDER Station users can have three alarms programmed at their phones Each alarm may be one of the following three types 0 NOTSET The alarm is not set 1 TODAY ONLY The alarm will ring at the programmed time and be canceled automatically 2 DAILY The alarm will ring each day at this time ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press the transfer key followed by 112 201 ALM CLK 1 Display shows HHMM 2 Dial 1 3 to select the alarm e g 2 201 ALM CLK 2 OR HHMM NOTSET Press UP or DOWN to select alarm Press the right soft key to move the cursor OR Press the left soft key to return to step 2 3 Enter alarm time in 24 hour format e g 1300 201 ALM CLK 2 Display automatically advances to step 5 HHMM 1300 NOTSET 4 Enter alarm type e g 2 201 ALM CLK 1300 DAILY Press UP or DOWN to select alarm type Press the right soft key to move the cursor and return to step 2 5 Press the transfer key to store and exit 1 18 OfficeServ 7100 USER INSTRUCTIONS TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 APRIL 2007 1 15 STATION VOLUME
447. r Dial 1 to set OR Press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO e Press TRANSFER to store and exit STATION CALL PICKUP To pick up answer a call ringing at another station lift the handset and dial 65 plus the extension number of the ringing phone If you have a DP key assigned with a station number you only need to press this DP key with the flashing light to answer this ringing station NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing GROUP CALL PICKUP To pick up answer a call ringing in any pickup group lift the handset and dial 66 plus the desired group number or press the flashing GROUP PICKUP button if available GROUP NUMBERS 01 20 OfficeServ 100 and OfficeServ 7100 01 99 OfficeServ 500 M 01 99 OfficeServ 500 L 01 99 OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400 NOTES 1 A group pickup button can have an extender for a specific pickup group 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing the access code MY GROUP PICKUP If desired a new access code can be assigned to pickup ringing calls in the same pickup group as you are in Like 66 above except you do not need to dial the desired group number See your installation company for the assigned access code MY GROUP PICKUP 22 Table of Contents DS 5000 PRIVACY RELEASE This feature will allow anoth
448. r a complete list of descriptions and extenders for any keys you may have programmed on your keyset NOTE Confirm that the cursor is placed correctly before you enter the extender 59 LCR WITH CLEAR When you are making outside call using LCR and dial an incorrect digit you can press the CLEAR soft key to reenter the telephone number You do not need to redial 9 to reaccess LCR BACKSPACE WITH LCR If you misdial while using LCR you can delete digits shown in the display by press ing the BACKSPACE soft key as many times as necessary TEXT MESSAGING See also MESSAGE option in the Application Program Menus section This feature allows two digital keyset users to respond to each other with prepro grammed messages After receiving an Off Hook Voice Announcement or Station Camp On you may respond with a text message while continuing to talk and lis ten to your outside party The other station can view this message and take the appropriate action or respond back with another text message There are 1000 messages assignable to stations in blocks of 10 stored in system memory that can be sent to another display keyset Only the display keysets that are allowed in system programming MMC 611 will receive the TEXT MESSAGE soft key in the display and use this feature Familiarization with the two digit message numbers you will use the most will make this procedure quick and easy However if you do not know them use the UP DOWN
449. rb or Forwarded All This will allow different greetings to play depending on the type of call forward that you have set or the condition of your telephone The Call Coverage conditions that you can assign specific greetings to are select ed by the following digits 1 Primary No Answer Greeting Used when in your office away from your desk or during the time period you are scheduled available If this is the only Personal Greeting you record it will play for all call coverage conditions This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Basic Greeting feature 68 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset Example Hi this is John Smith l m sorry am not available to answer your call If someone else can help you please enter the extension number now Or to leave me a message press 1 Busy Greeting Played to a caller when you are already talking to someone on your extension or the telephone at your Designated Location This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Busy Greeting feature Example Hi this is John Smith I m on another line right now If someone else can help you please enter the extension number now Or to leave a message press 1 Call Blocking Greeting Used while Call Blocking is enabled in your Access Manager or if your phone is forwarded ALL or DND This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Blocking fea
450. rding to Subscriber before actually being forwarded 5 Call Screening If this is turned on the caller will be asked their name and the Samsung Voicemail will play this name to you before the transfer giving you an option to accept or reject the call 6 Find Find Me when enabled will attempt to locate the subscriber by calling a list of preprogrammed phone numbers The stored phone numbers are entered in Personal Services 2 if allowed by the Administrator The stored tele phone number list can contain up to 9 preprogrammed telephone numbers The Find Me feature only use the first five 7 Night Intercept This feature is dependent on your weekly availability schedule which is entered in Personal Services 3 if allowed by the Administrator When Night Intercept is active the Samsung Voicemail will first ring your extension 67 then play your primary No Answer greeting during the day when you available and will NOT ring your extension but simply play your Night greet ing during the night when you are not available Note This does NOT use the Day and Night schedules of the phone system It is solely controlled by the Subscriber s Availability Schedule Pause Resume Exit from Access Manager Play All Options Play Access Coverage This feature is useful for finding out how you current access settings are set It will also tell you what greetings will play under
451. rdless of which one is selected you can press the NND button to view the other pieces of Caller ID information To select the type of Caller ID informa tion you wish to view first With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 119 Dial O for CID options 1 for ANI options or 2 for CLI options 0 if you do not wish to view CID information 1 to view the NUMBER first or 2 to view the NAME first Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection VIEWING THE NEXT CALLER ID CALL In the event that you have a call waiting or a camped on call at your keyset you can press the NEXT button to display the Caller ID information associated with the call in queue at you keyset Either the CID name or CID number will show in the display depending on you Name Number selection To view Caller ID information for calls that have been camped on to your keyset press the NEXT button SAVING THE CALLER ID NUMBER At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information you may press the SAVE button to save the CID number The system must be using LCR to dial the saved number REDIALING A SAVED CALLER ID NUMBER To redial a number that has been saved press the SNR button or dial 17 NOTES 1 Your telephone system must be LCR correctly programmed to redial the saved number 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin 62 Table
452. re directional arrows stenciled into this button which indi cate which direction the cursor will be moved END BUTTON This button is used to disconnect a call after a conversation or to move to the initial screen The END button operates as the RLS portion of the ANS RLS button An ANS RLS button may be assigned to the station as a programmable button CANCEL BUTTON This button is used to erase any characters or numbers entered by the dial pad or to move to the previous screen FEATURE ACCESS CODES This user guide is written based on the default access code for using system fea tures If the system numbering plan has been changed some of the access codes may not be correct Your installing company can inform you of the correct codes 5 5 5 The system provides several tones to assist you Some of these tones are already familiar to you Intercom Dial Tone A steady tone that indicates you can begin dialing Ringback Tone Indicates the station you dialed is ringing RINGBACK TONE 1000 ms ON 3000 ms OFF E CONTINUOUS Busy the station you dialed is busy BUSY TONE 500 ms 500 ms OFF 7771 EN N CONTINUOUS DND No More Calls Tone Fast busy tone indicates the station you dialed is in the Do Not Disturb mode or cannot receive any more calls DND NO MORE CALLS TONE 250 ms ON 250 ms OFF E FORTEN SECONDS Transfer Conference Tone Indicates your
453. re has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing CANCELING CALLBACK A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds If you have set a callback your CBK button will light Your phone may have a maximum of five callbacks to lines and or stations set at a time To cancel a callback Press the button if programmed or dial 44 You will hear confirmation tone While you are listening to confirmation tone press the HOLD button This will cancel the oldest set callback NOTE If the hot keypad feature is turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing Table of Contents DS 5000 INTERCOM CALLS CALMING OTHER STATIONS Dial the extension number or group number Wait for the party to answer If you hear a brief tone burst instead of ringback tone the station you called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer Begin speaking immediately after the tone Finish the call by replacing the handset or press the END button NOTES 1 If you have a DSS button assigned to an extension or station group you may press this button instead of dialing the number 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing ANSWERING INTERCOM CALLS When your keyset rings simply lift the handset press the SEND button to be connected to the calli
454. rectly from the displayed status Scroll or dial option number 2 Incoming Call Log Scroll to the desired PHONE NUMBER and press the SEND button to automatically dial the number OR e Press CANCEL to return to Main Menu 61 62 OR Press END to exit programming SPEED DIAL Allows you to search through Station and System Speed Dial Numbers You may dial the number directly from the displayed status OR OR OR Scroll or dial option number 3 Speed Dial Press ENTER Scroll to option or dial desired option 1 Personal Speed 2 System Speed Press ENTER Scroll to the desired number and press the SEND button to automatical ly dial the number Press CANCEL to return to main menu Press END to exit programming DIRECTORY DIAL Allows you to search for station speed system speed and station numbers based on their associated programmed name OR OR Scroll or dial option number 4 Directory Dial Press ENTER Scroll to option or dial desired option 1 Personal Speed 2 System Speed 3 Station Number Enter the name associated with that speed number or station number Press the SEND button to automatically dial the number Press CANCEL to return to main menu Press END to exit programming FORWARD SET Allows you to assign station call forward condition for the phone You must first set the forward type and destination Options 2 5 then activate the forwarding in option 1 Scroll or dial
455. ress TRANSFER to store your selection NOTE Outside lines must ring your station directly for the Auto Answer CO to work Lines ringing a station group will not cause your phone to Auto Answer DISPLAY SPEED DIAL NAME This option allows you to view the name associated with a speed dial number as it is dialed With you handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Press 111 to turn DISP SPDNAME on or 110 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection CALLER ID REVIEW ALL This feature allows display keyset users to review Caller ID information for calls sent to their stations This list can be from ten to fifty calls in a first in first out basis The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your station but that you did not answer When reviewing this list you can press one button to dial the person back The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number e With you handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Press 121 to turn CID REVIEW ALL on or 120 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection SECURE OHVA This option allows you to receive OHVA calls via the speaker while you are on the handset With you handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Press 131 to turn AUTO CAMP ON on or 130 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection 41 ENBLOCK DIALING This option allows you to dial digits then press the SEND button to make the cal
456. ress TRSF to store and exit pro gramming OR press SPK to store and advance to the next program 29 Table of Contents System Admin STATION TIMERS Each station can have five timers customized for them to accommodate station users with individual work habits These timers are as follows NO ANS FWD No Answer Forward This is the amount of time a call will ring at a station before it forwards to the Forward No Answer destination The default is 15 seconds and the range is 000 to 250 seconds Make sure that this timer is not set to a greater value than the trans fer recall timer or transferred calls will not forward DTMF DUR DTMF Duration This is the duration of DTMF tones sent to an analog voice mail port The default duration is 100 milliseconds and the range is 0100 to 9900 milliseconds F DGT DELY First Digit Delay This is the time the system will wait before sending DTMF digits to a voice mail port The default time is 600 milliseconds and the range is from 100 to 9900 mil liseconds OFFHK SEL Off Hook Select This timer controls the delay between going off hook lifting the handset and the off hook select destination being called The default duration is 10 seconds and the range is from 000 to 250 seconds EFWD DELAY External Forward Delay This is the time that a station will ring before a call forwards to the external call for ward destination The default duration is 10 seconds and the range is 1 second to 250 se
457. ressing D while entering a speed dial number causes all subsequent digits to be sent as DTMF tones The E button is used to hide digits Display keyset users may want to hide some speed dial numbers so that they will not show in the display When you are entering a telephone number press E All subsequent digits will be hid den Press E again to begin displaying digits The button is used to enter a name See Personal Speed Dial Names under Display Features Use the HOLD button to clear a speed dial number ONE TOUCH SPEED DIALING You may assign any speed dial number to an already existing One Touch Speed Dial button for quick and easy dialing of frequently used numbers e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 107 Press a One Touch Speed Dial button Dial the speed dial number 00 49 or 500 999 that you want assigned to this button Press TRANSFER to store your selection To call this telephone number just press the One Touch Speed Dial button NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing LAST NUMBER REDIAL redial the last telephone number you dialed press the REDIAL button or dial 19 NOTES 1 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 2 Redial does not apply to intercom calls 25 MANUAL RETRY WITH R
458. rs This feature must be authorized by the System Administrator and can be limited or opened to internal local and long distance calls Personal Administration This area is used during the initial set up of your Subscriber Settings see next section Table of Contents ITP 5112L PERSONAL ADMINISTRATION SETTINGS This menu allows you to make changes to basic setup settings that are rarely changed Use these when you initially set up your personal Subscriber settings You probably will not need to change them after that 1 Setting your Password From the Subscriber Services Menu press 7 1 The current password will be played and you will have the chance to change it 2 Recording your Name Use this option to record your name Your recorded name is played in several different situations It is important to record your name for proper operation of the Samsung Voicemail system From the Subscriber Services Menu press 7 2 The current name will be played and you will have the chance to change it Note It is possible that if you do not record your name and or enter your Directory Name described below you will not be included in the Dial by Name Directory 3 Entering your Directory Name Use this option to enter your Directory Name Your Directory Name is used by callers to find you if they do not know your extension number From the Subscriber Services Menu press 8 7 3 The current
459. rty of a conference and your keyset has the Auto Hold feature turned on See Customizing Your Keyset and all of the outside lines involved in the conference appear as buttons on your keyset you can split the conference into separate calls as follows Press any one of the outside line buttons That outside line will remain steady green to indicate you are still connected to it All other outside lines in the conference will be placed on system hold at your keyset All intercom callers in the conference will be disconnected You may now speak with each caller privately and transfer them as usual or reestablish another conference FORWARDING CALLS You may forward your calls to another station group of stations or an external telephone number Program a destination for the type of forwarding you want as detailed below If you have FWD ALL FWD BUSY and FWD NO ANSWER buttons press to turn that forward feature on steady red light reminds you what for ward condition is activated You can clear all call forward conditions set at your station by lifting the handset and dialing 600 FORWARD ALL CALLS To forward all your calls under any condition to another station Dial 601 plus the extension or group number Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTES 1 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 2 The station that receives a F
460. rv 100 OfficeServ 500 and OfficeServ 7000 Series The ITP 5121D IP keyset represents a new concept of Internet phone in that it uses an IP address to Send Receive voice and data For voice communications the ITP 5121D uses the data network line already in place in most offices and increasing number of homes The ITP 5121D keysets incorporate an LCD screen which provides important infor mation for the user to make using the keyset easier and more convenient Your keyset is the most visible part of your telephone system Please take the time to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation of your keyset Keep this guide handy as you may need to look up instructions for infrequently used features Learning to use your keyset correctly will make everyday telephone communica tions a breeze This book is written based on the factory default settings for the feature access codes Sometimes due to programming requirements these codes may be changed If you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book please contact your installation and service company to determine the correct code THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW USER ORIENTATION The ITP model telephones are called IP keysets The IP keyset incorporates buttons or keys that are used to access or activate the many features of your office phone system The ITP 5121D keyset incorporates 21 programmable buttons These 21 buttons are arranged in three rows
461. rward No Answer FNA turned on you must answer screened transfers by pressing the SEND button before your FNA timer expires or the call will forward SET ANSWER MODE CO Your incoming CO calls can be set to follow the intercom answer mode While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 15 to access AUTO ANS CO Press the VOLUME UP or DOWN key to change status Press TRANSFER to store your selection AUTOMATIC HOLD While on an outside call pressing a line button route button or a flashing CALL button will automatically put your call on hold and connect you to the next call This feature can be turned on or off at your keyset e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Dial 001 to turn Automatic Hold on or 000 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection NOTE Intercom calls can be automatically put on hold by pressing TRANSFER HEADSET OPERATION Keyset users can switch between headset mode and handset mode When using headset mode press the SEND END button to answer and release calls With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 021 to use the headset or 020 to use the handset Press TRANSFER to store your selection 44 Table of Contents ITP 5121D Your keyset may be equipped with a Headset mode button If it is so equipped pressing this button while the light is out will cause the keyset to enter headset mode and the light will illuminate to
462. ry Dial Press ENTER Scroll to option or dial desired option 1 Personal Speed 2 System Speed 3 Station Number Enter the name associated with that speed number or station number Press the SEND button to automatically dial the number OR Press CANCEL to return to main menu OR Press END to exit programming FORWARD SET Allows you to assign station call forward condition for the phone You must first set the forward type and destination Options 2 5 then activate the forwarding in option 1 Scroll or dial option number 5 Forward Set e Press ENTER Scroll to or dial the desired forward option and assign station number to forward your station to 57 Table of Contents DS 5000 2 ALLFWD NO BUSY FWD NO Samsung Voicemail 4 NOANS FWD NO 5 DND FWD NO i 0 FWD CANCEL This section describes how to setup and use the various features available to a Subscriber A Subscriber is a person that has been authorized access to the vari ous features and services available in the Samsung Voicemail Please review this section carefully before you use your Authorized Features and Services known as 655 e Scroll to or dial 1 FORWARD and scroll to or dial the desired for ward type Subscriber Services Press ENTER to activate the desired call forward type e Press CANCEL to return to main menu Voicemail is one of the Subscriber Services available Your voice
463. s Menu 6 5 toggles Autoplay of New Messages ON OFF SUBSCRIBER SERVICES MENU The following is a list of all the options available in the Subscriber Main Menu 1 LISTENING TO NEW MESSAGES 11 GROUP NEW MESSAGES 2 RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE 3 LISTENING TO OLD MESSAGES 33 GROUP OLD MESSAGES 4 ACCESS MANAGER 5 PERSONAL GREETINGS 6 MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION 8 PAUSE RESUME Table of Contents ITP 5112L 0 PLAY MENU OPTIONS EXIT TO AUTO ATTENDANT PERSONAL SERVICES LISTENING OLD OR NEW MESSAGES 1 Play replay the message you just heard 11 Play the previous message 2 Save the message you just heard and listen to the next message Delete the message you just heard and listen to the next message 4 Reply to the message This will allow you to leave a message in the mailbox of the sender if the sender has a mailbox on this system 5 Return the call directly to the telephone number that left the message This will work for internal and external callers but Caller ID service is need ed to use this feature on an outside call 55 Deliver a fax copy This will allow you to receive attached faxmail document s Faxmail docu ments can be delivered to any fax machine of your choice as long as out calling is authorized You can also have faxmail messages automatically delivered to the fax machine of your choice 6 Forward the message and saves a copy The subscriber can be selected by dialing their mailb
464. s as they are dialed They will stay in the dis play until the call duration timer comes on automatically or the TIMER button is pressed If the call duration timer is not used the number dialed will be displayed until the call is released transferred or put on hold CALL DURATION TIMER The system can be set to automatically time outside calls few seconds after you dial a telephone number the timer appears in the display It appears immediately for incoming calls The call timer continues for the duration of the call Call dura tion times are displayed in minutes and seconds If a call lasts longer than 60 min utes the timer restarts You can press the TIMER button to manually begin timing a call Press it again to stop timing If you press it while the automatic timer is on the call duration time is restarted AUTO TIMER Display keyset users may have the timer automatically start when they answer incoming calls or after a short delay on an outgoing call e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 e Dial 011 to turn the auto timer on or 010 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection TIMER FUNCTION Display keyset users may use this feature as a simple stopwatch When the keyset is idle press the TIMER button to start timing Press the TIMER button again to stop timing Read the elapsed time in the display Liftthe handset and replace it The display will return to date and ti
465. s below ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press TRSF and then dial 505 Display shows OLD 6010184 0047 NEW WMMDDYY HHMM OLD 6010184 0047 NEW 3020994 1445 2 Enter the new time and date using the above format OLD 5 NEW WMMDDYY 3 Verify the time and date and reenter them if necessary 4 Press TRSF to store and exit programming OR press SPK to store and advance to the next program If you have entered invalid data you will receive an INVALID ENTRY message for three seconds Reenter the correct date and time If the information you entered is incorrect repeat the procedure RESET STATION PASSCODES TO DEFAULT Individual keyset users can set or change their own individual passcodes These passcodes are used to lock and unlock keysets override toll restriction and access the DISA feature At times it may be necessary for the system administrator to reset a station s passcode to default 1234 This program cannot be used to display passcodes only to reset them PROGRAM KEYS UP amp DOWN Select the extension number HOLD Press to reset the passcode Open customer programming and follow the instructions below ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press TRSF and then dial 101 201 PASSCODE Display shows PASSCODE 2 Dial the station number OR use the UP and DOWN keys to scroll through the keyset numbers and press the right soft key to move the cursor right 205 PASSCODE PASSCODE 3 Pr
466. s enables you to still be able to find out what to do if you were to get lost and extended prompting was disabled KEYSET USER FEATURES The following options are available if you have a display keyset They require setup by the System Administrator Message Waiting Lights When new messages are left in your mailbox the voice mail message light on your keyset will flash Press this flashing key VMMSG and follow the prompts to retrieve messages This key may be pressed at any time to log into your Subscriber Main Menu Answer Machine Emulation If you have an Answer Machine Emulation key programmed on your keyset you can use it to monitor calls going to your voice mail and optionally answer them The operation of this feature is similar to screening a call on a home answering machine Your keyset must be set to forward on no answer to voice mail After ringing your station the caller will be connected to your voice mail and hear your personal greeting before leaving a message During this time you will be monitoring the connection between the caller and your voice mail box At this time you will only be monitoring the call you can not talk to the other party until you answer You may pick up the call at any time or ignore it To activate this feature press the AME button The associated indicator will be lit steady Press again to turn off If this key is pressed while a station is ringing during forward no answer the feature will be
467. s is John Smith Please leave a message will call you as soon as can Note This greeting will only play if none of the 5 personal greetings has played to the caller A common usage for this Greeting is when another Subscriber is talking with a caller and uses the VT key on their phone to trans fer the caller directly to your Mailbox MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION The Mailbox Administration menu is used to turn on and off your pager notifica tion message alert options and other message control features 1 Message Alert When this function is activated the Samsung Voicemail will call any outside or inside telephone number after each message is left in your voice mailbox To hear your message at the remote location when the Samsung Voicemail calls you after you pick up the telephone and answer you will be instructed that there is a message and to enter your password Simply enter your pass word and you will now be logged in 69 70 Setting Up Message Alert From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 1 for Message Alert There 4 options available to you Press 1 to toggle message alert on and off Press 2 to set the schedule when you would like to be notified Press 3 to be notified on urgent messages only Press 4 to set the destination phone number Pager Notification When this function is activated the Samsung Voicemail will call your beeper service and n
468. s the MENU button then select ADD option The Group Name Window appears Enter up to a 20 character name using the dial pad keys Use the navigation key to move the cursor left or right while entering characters Press the DOWN button on the NAVIGATION DISC to move the cursor to the first entry NUMOT and begin entering the phone number of the first mem ber Enter 9 plus the outside telephone number or enter an internal extension number Repeat the process until all members are entered in the Conference Group Use CANCEL to erase digits as needed Press ENTER to SAVE this conference group Press END to return phone to idle condition 27 Using Conference Groups From the idle condition press the CONFERENCE button Select the Conference Group by pressing the corresponding soft key on the left Press SEND to call all members of the group OR press the ENTER key to deselect one or more members then press SEND As each member answers their status indicator on the left will change from an X to a circle Once you press the SEND button to initiate the conference call you can hang up any member by selecting the member by pressing the MENU button and selecting SENDING CANCEL This action will drop the selected member e When the conference call is finished place the handset in the cradle or press the SPEAKER key to hang up Note The originating station is the Supervisor of the conference When this station hangs u
469. s when you access them 66 Table of Contents DS 5000 Note ALL Access Manager options MUST be individually allowed by the System Administrator for each Subscriber They are 1 Follow Me Allows the subscriber to enter an alternate location and set how long the new destination Designated Location will be active This number may be an internal or external number This is useful if you are frequently traveling or changing the number where you can be reached When Follow Me is activated the transfer will be supervised and confirmed This means that if the call is not answered or if rejected by the Subscriber at the designated location it will be recalled to the Subscriber s mailbox 3 Call Blocking When this feature is active callers will not be transferred to your extension they will hear your blocked greeting if recorded and will go directly to your mailbox if they do not select any or are not offered any other options 4 CallForwarding Unlike Follow Me where the subscriber wants to take their calls at an alter nate location this feature allows the subscriber to pass control of his calls to another Subscriber The Forwarded To Subscriber will now be in control of the caller and the caller will NOT return to originating Subscriber s Mailbox If the Forwarded To Subscriber does not answer the caller it will now follow what ever the Forwarded To Subscriber has set up for their call conditions The Caller will hear Forwa
470. screened portion of the call will be Auto Answer but the keyset will ring when the transfer is complete if the user has not pressed the ANS RLS key or lifted the handset VOICE The station will ring After a short attention tone callers can make an announcement The called party must press the ANS RLS key or lift the handset to reply ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press the transfer key followed by 103 201 ANS MODE Display shows RING MODE 2 DialO 1 or 2 to change the ring mode e g 2 201 ANS MODE OR VOICE ANNOUNCE Press UP or DOWN to select the ring mode 3 Press the transfer key to store and exit OfficeServ 7100 USER INSTRUCTIONS TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 APRIL 2007 1 6 PROGRAMMING YOUR STATION S NAME Names are written using the keypad Each key press selects a character Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position For example if the directory name is SAM SMITH press the number 7 four times to get the letter S Press the number 2 once to get the letter A Continue selecting characters from the table below to complete your message Pressing the bottom left programmable key will change the letter from upper case to lower case There are up to 11 characters that can be used NOTE When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous character press the VOLUME UP or DOWN keys to move the cursor to the right or to the iDCS KEYSETS and ITP KEY
471. selected the station that barges in can monitor the con versation and no warning tone or display will be sent to the station being moni tored The handset transmitter and keyset microphone are disabled The party that originated the barge in may join the conversation by pressing the MUTE button on the keyset Your service company must program these options for you WARNING Barge in without tone may violate state or federal laws concerning the right to privacy Samsung Telecommunications America is in no way responsible for the possible misuse of this feature WALKING CLASS OF SERVICE You can change a restricted station s class of service to the same class as your sta tion allowing you to make calls or use features that would otherwise be restricted from that station Lift the handset or press the SPK or the MONITOR key Dial 59 and then your extension number Dial your station passcode and receive internal dial tone Dial access code and then the telephone number OR use the desired feature as usual Hang up The station will be returned to its restricted status NOTE The default station passcode 1234 cannot be used IN OUT OF GROUP Any station assigned to a station group can remove itself from that group and then reenter the group at a later time When out of the group a station can receive calls to its extension number but not to the group The number of groups available to choose from may vary depend
472. set VOLUME CONTROLS The iDCS keysets use the UP and DOWN keys to adjust the ringer volume while the keyset is ringing the speaker volume while the speakerphone is in use and the handset volume while you are listening These three levels will be stored in mem ory until changed If background music is turned on at your keyset the volume keys will also control the level of music The volume of pages heard through the speaker of a keyset can be adjusted during a page announcement by using the volume keys There are 16 levels for each volume setting The volume of off hook ring is controlled by a user programmable setting TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR The terminal status indicator light is positioned on the top right corner of the key set above the display The terminal status indicator is a tri colored red green and amber light that provides greater visibility of your keysets status than the indi vidual key LEDs The terminal status indicator provides the following indications Busy Off Hook Steady Red ntercom Ring Flashing Red Outside Call Ring Flashing Green Recall Ring Flashing Amber Message Waiting Flashing Red Do Not Disturb Fast Flash Red at 1 Second Intervals FEATURE ACCESS CODES This user guide is written based on the default access code for using system fea tures If the system numbering plan has been changed some of the access codes may not be correct Your installing company can inform you of the correct
473. set Use the dial buttons from 0 9 and to set the IP address and press the ENTER button among the navigation but tons to save and exit Next select the 2 System ID item and the screen below will be displayed Phone ID XXXX 14 Table of Contents ITP 5112L You must input the ID assigned to your ITP phone See your phone system admin istrator to get this value Press the ENTER button to save and exit Finally select the 3 System Password item and the screen below will be dis played Phone Password XXXX You must input the password associated with your ID See your phone system administrator to get this value Press the ENTER button to save and exit Completion of Settings From the Main Menu verify settings at the second item 2 System Information after setting all of the above items Select the seventh item 7 Reboot to save all modified settings and reboot the ITP 5112L phone DIALING FROM THE OUTGOING OUTSIDE CALLS INCOMING MENU Note When making calls internal or outside calls in order to access the program From the station idle screen press the MENU button and select PHONE mable button screens press the SCREEN button Then you can utilize either the BOOK SCROLL button or the UP DOWN arrow select buttons on the display Select OUTGOING CALLS or INCOMING CALLS from the submenu These menus will store the last thirty calls made to and from the station MAKI NG AN OUTSI DE CALL Pressthe s
474. sets use the UP and DOWN buttons to adjust the ringer volume while the keyset is ringing the speaker volume while the speakerphone is in use and the handset volume while you are listening These three levels will be stored in memory until changed If background music is turned on at your keyset the vol ume buttons will also control the level of music The volume of pages heard through the speaker of a keyset can be adjusted during a page announcement by using the volume buttons There are 16 levels for each volume setting The volume of off hook ring is controlled by a user programmable setting TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR The terminal status indicator light is positioned on the top right corner of the key set above the display The terminal status indicator is a tri colored red green and amber light that provides greater visibility of your keysets status than the indi vidual button LEDs The terminal status indicator provides the following indica tions Busy Off Hook Steady Red ntercom Ring Flashing Red Outside Call Ring Flashing Green Recall Ring Flashing Amber Message Waiting Flashing Red Do Not Disturb Fast Flash Red at 1 Second Intervals Table of Contents DS 5000 CONFERENCE BUTTON SEND BUTTON If the station is programmed for Enblok Dial Mode when dialing an outside telephone number or internal station number you must The CONFERENCE button allows the user to set up a call with up to 5 parties sta pre
475. she does not have a FORWARD ALL key the TRANSFER key will light to indicate Forward All has been set and calls to this station have been transferred else where FORWARD BUSY To forward calls to another station when you are on the phone Dial 602 plus the extension or group number Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press SPEAKER before you begin dialing FORWARD NO ANSWER To forward calls to another station when you do not answer e Dial 603 plus the extension or group number e Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing 23 FORWARD BUSY NO ANSWER If you have both a Forward on Busy destination and a Forward No Answer desti nation programmed you may set both of these at the same time Dial 604 e Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing FORWARD FOLLOW ME When you want all calls to your extension forwarded to the extension where you are now Dial 604 plus your extension number e Receive confirmation tone and hang up If you want a specific extension s calls forwarded to your phone Remote Call Forward Dial 606 plus the desired extension number
476. sociated number press ENTER The numbers registered to that group are displayed Scroll to the desired number and press SEND The number is automatically dialed for you 5 BY TIME Searches for entries based on incoming calls that have registered numbers on the set Scroll to the desired entry and press ENTER The infor mation associated with that call will be displayed Scroll to the desired num ber entry and press SEND to have the number dialed automatically for you PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial list A station may be assigned up to fifty numbers 00 49 See your system admin istrator to determine the amount assigned to your station The phone itself main tains 1000 station speed dial numbers 32 Table of Contents ITP 5112L While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 105 Dial a speed dial number 00 49 Dial a line or line group access code Dial the telephone number to be stored 24 digits maximum It can include FLASH and PAUSE Press TRANSFER to store the number NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the hand set or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing From the LCD Press MENU button Scroll to PHONEBOOK option press ENTER Scroll to New Number and press ENTER Or you dial 5 and immediate ly enter the option Enter the name and all desired phone numbers for th
477. splay IS ntt tH atn d cd 43 HON 43 te RET 44 44 Dial Call Progress LubusiusEeiduuidH tdi acia c roa io atr Lb ad 45 Display Nomber cii 45 Call Duration Tief usa cases cierre aa 45 45 scorta ets tot eer i 45 Blend Message Indicatiehis aaa aceite dpa eligenda 46 46 47 Alarma Reminder Massages Personal Dial Malfibs sacco ete rtu ttti oci to ttti e tito co a md 47 i tete ibt cel HU LoCo TUR ELLEN 47 Managing Key 55 0 5 48 48 0 48 MONT 49 50 51 55 Caller 52 55 SPECIAL APPLICATION MENU 56 Men OO RIO NUS ata iut cot detenti 56 58 56 Call 56 57 Directory Dial 57 Forward Set Tu racio Ros CR 57 58 Samsung 59 Subscriber Services 21801 207 60 61 Mailbox e
478. ss PAGE and dial a zone number MAKING AN EXTERNAL PAGE To make an announcement through the external paging speakers Lift the handset Press the PAGE button or dial 55 Dialthe desired zone number 5 6 7 or 8 OR Dial 9 to page all external zones After the attention tone make your announcement NOTE If you have a dedicated page zone button it is not necessary to press PAGE and dial a zone number ALL PAGE To page all designated keysets in internal zone 0 and all external zones at the same time Lift the handset Press the PAGE button or dial 55 Dial or press the ALL PAGE button After the attention tone make your announcement NOTE The LED on the PAGE button will only light when an All Page is in progress 28 Table of Contents DS 5000 MEET ME PAGE Lift the handset Press the Meet Me Page MMPG button or dial 54 e Dialthe desired zone number After the attention tone instruct the paged person to dial 56 Press WAIT or TRANSFER e Remain off hook until the person dials 56 from any phone The paged person will be automatically connected with you CALL PARK AND PAGE When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his her desk you can park the call prior to paging The system offers two different methods MANUAL PARK ORBITS While in conversation press the PARK button Entered a desired orbit number 0 9 if the orbit number is busy dial another orbit num
479. ss the SEND button to initiate the call This button is also used when tion or trunk reviewing recently received or called numbers and answering incoming calls TRANSFER BUTTON When reviewing recently received calls continue to press the SEND button for more than 2 seconds and the last outside number called will be redialed Transfer is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways You can The SEND button operates as the ANS portion of the ANS RLS button An do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can ANS RLS button may be assigned to the station as a programmable button do a blind transfer without notification ENTER BUTTON This button is used to select menu option or to save HOLD BUTTON changes made to a menu or submenu option HU DIRECTION BUTTON DIRECTION BUTTON is the donut shaped ring The HOLD button maintains the call at your keyset while enabling you to call which surrounds the ENTER button This button is used to navigate within other stations or consult coworkers in confidence the menus There are directional arrows stenciled into this button which indi SPEAKER BUTTON cate which direction the cursor will be moved BUTTON This button is used to disconnect a call after a conversation or The SPEAKER button allows you to have a conversation from the keyset without to move to the initial screen lifting the handset The END button operates as
480. ss the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 3 Ifa message has been left at your keyset by a keyset in Auto Answer you must manually cancel the message after it has been returned PROGRAMMED MESSAGES When you will be away from your phone for any length of time you can leave a programmed station message Display stations calling you will see this message and be informed of your status or follow your instructions Dial 48 plus any of the message codes 01 20 listed on the back of this user guide Tocancel any of these messages you might have selected dial 48 plus 00 Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button You can have multiple programmed message buttons PMSG and each one can have a different message code Press any programmed message PMSG button The message is set and the button will light red Press the button again to turn off Pressing another programmed message PMSG button will turn the previous one off and set a different programmed message 36 Table of Contents ITP 5121D CONVENIENCE FEATURES DO NOT DISTURB Use this feature when you want to block calls to your keyset e While on hook press the DND button or dial 401 The DND button lights steady red to remind you of this mode Tocancel DND press the DND button again or dial 400 The DND light turns off You can
481. ss the transfer key followed by 105 201 SPEED DIAL Display shows 00 If you no speed dial bins 201 SPEED DIAL the display will be as shown SPDBLK NOT EXIST 2 Dial the location number e g 05 201 SPEED DIAL OR 05 Press UP DOWN to select the location Press the right soft key to move cursor 3 Enter the trunk access code e g 9 followed 201 SPEED DIAL by the number to be dialed e g 4264100 05 9 4264100_ OR Press the left soft key to return to step 2 4 Press the F button to access the next program OR Press the transfer key to save and exit OfficeServ 7100 USER INSTRUCTIONS TECHNICAL MANUAL PART 1 APRIL 2007 1 8 NAMING YOUR PERSONAL SPEED DIAL LOCATIONS This program allows a character name to be entered for each personal speed dial location This name enables the speed dial number to be located when using the directory dial feature The directory dial feature allows the display keyset user to select a speed dial location by scanning its name There are up to 11 characters that can be used ACTION DISPLAY 1 Press the transfer key followed by 106 201 SPEED NAME Display shows 00 2 Dial the speed dial location e g 01 201 SPEED NAME OR 01 Use UP DOWN to scroll through the location numbers and use the right soft key to move the cursor 3 Enter the location name using the procedure 201 SPEED NAME described in Programming Your Station s Name 01 SAMSUNG _ 4 Press UP or DOWN to
482. ssage 51 STATION 201 LINDA received a call on line 702 Talking on line 702 702 01 15 CONF PAGE MUTE Press TRANSFER Transfer RETURN Dial 205 205 busy OHVA CAMP ON v OHVA to 205 Wait for reply ASK THEM TO HOLD TMSG EXIT v 702 01 45 CONF PAGE MUTE 52 STATION 205 JOHN is talking on line 701 701 05 25 OHVA from 201 TMSG REJECT GIVE THE CALL TMSG 01 SEND Dial 03 or press twice ASK THEM TO HOLD TMSG 03 SEND Wait for reply 701 05 55 CONF PAGE MUTE Table of Contents iDCS Keyset CALLER ID WHAT IS CALLER ID Caller ID is the name given to the telephone company provided feature that de livers the telephone number and sometimes the name of the person calling your phone There are two types of Caller ID the first delivers the calling party s tele phone number only and the second sometimes referred to as Deluxe Caller ID delivers both the calling party s telephone number and name as listed in the tele phone directory The phone system can handle both types of Caller ID in fact in the case of num ber only delivery the system can be programmed to insert a name for a specific telephone number However even though you are paying to receive Caller ID information there are some circumstances that mean you will not receive this in formation The six most common reasons are listed below along with the display information that the system will provide PRIVATE The call
483. ssage Then Exit Record Play Menu Options Cancel Return to Subscriber Services 0 6 7 Bm o Menu Options Cancel Return to Subscriber Services NOTE All options shown MAY NOT be authorized If an option is not available please speak to your system administrator 66 to Subscriber Services Cancel Return to Subscriber Services e Menu Options Cancel Return to Subscriber Services 67 GETTING STARTED Using your new Samsung Voicemail Subscriber Services is as simple as following a few simple spoken instructions First time users should read this section as a tutorial You should start with the following steps Access your Subscriber Services Menu You already know how to do this From the Subscriber Services Menu e Record a Primary No Answer Personal Greeting Dial 5 1 Record a Mailbox Greeting Dial 5 7 Change your access code Password Dial 7 1 Record your name Dial 7 2 Enter your directory name Dial 7 3 After you have completed the steps above your Subscriber Services are set up and ready to use LISTEN TO YOUR MESSAGES If there are new messages in your mailbox your VMMSG key will be lit Call the Samsung Voicemail by pressing this key and when prompted enter your pass word You will then be at the Subscriber Services Menu Select 1 to listen to new messages or 3 to list
484. ssages Press TRANSFER to store the name 49 MANAGING KEY ASSIGNMENTS You can view your key assignments and add extenders to some of your program mable keys for easy one touch operation of frequently used features e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 107 Use the VOLUME keys to scroll through all of your programmable keys OR Press the programmable key to which you want to add the extender When you reach a key listed below dial the corresponding extender Press TRANSFER to store and exit programming Please refer to the Enhanced Display Programming Section provided by your installation company when requested for a complete list of descriptions and extenders for any keys you may have programmed on your keyset NOTE Confirm that the cursor is placed correctly before you enter the extender LCR WITH CLEAR When you are making an outside call using LCR and dial an incorrect digit you can press the CLEAR soft key to reenter the telephone number You do not need to redial 9 to reaccess LCR BACKSPACE WITH LCR If you misdial while using LCR you can delete digits shown in the display by press ing the BSPC soft key as many times as necessary 50 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset TEXT MESSAGING This feature allows two digital keyset users to respond to each other with prepro grammed text messages After receiving an Off Hook Voice Announcement or Station Camp On you may respond with a text message whil
485. stem admin istrator to determine the amount assigned to your station e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 105 e Diala speed dial number 00 49 Diala line or line group access code e Dialthe telephone number to be stored 24 digits maximum It can include k FLASH and PAUSE Press TRANSFER to store the number NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 29 For the purposes of gramming speed dial num bers the programmable but tons are known as B C D E and F TheA button is notused The B button inserts a flash e The C button inserts a pause The D button is used for pulse to tone conversion If your system uses rotary or pulse dialing C O lines pressing D while entering a speed dial number causes all subsequent digits to be sent as DTMF tones The E button is used to hide digits Display keyset users may want to hide some speed dial numbers so that they will not show in the display When you are entering a telephone number press E All subsequent digits will be hid den Press E again to begin displaying digits e The button is used to enter a name See Personal Speed Dial Names under Display Features Use the HOLD button to clear a speed dial number ONE TOUCH SPEED DIALING You may assign any speed dial number to an already existing One Touch Speed Dial button f
486. supplied you may listen to music through the speaker in your keyset e While on hook press the HOLD button to hear music Press the HOLD button again to turn music off You can set the level of background music by using the VOLUME buttons while lis tening to the music This does not affect the speakerphone level 32 Table of Contents DS 5000 ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP To pick up an established call in progress at a single line extension connected to a computer modem on your PC Press the EP button for that station on your keyset and the call is automati cally moved to your keyset The single line extension on your modem will be disconnected NOTE You must have an assigned EP button button on your regular keyset for the single line station APPOINTMENT REMINDER ALARM CLOCK This feature works like an alarm clock Use it to remind yourself of an appointment later in the day TODAY ONLY or as a daily reminder every day DAILY You set up to three alarms Each one can be either a TODAY ONLY or a DAILY alarm When the alarm rings you will hear three short rings repeated three times Lift the handset to answer the alarm If you do not the alarm will alert you two more times at five minute intervals To set alarms Press TRANSFER and then dial 112 Dial the alarm number 1 2 or 3 Dialthe time at which you want the alarm to sound Enter the time as HHMM hours and minutes using the 24 hour clock
487. sy signal press the RETRY button Thesystem will reserve the line and automatically redial the same number for you You will hear the call being made through the keyset speaker The micro phone is muted 26 Table of Contents DS 5000 When the called party answers lift the handset or press the flashing SPEAK ER to begin speaking NOTES 1 Ifyou make another call auto redial is canceled 2 Tocancela retry lift and replace the handset PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER When making an outside call on a dial pulse line press All digits dialed after the with be sent as tones MEMO REDIALING When you are calling directory information you can store the number you are given using the SAVE feature There is no need for pencil and paper While you are talking on an outside call press SAVE Dialthe telephone number as it is dictated to you on the keypad Press SAVE to store the number To dial the number press the SNR button It will select the same line and dial the stored number If necessary you can select a different line and then press the SNR button 27 PAGING AND MESSAGING MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE To make an announcement through the keyset speakers in the idle condition e Lift the handset Press the PAGE button or dial 55 Dial the desired zone number 0 2 or 4 After the attention tone make your announcement NOTE If you have a dedicated page zone button it is not necessary to pre
488. system admin istrator to determine the amount assigned to your station e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 105 e Diala speed dial number 00 49 Diala line or line group access code e Dialthe telephone number to be stored 24 digits maximum It can include k FLASH and PAUSE e Press TRANSFER to store the number NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 27 For the purposes of gramming speed dial num bers the programmable but tons are known as A B C D E and F TheA button is notused The B button inserts a flash e The C button inserts a pause The D button is used for pulse to tone conversion If your system uses rotary or pulse dialing C O lines pressing D while entering a speed dial number causes all subsequent digits to be sent as DTMF tones The E button is used to hide digits Display keyset users may want to hide some speed dial numbers so that they will not show in the display When you are entering a telephone number press E All subsequent digits will be hid den Press E again to begin displaying digits e The button is used to enter a name See Personal Speed Dial Names under Display Features Use the HOLD button to clear a speed dial number ONE TOUCH SPEED DIALING You may assign any speed dial number to an already existing One Touch Speed Dial button
489. t Starts the ITP software upgrade process SYSTEM SERVER SETUP 1 Server IP Address The IP address 2 Server ID The ID assigned to your ITP see your phone administrator for this information 3 Server 55 password assigned to your ITP see your phone adminis tratror for this information FACTORY RESET This option resets ITP to factory default settings REBOOT This option reboots the ITP Table of Contents ITP 5107S SETTING THE NETWORK PARAMETERS Utilize the following programming steps to program the ITP 5107S keyset to operate within the users network YOU CAN SELECT THE SYSTEM EASY WIZARD TO PROGRAM ALL REQUIRED NETWORK PARAMETERS IF YOU WANT TO SET UP THESE PARAMETERS INDIVIDUALLY FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS BELOW Network Parameter Setup Get into the SETUP MODE as shown on page 8 From the Setup Main Menu select 3 NET 3 NETWORK MODE SET UP WORK SETUP to set or modify the network parameters Scroll to this option using the volume W A button and press SPEAKER Select the Network Mode Setup and press 1 SPEAKER the LCD will display this message MANUAL TP 2 DHCP If 1 MANUAL IP is selected the user must enter the IP address of the IP key set Then enter the subnet mask and gateway value for the customer net work If 2 DHCP is selected the IP address subnet mask and gateway value will be obtained automatically if a DHCP server is present Setting IP Manu
490. t Auto Play of Message Information MESSAGE BROADCAST This option will only be available if it has been allowed by the System Administrator Broadcast to Mailboxes If you have been designated as a Subscriber Administrator you may send a message to ALL mailboxes in the system From the Subscriber Services Menu press 6 for Mailbox Administration Press 9 for Broadcast Messages This option will only be available if your mailbox has been assigned Subscriber Administration privileges 72 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset PERSONAL SERVICES The Personal Administration Menu is used to set your password and record your name Many of these features must be allowed by the System Administrator 1 Workload Management Allows you to access to all reminders both Active and Pending If authorized you can group your reminders as Commitments Follow Ups or Tasks for bet ter organization The system will flag each reminder as Active or Pending pending means scheduled for future delivery 2 Stored Numbers Allows you to enter up to 9 stored phone numbers The first five of these are used in the Find Me feature but any of them 1 9 can be easily dialed using only one digit followed by the pound key to be used by many other features from within your subscriber space ie Follow Me Message Alert Pager Alert and Direct Call 3 Schedule Availability Allows you to enter a weekly availability schedule for use with
491. t schedules of the phone system It is solely controlled by the Subscriber s Availability Schedule Pause Resume Exit from Access Manager Play All Options Play Access Coverage This feature is useful for finding out how you current access settings set It will also tell you what greetings will play under each of the call conditions you have setup PERSONAL GREETINGS The options available in this menu will be determined by your System Administrator and not all of them may be available to you In the simplest sys tems only a mailbox greeting will be available additional greetings may be acces sible in more complex systems Your Personal Greeting will be played every time someone dials your extension and you do not answer You may record up to 9 Personal Greetings and you may assign any one of them to be active There are several different Call Coverage conditions to which you may assign any of your 9 greetings The Call Coverage Conditions are No Answer Busy and Do Not Disturb or Forwarded All This will allow different greetings to play depending on the type of call forward that you have set or the condition of your telephone The Call Coverage conditions that you can assign specific greetings to are select ed by the following digits 1 Primary No Answer Greeting Used when in your office away from your desk or during the time period you are scheduled available If this is the only Personal Greeti
492. t the handset and dial 65 plus the extension number of the ringing phone If you have a DP key assigned with a station number you only need to press this DP key with the flashing light to answer this ringing station NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing GROUP CALL PICKUP To pick up answer a call ringing in any pickup group lift the handset and dial 66 plus the desired group number or press the flashing GROUP PICKUP button if available GROUP NUMBERS 01 20 OfficeServ 100 and OfficeServ 7100 01 99 OfficeServ 500 M 01 99 OfficeServ 500 L 01 99 OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400 NOTES 1 A group pickup button have an extender for a specific pickup group 2 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing the access code MY GROUP PICKUP If desired a new access code can be assigned to pickup ringing calls in the same pickup group as you are in Like 66 above except you do not need to dial the desired group number See your installation company for the assigned access code MY GROUP PICKUP 25 PRIVACY RELEASE This feature will allow another station to join in our conversation by releasing pri vacy on the C O from your phone To Release Privacy While you are talking on a C O line and you wish to have other internal parties u
493. t the time period for the Power Save Mode to occur or you can select the interval the Power Save Mode occurs During Power Save Mode the screen will turn off ITP 5112L SETUP INITIALIZING THE ITP 5112L Initially the ITP 5112L IP keyset will need to be setup to operate within the users network The Setup Menu is also used to make changes to the keyset in the event that the system information should change The option chosen via scroll button will be highlighted The station numbers will be automatically set by the OfficeServ 100 the OfficeServ 500 or the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems once the necessary infor mation has been entered into the IP keyset Enter ID and password of the server as described below to register the phone See your system administrator for specific Network and Server addresses The addresses necessary to set up the ITP 5112L are P Address of Station Network Gateway Address Address of System s MCP User ID Password IP SETUP MENU To get to the SETUP MODE unplug the power 7 cord from the ITP Press and hold the MENU Configuration button while you plug power back into the System Easy Wizard phone Release the MENU button when you see the SETUP SCREEN If you have PoE Load amp Upgrade Setup Power over Ethernet connection the same System Server Setup procedure can be done by unplugging and Factory Reset plugging the Ethernet cable into the phone Reboot whi
494. tation The caller continues to leave a message normally Pickup the handset and monitor privately Press ANS RLS to answer the call using the handset or speaker 80 Table of Contents ITP 5121D AME Password If your keyset has AME PASSWORD MMC 110 set to YES you must enter your station password to listen to messages being left This will prevent unauthorized people from listening to messages being left for you If the password option is turned on while a message is being left press the flash ing AME indicator and enter your station password not your SVMi E Series pass word You will then hear the message being left Call Record If you have a call record button assigned to your phone you may press it at any time to record the conversation in progress If you have a display keyset you will also have the soft key options to pause and time the message 81 SHORTCUTS Calling Calling a station that is busy or does not answer you can press to immediately send the call to the called parties mailbox Call Divert to Voicemail While receiving an incoming ringing call dial to immediately send the caller to your personal voicemail box This will override the call forward no answer set ting Direct Messaging DSS To make it easy to leave messages for others in your office without hav ing to dial their extension number first keyset users may simply dial plus a mailbox extension number and l
495. tele phones receive special dial tone as a message indication or a lit message lamp if the phone is equipped with one and they are connected to an BMWSLI card not available on the OfficeServ 100 or OfficeServ 7000 Series or a 16MWSLI card on the system NOTES 1 Astation can have up to five message indications 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing CANCELING MESSAGES To cancel a message indication that you left at another station dial 42 plus the extension number of the station at which you left a message To cancel all mes sage indications left at your keyset dial 42 plus your extension Your MESSAGE light will go out NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 55 5 Press the MESSAGE button or dial 43 The first station that left a message will be called automatically If that station does not answer your MESSAGE light will stay on Repeat until all messages have been returned in the order received Your MESSAGE light will turn off when all messages have been returned 35 NOTES 1 Display keyset users can view message indications and return them any order See Viewing Message Indications under Display Features 2 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or pre
496. tension number now Or to leave me a message press 1 Busy Greeting Played to a caller when you are already talking to someone on your extension or the telephone at your Designated Location This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Busy Greeting feature Example Hi this is John Smith I m on another line right now If someone else can help you please enter the extension number now Or to leave a message press 1 Call Blocking Greeting Used while Call Blocking is enabled in your Access Manager or if your phone is forwarded ALL or DND This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Call Blocking feature Example Hi this is John Smith Sorry missed your call but I m going to be out of the office for the next few hours If someone else can help you please enter the extension number now Or to leave me a message press 1 Night Greeting Used during the time period you are scheduled UNAVAILABLE usually after business hours during the evening and at night This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Scheduling feature Example Hi this is John Smith I ve left the office for the evening If you would like to try someone else please enter the extension number now Or to leave me a message press 1 Call Screening Greeting Used while Call Screening is enabled and you REJECT a caller after listening to the caller s re
497. tents DS 5000 OHVA BLOCK Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Block BLOCK button Pressing this button will prevent anyone from making an OHVA to you until you press the button again and cancel the blocking OHVA REJECT Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Reject REJECT button Pressing this button while receiving an OHVA call will disconnect the voice announcing party and return you to your original call IN GROUP OUT OF GROUP If your keyset is assigned to a station ring group you can remove your keyset from the group and then put it back in While you are out of the group you can receive calls to your extension number but not calls to the group number If you have IN OUT button with the group number assigned Press the IN OUT button It will light red when your keyset is in the group Press the IN OUT button again to exit the group and turn the light off Repeat as necessary If you do not have an IN OUT button e Dial the IN OUT access code number number then 0 to exit the group or 1 to enter the group then the group NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the hand set or press SPEAKER button The IN OUT button can include an extender to indicate the specific group that this button will affect This means that if you are in multiple groups you can de cide for which groups you will receive calls 37 CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET AME PASSWORD This feat
498. tents ITP 5121D FORWARDING CALLS You may forward your calls to another station group of stations or an external telephone number Program a destination for the type of forwarding you want as detailed below If you have FWD ALL FWD BUSY FWD NO ANSWER buttons press one to turn that forward feature steady red light reminds you what for ward condition is activated You can clear all call forward conditions set at your station by lifting the handset and dialing 600 FORWARD ALL CALLS To forward all your calls under any condition to another station Dial 601 plus the extension or group number Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTES 1 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing 2 The station that receives a Forwarded All call can transfer the call to the for warded station This is useful when you are expecting an important call but you do not wish to be disturbed by other calls 3 When a station user places his her keyset in Forward All mode and he she does not have a FORWARD ALL button the TRANSFER button will light to in dicate Forward All has been set and calls to this station have been transferred elsewhere FORWARD BUSY To forward calls to another station when you are on the phone Dial 602 plus the extension or group number Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has
499. th the top left soft key and you will advance to STATION PROGRAMMABLE SCREEN 2 Each additional press of the DOWN arrow will advance you through the screens until you reach SCREEN 10 Press the UP arrow associated with the top left soft key to return to the previous screen Each additional press of the UP but ton will move you back towards the main screen Press the SCREEN button twice to access the SOFT MENU SCREEN 1 Press the DOWN arrow associated with the top left soft key and you will advance to SCREEN 2 CONFERENCE BUTTON The CONFERENCE button allows the user to set up a call with up to five parties station or trunk TRANSFER BUTTON TRANSFER is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways You can do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can do a blind transfer without notification HOLD BUTTON The HOLD button maintains the call at your keyset while enabling you to call other stations or consult coworkers in confidence SPEAKER BUTTON The SPEAKER button allows you to have a conversation from the keyset without lifting the handset Table of Contents ITP 5112L SCROLL BUTTON ASSEMBLY The scroll button is actually a type of thumbwheel assembly You may use it to scroll through the station screens Rolling the SCROLL BUTTON DOWN towards the navigation button will advance you through the multiple SOFT MENU and STATION PROGRAMMABLE button screens Rolling the SC
500. that de livers the telephone number and sometimes the name of the person calling your phone There are two types of Caller ID the first delivers the calling party s tele phone number only and the second sometimes referred to as Deluxe Caller ID delivers both the calling party s telephone number and name as listed in the tele phone directory The phone system can handle both types of Caller ID in fact in the case of num ber only delivery the system can be programmed to insert a name for a specific telephone number However even though you are paying to receive Caller ID information there are some circumstances that mean you will not receive this in formation The six most common reasons are listed below along with the display information that the system will provide PRIVATE The caller does not wish his her name or number to be re vealed to you This type of call can be stopped at the tele phone company by dialing an access code on your outside lines This will redirect these PRIVATE calls to an announce ment that states that you do not wish to receive calls that have had Caller ID blocked The code to block these calls can usually be found in the front section of the telephone direc tory OUT OF AREA The caller is calling from an area that cannot provide Caller ID information for example international calls or he she is calling from a type of circuit that cannot provide Caller ID information for example some outbound WATS li
501. the ITP keyset to any port on the local network your ITP will share LAN connection with a PC plug eight conductor eth ernet cable from the PC into the jack marked PC on the back of the keyset Plug the power connector from the power adapter provided into the power jack on the back of the keyset The power adapter is not required if the ITP is connected to a LAN connection that provides power over the ethernet The ITP 5121D supports the power over ethernet feature when it is connected to a IEEE 802 3af compliant LAN switch or power injector port IMPORTANT NOTE Be careful not to connect the Network LAN cable into the PC connector of the phone To prevent damaging the keyset only use the Power Adapter that came with the 5121D keyset This manual assumes that the ITP keysets are connected to a functioning local IP network The local IP network must be able to communicate with the MCP and card in the OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 or the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems over IP This is assumed regardless of whether the IP keyset is on a local or remote network Table of Contents ITP 5121D ITP 5121D SETUP INITIALIZING THE ITP 5121D Initially the ITP 5121D keyset will need to be setup to operate within the users network The Setup Menu is also used to make changes to the keyset in the event that the system information should change The option chosen via scroll key will be highlighted T
502. the announcing party NOTES 1 Executive off hook voice announce can only be accomplished when an AOM is attached to your phone 2 If the MUTE key on the AOM is lit you must press the AOM s SPK key to answer the OHVA call OHVA BLOCK Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Block BLOCK key Pressing this key will prevent anyone from making an OHVA to you until you press the button again and cancel the blocking OHVA REJECT Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Reject REJECT key Pressing this key while receiving an OHVA call will disconnect the voice announcing party and return you to your original call IN GROUP OUT OF GROUP If your keyset is assigned to a station ring group you can remove your keyset from the group and then put it back in While you are out of the group you can receive calls to your extension number but not calls to the group number If you have IN OUT key with the group number assigned Press the IN OUT key It will light red when your keyset is in the group Press the IN OUT key again to exit the group and turn the light off Repeat as necessary If you do not have an IN OUT key Dial the IN OUT access code number number then 0 to exit the group or 1 to enter the group then the group NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the hand set or press SPEAKER key The IN OUT key can include an extender to indicate the specific group that th
503. to any fax machine of your choice as long as out calling is authorized You can also have faxmail messages automatically delivered to the fax machine of your choice Forward the message and saves a copy The subscriber can be selected by dialing their mailbox number nnn using the directory service or you may also add comments and leave it as a memo to yourself The Send and Copy Service option 6 allows a user to send copies of a mes sage to multiple recipients easily A different introduction message may be left for each recipient Rewind the message 5 seconds Change playback volume of the recording There are two levels of volume during playback Dialing this code will tog gle between the two levels Pause or resume during message playback Fast forward the message 5 seconds 69 99 Change playback speed of the recording There are two levels of speed during playback Dialing this code will toggle between the two speeds 0 Play options Pressing this key will play all the menu options available to you from this point 00 Hear the time and date and sender s information of the message you just heard Sender information is not available on outside calls Move to the next message This does not Save Discard the current mes sage it is retained as new Scan Plays first 7 seconds of a message then skips to next message This is similar to the scan button on a radio It will allow you to find a s
504. to your extension number but not calls to the group number If you have an IN OUT button with the group number assigned Press the IN OUT button It will light red when your keyset is in the group Press the IN OUT button again to exit the group and turn the light off Repeat as necessary If you do not have an IN OUT button Dial the IN OUT access code number number then 0 to exit the group or 1 to enter the group then the group NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the hand set or press SPEAKER button The IN OUT button can include an extender to indicate the specific group that this button will affect This means that if you are in multiple groups you can de cide for which groups you will receive calls 40 Table of Contents ITP 5107S CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET AME PASSWORD This feature allows customers using the AME feature to enable password protec tion This will prevent unauthorized users from listening to your messages being left The passcode is the same as your station passcode This feature only applies if there is an Samsung Voicemail card installed in the system and your keyset has a programmed AME button e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 101 to turn on AME PASSCODE or 100 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection AUTO CAMP ON This option allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on if possible when a
505. tons to save and exit Select the 2 SERVER ID item INPUT SYSTEM ID XXXX You must input the ID assigned to your ITP phone See your phone system admin istrator to get this value Press the ENTER button to save and exit Select the 3 SERVER PASS item INPUT SYSTEM PASSWORD XXXX You must input the password associated with your ID See your phone system administrator to get this value Press the ENTER button to save and exit Completion of Settings From the main menu select the seventh item 7 REBOOT to save all modified settings and reboot the ITP 5121D phone OUTSIDE CALLS MIRING AN OUTSIDE CALL Lift the handset and press an idle outside line button line group button or dial a line access code to receive dial tone OR press an idle outside line button line group button or dial a line access code to receive dial tone through the speaker OR press SPEAKER receive intercom dial tone and dial a line access code the telephone number Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the END button NOTE You will receive No More Calls tone when you attempt to make a call and there is no button available for that line f Least Cost Routing is enabled on your phone system this button may be labeled LCR or accessed by dialing an access code usually 9 fyour system is programmed to require an authorization code before making a call dial k plus a valid code before se
506. tory 3 Entering your Directory Name Use this option to enter your Directory Name Your Directory Name is used callers to find you if they do not know your extension number From the Subscriber Services Menu press 7 3 The current Directory Name will be played as a string of digits that are equal to your name spelled out on your telephone keypad Follow the instructions to enter a new name You will be prompted to enter your last name and then your first name This must be done in order for the directory feature to work correctly Note It is possible that if you do not record your name described above and or enter your Directory Name you will not be included in the Dial by Name Directory 4 Extended Prompting Use this option to drastically reduce the number of prompts played in the subscriber interface mailbox prompts Change this setting only if you are very familiar with the user operation of the Samsung Voicemail 79 Note Remember if you know what digits to press you can enter them at time you do not have to wait to be prompted This feature can be toggled on off at anytime Also if it is off you will be prompted within each subscriber menu to press zero for more options This enables you to still be able to find out what to do if you were to get lost and extended prompting was disabled KEYSET USER FEATURES The following options are available if you have a display keyset They require setup b
507. trunk number You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button OR you use NND to view more information about this call OR you can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE NOTES 1 If you are on an intercom call or you have Automatic Hold turned off you must finish the existing call or place it on hold before inquiring 2 Ifyou inquire about an outgoing call you will receive a call no longer avail able display 63 REVIEWING PAST CALLER ID CALLS This feature allows you to review CID information for calls sent to your keyset This list can contain 10 50 calls in a last in first out basis The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your keyset but that you did not answer When reviewing this list you can press one button to dial the person back The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number To access the CID information stored in your REVIEW list Press the REVIEW button OR press the CID button and then press the REVIEW soft key f you have entries in your review list the most recent call will be shown first You can now CLEAR this entry OR use NND to view more information about this call OR Press DIAL to call this person back OR press SCROLL and then press STORE to save this number in a personal speed dial bin NOTES 1 Each keyset defaults with ten review bins Please see your system administra tor to determine the number of bins assign
508. ts You never lose sight of your calls while they are on hold They stay right where you put them and are identified with a green flashing light Table of Contents ITP 5107S Some simple rules to remember Any steady LED indicates the line or feature is in use Afast flashing green LED indicates a new call ringing in A slow flashing green or red LED indicates a call is on hold Aslow flashing amber LED indicates a recall to your keyset FULL DUPLEX SPEAKERPHONE All ITP keysets are speakerphones Pressing the FLASHING CALL BUTTON will answer an incoming call on the speakerphone Pressing the SPEAKER button will release the call on the speakerphone Switching from the handset to the speakerphone is easy Simply press the SPEAK ER button and hang up the handset VOLUME CONTROLS The ITP 5107S keyset uses the UP and DOWN buttons to adjust the ringer volume while the keyset is ringing the speaker volume while the speakerphone is in use and the handset volume while you are listening These three levels will be stored in memory until changed If background music is turned on at your keyset the vol ume buttons will also control the level of music The volume of pages heard through the speaker of a keyset can be adjusted during a page announcement by using the volume buttons There are 16 levels for each volume setting The volume of off hook ring is controlled by a user programmable setting TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR The term
509. tually being forwarded 5 Call Screening If this is turned on the caller will be asked their name and the Samsung Voicemail will play this name to you before the transfer giving you an option to accept or reject the call 6 FindMe Find Me when enabled will attempt to locate the subscriber by calling a list of preprogrammed phone numbers The stored phone numbers are entered in Personal Services 2 if allowed by the Administrator The stored tele phone number list can contain up to 9 preprogrammed telephone numbers The Find Me feature only use the first five 7 Night Intercept This feature is dependent on your weekly availability schedule which is entered in Personal Services 3 if allowed by the Administrator When Night Intercept is active the Samsung Voicemail will first ring your extension 66 Table of Contents 51075 then play your primary No Answer greeting during the day when you are available and will NOT ring your extension but simply play your Night greet ing during the night when you are not available Note This does NOT use the Day and Night schedules of the phone system It is solely controlled by the Subscriber s Availability Schedule Pause Resume Exit from Access Manager Play All Options Play Access Coverage This feature is useful for finding out how you current access settings set It will also tell you what greetings will play under each of the
510. ture Example Hi this is John Smith Sorry missed your call but I m going to be out of the office for the next few hours If someone else can help you please enter the extension number now Or to leave me a message press 1 Night Greeting Used during the time period you are scheduled UNAVAILABLE usually after business hours during the evening and at night This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Scheduling feature Example Hi this is John Smith I ve left the office for the evening If you would like to try someone else please enter the extension number now Or to leave me a message press 1 Call Screening Greeting Used while Call Screening is enabled and you REJECT a caller after listening to the caller s record name This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Call Screening feature Example Hi this is John Smith I m sorry but am not available to speak with you at this time If someone else can help you please enter the extension number now Or to leave me a message press 1 69 6 Edit Personal Greetings You may also edit record each one of the greetings 1 9 at any time Select a greeting number to edit and follow the instructions to record your greeting When you are done recording your greeting you will be able to lis ten to the greeting you recorded save the greeting you recorded and return to the previous menu record
511. ture Messages can be sent with future delivery so you can have the system call you when items become due INTERACTIVE DISPLAYS Display keyset users have the added advantage of using the soft keys and displays to play save delete reply call forward rewind pause fast forward change the vol ume get message information or help Viewing Mailbox Contents If you have new messages in addition to the Terminal Status Indicator TSI you will be able to use the keyset displays and soft keys to communicate with the SVMi E Series 88 Table of Contents ITP 5112L PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS CODE NAME TELEPHONE NUMBER 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 89 NOTES PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS CODE NAME TELEPHONE NUMBER 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 90 Table of Contents ITP 5112L NOTES Table of Contents Enterprise IP Solutions OfficeServ ITP 5121D User Guide For OfficeServ 100 OfficeServ 500 OfficeServ 7000 Series 04 2007 Copyright 2006 Sams
512. turn Your default station passcode is 1234 e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 100 Dial your four digit station passcode Dial 1 to locking outgoing 2 for locked all calls or 0 to unlock Press TRANSFER to store your selection 38 Table of Contents ITP 5107S LOCKED LOCKED m CALLS Hold Button LED Flashes Hold Button LED Solid Make outside calls YES NO ACCESS DENIED NO Receive outside calls YES YES NO Make intercom calls YES YES NO Receive intercom calls YES YES NO MANUAL SIGNALLING Use this feature when you want to send a brief 500ms ring burst to another sta tion regardless of the status of your phone on hook off hook handsfree DND or ringing To send a signal to another station e Press the Manual Signalling MS button You may press the MS button repeatedly to send multiple signals to the des ignated station NOTE Your phone must have a Manual Signalling MS button with a station number extender assigned to it OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE Keysets may receive a voice announcement while on another call The calling sta tion must have an OHVA button When you are in DND you cannot receive OHVA calls The OHVA feature will work with intercom and transferred calls When you receive an OHVA and secure OHVA is ON you will hear the announce ment in the handset receiver if you are using the handset If secure OHVA is OFF then you will hear
513. turned on for the current call only While the caller is leaving a message or ringing you may Press 4 to immediately put the caller in your voice mailbox and monitor it Press to immediately disconnect your station The caller continues to leave a message normally Pickup the handset and monitor privately Press ANS RLS to answer the call using the handset or speaker 75 AME Password If your keyset has AME PASSWORD MMC 110 set to YES you must enter your station password to listen to messages being left This will prevent unauthorized people from listening to messages being left for you If the password option is turned on while a message is being left press the flash ing AME indicator and enter your station password not your Samsung Voicemail password You will then hear the message being left Call Record If you have a call record button assigned to your phone you may press it at any time to record the conversation in progress If you have a display keyset you will also have the soft key options to pause and time the message 76 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset SHORTCUTS Calling Calling a station that is busy or does not answer you can press to immediately send the call to the called parties mailbox Call Divert to Voicemail While receiving an incoming ringing call dial to immediately send the caller to your personal voicemail box This will override the call forward no answ
514. u can receive calls to your extension number but not calls to the group number If you have an IN OUT button with the group number assigned Press the IN OUT button It will light red when your keyset is in the group Press the IN OUT button again to exit the group and turn the light off Repeat as necessary If you do not have an IN OUT button Dial the IN OUT access code number number then 0 to exit the group or 1 to enter the group then the group NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the hand set or press SPEAKER button The IN OUT button can include an extender to indicate the specific group that this button will affect This means that if you are in multiple groups you can de cide for which groups you will receive calls 42 Table of Contents ITP 5121D CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET AME PASSWORD This feature allows customers using the AME feature to enable password protec tion This will prevent unauthorized users from listening to your messages being left The passcode is the same as your station passcode This feature only applies if there is a Samsung Voicemail card installed in the system and your keyset has a programmed AME button e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 101 to turn on AME PASSCODE or 100 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection AUTO CAMP ON This option allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on
515. u is displayed you can move to each menu by using the buttons as described below The 0 9 dial buttons are used to directly choose a menu or sub menu options The volume W A buttons are used to move the cursor up or down to scroll through menu items The SPEAKER button is used to select a menu item or to save data after entry It functions as an ENTER or OK button HOLD button will take you out of the current sub menu to one menu level up to previous screen It functions as an ESCAPE or CANCEL button n some entry fields the HOLD button is used to backspace the cursor or to delete entered data The button on the dial pad is used to enter e between IP address octets MENU STRUCTURE The IP SETUP MENU is configured as follows 1 SYSTEM EASY WIZARD This option will guide you through setting up all required parameters for con necting the ITP keyset to your system SYSTEM INFORMATION 1 Version Info Provides boot rom software DSP and hardware version information 2 Network Info Displays network mode IP address of phone network and gateway information 3 Netmask 4 Gateway Note that items 2 to 4 are only displayed when setting Manual IP NETWORK SETUP This menu allows you to individually setup the same parameters found in the Easy Wizard LOAD amp UPGRADE SETUP 1 Upgrade TFTP Server The IP address of the TFTP server containing the ITP software 2 Upgrade Star
516. u of the correct codes Table of Contents 51075 5 5 5 The system provides several tones to assist you Some of these tones are already familiar to you Intercom Dial Tone A steady tone that indicates you can begin dialing CONTINUOUS Ringback Tone Indicates the station you dialed is ringing RINGBACK TONE 1000 ms ON 3000 ms OFF MN CONTINUOUS Busy Tone Indicates the station you dialed is busy BUSY TONE 500 ms ON 500 ms OFF CONTINUOUS DND No More Calls Tone Fast busy tone indicates the station you dialed is in the Do Not Disturb mode or cannot receive any more calls DND NO MORE CALLS TONE 250 ms ON 250 ms OFF FOR TEN SECONDS Transfer Conference Tone Indicates your call is being held and you can dial another party TRANSFER CONF TONE 100 ms ON 100 ms OFF CONTINUOUS Confirmation Tone Very short beeps followed by dial tone indicate you have correctly set or canceled a system feature CONFIRMATION TONE 50 ms ON 50 ms OFF FOR ONE SECOND programmable Error Tone A distinctive two level beeping tone indicates you have done something incorrectly Try again ERROR 50 ms of tone 1 50 ms of tone 2 FOR THREE SECONDS 51075 Soft Button LCD Panel Status Indicator Scroll Button Programmable Buttons 7 Keyset Support Volume Button Redial Button Conference Button Transfer Button H
517. u will have the chance to change it Note It is possible that if you do not record your name and or enter your Directory Name described below you will not be included in the Dial by Name Directory 3 Entering your Directory Name Use this option to enter your Directory Name Your Directory Name is used by callers to find you if they do not know your extension number From the Subscriber Services Menu press 7 3 The current Directory Name will be played as a string of digits that are equal to your name spelled out on your telephone keypad Follow the instructions to enter a new name You will be prompted to enter your last name and then your first name This must be done in order for the directory feature to work correctly Note It is possible that if you do not record your name described above and or enter your Directory Name you will not be included in the Dial by Name Directory 4 Extended Prompting Use this option to drastically reduce the number of prompts played in the subscriber interface mailbox prompts Change this setting only if you are very familiar with the user operation of the Samsung Voicemail 74 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset Note Remember if you know what digits to press you can enter them at any time you do not have to wait to be prompted This feature can be toggled on off at anytime Also if it is off you will be prompted within each subscriber menu to press zero for more options Thi
518. ubscriber will now be in control of the caller and the caller will NOT return to originating Subscriber s Mailbox If the Forwarded To Subscriber does not answer the caller it will now follow what ever the Forwarded To Subscriber has set up for their call conditions The Caller will hear Forwarding to Subscriber before actually being forwarded 5 Call Screening If this is turned on the caller will be asked their name and the Samsung Voicemail will play this name to you before the transfer giving you an option to accept or reject the call 6 Find Find Me when enabled will attempt to locate the subscriber by calling a list of preprogrammed phone numbers The stored phone numbers are entered in Personal Services 2 if allowed by the Administrator The stored tele phone number list can contain up to 9 preprogrammed telephone numbers The Find Me feature only use the first five 7 Night Intercept This feature is dependent on your weekly availability schedule which is entered in Personal Services 3 if allowed the Administrator When Night Intercept is active the Samsung Voicemail will first ring your extension 78 Table of Contents ITP 5112L then play your primary No Answer greeting during the day when you are available and will NOT ring your extension but simply play your Night greet ing during the night when you are not available Note This does NOT use the Day and Nigh
519. ume of off hook ring is controlled by a user programmable setting TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR The terminal status indicator light is positioned on the top right corner of the key set above the display The terminal status indicator is a tri colored red green and amber light that provides greater visibility of your keysets status than the indi vidual button LEDs The terminal status indicator provides the following indica tions Busy Off Hook Steady Red ntercom Ring Flashing Red Outside Call Ring Flashing Green Recall Ring Flashing Amber Message Waiting Flashing Red Do Not Disturb Fast Flash Red at 1 Second Intervals CONFERENCE BUTTON The CONFERENCE button allows the user to set up a call with up to 5 parties sta tion or trunk TRANSFER BUTTON Transfer is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways You can do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can do a blind transfer without notification HOLD BUTTON The HOLD button maintains the call at your keyset while enabling you to call other stations or consult coworkers in confidence SPEAKER BUTTON The SPEAKER button allows you to have a conversation from the keyset without lifting the handset NAVIGATION BUTTON The ITP 5121D keyset incorporates a NAVIGATION button This button is designed to assist the user in activating and using various station features more easily These features include
520. ung Telecommunications America All rights reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means graphic electronic or mechanical including recording taping photocopying or information retrieval systems without express written permission of the publisher of this material Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in this guide for any reason Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing may warrant Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide HomePage Table of Contents messo 5 ABOUT THIS BOOK 1 THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW 2 7 ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET 8 TO SETUP 9 15 OUTSIDE CALLS Wie lave 0 16 Answering an snasas dic nest attt cca ai 16 Universal Answer TER RC NDS Busy Line Queuing With 4 3 00 17 Canceling Call ena ea 17 INTERCOM CALLS Calling Answering Intercom
521. ur microphone and speaker are turned and you can speak handsfree For privacy use the handset Tofinish the call replace the handset or press the END button NOTE In order for C O calls to be answered handsfree AUTO ANS CO must be set ON 18 Table of Contents ITP 5121D BUSY STATION CALLBACK When you call another station and receive a busy signal e Press the button if programmed or dial 44 When the busy station becomes free your keyset will ring Lift the handset or press SEND to call the now idle station NOTES 1 A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds If you have set a callback your CBK button will light 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before dialing BUSY STATION CAMP ON When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to wait for a callback MANUAL CAMP ON Press the CAMP button or dial 45 Thecalled station will receive off hook ring tone repeated every few seconds and its first available CALL button will flash green to indicate your call is wait ing Wait for the called party to answer The called station must release its first call or place it on hold before answer ing your camp on NOTES 1 If you receive No More Calls tone that station has no available button to accept your call Hang up or leave a message 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has
522. ure allows customers using the AME feature to enable password protec tion This will prevent unauthorized users from listening to your messages being left The passcode is the same as your station passcode This feature only applies if there is an Samsung Voicemail card installed in the system and your keyset has a programmed AME button e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 101 to turn on AME PASSCODE or 100 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection AUTO CAMP ON This option allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on if possible when a busy station is called With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Press 081 to turn CAMP ON on or 080 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection SELECT RING TONE Each keyset user can select any one of eight ring frequencies While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 111 Dial 1 8 or press the UP and DOWN buttons to hear each tone When you hear the tone that you prefer press TRANSFER to save it NOTE Specific lines or stations may be programmed to ring with a different tone than what you have selected for your keyset CHANGE YOUR PASSCODE From the factory your station passcode is 1234 You can change your station pass code whenever you desire e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 101 Dial your old passcode Diala new passcode must be four characters You can use 0 9
523. utside line buttons That outside line will remain steady green to indicate you are still connected to it All other outside lines in the conference will be placed on system hold at your keyset All intercom callers in the conference will be disconnected You may now speak with each caller privately and transfer them as usual or reestablish another conference 22 Table of Contents iDCS Keyset FORWARDING CALLS You may forward your calls to another station group of stations or an external telephone number Program a destination for the type of forwarding you want as detailed below If you have FWD ALL FWD BUSY and FWD NO ANSWER keys press to turn that forward feature A steady red light reminds you what for ward condition is activated You can clear all call forward conditions set at your station by lifting the handset and dialing 600 FORWARD ALL CALLS To forward all your calls under any condition to another station Dial 601 plus the extension or group number Receive confirmation tone and hang up NOTES 1 If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing 2 The station that receives a Forwarded All call can transfer the call to the for warded station This is useful when you are expecting an important call but you do not wish to be disturbed by other calls 3 When a station user places his her keyset in Forward All mode and he
524. utton available to re ceive another call Press TRANSFER to return to the other party 3 Youcannot transfer an Intercom call by pressing a DSS button You must press the TRANSFER button and dial the destination extension number TRANSFER WITH CAMP ON When you are transferring a call to another station and you receive a busy signal you may camp the call on to this station Simply hang up when you hear the busy signal The called party will be alerted that a call is waiting for them NOTE If you receive No More Calls tone that station has no button available to receive another call Press TRANSFER to return to the outside caller 25 TRANSFER VOICEMAIL This feature is used to send a call directly to a voice mailbox Your keyset must have a correctly programmed VT button to accomplish this To transfer a call directly to a voice mailbox e While a call press the VT button and dial the mailbox number e up when dialing is completed CALL WAITING If an outside call has been camped on to your phone or another station has camped on to you You will hear a tone in the earpiece and the call that is waiting for you camped on will flash addition the bottom line of the display will indicate the number of the station or trunk party camped on Press the flashing button to answer your other call will go on hold automati cally if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set If not you must press HOLD
525. v 500 and OfficeServ Lift the handset 7000 Series systems offer two different methods Press the PAGE button or dial 55 Dial the desired zone number 0 1 2 or 4 MANUAL PARK ORBITS e After the attention tone make your announcement While in conversation press the PARK button e Entered a desired orbit number 0 9 if the orbit number is busy dial another orbit number Display users can press to automatically place the call in any available orbit number and see the number in the display MAKI NG AN EXTERNAL PAGE Remember the selected orbit number e Replace the handset when finished To make an announcement through the external paging speakers Lift the handset and make a page announcement as previously described example John Smith park two NOTE If you have a dedicated page zone button it is not necessary to press PAGE and dial a zone number e Lift the handset e Press the PAGE button or dial 55 To retrieve a parked call from orbit Dial the desired zone number 5 6 7 or 8 OR dial 9 to page all external Press the PARK button and dial the announced orbit number 0 9 zones You will be connected to the parked call After the attention tone make your announcement NOTES NOTE If you have a dedicated page zone button it is not necessary to press PAGE 1 You must have a PARK button or park access code to retrieve and place calls and dial a zone number in park orbits 2 If the parked ca
526. vailability schedule which is entered in Personal 5617 1665 3 if allowed the Administrator When Night Intercept is active the Samsung Voicemail will first ring your extension 0 then play your primary No Answer greeting during the day when you are 67 available and will NOT ring your extension but simply play your Night greet ing during the night when you are not available Note This does NOT use the Day and Night schedules of the phone system It is solely controlled by the Subscriber s Availability Schedule Pause Resume Exit from Access Manager Play All Options Play Access Coverage This feature is useful for finding out how you current access settings are set It will also tell you what greetings will play under each of the call conditions you have setup PERSONAL GREETINGS The options available in this menu will be determined by your System Administrator and not all of them may be available to you In the simplest sys tems only a mailbox greeting will be available additional greetings may be acces sible in more complex systems Your Personal Greeting will be played every time someone dials your extension and you do not answer You may record up to 9 Personal Greetings and you may assign any one of them to be active There are several different Call Coverage conditions to which you may assign any of your 9 greetings The Call Coverage Conditions are No Answer Busy and Do Not Distu
527. wer mode e While on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 15 to access AUTO ANS CO Press the VOLUME UP or DOWN key to change status Press TRANSFER to store your selection AUTOMATIC HOLD While on an outside call pressing a line button route button or a flashing CALL button will automatically put your call on hold and connect you to the next call This feature can be turned on or off at your keyset e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 001 to turn Automatic Hold on or 000 to turn it off Press TRANSFER to store your selection NOTE Intercom calls can be automatically put on hold by pressing TRANSFER HEADSET OPERATION Keyset users can switch between headset mode and handset mode When using headset mode press the FLASHING CALL button to answer and release calls e With the handset on hook press TRANSFER and then dial 110 Dial 021 to use the headset or 020 to use the handset Press TRANSFER to store your selection Your keyset may be equipped with a Headset mode button If it is so equipped pressing this button while the light is out will cause the keyset to enter headset mode and the light will illuminate to indicate this Pressing the button while the light is lit will cause the keyset to return to handset mode and the light will go out 42 Table of Contents ITP 5107S HOT KEYPAD On your phone system your keyset s keypad can be made live or hot so that it
528. xample Hi this is John Smith l ve left the office for the evening If you would like to try someone else please enter the extension number now Or to leave me a message press 1 Call Screening Greeting Used while Call Screening is enabled and you REJECT a caller after listening to the caller s record name This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the Screening feature Example Hi this is John Smith I m sorry but am not available to speak with you at this time If someone else can help you please enter the extension number now Or to leave me a message press 1 Table of Contents ITP 5112L 6 Edit Personal Greetings You may also edit record each one of the greetings 1 9 at any time Select a greeting number to edit and follow the instructions to record your greeting When you are done recording your greeting you will be able to lis ten to the greeting you recorded save the greeting you recorded and return to the previous menu record the greeting again or exit without saving the greeting Note If you record only the greeting assigned to the No Answer Call Coverage Condition then that greeting will play to callers for all Call Coverage Conditions No Answer Busy Blocked Night and Rejected Caller In this case the salutation part of the greeting should be very general 7 Edit Mailbox Greeting Used whenever a caller reaches your mailbox or if you have not recorded
529. xit and store your selection 57 VIEWING THE NEXT CALLER ID CALL In the event that you have a call waiting or a camped on call at your keyset you can press the NEXT button to display the Caller ID information associated with the call in queue at your keyset Either the CID name or CID number will show in the display depending on your Name Number selection To view Caller ID information for calls that have been camped on to your keyset press the NEXT button If your keyset does not have a NEXT button press the CID button and then the NEXT soft key SAVING THE CALLER ID NUMBER At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information you may press the SAVE button to save the CID number If your keyset does not have a SAVE but ton press the CID button the SCROLL button and then the SAVE soft key The sys tem must be using LCR to dial the saved number REDIALING A SAVED CALLER ID NUMBER To redial a number that has been saved press the SNR button or dial 17 NOTES 1 Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the saved number 2 Ifthe Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing STORING A CALLER ID NUMBER At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information you may save the CID number as a speed dial number in your personal speed dial list To store Caller ID number in a personal speed dial bi
530. y Line Queuing with Callback 15 15 INTERCOM CALLS sic i a ci di ch dasa 16 Answering Calls rati 16 An wer Mode 16 2007 Busy Station 17 BUSY Statio M zi cac cru Calling Your Systetmi uus i coda 18 CALL PROCESSING Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in this guide for any reason Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior Holding Calls 1 9 20 notice to make changes design components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing Calls 20 21 5 ications America disclaims all liabilities for ising f M 21 Taosa to si uh ci o it 21 LA Cairn eat 21 C al cl 2 Forw
531. y Press again to turn off If this key is pressed while a station is ringing dur name and then your first name ing forward no answer the feature will be turned on for the current call only This must be done in order for the directory feature to work correctly While the caller is leaving a message or ringing you may Note It is possible that if you do not record your name described above and or enter your Directory Name you will not be included in the Dial by Press to immediately put the caller in your voice mailbox and monitor it Directory Press to immediately disconnect your station The caller continues to leave a message normally 4 Extended Prompting 4 9 y Pickuptheh d it ivately Use this option to drastically reduce the number of prompts played in the iek up the handset and mental privately subscriber interface mailbox prompts Change this setting only if you are Press ANS RLS to answer the call using the handset or speaker very familiar with the user operation of the Samsung Voicemail 74 75 Table of Contents DS 5000 AME Password SHORTCUTS If your keyset has AME PASSWORD MMC 110 set to YES you must enter your Calli station password to listen to messages being left This will prevent unauthorized aning people from listening to messages being left for you Calling a station that is busy or does not answer you can press to immediately T send the call to the called
532. y Name Call Progress Displays Display Number Dialed gd o DH Auto Timer Function Viewing Message Indications Personal Speed Dial Names Station Mariaging ASSIJMM EMES 1 iiic cadat ise casco aptent boolean dca 59 with Cleif Backspace with LCR Text MeSSQgII CALLER ID Selecting your Caller ID Display Viewing ithe Next Caller ID 0 3 Saving the Caller ID Number Redialing a Saved Caller ID Number Storing a Caller ID Number E Caller ID Patio MO Reviewing Past Caller Calls Message Sound Screen Call FONA O un ttm at Setup My Phone Samsung Voicemail 70 Accessitic you MallbOX 71 Subscriber Services 102 72 73 Gono a a 74 Listen to your Messages Subscriber Services Menu Listening to Old or New Messages 4 75 Group New or Old Messages Record and Send a Message Access Manager iis P
533. y by press ing the TRANSFER button or the RETURN soft key in the display 2 Intercom calls cannot be put on remote hold 23 HOLD RECALL If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer it will recall your station The button that the call appears on will have a slow flashing indicator When your phone rings lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer the recall e Ifyou do not answer this recall within a pre programmed period of time it will go to the system operator CONSULTATION HOLD When you are talking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with anoth er extension Press the TRANSFER button you will receive transfer dial tone Your call is placed on transfer hold Dial the extension number Consult with the internal party Press TRANSFER to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call NOTE Repeatedly pressing the TRANSFER button will toggle between the outside party and internal extension If necessary you may disconnect either one of the parties by pressing the DROP button RETRIEVING CALLS HELD AT ANOTHER STATION When a line is on hold and it appears on your keyset press the LINE button with the flashing indicator When a line is on hold and it does not appear on your keyset dial 12 plus the line number or the extension number of the station that placed the call on hold NOTE If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the han
534. y call to another extension in one of two ways You can perform a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can perform a blind transfer without notification While you are speaking on a call hookflash to receive transfer dial tone and then dial an extension number Your call is automatically put on transfer hold Hang up when you hear ringing OR wait for the party to answer and advise the party of the call and then hang up If the transfer is refused you will be reconnected to the outside line when the station hangs up or you can hookflash to return to the outside party NOTE After the inside party answers you may alternate back and forth between the parties by hookflashing TRANSFER WITH CAMP ON When you are transferring a call to another station and it is busy you may camp the call on to this station While you are speaking on a call hookflash to receive transfer dial tone and then dial an extension number Your call is automatically put on transfer hold Hang up when you hear a busy signal The called party will be alerted that a call is waiting TRANSFER CANCEL If this feature has been activated on your system the Consultation Hold feature will not work Instead when you hookflash to return to the outside party after initiat ing a transfer the internal party will be dropped allowing you to transfer the call to another destination This is especially useful if the party you original
535. y the System Administrator Message Waiting Lights When new messages are left in your mailbox the voicemail message light on your keyset will flash Press this flashing key VMMSG and follow the prompts to retrieve messages This key may be pressed at any time to log into your Subscriber Main Menu Answer Machine Emulation If you have an Answer Machine Emulation key programmed on your keyset you can use it to monitor calls going to your voicemail and optionally answer them The operation of this feature is similar to screening a call on a home answering machine Your keyset must be set to forward on no answer to voicemail After ringing your station the caller will be connected to your voicemail and hear your personal greeting before leaving a message During this time you will be monitoring the connection between the caller and your voicemail box At this time you will only be monitoring the call you can not talk to the other party until you answer You may pick up the call at any time or ignore it To activate this feature press the AME button The associated indicator will be lit steady Press again to turn off If this key is pressed while a station is ringing dur ing forward no answer the feature will be turned on for the current call only While the caller is leaving a message or ringing you may Press 4 to immediately put the caller in your voice mailbox and monitor it Press to immediately disconnect your s
536. y you can press and hear a summary of your mailbox contents a Number of messages b Number of reminders c Number of urgent messages d Number of messages needing a callback e Number of private messages f Number of fax messages RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE This option is used to send a message to another subscriber The steps are simple a Enter the recipient s mailbox number or if this is not known enter to use the system directory 76 Table of Contents ITP 5112L b Record your message at the tone After recording the message you will hear the Send Menu with the following functions Review Continue Recording Discard and Re Record Set Message Attributes Delivery Options Schedule Future Delivery Save and Send then Send a Copy to Someone Else Save and Send the Recording 0 Setting Message Attributes If after recording a message you select 4 you can set up any combination of the following delivery options Urgent Delivery Return Receipt Requested Request a Call Back Private Delivery Reply Required Exit 3 2 A Scheduling Future Delivery If after recording a message you select 5 to schedule future delivery you will be able to set message attributes and set this message as Immediate Delivery Next Few Hours End of Current Business Day based on your Availability Schedule Beginning of Next Business Day based on your Availability Schedule A Coming Day of
537. yed and you will have the chance to change Answer Machine Emulation it If you have an Answer Machine Emulation key programmed on your keyset you can use it to monitor calls going to your voicemail and optionally answer them The operation of this feature is similar to screening a call on a home answering machine Note It is possible that if you do not record your name and or enter your Directory Name described below you will not be included in the Dial by Name Directory Your keyset must be set to forward on no answer to voicemail After ringing your 3 Entering your Directory Name station the caller will be connected to your voicemail and hear your personal Use this option to enter your Directory Name Your Directory Name is used by greeting before leaving a message During this time you will be monitoring the callers to find you if they do not know your extension number connection between the caller and your voicemail box At this time you will only be monitoring the call you can not talk to the other party until you answer You From the Subscriber Services Menu press 7 3 pickup The current Directory Name will be played as a string of digits that are equal to your name spelled out on your telephone keypad Follow the To activate this feature press the AME button The associated indicator will be lit instructions to enter anew name You will be prompted to enter your last stead
538. you can do a blind transfer without notification e While on a call press the TRANSFER button and dial an extension number or group number Your call is automatically put on transfer hold OR Press a DSS button or station group button Your call is automatically put on transfer hold Hang up when you hear ringing this is an unscreened or blind transfer OR Wait for the called party to answer and advise him her of the call and hang up If the transfer is refused you will be reconnected to the outside line when the called station hangs up or you can press TRANSFER to return to the outside party If you wish to send the call to another extension without waiting for the 20 Table of Contents ITP 5107S first station to hang up simply press another DSS button OR Press the CALL button or line button to return to the outside party and begin the transfer process again When you are transferring a call to a keyset set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer the transferred call will always ring NOTES 1 Afterthe inside party answers you may alternate back and forth between the parties by pressing the TRANSFER button 2 If you receive No More Calls tone that station has no button available to re ceive another call Press TRANSFER to return to the other party 3 You cannot transfer an Intercom call by pressing DSS button You must press the TRANSFER button and dial the destination extension number TRANSFER WITH CAMP ON Wh

Samsung IP Phone DS 5000 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents